JP2022033311A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of detecting abnormality in setting information.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: means for acquiring special information with entry of game balls into ball entry means as an opportunity; means for executing special information determination processing for determining whether the special information satisfies a privilege granting condition; means for granting privilege to a player when the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition; means for changing setting of a winning probability as a probability determined such that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition; setting information storage means for storing setting information as information for determining setting of a winning probability; and means for determining whether setting information stored in the setting information storage means agrees with setting information at the time of acquisition of special information stored as setting information at the time of acquisition of special information as an object of the special information determination processing following execution of the special information determination processing.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 98

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the efficiency of game machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that takes the player into consideration (for example, Patent Document 1). ).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the interest of the game is improved, the processing load of the gaming machine is reduced, the processing is optimized, the control is simplified, the structure is simplified, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and problems occur. Further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines that are friendly to players, and providing sounder games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[form]
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and a means for executing the special information determination process.
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A winning probability changing means capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
Along with the execution of the special information determination process, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the special information to be the target of the special information determination process are stored as the setting information at the time of acquisition. Setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of acquisition of special information matches
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above embodiment, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the setting information.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control device and the structure of an inspection machine in detail. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the content of the processing in a game history management chip and an inspection machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main MPU executes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing explaining the structure of the input port provided in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing explaining the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry determination process which the main MPU executes. It is explanatory drawing explaining how the presence or absence of a ball entering is detected. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU of a game history management chip executes. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control device and the structure of an inspection machine provided in the pachinko machine of aspect 6 of 1st Embodiment in detail. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the content of the processing in the game history management chip and the inspection machine of Embodiment 6 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control device and the structure of an inspection machine provided in the pachinko machine of aspect 7 of 1st Embodiment in detail. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the outline of the processing in the game history management chip and the inspection machine of Embodiment 7 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in Embodiment 11 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the outline of the processing in the main MPU of Embodiment 11 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in aspect 12 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game history processing performed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the specific processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in aspect 37 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 46 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of the electric structure of the pachinko machine in aspect 50 of 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) in the aspect 56 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the information display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state that the game history information is displayed in the information display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the setting information is displayed in the information display part in the setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the setting information is displayed in the information display part in the setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the setting information is displayed in the information display part in the setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the setting information is displayed in the information display part in the setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the setting information is displayed in the information display part in the setting change mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 74 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the main side ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the main side RAM. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the memory map of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing which the main CPU of the 1st Embodiment 74 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU of the 1st Embodiment 75. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU of the 1st Embodiment 76. It is a process diagram which shows the work process when the manager changes the lottery setting of a pachinko machine. It is a process chart which shows the work process when the manager confirms the lottery setting of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the main processing which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 87 executes at power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 87 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 87 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the main processing which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 88 executes at power-on. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the main processing which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 89 executes at power-on. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the main processing which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 90 executes at power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 91 of 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the change of the display mode of an information display part. It is a time chart which shows an example of the change of the display mode of the information display part when the number of passing through the discharge passages during measurement reaches 60,000. It is a time chart which shows an example of the change of the display mode of the information display part when the number of passing through the discharge passages during measurement reaches 60,000. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 97 executes when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 97 executes when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of Embodiment 98 of 1st Embodiment executes when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of Embodiment 98 of 1st Embodiment executes when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 100 executes when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 100 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 100 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 100 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 of the aspect 101 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 101 performs when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 101 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 101 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 101 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 101 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the activation date / time information acquisition process which is executed by the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the aspect 101 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the activation type notification processing executed by the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the aspect 101 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the aspect 101 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC effect processing performed by the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the aspect 101 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the RTC effect execution determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the activation date and time information acquisition process which is executed by the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the aspect 102 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the destination determination process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 103 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a through gate executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 103 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 103 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening and closing process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 103 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the ending period executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service support processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 103 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric function opening / closing control process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 103 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the aspect 102 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for hold effect executed by the sound light side MPU (sound light side CPU) of the aspect 102 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 104 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 104 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for the start opening which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 105 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 105 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for the start opening which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the 1st Embodiment 106 performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 106 of 1st Embodiment.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First Embodiment:
B. Application to other configurations:
C. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:

A. First Embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) according to the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This substrate box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing (also referred to as traces of opening and traces of opening). For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entry openings into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In the present embodiment, three general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as general winning openings 32. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as a first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b is also referred to as a second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c is also referred to as a third winning opening 32c.

The first starting port 33 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as an ordinary electric accessory.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, if a big hit or a small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

Further, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

In this embodiment, a game in which a ball is entered into the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, the third winning opening 32c, the large winning opening 36a, and the out opening 43. The ball is configured to join the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game ball. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30 by detecting the game balls by the discharge passage detection sensor.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol or the predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 are also referred to as the game times for the first start port.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , A variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are also referred to as the game times for the second start port.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying the fluctuation of the symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when a big hit is won. It also displays the effects during the open / close execution mode that shifts. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the game times is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined value in the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol column is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when the CPU 62x executes a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64, which is a memory of the above, and an input / output port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65.

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information to be described later based on the ball entry information of the game ball to the start opening, the winning opening, and the gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "entry entrance"). do. The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to an inspection machine described later. Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has.

A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, in the present embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor 87, and when a power failure occurs or the power switch is turned off, the power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period.

Further, a ball entry detection sensor provided at each entry port is connected to the input side of the MPU 62. Specifically, the large winning opening detection sensor 44a that detects the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 36a, the first starting opening detection sensor 44b that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting opening 33, and the first. 2 The second start opening detection sensor 44c that detects the game ball that has entered the start opening 34, the first winning opening detection sensor 44d that detects the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 32a, and the second winning opening 32b. The second winning opening detection sensor 44e that detects the game ball that has entered the third winning opening 32c, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f that detects the game ball that has entered the third winning opening 32c, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35. The through gate detection sensor 44g for detection and the discharge passage detection sensor 44h for detecting the game ball passing through the discharge passage described above are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the start opening or the winning opening, and the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. Judge whether or not. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and a main display. The unit 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting port 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. In addition to controlling the drive of the display control device 100, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal display symbol and the second liquid crystal display symbol are variable display. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. Various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are set in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and becomes a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Whether or not it occurs is determined. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Whether or not it occurs is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, and then the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the variable type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 7A shows a hit / miss table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a hit / miss table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7A, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of order. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of order. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (low probability mode or high probability mode)

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, the generation of a game ball into the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, it is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10 in the opening / closing execution mode. Can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the above-mentioned high-frequency winning mode is used during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b is 10.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R normal. A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the case where the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the jackpot is obtained. 2 It is different from the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball to the game area PA continues in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although it is not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric accessory is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the next open state is completed after one open state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than the one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 9A shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9B shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9B, in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning, are set as values of 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the CPU 62x, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are also referred to as a main MPU 62, a main CPU 62x, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a calculation execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, the number of game balls (prize ball number data) to be paid out as a prize ball when a game ball enters each entrance is stored. In the present embodiment, the following prize ball number data is stored in the prize ball number data storage area.
-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (number of prize balls at the first starting port P ₁ ): 3
-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 (number of prize balls at the second starting port P ₂ ): 3
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first prize opening 32a (number of first prize opening prize balls PN1): 10
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second prize opening 32b (second prize opening number of prize balls PN2): 10
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the third prize opening 32c (3rd prize opening number of prize balls PN3): 10
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the large prize opening 36a (number of large prize opening prize balls PS): 15

The main MPU 62 refers to the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, and pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters each entry port. Determine the number of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

In the calculation execution condition storage area, the calculation execution condition, which is a condition for starting the calculation for the game history management chip 300 to calculate the game history information, is stored. In the present embodiment, it is stored as a calculation execution condition that the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. The calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various game history information based on the ball entry information of the game ball to each entry port and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires information on the entry of game balls from the CPU 62x into each entry port, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, and a main ROM 63. The memory for storing the number of prize balls data acquired from the above, the memory 307 for storing the operation execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the overall control of the game history management chip 300. CPU 308, which calculates game history information based on the number of game balls entering each entry slot and the number of prize balls set at each entry slot, when the calculation execution condition is satisfied. It is provided with a calculation result storage memory 309 for storing the played game history information.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 is composed of a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a game history management chip 300. It includes a display unit 328 that displays the received game history information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320.

The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and acquires the ball entry information at each entry port from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 is provided with a plurality of bits corresponding to each entry port, and the CPU 62x turns on the bit corresponding to the entry port determined to have entered the game ball (“1”. "). For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33, the CPU 62x turns on (“1”) the bit corresponding to the first starting port 33 of the buffer 302.

Further, the buffer 302 is also provided with a bit for grasping the game mode when the game ball enters each entry port and the state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as a game state). In the present embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not the mode is in the normal mode (a mode that is neither in the high-probability mode, in the high-frequency support mode, nor in the open / close execution mode), and whether or not the mode is in the high-probability mode. The upper limit is a bit for determining whether or not, a bit for determining whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, a bit for determining whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, and the first hold number. A bit for determining whether or not the value is in the period, a bit for determining whether or not the second reserved quantity is in the upper limit value, and the front door frame 14 are open. A bit for determining whether or not there is a bit and a bit for determining whether or not a trouble such as a failure has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 are provided. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the game ball is in the normal mode at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the CPU 62x turns on the bit for determining whether or not the buffer 302 is in the normal mode (“1”. ").

The register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port. Specifically, the register 304 is composed of a plurality of counters corresponding to each entry port, and when it is determined that the bit of the buffer 302 has entry information (that is, when the bit is ON). ), 1 is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the bit determined to have the ball entry information. In this embodiment, the register 304 is composed of a non-volatile register capable of retaining memory even when the power supply is cut off.

In the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by each counter corresponding to each entry port.
・ Number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a = Number of balls that have entered the large winning opening _NS
-Number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 = Number of balls that have entered the first starting port N ₁
The number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 = the number of balls that have entered the second starting port N ₂
-Number of game balls entered in the first winning opening 32a = Number of entering balls in the first winning opening N _N1
-Number of game balls entered in the second winning opening 32b = Number of entering balls in the second winning opening N _N2
・ Number of game balls entered in the 3rd winning opening 32c = Number of entering balls in the 3rd winning opening N _N3
-Number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 = Number of game balls that have passed through the through gate _NG
・ Number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage = Number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage N _OUT
As described above, the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage coincides with the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port for each game state.
・ Number of game balls that entered each entry slot during normal mode ・ Number of game balls that entered each entry slot during high-probability mode ・ Number of game balls that entered each entry slot during high-frequency support mode Number of game balls ・ Number of game balls entered into each entrance during the open / close execution mode ・ Game balls entered into the first starting port 33 during the period in which the number of first reserved balls is the upper limit in the normal mode -The number of game balls that entered the second start port 34 during the period when the normal mode and the second hold number is the upper limit value-The game that entered each entry port while the front door frame 14 was open. Number of balls ・ Number of game balls that entered each entrance during an error

For example, it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first start port 33 of the buffer 302 has entry information (the bit is ON), and the information is in the bit for determining whether or not the mode is normal. When it is determined that there is (the bit is ON), the value of the first start port entry number counter, which is a counter for storing the number of entry of game balls that have entered the first start opening 33, is 1. Is added, and 1 is added to the value of the first start port entry number counter in the normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 33 during the normal mode. To.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. .. Therefore, the content of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the calculation execution condition is a condition for starting the calculation for calculating the game history information. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the calculation for calculating the game history information is started every time the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Therefore, the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is the same as the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63. As the calculation execution condition, the number of game balls that have passed or entered other than the discharge passage may be stored as a reference, or the number other than 500 may be stored as a reference.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied, and if it is determined that the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the prize ball number data storage memory 306. Various game history information is calculated based on the prize ball number data stored in the game and the number of game balls entered into each entry port stored in the register 304. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following value as game history information every time the value of the number N _OUT of the number of passing through the discharge passages stored in the register 304 reaches 500.

・ Character ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the character (number of prize balls for the character) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= (N ₂ x P ₂ + NS x _PS ) / (N _N1 x P _N1 + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3 + N ₁ x P ₁ + N ₂ x P ₂ + N _S x _{P S} )
-Continuous prize ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to continuous bonus operation (number of continuous prize balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= ( _{NS × PS) / (NN1 × P N1 + N N2 ×} P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × _{P 1} + N ₂ × _{P 2} + NS × PS)
・ Ball output rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls) / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 = (N _N1 x P _N1 + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3 + N ₁ × _{P 1} + N ₂ × _{P 2} + NS × PS) / N _OUT

The basis for calculating the above values is as follows.
-Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the character (number of prize balls for the character)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by operating the electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory and the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory = To the second starting port 34 and the large winning opening 36a Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls in = N ₂ x _{P 2} + NS x _PS
-Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to continuous character operation (number of continuous character prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by operating the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory = Games paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the large winning opening 36a Number of spheres = _NS x _PS
-Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c = N _N1 x P _N1 + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3
・ Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, and the large winning opening 36a = N _N1 x P _N1 + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3 + N ₁ x _{P 1} + N ₂ x _{P 2} + NS x PS

Further, in the present embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of balls entered into each entry port counted for each gaming state.

・ Payout ratio (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 during the normal mode / Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 during the normal mode Number of game balls paid out as prize balls + Number and number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode. Ball rate (in normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 during normal mode ・ Ball ejection rate (during high frequency support mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the high frequency support mode / Number of game balls fired at the game board 30 during the high frequency support mode ・ BY (during normal mode)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode + the first reserved number during the normal mode is the upper limit. The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the first start port 33 during the period + the second start port during the period in which the normal mode and the second hold number are the upper limit values. Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into 34 / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 during normal mode-BY _MIN (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode / Game balls fired at the game board 30 during the normal mode Number of balls ・ Number of game balls entered into each entrance while the front door frame 14 is open / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 ・ Error ball entry rate = Number of game balls entered into each entrance during an error / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 The above game history information is an example, and game history information other than these is calculated. May be.

When the CPU 308 calculates the various game history information described above, the CPU 308 stores the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the value of each counter in the register 304 to "0". In the following, various game history information calculated every time 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30 are collectively referred to as a “short-term game history information group”.

The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory that stores the game history information calculated by the CPU 308, and in the present embodiment, it is configured by a non-volatile memory that can retain the storage even if the power supply is cut off. Has been done. The calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term game history information group is written, and the CPU 308 calculates when there is no free area for writing the calculated short-term game history information group. The short-term game history information group is stored in the area where the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in / first-out method), and the latest short-term game history information group is always stored. It will be in the state of being.

In the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term game history information groups calculated each time 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30. is doing. For example, if the game balls are continuously fired for 10 hours a day, 60,000 game balls are fired a day, so 120 short-term game history information groups are calculated per day. The result is stored in the storage memory 309. Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 can store the short-term game history information group for the last 10 days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the game history information to the game history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 transmits the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309, and causes the display unit 328 to display the acquired game history information.

As described above, in the present embodiment, every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, that is, every time 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30, a game such as a bonus ratio or the like is played. The history information is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. Then, the calculated game history information is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

A3. Details of various processes performed on the gaming machine:
Next, each process executed by the MPU 62 (CPU 62x in the present embodiment) will be described. The processing of the MPU 62 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 62. In step S10101, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the initial setting process, a process of transmitting calculation data to the game history management chip 300 is executed. Specifically, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300. As will be described later, the game history management chip 300 that has received the calculation data stores and stores the prize ball number data and the calculation execution condition in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively. Sends a setting completion command indicating that is completed to the main MPU 62. After executing step S10101, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether or not the setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process proceeds to step S10103, and interrupt permission is set in order to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. That is, until the setting completion command is received, the process does not proceed to step S10103, and the interrupt permission for permitting the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is not set.

After executing step S10103, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S10104 to S10107. That is, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process as described later, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S10104 to S10107 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S10104 to S10107 is an irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S10105, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S10106, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S10107, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are repeated.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment) will be described.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62. The timer interrupt process is started in a specific cycle (4 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, the lottery random number update process is executed in step S10201. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. , Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. Then, the process proceeds to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the process proceeds to step S10203 to update the variable type counter CS in the variable type counter update process. Then, the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step S10205.

In step S10205, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and the ball entry detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. The processing content of the ball entry detection process will be described in detail later. Then, the process proceeds to step S10207.

In step S10207, the ball entry detection information is output to the bit of the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entry port determined to have entered the game ball in the ball entry detection process of step S10206 is turned ON (“1”), and the bit corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON (“1”). To ON (“1”). Then, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S10209 to execute the output setting process of the prize ball command. Then, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, the ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the start port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Along with acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, the ball entry process for the through gate accompanying the entry (passage) of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is used as the electric power of the RAM 64. Store in the hold area 64d. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are performed. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, a process of shifting the game state to an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is executed. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric service support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (electric accessory opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process for launching a game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, the external information setting process is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. After executing step S10216, the timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the ball entry detection process, the process of confirming the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is executed, and at the time of the confirmation, the input port 62b of the input / output ports 62a of the main MPU 62 is confirmed. Here, prior to the description of the ball entry detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of an input port 62b provided on the main MPU 62. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled at the same time. An area in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area.

Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 62b, but in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 62b depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control. In the ball entry detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 62b is set in each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h.

In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the entry signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the 1st bit D1 is the entry signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 44b. The corresponding information is stored, the second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the third bit D3 is the ball entry signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 44d. The corresponding information is stored, the 4th bit D4 stores the information corresponding to the entry signal from the 2nd winning opening detection sensor 44e, and the 5th bit D5 is the entry signal from the 3rd winning opening detection sensor 44f. The corresponding information is stored, the 6th bit D6 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the 7th bit D7 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Stored.

In this case, each of the above-mentioned ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs an HI level signal indicating that the ball is not detected as a ball entry signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and the passage of the game ball. When is detected, a LOW level signal indicating that the ball is being detected is output as a ball entry signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the signal state is inverted before each of the above detection signals is input to the input port 62b. Then, in the input port 62b, when the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the information of "0" (data 0 or none information) is stored in the corresponding bit, and the HI level signal is received through the inverting circuit. If so, the information of "1" (data 1 or existence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

That is, in the situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In this situation, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that detection is being performed is stored in the corresponding bit.

The ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h output a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while not detecting the passage of the game ball, and HI as a ball entry signal while detecting the passage of the game ball. It may be configured to output a level signal. In this case, the inverting circuit may not be provided.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the ball entry detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15A, first, in step S10301, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the register of the main MPU 62. 1 The process of shifting to the ball entry determination area WA1 is executed. The first ball entry determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15 (b-1), and stores all the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is a data capacity that can be used. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 are predetermined to have a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit. The information of D0 is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first ball entry determination area WA1.

In the following step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. In the wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In the pachinko machine 10, the wait time is set to 10 μsec, but the effect described later by setting the wait process is sufficiently exhibited without hindering the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process. If this is possible, the specific wait time is arbitrary, but is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, and more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

By the way, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S10302 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec is generated between step S10301 and step S10303. In this regard, in step S10302, not only the minimum time required to execute the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S10301 and the process of step S10303.

In the following step S10303, a process of shifting the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second ball entry determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 62 is executed. Incidentally, since the information update in the input port 62b is performed at intervals shorter than the time from the completion of step S10301 to the start of step S10303, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are performed in step S10303. The information transferred from can be different from the case of step S10301.

Similar to the first ball entry determination area WA1, the second ball entry determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15 (b-2), and is in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is a data capacity that can store all of the stored information. In this case, the bit of the storage source in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the bit of the storage destination in the second ball entry determination area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence, and further, the storage source bit. The relationship between the bit and the storage destination bit is the same as in the case of the first ball entry determination area WA1.

Then, in step S10304, after the ball entry determination process is executed, the main ball entry detection process is terminated. The ball entry determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. In the ball entry determination process, first, in step S10401, 8 is set in the ball entry determination counter provided in the main RAM 64. The numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry ports. Specifically, in the present embodiment, "8" of the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the large winning opening 36a, and "7" is the first bit D1 of the first starting port 33, "6". Is the second bit D2 of the second starting port 34, "5" is the third bit D3 of the first winning opening 32a, "4" is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning opening 32b, and "3" is the third winning opening. The 5th bit D5 of 32c, “2” corresponds to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35, and “1” corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage. In the following step S10402, each information of the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter in the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit in the input port 62b.

In the following step S10403, AND processing of each information grasped in step S10402 is executed, the AND processing result is stored in the register, and in step S10404, the area WA3 after the first calculation and the area WA4 after the second calculation Among them, the AND processing result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side where the information of the result of the AND processing is stored in the ball entry detection processing in the processing round of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 15 (b-3) and 15 (b-4), and are the first ball entry determination area WA1. The data capacity is such that all the information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second ball entry determination area WA2 can be stored. In this case, the order of the bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2, which are the targets of the AND process, and the order of the bits in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4. Is uniquely defined.

After that, in step S10405, of the area WA3 after the first calculation and the area WA4 after the second calculation, the side where the information of the result of the AND processing is stored in the ball entry determination processing in the processing round of the previous timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is read out. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process for inverting the read information between "0" and "1" is executed.

After that, in step S10407, the AND processing of the information of the AND processing result in step S10403 and the information of the inversion processing result in step S10406 is executed, and in the subsequent step S10408, the result of the AND processing is the ball entry detection start information. It is determined whether or not it is "1" corresponding to. If it is determined in step S10408 that the AND processing result is "1", the process proceeds to the processing of step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to any of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. When it corresponds to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, "1" is set in the starting port entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10410, and step S10411. In, the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 64 is added by one.

The start port entry flag specifies the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 by the main MPU 62, and the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. It is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the process corresponding to the entry of the ball and the process other than the execution of the prize ball should be executed. By the way, since the ball entry detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided in the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, respectively, the ball enters the first start port 33 and the ball enters the second start port 34. And may be simultaneously grasped within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the start ball entry flag is provided corresponding to the number of start ports 33 and 34, and specifically, two are provided. Further, the three-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times to output the three-prize ball command instructing the execution of the three prize balls in the main MPU 62.

If a negative determination is made in step S10409, it is determined in step S10412 whether or not the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the large winning opening 36a (variable winning device 36). judge. When the variable winning device 36 is supported, "1" is set in the large winning opening ball entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10413, and the main RAM 64 is provided in step S10414. Add 1 to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counters.

The large winning opening ball entry flag is a process corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 36 by the main MPU 62 and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 36. This is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that a process other than execution should be executed. Further, the 15-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times to output the 15-prize ball command instructing the execution of the 15 prize balls on the main MPU 62.

When a negative determination is made in step S10412, it is determined in step S10415 whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 35. When the through gate 35 is supported, "1" is set in the through passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10416.

The through pass flag specifies that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 on the main side MPU 62, and indicates that the main side should execute the process corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35. It is a flag for specifying by MPU62.

When a negative determination is made in step S10415, the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter corresponds to any of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c in step S10417. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a bit. When any of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c is supported, in step S10418, the general winning opening entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". Is set, and in step S10419, the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1.

The general winning opening entry flag is a flag for specifying the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, or the third winning opening 32c by the main MPU 62. By the way, since the ball entry detection sensors 44d, 44e, 44f are provided in each of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c, the ball enters the first winning opening 32a and the second winning opening 32a. The entry into the winning opening 32b and the entry into the third winning opening may be simultaneously grasped within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the general winning opening entry ball flag is provided corresponding to the number of the general winning opening 32a, 32b, 32c, and specifically, three are provided. Further, the 10-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times to output the 3-prize ball command instructing the execution of the 10 prize balls in the main MPU 62.

If a negative determination is made in step S10417, it means that the current entry ball corresponds to the discharge passage. Therefore, in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". To set. The discharge passage passage flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative determination is made in step S10408, or after any of the processes of step S10411, step S10414, step S10416, step S10419, and step S10420 is executed, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the ball entry determination counter is subtracted by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether or not the ball entry determination counter is “0”.

If the ball entry determination counter is not "0", the processes of steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter updated in step S10421. When the processing of steps S10402 to S10420 is executed for the numerical information set in step S10401, an affirmative determination is made in step S10422, and the main ball entry determination processing is terminated.

Next, by executing the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15), the general winning opening 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage are reached. The state in which the presence or absence of a ball has been detected will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how the presence or absence of a ball has been detected. First, with reference to FIG. 17A, the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter, also referred to as ball entry information) in the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h will be described. FIG. 17A is a timing chart for explaining the timing for monitoring each ball entry information.

As shown in FIG. 17 (A), in a configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is activated in a T1 (specifically, 4 msec) cycle, the process of monitoring the incoming ball information is performed at each process of the timer interrupt process. It is performed twice (step S10301, step S10303). The process of monitoring each set of ball entry information is executed so that the timing is before or after, but the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side (step S10301) is T2 with respect to the timing when the timer interrupt process is started. It is executed when the time of.

In this case, the timing at which the ball entry detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the process such as the game turn control process and the electric service support process in which the processing time is liable to fluctuate, and further, the ball entry is executed in the timer interrupt process. The processing executed before the detection processing is a processing in which the processing time is relatively unlikely to fluctuate. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing of each processing time, the period until the processing for monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side is started is the same, substantially the same, or the same in T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of ball entry information included in each process of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the front side is periodically executed.

Further, among the processes for monitoring each set of ball entry information, between the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the front side (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side (step S10303). The wait process for ball entry detection (step S10302) is executed, but the wait process does not execute any process and only waits until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of ball entry information included in each process of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side is periodically executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17B, the content of the calculation executed when the ball entry determination is performed will be described. FIG. 17B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the calculation executed when the ball entry determination is performed. Although various operations are actually performed in 1-bit units, the contents of the operations will be described in 1-byte units in the following description. However, the configuration may be such that the calculation in 1-byte units is actually performed as described below.

In the case of FIG. 17 (B), first, in the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side in the nth timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17 (B1), the first incoming ball determination area WA1 is set to "0010000". "Is set. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the entry information of the third winning opening detection sensor 44f is information that the game ball is detected (hereinafter, also referred to as information with entry). The entry information of other sensors is information that the game ball is not detected (hereinafter, also referred to as no entry information).

Further, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side in the nth timer interrupt process, "1010000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17 (B2). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h and the third winning opening detection sensor 44f has information on the presence of a ball, and the other sensors have information on no ball entry. ..

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "0010000" as shown in FIG. 17 (B3). The information is set in the area WA3 after the first calculation as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt processing of the nth processing time. When the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the n-1th timer interrupt process is set in the area WA3 after the first calculation, the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process is the second calculation. It is set in the rear area WA4. Further, the ball entry determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the n-1th time and the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the nth time, but the content of the calculation of this process is omitted here.

Next, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, "10100110" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1 as shown in FIG. 17 (B4). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b is the information that the ball has entered. The other sensors are information that there is no entry.

Further, in the process of monitoring the incoming ball entry information on the rear side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, "1010010" is set in the second incoming ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17 (B5). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b is information on the presence of a ball, and the other sensors are It is information that there is no entry.

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "1010010" as shown in FIG. 17 (B6). The information is set in the area WA4 after the second calculation as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt processing of the n + 1th processing round.

After that, in the ball entry determination process (FIG. 16) in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process is first read from the area WA3 after the first calculation and is read out. Inversion processing is executed for the monitoring result information. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (B7), it becomes "11011111". Then, the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the n + 1th timer interrupt processing is ANDed with the information of the result of the inversion processing. As a result, as shown in FIG. 17 (B8), it becomes "10000010". In this case, in the ball entry determination process, it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, and it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the first start port detection sensor 44b. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (B4), the second start port detection sensor 44c is the information that the ball has entered in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process. Is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if the switch from the information without ball entry to the information with ball entry is confirmed, it is not immediately specified that the ball has entered, but when the information with ball entry is confirmed multiple times, the ball enters. It is a configuration that identifies the occurrence. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the entry information on the rear side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, the second start port detection sensor 44c is the information without entry, which is electrical. The generation of noise is not treated as the entry of a game ball.

Further, in the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, a set of ball entry information is monitored in the nth timer interrupt process and a set of ball entry information is monitored in the n + 1th timer interrupt process. Although it is information with a ball, this indicates a state in which a game ball for which the occurrence of an incoming ball has already been grasped is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of the incoming ball is specified on the condition that the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the nth timer interrupt process is "0", a plurality of incoming balls of one game ball are specified. Do not treat it as an entry ball.

When the ball entry detection process is executed as described above, the detection results are monitored by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and the ball entry corresponding to the granting of the game ball is generated. Is executed to add to the 3-prize ball counter, the 10-prize ball counter, and the 15-prize ball counter according to the entry point. If any of these counters is "1" or higher, the prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), and the setting thereof is performed. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In this case, the output setting of the prize ball command is performed only once in one processing of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is "2" or more, the 15 prize ball command is transmitted only once in one processing time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined plurality of (for example, two or three) prize ball commands may be transmitted in one processing time.

Further, it is possible that each of the three prize ball counters, the ten prize ball counters, and the fifteen prize ball counters is "1" or more, but in this case, the output of the prize ball command with a large number of prize balls is output. have priority. That is, the output of the 15-prize ball command takes precedence over the output of the 10-prize ball command and the output of the 3-prize ball command, and the output of the 10-prize ball command takes precedence over the output of the 3-prize ball command. ..

When the 15-prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 15-prize ball command is set as an output target, the 15-prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Further, when the 10-prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 10-prize ball command is set as an output target, the 10-prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Further, when the 3-prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 3-prize ball command is set as an output target, the 3-prize ball counter is decremented by 1.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300.

In step S10501, it is determined whether or not the calculation data including the prize ball number data and the calculation execution condition is received. If it is determined in step S10501 that the calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that the calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. That is, until the calculation data is received, the infinite loop is continued without proceeding to the processing of the next step S10502.

In step S10502, the received prize ball number data is stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. After that, the process proceeds to step S10503, and the received calculation execution condition is stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Then, the process proceeds to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command meaning that the storage of the prize ball number data in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is completed and the storage of the calculation execution condition in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is completed. Is transmitted to the main CPU 62x. Then, the process proceeds to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether or not the bit of the buffer 302 contains the incoming ball information received from the main CPU 62x (“1” is stored in the bit). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 contains the ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process proceeds to step S10506, and 1 is set in the counter of the register corresponding to the bit of the buffer 302. to add. Specifically, for example, when the bit corresponding to the first start port entry information of the buffer 302 is "1" and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is "1", the register 304 wins a big prize. 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the mouth _NS , and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of large winning balls entered in the normal mode. Then, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 does not have the ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied. In the present embodiment, whether or not the value of the number of discharge passages N _OUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether or not the number of game balls fired on the game board 30 has reached 500. judge. If it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, various game history information is based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls entered into each entry port stored in the register 304. Performs arithmetic processing to calculate. After that, the process proceeds to step S10509, and the calculated various game history information is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. After that, the process proceeds to step S10510, and the number of game balls entered into each entry slot stored in the register 304 is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is not satisfied (S10507: NO), step S10511 is not executed from step S10508 to step S10511. Proceed to.

In step S10511, it is determined whether or not the game history information transmission request command has been received from the inspection machine 320, and if it is determined that the transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512. , The game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505 and the processing of step S10505 and the like is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10511 that the game history information transmission request command has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the process of step S10512. The process of S10505 and below is repeated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate game history information which is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game. If the gaming machine is illegally modified or the like, the calculated gaming history information may have an unnatural value different from the expected value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with by checking the game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes a calculation result storage memory 309 that non-volatilely stores the calculated game history information. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information is different for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique information of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the game history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. According to the present embodiment, the game history information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10. do. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, information regarding the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed in various ways, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional pachinko machine 10 retains information on the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. Can not do it. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10. Since it is stored, the game history information can be acquired from the pachinko machine 10 main body even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information are always one-to-one regardless of the state (the state installed in the game hall or the distribution state) of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to put it in a state of being linked with, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are mounted on the main MPU 62, and they are configured to operate by the same power source. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by the hall computer, a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer. Even if there is a problem in the processing of the hall computer, the game history information can be calculated as long as the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. If the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power sources, or if there is a problem in the power supply of the game history management chip 300, the pachinko machine 10 may be executing the game. However, there is a problem that the game history information cannot be calculated. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power source, the game history information must be calculated whenever the game can be executed. Can be done. Therefore, the reliability of the game history information can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, which is a space in which traces of opening and closing (also referred to as traces of opening and traces of opening) remain. Therefore, when the memory 309 for storing the calculation result is physically contacted, a trace of opening the board box remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is modified through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, it can be grasped from the trace of the board box that the modification has been performed. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the game history information. Since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed in various ways, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box in which traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is distributed in various ways, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the game history information by someone. Further, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the game by using the game history information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the game history information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the game. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, and therefore, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the paid out prize balls. Can be calculated. Further, even if different prize ball number data are set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 uses the prize ball number data set for each type of the pachinko machine 10 to perform a correct game. History information can be calculated. If the gaming machine is illegally modified or the like, the calculated gaming history information may have an unnatural value different from the expected value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with by confirming the correct game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300, so that the game history management The configuration in which the chip 300 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, and the storage position of the prize ball number data stored in the game history management chip 300 in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. Even if the configuration is such that the (memory address) cannot be grasped, the game history management chip 300 can acquire the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the main process of the main CPU 62x, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is not permitted until the setting completion command is received, and the game ball launch control process included in the timer interrupt process is not executed. It is composed. That is, since the game ball is not fired until the storage of the prize ball number data in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is completed, the game ball leaks from the calculation target of the game history information by the game history management chip 300. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is calculated and stored, 500 game balls are stored by each pachinko machine 10. Even if there is a variation in the time until the detection, it is possible to calculate and store the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the game ball is fired, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. In addition, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the ball entry information to each entry port is stored as it is.

If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so that the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. According to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that the calculation set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the execution condition is satisfied, the operation for calculating the game history information can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes an operation for calculating the game history information, the number of game balls entered into each entry slot stored in the register 304. Since (counter value) is erased, it is possible to store information regarding the number of game balls entered in the register 304 again. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the register 304 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320, the inspection machine 320 can display the game history information of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320.

A4. Another aspect of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it is set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaches 500. As an execution condition, a configuration in which a time interval for executing an operation is set may be used. For example, one hour is set as a time interval for executing the calculation, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate the game history information every time one hour elapses. The inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately judge whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. Become. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so that the optimum conditions (time interval) for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, also in this aspect 1, since the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. The operation can be executed when the operation execution condition is satisfied.

Further, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 measures the elapsed time since the calculation is executed, determines whether or not the game is being played by the player, and determines that the game is not being played. During the period of time, the measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed in a state where there is no entry information in the bit of the buffer 302, it is determined that the game has not been performed, the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted, and the buffer is used. When the entry information is confirmed in the bits of 302, it may be determined that the game has been restarted and the measurement of the elapsed time may be restarted. According to this configuration, the game history information can be calculated only for the period during which the game is actually performed.

The elapsed time may be measured by using a timer counter, or by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and using the date and time information of the RTC. Further, the game history information may be calculated at predetermined time intervals.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it is set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaches 500. As an execution condition, it may be configured that the occurrence of power cutoff is detected. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects the occurrence of a power cutoff, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a signal indicating that the power cutoff has occurred to the game history management chip 300. The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that has received the signal determines that the power supply has been cut off, and calculates the game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of a volatile memory, and the information on the number of balls entered is erased. According to such a configuration, the game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls detected during the period from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 10 to the occurrence of power cutoff. can. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start to the end of the business of the game hall, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not the characteristics of the game history information have changed over the business days of the game hall, so that the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified or the like. It is possible to properly judge whether or not it has been done. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, if a capacitor 87 is provided to supply power to the game history management chip 300 even after the power is cut off, the CPU 308 calculates the game history information and the memory for storing the calculation result of the game history information 309. You can be sure to complete the memory of.

<Aspect 3>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. .. According to this configuration, the game history information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can use a dedicated device (inspection machine 320, etc.) for confirming the game history information. The game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed without using it. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x has a configuration in which the operation result storage memory 309 can be accessed, but the data cannot be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, a bug in the program, or the like.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x is configured to be accessible to the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is notified that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. An LED lamp for this purpose may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a predetermined portion of the main display unit 45). For example, the LED lamp may be made to emit light when a specific value (for example, a bonus ratio, a continuous bonus ratio, a payout ratio (during the normal mode)) included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. good. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. Then, by checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting port 33 and the general winning openings (1st to 3rd winning openings 32a to 32c) are fraudulent, the above-mentioned payout ratio (during normal mode) is the design of the pachinko machine. It will sometimes deviate from the assumed predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70). Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to emit light when the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is no longer included in the predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70), the first starting port 33 and the general prize can be won. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the nails in the vicinity of the mouths (first to third winning mouths 32a to 32c) are fraudulent.

Further, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp according to the degree of deviation from a predetermined range of specific values (for example, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, payout ratio (during normal mode)) included in the game history information. It may be a configuration for determining. For example, when the accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), the first LED lamp emits purple light, and when the accessory ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, the first LED lamp emits light. May emit light in purple, and the first LED lamp may emit light in red when the accessory ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp emits purple light when the continuous accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), and the second LED lamp when the continuous accessory ratio is 0.61 to 0.70. May emit red light, and when the continuous accessory ratio is 0.71 to 1.00, the second LED lamp may emit red light. When the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is within the predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), the third LED lamp emits blue light and the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is 0.71. When the value is ~ 0.80, the third LED lamp emits purple light, and when the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is 0.81 to 1.00, the third LED lamp may emit red light. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how much the specific value included in the game history information deviates from a predetermined range. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x has a configuration in which the operation result storage memory 309 can be accessed, but the data cannot be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, a bug in the program, or the like.

<Aspect 5>
In the first embodiment, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x). However, the game history management chip 300 is configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 is concerned immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A configuration in which the main ROM 63 is accessed to acquire calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions), and the acquired calculation data is stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. May be. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the bonus ratio, but the number of balls entered for every 500 balls stored in the register is stored as it is, and the inspection machine 320 is used. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Hereinafter, the details of the sixth aspect will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, the number of game balls (prize ball number data) to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each entrance is stored as in the first embodiment. There is. Further, as in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Will be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

The storage execution condition The storage execution condition, which is a condition for the game history management chip 300 to execute the storage process described later, is stored in the storage execution condition storage area. In this aspect 6, it is stored as a storage execution condition that the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. The storage execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires information on the entry of game balls from the CPU 62x into each entry port, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, and a main ROM 63. The memory for storing the number of prize balls data acquired from the above, the memory for storing the storage execution conditions 307a for storing the storage execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the overall control of the game history management chip 300. It is provided with a CPU 308 that controls the above, and a memory for storing the number of balls to be entered, 309a, which sequentially stores the number of balls to be entered into each entry port stored in the register 304. The above-mentioned storage process is a process of storing the number of game balls entered into each entry slot stored in the register 304 in the entry number storage memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 6, the number of balls entered information stored in the memory for storing the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls stored in the memory for storing the number of prize balls 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Will be done.

The inspection machine 320 has a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A unit 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 issues a transmission request command requesting transmission of ball entry number information and prize ball number data. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the number of incoming balls stored in the memory for storing the number of incoming balls 309a via the inspection terminal 65 and the number of winning balls data are stored. The prize ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received ball entry number information and the prize ball number data, and displays the calculated game history information on the display unit 328.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 according to the sixth embodiment of the first embodiment.

Since the contents of the processing in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 6, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. .. Therefore, the content of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

The storage execution condition storage memory 307a is a memory for storing the storage execution condition set in the pachinko machine 10. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the storage execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the content of the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a is the same as the content of the storage execution condition stored in the main ROM 63.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a is satisfied, and if it is determined that the storage execution condition is satisfied, each input stored in the register 304 is stored. Information on the number of game balls entering the ball mouth is stored in the memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a, and the value of each counter of the register 304 is reset to "0". In this aspect 6, the CPU 308 relates to the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the register 304 every time the value of the number N _OUT of the number of passing through the discharge passages stored in the register 304 reaches 500. The information is stored in the memory for storing the number of incoming balls 309a. In the following, information on the number of game balls entering each entry slot counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entry number information group".

The memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a is a memory for sequentially storing information regarding the number of balls entered (short-term number of balls entered information group) stored in the register 304, and in the present embodiment, it is stored even if the power supply is cut off. It is composed of a non-volatile memory that can hold. The memory 309a for storing the number of balls entered also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term number of balls entered information group is written, and the CPU 308 determines that there is no free area for writing the short-term number of balls entered information group. The short-term entry number information group is stored in the area where the short-term entry number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the memory 309a for storing the number of balls entered is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term number of balls entered information group (first-in / first-out method), and the latest short-term number of balls entered information group is always used. It will be in a memorized state.

In this aspect 6, the memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a is short-term entry which is information on the number of balls entered into each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 ball number information groups. For example, if the game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours a day, 60,000 game balls are fired a day, so that 120 short-term ball entry number information groups are fired a day. It will be stored in the memory for storing the number of incoming balls 309a. Therefore, the memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a can store the short-term number of balls entered information group for the last 10 days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command to the game history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 transmits the short-term entry number information group and the prize ball number data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information such as the bonus ratio based on the short-term entry number information group and the prize ball number data, and displays the calculated game history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320 can calculate one short-term game history information group for one short-term entry number information group, similarly to the CPU 308 of the first embodiment described above. In addition to being possible, the number of game balls entered into each entry slot stored in each of the plurality of short-term entry number information groups is added, and the added number of entry balls is used for long-term game history information. (Long-term game history information group) can be calculated. That is, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 6 is not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period in which 500 game balls are launched, but also, for example, 600,000 (about). It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entering each entrance for a long period of time when the game ball (for 10 days) is launched.

In this aspect 6, the following configuration may be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured so that the received short-term entry number information group can be displayed on the display unit 328. Further, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and to display each received counter value on the display unit 328.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x is stored in the main side ROM 63. The ball number data may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320. According to such a configuration, the memory for storing the prize ball number data 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be configured such that a time interval for executing the storage process is set. For example, one hour is set as a time interval for executing the storage process, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the storage process every time one hour elapses.

Further, the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be configured such that the occurrence of power interruption is set as the storage execution condition. Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 is configured to output a signal indicating that the power cutoff has occurred to the game history management chip 300 when it detects the occurrence of the power cutoff, and the game history management chip that has received the signal. The CPU 308 of the 300 may be configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and execute the storage process.

Further, in the sixth aspect, the calculation for calculating the game history information is executed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but a part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation is performed. The game history information as a result of the above may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 7>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the bonus ratio, but the ball entry information in the buffer is stored as it is, and the inspection machine 320 is based on the ball entry information. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Hereinafter, the details of the seventh aspect will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

In this aspect 7, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the game history management chip 300. The RTC96 is provided with a backup power supply, and can update the date information and the time information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area. In this aspect 7, the calculation start condition storage area is not provided.

In the prize ball number data storage area, the number of game balls (prize ball number data) to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each entrance is stored as in the first embodiment. There is. Further, as in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Will be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 for acquiring game ball entry information from the CPU 62x to each entry port, and a prize ball number data storage memory 306 for storing prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63. It is provided with a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300, and a ball entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores game ball entry information and the like into each entry slot stored in the buffer 302. ..

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the ball entry information and the like stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b and the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. The data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

The inspection machine 320 has a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A unit 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 issues a transmission request command requesting transmission of ball entry information and prize ball number data. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the entry information and the like stored in the entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65 and the prize ball number data storage are used. The prize ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received ball entry information and the prize ball number data, and displays the calculated game history information on the display unit 328.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 according to the seventh embodiment of the first embodiment.

Since the content of the process in the buffer 302 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The ball entry information storage memory 309b is a memory that sequentially stores the ball entry information stored in the buffer 302 and the information regarding the game state when the game ball enters, and in the present embodiment, the power supply is cut off. It is composed of a non-volatile memory that can hold memory. Further, in the present embodiment, when the entry information and the information regarding the game state are stored, the date and time information when the game ball enters each entry port is added and stored. Further, the entry information storage memory 309b also stores information regarding the order in which the entry information and the like are written, and the CPU 308 performs the entry when there is no free area for writing the entry information and the like. Information and the like are stored in the area where the entry information and the like with the oldest written order are stored. That is, the ball entry information storage memory 309b is configured to overwrite the oldest ball entry information in order (first-in / first-out method), and the latest ball entry information or the like is always stored. It becomes a state.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. .. Therefore, the content of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63. Further, in this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 issues a transmission request command requesting transmission of ball entry information and prize ball number data to the game history management chip 300. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 includes the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, the game status information, and the date and time information. , The prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received information, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 7 calculates game history information (short-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls are launched. For example, game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated based on the number of balls entering each entrance in a long period of time when 600,000 game balls (for about 10 days) are launched. It is possible to do. That is, it is possible to calculate the game history information in an arbitrary period.

Further, in this aspect 7, since the date and time information (year / month / day information and time information) is added to the ball entry information and the like, the inspection machine 320 has a range of the date and time information added to the received ball entry information and the like. It is also possible to calculate the game history information by designating the range of the date and time for which the game history information is to be calculated. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information in which the range of the date and time is specified.

In this aspect 7, the following configuration may be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured so that the received ball entry information and the like can be displayed on the display unit 328. With such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also grasp the date and time when the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x is stored in the main side ROM 63. The ball number data may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320. According to such a configuration, the memory for storing the prize ball number data 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, in the seventh aspect, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes a part or all of the calculation, and the calculation is performed. The game history information as a result of the above may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 8>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition is stored in the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 is configured to acquire these conditions from the main ROM 63. The game history management chip 300 may be configured to store these conditions in a non-volatile memory from the beginning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which inappropriate calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63 and the game history information or the number of balls entered cannot be properly stored. can. For example, an extremely short period (for example, the number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT = 5) is stored as the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition, and the calculation result storage memory 309 or the ball entry number storage memory 309a has been stored. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only game history information or ball entry number information for an extremely short period (for example, about one hour) is stored.

<Aspect 9>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a function of storing the number of game balls entering each entrance, a function of calculating game history information such as a bonus ratio, and the calculated game history information are stored. Although the game history management chip 300 is provided with the function of storing, the main CPU 62x (main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may be configured to include some of these functions. Further, the game history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main CPU 62x (main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide the game history management chip 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, according to the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 is provided, the processing load of the main CPU 62x can be reduced.

<Aspect 10>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the game history management chip 300 has a part or all of the functions provided by the functional units other than the game history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 and the main CPU 62x). However, a part or all of the functions included in the game history management chip 300 may be provided in a functional unit other than the game history management chip 300. For example, if the game history management chip 300 is configured to include a part of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and the manufacturing cost of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced, and the functions of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced. If a part of the inspection machine 320 is provided, the processing load and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the bonus ratio, but the game history management chip 300 is not provided and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the game history information. It is also good. Hereinafter, the details of the eleventh aspect will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment of the first embodiment. In this embodiment 11, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main RAM 64 is provided with a ball entry number storage area and a calculation result storage area, as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 5). It's different.

The main CPU 62x updates the number of balls entering each entry port stored in the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 based on the entry information of the game balls received from the input / output port 62a. do. When the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 The game history information is calculated by executing a calculation based on the number of game balls entered at each entry port stored in the entry number storage area, and the game history information is stored in the calculation result of the main RAM 64. Store in the area. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of the processing in the main MPU 62 according to the eleventh embodiment of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied, and if it is determined that the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the calculation execution condition is satisfied. Information on the number of game balls entered into each entry port stored in the cache is stored in the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 11, the main CPU 62x obtains information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port every time the value of the number N _OUT of the number of exit passages stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x reaches 500. , It is stored in the number of incoming balls storage area of the main RAM 64. As described above, the information regarding the number of game balls entering each entrance, which is counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30, is also referred to as "short-term entry number information group". ..

The ball entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 is an area for sequentially storing information regarding the number of ball entry (short-term ball entry number information group). Information regarding the order in which the short-term entry number information group is written is also stored in the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64, and the main CPU 62x does not have an empty area for writing the short-term entry number information group. In this case, the short-term entry number information group to be newly written is stored in the area where the short-term entry number information group having the oldest written order is stored. That is, the incoming ball number storage area of the main RAM 64 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term incoming ball number information group (first-in / first-out method), and is always the latest short-term incoming ball number information. The group is memorized.

In this aspect 11, the ball entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 is information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry slot counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term ball entry number information groups. For example, if the game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours a day, 60,000 game balls are fired a day, so that 120 short-term ball entry number information groups are fired a day. It will be stored in the ball entry number storage area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 can store the short-term entry number information group for the last 10 days.

Then, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term entry number information group. Further, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x is a game to each entry port stored in each of a plurality of short-term entry number information groups including a newly stored short-term entry number information group. The number of balls entered is added, and the game history information (long-term game history information group) over a long period of time is calculated using the added number of balls. That is, the main CPU 62x of this aspect 11 is not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period in which 500 game balls are launched, but also, for example, 600,000 (about). It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entering each entrance for a long period of time when the game ball (for 10 days) is launched. Then, these calculated game history information are stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64.

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group and an area for storing the long-term game history information group. In the area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group, information regarding the order in which the short-term game history information group is written is also stored, and the main CPU 62x has no free area for writing the short-term game history information group. Stores the newly calculated short-term game history information group in the area where the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group of the main RAM 64 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in / first-out method), and is always the latest short-term. The game history information group is stored. The area for storing the long-term game history information group is overwritten with the newly calculated long-term game history information group every time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. That is, in the area for storing the long-term game history information group, the latest long-term game history information group calculated based on a plurality of short-term ball entry number information groups including the latest short-term ball entry number information group is stored. become.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. Upon receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information.

Further, in this aspect 11, when a predetermined operation for displaying the game history information on the symbol display device 41 is executed, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is controlled by voice emission control via the input / output port 62x. It is output to the device 90 and displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Further, in this aspect 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the short-term ball entry number information group and the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 are counted by the backup power supply supplied from the capacitor 87. It is configured to be retained for days.

According to such a configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes a process for advancing the game such as a winning lottery process and a process for calculating and storing the game history information. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing history information, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, the short-term ball entry number information group, which is information on the number of game balls entering each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30, is stored in the main RAM 64. (For example, a configuration in which the entry information of the game ball is stored in the same format (for example, a configuration in which the entry information is stored in the entry information storage memory 309b of FIG. 22)). In comparison, it is possible to calculate the latest short-term game history information group and long-term game history information group while significantly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64.

The main CPU 62x is not limited to the configuration of calculating both the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group as the game history information, and may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth aspect of the first embodiment. The difference from the above-mentioned aspect 11 (FIG. 23) is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a non-volatile memory that is rewritable and can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off. It is a point that is being done. The flash memory 64x stores the number of balls entered for storing the short-term number of balls entered in the above-mentioned aspect 11 and the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11. The calculation result storage area of is provided.

The main CPU 62x of the aspect 12 is configured to store the short-term entry number information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the configuration including the game history management chip 300. Further, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, the short-term entry number information group and the game history information are retained, so that the pachinko machine 10 is in any state (for example, the pachinko machine for a long period of time). Even if the pachinko machine 10 is placed in a distribution state where power is not supplied to the machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information can always be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed. , Can be inspected.

Further, since it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the short-term entry number information group and the game history information in the main RAM 64, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 can be suppressed and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can do.

<Aspect 13>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the main control device 60 sets the game mode, which is a mode in which the game progress process, which is the process for progressing the game, can be executed, and the game history information to the inspection machine 320. The configuration may be such that it can be executed by switching between the inspection mode, which is the output mode. The game progress process is a process executed based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and is a winning lottery process, a motor opening lottery process, a prize ball payout process, and a main display unit. The variable display processing of the symbol in 45, the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b, the electric accessory 34a, and the like are included.

Then, in the inspection mode, even when the game ball passes through the region detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the game progress process may not be executed.

Specifically, for example, when the mode shifts to the inspection mode, the inspection mode flag for determining whether or not the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode is turned ON. Then, the main control device 60 determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and if it is determined that the inspection mode flag is ON, the main control device 60 does not proceed to the processing flow for executing the normal game progress process. , Proceed to the processing flow for the inspection mode. As a result, even when the main control device 60 receives a signal indicating that the game ball has been detected from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, a process based on the reception of the signal (for example, a jackpot random number). It is configured not to execute the process of acquiring the value of the counter C1, the process of paying out the prize ball, the process of transmitting a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the like).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute in the inspection mode a process that is not preferable to be executed in parallel with the game progress process, a process in which a problem is likely to occur when the process is executed in parallel with the game progress process, and the like. .. Further, according to such a configuration, the game progress process is not executed in the inspection mode. Therefore, when developing a program for the process to be executed in the inspection mode, measures should be taken when the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to consider it, it is possible to greatly improve the development efficiency of the program of the process executed in the inspection mode.

Further, the game history information is information whose contents change when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process of outputting game history information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 by the game history information. The game progress process may be executed and the content of the game history information may change at any time, making it difficult to smoothly carry out the inspection. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 13, since the game history information is output in the inspection mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, the game history information is output. It is possible to prevent the content of the game history information from changing while the game is being played. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can smoothly carry out the inspection.

The mode of outputting the game history information in the inspection mode is not limited to the mode of outputting the game history information to the inspection machine 320 and displaying it, and may be another mode. For example, the game history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

Further, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to the game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, such as the entry information of the game ball and the entry number information.

<Aspect 14>
In the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode among the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, the game mode is changed to the inspection mode while the game progress process of the game mode is being executed. When a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as "mode switching operation") for shifting to is executed by the inspector, the game is played at the timing when the game progress process being executed is completed up to a predetermined processing stage. It may be configured to shift from the mode to the inspection mode.

Specifically, for example, when the mode switching operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed during the execution of the game progress processing of the game mode, each game progress processing being executed ( Up to a predetermined processing stage for each winning lottery process, electric role opening lottery process, prize ball payout process, symbol variation display process on the main display unit 45, opening / closing process of opening / closing door 36b and electric accessory 34a, etc.) Complete the process. Then, when the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the processing after the processing stage is not executed and the game goes into a standby state. Then, the game mode shifts to the inspection mode at the timing when all of the executed game progress processes are completed up to the predetermined processing stage.

According to such a configuration, the game mode is changed to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether or not the processing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage of the game progress processing being executed. Compared with the configuration to be migrated, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing defects when shifting to the inspection mode.

For example, a configuration in which the game mode is changed to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether or not the processing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage of the game progress processing being executed. In the case of adoption, if the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the change display process of the symbol on the main display unit 45 as the game progress process is executed in the game mode, the symbol on the main display unit 45 is executed. Since the inspection mode is entered in the middle of the fluctuation display, it becomes difficult to control the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 14, for example, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process is executed in the game mode, the symbol variation display process is performed. The inspection mode will be entered at the timing when the processing is completed up to the processing stage where the symbol is stopped after the end. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

When the mode is changed (returned) from the inspection mode to the game mode, the game progress processing of the remaining processing stages scheduled to be executed before the transition to the inspection mode may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an unpleasant feeling that the expected game progress process is completed in an incomplete state.

Further, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the game mode is switched to the inspection mode at the timing when all the processes of each of the running game progress processes are completed. May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when the game progress processing is restarted.

Further, if the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the game execution process is interrupted and the information that enables the interrupted game progress process to be restarted is transmitted to the main RAM 64. It may be configured to memorize and shift from the game mode to the inspection mode at the timing when the memorization is completed. According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, so that many pachinko machines 10 can be inspected in a short period of time.

Further, the mode switching operation for shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button. Further, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is executed may be executed.

<Aspect 15>
In the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode among the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, 10 minutes from the time when the main control device 60 shifts to the inspection mode during the inspection mode When the automatic return condition that the lapse has passed is satisfied, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode (for example, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed. However, it may be configured to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode.

According to such a configuration, when 10 minutes have passed from the time of shifting to the inspection mode, the inspection mode is performed even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift to the game mode from the above, it is possible to surely suppress that the game mode is not returned without executing a predetermined operation. For example, even if the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 by the game history information output in the inspection mode and then forgets to execute a predetermined operation, the inspection mode is set. Since the game mode is restored 10 minutes after the transition, a situation occurs in which the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game on the pachinko machine 10 without returning to the game mode in which the game progress process can be executed. Can be suppressed.

The automatic recovery condition is not limited to the condition that 10 minutes have passed from the time when the inspection mode is entered, and may be another aspect. For example, it may be a condition that 5 minutes have passed from the time when the inspection mode is entered, or 10 minutes may have passed from the time when the inspection machine 320 is removed from the inspection terminal 65.

Further, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, the main control device 60 is provided with a RAM clear button for initializing the main RAM 64, and the power button is pressed while pressing the RAM clear button (hereinafter referred to as an operation). When the "erasing operation") is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized).

Further, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between the game mode and the inspection mode. Then, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, for example, in the state during the inspection mode or in the state where the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode, while pressing the RAM clear button. Even when the erasing operation of pressing the power button is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be erased.

According to such a configuration, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is executed. However, since the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased, the erasing operation is erroneously executed in an attempt to shift to the game mode in the state after the shift to the inspection mode and before the shift to the game mode. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the mode is shifted between the game mode and the inspection mode. In the configuration where the operation for this is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button in order to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode, but it is incorrect. There is a risk of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button. However, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the erasing operation of erroneously pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button is executed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, the game progress process executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress process is returned to the inspection mode. In the case of adopting a configuration in which information for resuming later is stored in the main RAM 64, the power button is intended to be pressed while pressing the mode switching button in an attempt to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but the RAM clear button is mistakenly used. If the power button is pressed while pressing, the information for restarting the game progress process will be deleted, and the game progress process cannot be restarted after returning to the inspection mode, and the player There is a risk of giving a disadvantage to. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the power button is erroneously pressed while pressing the RAM clear button in an attempt to shift to the game mode. Even if you press, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the main RAM 64 from being accidentally erased, so it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Can be done.

The game history information may be stored in the main RAM 64. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated memory for storing the game history information, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when the erasing operation is executed, the game history stored in the main RAM 64 is stored regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power on / off state, game mode or inspection mode, etc.). The information may not be erased, and only the information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (information stored for restarting the game progress process, etc.) may be erased (initialized). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information that deviates from a predetermined predetermined range from being intentionally deleted.

The erasing operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be in another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
In the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode in the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode. , A game stop command, which is a command indicating that the game progress process is temporarily stopped by shifting to the inspection mode, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, and the game progress process that was being executed is transmitted in the inspection mode. It may be configured to be temporarily stopped. Specifically, for example, when the inspection mode is entered while the symbol variation display on the main display unit 45 is being executed, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off and the symbol variation time on the main display unit 45 is counted. To stop. Further, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, a game restart command, which is a command indicating that the main control device 60 shifts to the game mode and the game progress process is restarted, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. It may be configured to be used.

Then, the voice emission control device 90 temporarily stops the effect being executed when the game stop command is received, and then temporarily stops the effect when the game restart command is received. Is configured to restart. According to such a configuration, even when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game progress process executed by the main control device 60 (for example, the symbol on the main display unit 45) is executed. (Variation display processing) and the effect controlled by the voice emission control device 90 (for example, the variation display processing of the symbol in the symbol display device 41) can be synchronized, and the player feels a sense of discomfort after shifting to the game mode. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

The voice emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the effect being executed even when the game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when a game stop command is received during the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41, the symbol variation display layer is maintained while the symbol variation display control on the symbol display device 41 is continued. A layer of another image (for example, a black image) is displayed on the top. However, since the control of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is continued, the variable display of the symbol is continued under the layer of the black image. Then, when the fluctuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 elapses, the variation display of the symbol ends under the layer of the black image, but the symbol does not stop and shakes slightly.

Then, when the game restart command is received from the main control device 60, the layer of the black image displayed above the layer of the variable display of the symbol is removed, and the layer of the symbol is displayed again. At this time, the main control device 60 shifts (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and restarts the stopped game progress processing (display of fluctuations in the symbol on the main display unit 45).

Then, the main control device 60 resumes the fluctuation display of the symbol on the main display unit 45, which has stopped counting the fluctuation time, and when the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45 is displayed. When it is time to stop, a symbol stop command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a symbol stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 displays the symbol displayed in the symbol display device 41 in a slightly shaken manner. Stop completely.

According to such a configuration, while the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off, and the display on the symbol display device 41 is a black image. Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the fluctuation display of the symbol on the main display unit 45, which has stopped counting the fluctuation time, is resumed, and the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is variable display. It is a mode or a display mode that is slightly shaken. Then, at the timing when the symbol on the main display unit 45 stops, the symbol on the symbol display device 41 also stops. That is, it is possible to synchronize the variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 45 with the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. Further, since the control of the effect being executed is not stopped even when the game stop command is received, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem by temporarily stopping the control of the effect being executed. As a problem, for example, when the control of the effect is restarted from the state where the control of the effect is temporarily stopped, the timing of the plurality of effects may be shifted when a plurality of effects are executed, or the symbol display device may be used. There may be a discrepancy between the moving image displayed on the 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46.

If the main control device 60 adopts a configuration in which the symbol stop command is not transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 even when it is time to stop the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45, the symbol is used. The variable display of the symbol on the display device 41 will continue to be in a small shaking mode, and then the variable command transmitted from the main control device 60 or the standby command transmitted when the hold information is not stored. Is received, the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is stopped.

<Aspect 18>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the predetermined time is reached. Specifically, for example, the game mode may be changed to the inspection mode at 11:10 pm, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at around 11:10 pm after the game hall is closed, so that the pachinko machine 10 is inspected. The person can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the game hall is closed, without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Further, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer. According to such a configuration, for example, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall are simultaneously shifted to the inspection mode, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on each symbol display device 41. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode. Will be.

<Aspect 19>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the game history information may always be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the player or the inspector can always check the game history information, so that if an abnormality such as the game history information deviates from a predetermined range occurs, the relevant information is immediately taken. It becomes possible to notice the incident. As a result, it becomes possible to promptly secure the soundness of the game.

<Aspect 20>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a game in which a 7-segment display composed of seven light emitting diodes is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and is stored in the pachinko machine 10 in the 7-segment display. It may be configured to display information related to history information. For example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode described above to the inspection mode, whether or not the bonus ratio, the payout ratio (in the normal mode), etc. stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range. It may be configured to display on a 7-segment display.

More specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, "1" indicating that the display regarding the accessory ratio is performed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and then the accessory ratio is displayed. Is within a predetermined range (specifically, when the accessory ratio is 0.700 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while the accessory ratio is concerned. If is not within the predetermined range, "E" indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display. When "2" indicating that the display regarding the continuous bonus ratio is to be performed is displayed on the 7-segment display after the display regarding the bonus ratio is displayed, and the continuous bonus ratio is within the predetermined range (specifically). When the continuous bonus ratio is 0.600 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while when the continuous bonus ratio is not within the predetermined range. , "E" indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After displaying the continuous bonus ratio, "2" indicating that the payout ratio (in normal mode) is displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the predetermined range. (Specifically, when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is in the range of 0.60 to 0.70), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display. On the other hand, if the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not within the predetermined range, "E" indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect game history information such as a bonus ratio. In addition, since the 7-segment display consumes less power, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the game history information is inspected with only a small amount of power from the capacitor, battery, etc. provided inside the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to do.

Further, the 7-segment display may always display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the bonus ratio without switching from the game mode to the inspection mode. Further, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have the inspection mode, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the accessory ratio. Further, if the 7-segment display is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the 7-segment display is out of the player's field of view, so that the player is concerned about the display of the 7-segment display. It is possible to prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, when the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine main body 12 supported by the hinge 15 is rotated toward the front and provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine main body 12. Since it is only necessary to confirm the display of the 7-segment display, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the bonus ratio. In addition, instead of the 7-segment display, another display capable of displaying the game history information in a recognizable manner, such as a segment display composed of a number of light emitting diodes other than 7, may be adopted.

<Aspect 21>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to calculate game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 transmits a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the voice emission control device 90 in the initial setting process. The voice emission control device 90 calculates game history information based on the acquired prize ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and the calculated game history information. May be configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

According to such a configuration, the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, or the voice emission control device 90 is located in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. Even if the configuration is such that the storage position (memory address) of the stored prize ball number data cannot be grasped, the sound emission control device 90 is the prize ball stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. It is possible to acquire several data and calculate game history information. Further, since the voice emission control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be significantly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 capable of shifting from the gaming mode to the inspection mode, but also to the gaming machine capable of shifting from the gaming mode to another mode. .. For example, it can be applied to a gaming machine having a gaming status display mode capable of displaying the status of processing related to the game, such as the status of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, and the contents of stored hold information. can.

<Aspect 23>
FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the above-mentioned game history information. Further, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is an area for developing a program or the like for executing a process related to the progress of the game. The second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for developing a program or the like for executing a process for calculating and displaying game history information (hereinafter, also referred to as a game history process). Then, when the main CPU 62x executes the process related to the progress of the game (process other than the game history process), the information is written only to the first area of the main RAM 64, and the game history process is executed. , Information is written only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

Further, the first area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit ball entry detection information storage area, a stack area, and the like, which will be described later. The second area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit buffer area, a prize ball aggregation buffer, a calculation buffer, a calculation result buffer, a stack area, and the like, which will be described later. Details of these will be described later.

Further, the game history information display unit 45z is connected to the input / output port 62a. The game history information display unit 45z is composed of four 7-segment displays and is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later, the game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 23. Also in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is started in a cycle of 4 msec as in the first embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above is that the content of the ball entry detection processing shown in step S10606 is different, and the game history for calculating and displaying the game history information. The process is added as the final process (step S10616) of this timer interrupt process, and the ball entry detection information output process (step S10207 in FIG. 13) is a process of outputting the ball entry detection information to the game history management chip. The processing) is omitted, and the other processing is the same as the processing described in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the ball entry detection process of step S10606 shown in FIG. 27 and the game history process shown in step S10616 will be described.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment. In the ball entry detection process of this aspect 23, it is determined that there is no information (“0”) in the bit of the input port 62b in the previous timer interrupt process (one time before), and the bit of the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process. When it is determined that there is information (“1”) in the bit, and then it is determined that the bit has information (“1”) again in the timer interrupt process, the game is played at the entrance corresponding to the bit. It is determined that the ball has entered. Hereinafter, an example of the ball entry detection process will be described.

In step S10701, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 (FIG. 14) of the input port 62b described above (hereinafter, also referred to as ball entry determination information) is read, and is read as step S10702. However, the ball entry determination information is stored in the first buffer, which is an 8-bit buffer. That is, the first buffer is a buffer for storing the ball entry determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the timer interrupt process this time. The second buffer, which will be described later, is an 8-bit buffer that stores the ball entry determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the previous timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the first buffer and the second buffer are provided in the first area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10702, the process proceeds to step S10703.

In step S10703, 8 is set in the ball entry determination counter provided in the main RAM 64. Then proceed to 10704. In addition, the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is the same as the ball entry determination counter (step S10401) used in the ball entry determination process (FIG. 16) of the first embodiment described above, and each of the eight ball entry ports. It corresponds to the bit of. Specifically, in this embodiment, "8" of the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the large winning opening 36a, "7" is the first bit D1 of the first starting port 33, and "6" is. The second bit D2 of the second starting port 34, "5" is the third bit D3 of the first winning opening 32a, "4" is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning opening 32b, and "3" is the third winning opening 32c. The 5th bit D5 and "2" correspond to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35, and the "1" corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage.

In step S10704, whether or not there is ball entry determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter in the second buffer, that is, the ball entry determination information stored in the bit is “1”. Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S10704 that the ball entry determination information is not "1" (S10704: NO), the process proceeds to step S10705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10704 that the ball entry determination information is "1" (S10704: YES), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10705 to step S10709 described later. ..

In step S10705, whether or not there is ball entry determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter in the first buffer, that is, the ball entry determination information stored in the bit is “1”. Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S10705 that the ball entry determination information is "1" (S10705: YES), the process proceeds to step S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10705 that the ball entry determination information is not "1" (S10705: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10706 to step S10709 described later. ..

In step S10706, whether or not there is ball entry determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter in the current input port 62b, that is, the ball entry determination information stored in the bit is "1". It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step S10706 that the ball entry determination information is "1" (S10706: YES), the process proceeds to step S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10706 that the ball entry determination information is not "1" (S10706: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10707 to step S10709 described later. ..

In step S10707, it is determined whether the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to which type of entry slot, and the game ball has entered the entry slot corresponding to the bit. Turn on the entry flag indicating. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is the information indicating the bit corresponding to the large winning opening 36a, it is determined that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a. Turn on the big winning opening ball entry flag. Further, for example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is the information indicating the bit corresponding to the second start opening 34, it indicates that the game ball has entered the second start opening 34. Turn on the 2nd start port entry flag. After executing step S10707, the process proceeds to step S10708.

In step S10708, the numerical information of the prize ball counter corresponding to the ball entry port where the ball entry flag is turned ON in step S10707, that is, it is determined that the game ball has entered is added by 1. Specifically, for example, when the large winning opening entry flag is turned on, 15 prize ball counters are added by 1, and when the second starting opening entry flag is turned on, 3 prize balls are added. Add 1 to the counter. After executing step S10708, the process proceeds to step S10709.

In step S10709, the ball entry determination counter is subtracted by 1, and then, in step S10710, it is determined whether or not the ball entry determination counter is "0".

If it is determined in step S10710 that the ball entry determination counter is not "0" (S10710: NO), the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter updated in step S10709 are set in steps S10704 to S10708. Execute the process. When the processing of steps S10704 to S10708 is executed for the numerical information set in step S10703, the ball entry determination counter becomes "0" and an affirmative determination (S10710: YES) is made in step S10710. Proceed to S10711.

In step S10711, the 8-bit ball entry determination information stored in the first buffer is stored (copied) in the second buffer. As a result, the ball entry determination information acquired from the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process will be referred to in the ball entry detection process in the next timer interrupt process. After executing step S10711, the process proceeds to step S10712.

In step S10712, the ball entry detection information indicating that the game ball has been detected in the ball entry detection process of the timer interrupt process this time is stored in the ball entry detection information storage area where 8-bit information can be stored. .. Specifically, in the ball entry detection information storage area, "1" is set for each bit corresponding to each of the above eight ball entry ports when the ball entry flag is ON. When the flag is OFF, "0" is stored as the ball entry detection information. For example, as a result of executing the ball entry detection process in the timer interrupt process this time, the large winning opening entry flag and the second starting opening entry flag are ON, and the entry flags corresponding to other entry openings are OFF. In some cases, the 8-bit ball entry detection information "0000101" is stored in the ball entry detection information storage area. The 8-bit ball entry detection information stored in the ball entry detection information storage area is referred to in the game history processing described later. After executing step S10712, the main ball entry detection process is terminated.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a game history process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment. In this game history processing, a bonus ratio and a continuous bonus ratio are calculated, and a process for displaying these on the game history information display unit 45z is executed. Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated, and the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z for 5 seconds. After that, the continuous bonus ratio is calculated, and the calculated continuous bonus ratio is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z for 5 seconds. After that, the bonus ratio is calculated again, and the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z for 5 seconds. In this way, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are alternately displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. Hereinafter, an example of specific processing will be described.

In step S10801, a save process is executed in which the information stored in the register in the main CPU 62x (hereinafter, also referred to as register information) is saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 23, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), before the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed, the process related to the progress of the game, which is a process other than the game history process (FIG. 27). Since the process of steps S10601 to 10615 of step S10601) is executed, in the save process, the register information regarding the progress of the game is saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the stack pointer (the address value indicating the uppermost stage of the stack area of the first area) in the main CPU 62x is saved (pushed) to the bottom of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. Then, an address value indicating the uppermost stage of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. After that, the register information stored in the registers in the main CPU 62x is sequentially saved in the stack area (the uppermost stage of the stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64) indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x. Let (Push). By executing this save process, the address value of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, so that the main CPU 62x uses the game history information described below. The calculation / display process can be executed using the second area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10801, the process proceeds to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is ON. The abnormality flag is a flag that is turned ON when the prize ball total value described later is an abnormal value. If it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is ON (S10802: YES), the process proceeds to step S10803 and the prize ball total value is cleared to 0. After that, the process proceeds to step S10804, and the abnormality flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is not ON (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to step S10805 without executing the processes of step S10803 and step S10804.

In step S10805, OR processing is executed for each corresponding bit in the ball entry detection information storage area and the buffer area, and the result (logical sum) of each OR processing is stored (overwritten) in the corresponding bit in the buffer area. The details of this process will be described later. The buffer area is an area that can store the same 8-bit information as the ball entry detection information storage area, and is provided in the second area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10805, the process proceeds to step S10806.

In step S10806, it is determined whether or not at least one of the eight bits in the buffer area has ball entry detection information (whether or not "1" is stored in one or more bits). .. If it is determined in step S10806 that at least one bit in the buffer area has the ball entry detection information (S10806: YES), the process proceeds to step S10807.

In step S10807, the target setting process for setting the bit to be the target of the prize ball aggregation process, which will be described later, is executed among the eight bits in the buffer area. In this embodiment, in one target setting process, two consecutive bits are set as targets for the prize ball aggregation process. Further, as will be described later, when the target setting process is executed in the timer interrupt process next time or after, the two consecutive bits located next to the two bits set in the previous target setting process. Is set as the target of the prize ball aggregation process. In this way, the two bits to be processed for the prize ball aggregation process are sequentially shifted to the next. After the last two bits of the eight bits are set as the target of the prize ball aggregation process, the first two bits of the eight bits are used for the prize ball aggregation process in the next target setting process. Set it again as a target. As described above, in this embodiment, the order of the two bits set as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation processing from the eight bits in the buffer area is predetermined. After executing step S10807, the process proceeds to step S10808 to execute the prize ball aggregation process corresponding to the set bit. Here, a specific example of the processing from step S10805 to step S10808 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 23. As described above, the ball entry detection information storage area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each ball entry port. Specifically, in this embodiment, the 0th bit D0 of the ball entry detection information storage area is the large winning opening 36a, the 1st bit D1 is the 1st starting port 33, and the 2nd bit D2 is the 2nd starting port 34, the third. The bit D3 corresponds to the first winning opening 32a, the fourth bit D4 corresponds to the second winning opening 32b, the fifth bit D5 corresponds to the third winning opening 32c, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. is doing.

The buffer area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each ball entry port. Specifically, in this embodiment, the 0th bit D0 of the buffer area is the large winning opening 36a, the 1st bit D1 is the 1st starting port 33, the 2nd bit D2 is the 2nd starting port 34, and the 3rd bit D3 is the first. The 1 winning opening 32a and the 4th bit D4 correspond to the 2nd winning opening 32b, the 5th bit D5 corresponds to the 3rd winning opening 32c, the 6th bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the 7th bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. That is, each bit in the buffer area corresponds to each bit in the ball entry detection information storage area.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned entry ball detection process (FIG. 28) that a game ball has entered the entry slot such as the large winning opening 36a, the game ball is out of the eight bits of the entry detection information storage area. The bit corresponding to the ball entry slot determined to have entered the ball is turned ON (“1”).

FIG. 30 (A1) shows an example of processing when the nth timer interrupt processing is executed. In this nth timer interrupt process, in the ball entry detection process, it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start opening 34 and the first winning opening 32a, and the eight bits of the ball entry detection information storage area. The value of is "00001100". Further, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "0000000000". Therefore, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "00001100". As a result, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated every time the timer interrupt process is executed, is set as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation process described later, and the buffer area until the process is executed. Will be held in.

In the nth timer interrupt processing, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR processing is executed, two consecutive bits of the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1 are subjected to the prize ball aggregation processing. Set as the processing target of.

In the prize ball totaling process, when the 0th bit D0 (bit corresponding to the large winning opening 36a) set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process is "1", it is stored in the prize ball totaling buffer. "15" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of consecutive prize balls. On the other hand, when the 0th bit D0 is "0", the addition is not performed. In this embodiment, the prize ball aggregation buffer is configured as a ring buffer, and is configured to store the number of prize balls paid out in the most recent predetermined period. Further, the number of consecutive prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the continuous character operation, and is paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the large winning opening 36a. It means the number of game balls.

Further, in the prize ball totaling process, when the first bit D1 (bit corresponding to the first starting port 33) set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process is "1", the prize ball totaling buffer is used. Add "3" to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the first bit D1 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30 (A1), since the 0th bit D0 is “0” and the 1st bit D1 is also “0”, the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball aggregation process is executed, the two bits (0th bit D0 and 1st bit D1) set as the target of the prize ball aggregation process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

FIG. 30 (A2) shows an example of processing when the n + 1th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n + 1th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that a game ball has entered the second winning opening 32b, and the value of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area is "00010000". ". Further, the value of the eight bits of the buffer area before the OR processing is executed is "000001100", which is the same as the buffer area after the prize ball aggregation processing in the nth timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "00011100".

In the n + 1th timer interrupt processing, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR processing is executed, two consecutive bits of the second bit D2 and the third bit D3 are subjected to the prize ball aggregation processing. Set as the processing target of.

In the prize ball totaling process, when the second bit D2 (bit corresponding to the second starting port 34) set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process is "1", it is stored in the prize ball totaling buffer. Add "3" to the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for the prize. On the other hand, when the second bit D2 is "0", the addition is not performed. The number of prize balls for the prize is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the prize, and is used as a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 and the large winning opening 36a. It means the number of game balls paid out.

Further, in the prize ball totaling process, when the third bit D3 (bit corresponding to the first winning opening 32a) set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process is "1", the prize ball totaling buffer is used. Add "10" to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the third bit D3 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30 (A2), since the second bit D2 is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for the prize. Further, since the third bit D3 is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls.

After the prize ball aggregation process is executed, the two bits (second bit D2 and third bit D3) set as the target of the prize ball aggregation process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

FIG. 30 (A3) shows an example of processing when the n + second timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n + 2nd timer interrupt processing, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are ". It is "01000000". Further, the value of the eight bits of the buffer area before the OR processing is executed is "00010000", which is the same as the buffer area after the prize ball aggregation processing in the n + 1th timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "01010000".

In the n + 2nd timer interrupt processing, two consecutive bits of the 4th bit D4 and the 5th bit D5 among the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR processing is executed are subjected to the prize ball aggregation processing. Set as the processing target of.

In the prize ball totaling process, when the fourth bit D4 (bit corresponding to the second winning opening 32b) set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process is "1", it is stored in the prize ball totaling buffer. Add "10" to the total number of prize balls. On the other hand, when the fourth bit D4 is "0", the addition is not performed.

Further, in the prize ball totaling process, when the fifth bit D5 (bit corresponding to the third winning opening 32c) set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process is "1", the prize ball totaling buffer is used. Add "10" to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the fifth bit D5 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30 (A3), since the fourth bit D4 is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls. Further, since the fifth bit D5 is "0", the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball aggregation process is executed, the two bits (4th bit D4 and 5th bit D5) set as the target of the prize ball aggregation process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

FIG. 30 (A4) shows an example of processing when the n + 3rd timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n + 3rd timer interrupt processing, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that a game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a, and the value of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area is "00100001". It has become. Further, the value of the eight bits of the buffer area before the OR processing is executed is "01000000", which is the same as the buffer area after the prize ball aggregation processing in the above-mentioned n + second timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "01100001".

In the n + 3rd timer interrupt processing, two consecutive bits of the 6th bit D6 and the 7th bit D7 out of the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR processing is executed are subjected to the prize ball aggregation processing. Set as the processing target of.

However, in this embodiment, the 6th bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the 7th bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. No prize balls are set in the through gate 35 and the discharge passage. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 6th bit D6 and the 7th bit D7 are set as the target of the prize ball totaling process, the addition to the total number of prize balls or the like is not performed in the prize ball totaling process. After that, the two bits (6th bit D6 and 7th bit D7) set as the target of the prize ball aggregation processing in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

After that, in the n + 4th timer interrupt processing, the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1 are set again as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation processing. After that, the same process is repeatedly executed. However, as will be described later, when there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), the target setting process (step S10807) and the prize ball aggregation process (step S10808). ) Is not executed. Further, in this embodiment, from the state where there is no ball entry detection information in the bit of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), the ball entry detection information is again present in at least one bit of the buffer area. When the state is reached and the target setting process is executed, the two bits set as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation process in the previous target setting process are stored, and the two bits are located next to the two bits. Two consecutive bits are set as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation process. If the two bits set as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation processing in the previous target setting processing are the 6th bit D6 and the 7th bit D7, the 2nd of the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1 Set a number of consecutive bits as the processing target for the prize ball aggregation process.

As described above, in this embodiment, since two bits out of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as the target of the prize ball aggregation process in one timer interrupt process, at least one bit in the buffer area is set. When the ball entry detection information is present in, the timer interrupt process is executed four times, so that the prize ball total process is executed for all eight bits in the buffer area.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29. After executing the prize ball aggregation process of step S10808, the process proceeds to step S10809.

In step S10809, the calculation result display control process is executed. Specifically, control is executed to display the value (calculated game history information, bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer, which will be described later, on the game history information display unit 45z. After executing step S10809, the process proceeds to step S10810.

In step S10810, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information. Specifically, when a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment) has elapsed from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, or when 5 seconds have elapsed from the previous execution of the arithmetic processing, the timing of executing the arithmetic processing is as follows. Judge that there is. If it is determined in step S10810 that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing (S10810: YES), the process proceeds to step S10811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10810 that it is not the timing to execute the arithmetic processing (S10810: NO), the process proceeds to step S10813 without executing the processing of steps S10811 and S10812 described later.

In step S10811, the type of game history information calculated in the arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 described later) is set. In this embodiment, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are alternately set as the types of the game history information to be calculated. After that, the process proceeds to step S10812, and task 1 is designated as the next task to be executed in the task process (step S10814) described later. After executing step S10812, the process proceeds to step S10813.

In step S10813, the process of returning the register information saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 to the register of the main CPU 62x in the above-mentioned save process is executed. Specifically, the register information saved sequentially from the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the uppermost stage of the stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64) is sequentially stored in the main CPU 62x. Return (pop) to the register inside. After that, the value of the stack pointer saved at the bottom of the stack area of the second area (the address value indicating the uppermost stage of the stack area of the first area) is returned (popped) to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. By executing this return processing, the address value of the stack area of the first area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, so that the main CPU 62x again has the first of the main RAM 64. It is possible to execute processing related to the progress of the game using the area. After that, the processing for this game history is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S10806. If it is determined in step S10806 that there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") (S10806: NO), the process proceeds to step S10814.

In step S10814, any one of the following three tasks is executed. If no task is specified, task 3 is executed. That is, instead of sequentially executing three tasks in one timer interrupt process, only one of the three designated tasks is executed in one timer interrupt process.

[Task 1]
The division number and the divisor required for calculating the game history information set as the calculation target are saved in the calculation buffer. Specifically, for example, when it is set to calculate the bonus ball ratio, the bonus ball number as the divisor and the total prize ball number as the divisor are stored in the calculation buffer. Further, for example, when the continuous bonus ball ratio is set to be calculated, the continuous bonus ball number is stored as a division and the total prize ball number is stored as a divisor in the calculation buffer. After that, task 2 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the timer interrupt processing from the next time onward.

[Task 2]
The operation of dividing the divisor stored in the calculation buffer by the divisor is executed, and the calculation result (quotient) is saved in the calculation result buffer. After that, task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the timer interrupt processing from the next time onward.

[Task 3]
It is determined whether or not the prize ball total value (number of prize balls for prizes, number of prize balls for continuous prizes, total number of prize balls) is valid, and if it is determined that it is not valid, the abnormality flag is turned ON, and then. , Task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process of step S10806 is performed in the timer interrupt process from the next time onward. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prize ball total value is valid, the abnormality flag is not turned ON and task 3 is designated as the next task. Here, when the prize ball total value is not valid, when the number of prize balls for the bonus exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, it is continuous. This is the case when the total number of prize balls is inconsistent, such as when the number of prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls.

After executing the designated task among the three tasks described above, the process proceeds to step S10809 described above, and the value (feature ratio or continuous bonus ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer is displayed in the game history information display unit. The process of displaying at 45z is executed. In this embodiment, the information indicating the type of the game history information is displayed on the first 7-segment display constituting the game history information display unit 45z, and the value of the game history information is displayed on the remaining three 7-segment displays. do.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the process related to the progress of the game included in the timer interrupt process (process other than the game history process) is the time until the next timer interrupt process is started (4 msec in this embodiment). ), But the time required to complete the process related to the progress of the game varies depending on the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the game history process is a process that is not related to the progress of the game, in one timer interrupt process, the process related to the progress of the game is executed rather than the time for executing the game history process. It is preferable to prioritize and secure the time for this. Further, even if it is not configured to continuously execute various processes included in the game history process (for example, prize ball aggregation process for each bit, arithmetic process, etc.) in one timer interrupt process to complete the game, the game can be played. There is no effect on progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, even when the execution time of the process related to the progress of the game is maximized according to the progress of the game, the execution time of one timer interrupt process (execution of the process related to the progress of the game). The various processes included in the game history process are divided into a plurality of processes so that the time (time + execution time of the game history process) is shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt process is started. In the timer interrupt processing of one time, the divided processing is executed, and various processing is completed by executing the timer interrupt processing multiple times. As a result, according to this aspect, it is possible to execute the game history process while securing the time required to execute the process related to the progress of the game in one timer interrupt process.

Specifically, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of two tasks (task 1 and task 2) constituting the arithmetic process which is the process of calculating the game history information. Tasks can be executed, and by executing the timer interrupt processing twice, all of the two tasks that make up the arithmetic processing are executed. Therefore, both of the two tasks are executed in one execution of the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to shorten the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process as compared with the configuration. As a result, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process becomes longer than 4 msec, which is the interval for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process (hereinafter, also referred to as an interrupt interval), and the timer interrupt process is performed for 4 msec. It is possible to suppress the fact that it cannot be executed at intervals.

Further, according to this aspect, a series of processes in which the order of execution is determined is divided into a plurality of tasks, and in one execution of the timer interrupt process, after executing one of the plurality of tasks. , Since the task to be executed next to the one task is specified, the time required to execute the timer interrupt processing when incorporated in the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt processing. Even if it is a process, it can be executed by incorporating it into the timer interrupt process. Specifically, according to this aspect, when the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than 4 msec. Even in the game machine having the configuration, the arithmetic processing can be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing executed at intervals of 4 msec and executed. In addition, the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all the tasks are not executed in one execution of the timer interrupt processing, so that the timer interrupt processing is executed once. The required time can be allocated to the execution time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt processing, two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation processing, and the setting is made. It is possible to execute the prize ball aggregation process for the bits to be processed, and by executing the timer interrupt process multiple times, the prize ball aggregation process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area. do. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing is shortened as compared with the configuration in which the prize ball aggregation processing is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in one execution of the timer interrupt processing. Can be done. As a result, the time required to execute the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than the interval of 4 msec, which is the interval for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process cannot be executed at the interval of 4 msec. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to this aspect, when setting two bits from the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation process, the prizes are set in a predetermined order. It is not necessary to execute the determination process of which bit the processing target of the sphere aggregation processing is set to, and the processing can be simplified, and as a result, the processing speed can be improved. Further, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for executing the determination process.

Further, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x has a shorter time than the shortest interval (about 18 msec in this embodiment) in which two game balls continuously enter into one entry port and are detected. Since the timer interrupt processing can be executed four times, the prize ball aggregation processing (FIG. 29) is performed for all eight processing target candidates (bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area) in a time shorter than the shortest interval. Step S10808) can be executed. Therefore, even if two game balls enter the same entrance in succession, the entry of the first first game ball is detected at the entrance. The updated ball entry detection information is set as the processing target and the prize ball totaling process is executed, and then the ball entry detection information corresponding to the remaining other ball entry openings is set as the processing target and the prize ball totaling process is performed. Is executed, the prize ball totaling process may be terminated for all of these ball entry detection information before the ball entry of the next second game ball is detected at the entry slot. can. That is, at the time when the entry detection information updated based on the detection of the entry of the second game ball at the entry opening is set as the processing target and the prize ball aggregation process is executed, The prize ball totaling process for the ball entry detection information updated based on the fact that the ball entry of the first game ball is detected at the entry slot has already been completed. The effect of this configuration will be described below.

As in this embodiment, in a configuration in which binary information of "0" or "1" indicating the presence or absence of a game ball is used as the ball entry detection information, the second ball is tentatively entered into a certain ball entry port. Ball entry detection updated from "0" to "1" based on the entry of the first game ball into the entry slot by the time the entry of the game ball is detected at the entry slot. If the prize ball aggregation process is not executed for the information, when the entry of the second game ball is detected at the entry opening, the entry detection information corresponding to the entry opening is still ". It remains "1", and it is not possible to record the entry of the second game ball. That is, even though two game balls have entered the ball entrance in succession, the ball entry detection information corresponding to the ball entry is one game in the ball entrance. It cannot be distinguished from the situation where only the ball has entered, and in the prize ball totaling process, one game ball is treated as the situation where the ball has entered the entrance. As a result, it may not be possible to record an accurate number of prize balls in the prize ball totaling process.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, when the entry of the second game ball is detected at the entry opening, the ball is already updated by the entry of the first game ball into the entry opening. Since the prize ball totaling process is executed for the ball entry detection information and the ball entry detection information is "0", it is possible to record the entry of the second game ball. .. As a result, it becomes possible to record an accurate number of prize balls in the prize ball totaling process. This makes it possible to adopt binary information of "0" or "1" indicating the presence or absence of a game ball as the ball entry detection information while ensuring the accuracy in the prize ball aggregation process. The storage capacity for storing the ball entry detection information can be reduced, and the processing speed of the prize ball aggregation process can be improved.

Further, according to this aspect, the game history process (FIG. 29) is the information held by the register in the main CPU 62x, and the information for executing the process related to the progress of the game is stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. Since the save process (step S10801 in FIG. 29) for writing to the stack area of is included, the game executed by the register in the main CPU 62x immediately before the start of the game history process when the main CPU 62x starts the game history process. When the information for executing the process related to the progress of the above is retained, the information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing the information to the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, the information for executing the process related to the progress of the game held in the register in the main CPU 62x is deleted, and when the game history process is executed by the main CPU 62x, the game history is stored in the register in the main CPU 62x. Information for executing the process can be retained.

Further, according to this aspect, the game history process (FIG. 29) is a return process (FIG. 29) in which the information written in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 in the save process is held in the register of the main CPU 62x. Step S10813) is included, so when the game history process is terminated, the information for executing the process related to the progress of the game is held again in the register of the main CPU 62x, and the game history process is executed before the start of the game history process. The processing related to the progress of the game that has been performed can be re-executed from the state immediately before the start of the game history processing.

Further, according to this aspect, since the save process and the return process are included in the game history process, even if only the program for executing the game history process is deleted, the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process is performed. Can provide a gaming machine that runs without problems. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history process without modifying the program for executing the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process. As a result, for example, when the gaming machine is improved so as not to execute the gaming history processing, or when a new gaming machine which does not execute the gaming history processing is developed based on the gaming machine, the design change is minimized. It is possible to limit it.

Further, according to this aspect, since the main CPU 62x executes the writing of the information in the game history processing only to the second area of the main RAM 64, it is written in the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to prevent the information from being rewritten by executing the game history processing. Therefore, in a configuration in which the process related to the progress of the game is executed using the first area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the game history process from affecting the process related to the progress of the game. ..

Further, according to this aspect, since the main CPU 62x executes the writing of the information in the process related to the progress of the game only to the first area of the main RAM 64, it is written in the second area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to prevent the existing information from being rewritten by executing a process related to the progress of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the game history process is executed using the second area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from having an influence on the game history process.

Further, according to this aspect, since the 8-bit buffer area that can store the ball entry detection information is provided, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area that is updated every time the timer interrupt process is executed can be stored. It can be set as a processing target of the prize ball aggregation processing and held until the processing is executed.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball aggregation process (step S10808) is executed in one timer interrupt process, the arithmetic process (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814) is executed. do not do. That is, since both the prize ball aggregation processing and the arithmetic processing are not executed in one timer interrupt processing, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being unable to be executed at the interrupt interval because the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt processing. be able to. Further, according to this aspect, the prize ball totaling process in which the ball entry status of the game ball and the processing load correlate is executed with priority over the arithmetic process in which the ball entry status of the game ball and the processing load do not correlate. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the interval between executions of the prize ball totaling process, and as a result, the prize ball total value, which is the processing result of the prize ball totaling process, cannot accurately reflect the entry status of the game ball. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Specifically, for example, the next game ball enters the entry slot corresponding to the bit before the prize ball aggregation process is executed for a certain bit in the buffer area, and two balls are entered. It is possible to prevent the entry of a game ball from being treated as the entry of one game ball.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball aggregation process (step S10808) is not executed and it is determined that it is the timing to execute the arithmetic process (step S10810: YES). Since the arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814) is executed, neither the prize ball aggregation processing nor the arithmetic processing is executed in one timer interrupt processing, and instead of the prize ball aggregation processing and the arithmetic processing in the situation. In addition, it is possible to execute other processes independent of these processes (in this embodiment, a process of determining the validity of the prize ball total value (task 3 in step S10814)). Further, in this embodiment, when either the prize ball aggregation process or the arithmetic process is executed in one timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is shorter than the interrupt interval. Therefore, in a situation where neither the prize ball totaling process nor the arithmetic processing is executed, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing by executing the processing having a shorter processing time than the prize ball totaling processing and the arithmetic processing. Can be reliably suppressed from becoming longer than the interrupt interval.

Further, according to this aspect, although it is possible to calculate two types of game history information, that is, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio is used in the arithmetic processing in one timer interrupt processing. Alternatively, since the process for calculating one of the continuous bonus ratios is executed, it is compared with the configuration in which the process for calculating the game history information of two types is executed in the arithmetic process in one timer interrupt process. , The time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being unable to be executed at a predetermined interrupt interval because the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than the interrupt interval. .. In addition, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

Further, according to this aspect, in the ball entry detection process, when the ball entry determination information of the bit corresponding to each entry slot is “0” → “1” → “1”, the bit corresponds to the relevant bit. Since it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entrance, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of false detection due to electrical noise, as in the first embodiment described above.

<Aspect 24>
In the above aspect 23, the game history information is configured to calculate the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, but the calculated game history information is not limited to these, and various game history information shown in the first embodiment can be used. It can be configured to be calculated. For example, it may be configured to calculate the ball ejection rate, the payout ratio, etc. shown in the first embodiment. In this case, in the same manner as the above-mentioned prize ball totaling process (step S10808 in FIG. 29), the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls fired on the game board 30) is also totaled. do it.

<Aspect 25>
In the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, when it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is ON, the prize ball total value is cleared (step S10803) and the abnormality flag is turned OFF (step). Although the configuration is S10804), if the abnormality flag is turned on a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 26>
In the above aspect 23, the arithmetic processing that is the processing for calculating the game history information is divided into a plurality of tasks and executed, but the type of the processing that is divided into a plurality of tasks is not limited to the arithmetic processing and is various. The process can be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed. For example, in a configuration in which the sound / light side MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 sets the content of the effect to be executed, the process of setting the content of the effect may be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed.

<Aspect 27>
In the above aspect 23, two of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as the processing target for the prize ball aggregation processing, but the number of bits to be processed is two. The number is not limited to, and may be another number. For example, a configuration may be configured in which five bits are set as processing targets in one timer interrupt processing. Further, in one timer interrupt processing, all eight bits may be set as processing targets. Further, only a predetermined bit out of the eight bits (for example, six bits of the 0th bit D0 to the 5th bit D5 in which the prize ball is set) can be set as the processing target, and can be set once. In the timer interrupt processing, two bits may be set as the processing target.

<Aspect 28>
In the above aspect 23, the first area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as a storage area for executing the process related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as the storage area for executing the game history process. However, the configuration may be such that the second area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as a storage area for executing processing other than the game history processing.

Further, the main RAM 64 may be divided into three or more areas. Then, for example, the third area, which is the third area of the main RAM 64, may be allocated as a storage area for executing a process for outputting the game history information to the outside.

<Aspect 29>
In the above aspect 23, the game history processing includes the evacuation process and the return process, but other processes other than the game history process may include the evacuation process and the return process. For example, the process scheduled to be deleted when the design of the gaming machine is changed may include a save process and a return process.

<Aspect 30>
In the above aspect 23, the game history process is incorporated in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), but the game history process may be incorporated in the main process (FIG. 12). Further, in the above aspect 23, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) is configured to incorporate the game history process as a process different from the process related to the progress of the game, but as a process different from the process related to the progress of the game. , Processing other than the game history processing may be incorporated in the timer interrupt processing. For example, the transmission process of transmitting information about the game status to the hall computer installed in the game hall at a predetermined timing is incorporated in the timer interrupt process as a process different from the process related to the progress of the game. May be. Further, various processes different from the processes related to the progress of the game may be incorporated in the main process.

<Aspect 31>
In the above aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the game history process (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. The configuration may include 300, and the main CPU 62x may execute the game history process (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, the game history information can be calculated by two systems, so that the game history information can be calculated even if a problem occurs in one system. In addition, if the game history information calculated from the two systems is compared and it is configured to notify (display) whether or not these values match, the reliability and accuracy of the calculated game history information can be confirmed. It becomes possible to do.

Further, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the game history process (FIG. 29) described in the above aspect 23 to calculate the game history information.

<Aspect 32>
In step S10805 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area (FIG. 30) provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 is ORed. Although it is configured to be read in the process, instead of this configuration, the 8-bit storage area corresponding to the ball entry detection information storage area (hereinafter, also referred to as the second ball entry detection information storage area) is the second of the main RAM 64. The information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 is provided in the second area of the main RAM 64 after being provided in the area. It may be configured to be duplicated (copied) in the second ball entry detection information storage area, and the information of the duplicated bits is read out in the OR process of step S10805.

Further, the ball entry detection information storage area may be provided in the second area of the main RAM 64.

<Aspect 33>
In step S10814 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, when the arithmetic processing (task 1 or task 2) for calculating the game history information is not executed, the prize ball total value included in the task 3 is valid. Although the process of determining the sex is always executed, the process of determining the validity of the prize ball total value may be executed only once each time the game history information is newly calculated. Specifically, for example, after determining the validity of the prize ball total value in task 3, the determined flag indicating that the determination has been made is turned ON, and the determined flag is turned on when the task 3 is executed next time. If is ON, the process of determining the validity of the prize ball total value is not executed. Then, in the task 1 executed again, the determined flag may be turned off. According to such a configuration, one game history process is completed while determining the validity of the prize ball aggregate value that is the basis for calculating the game history information and ensuring the validity of the game history information. It is possible to further shorten the processing time required for the process.

<Aspect 34>
In step S10810 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, or 5 seconds have elapsed from the previous execution of the arithmetic processing. In this case, it is determined that it is the timing to execute the arithmetic processing, and the game history information is calculated. However, instead of this configuration, the first time immediately after the power is turned on without waiting for a predetermined time to elapse. It may be determined that it is the timing to execute the arithmetic processing, and then every 5 seconds after the previous execution of the arithmetic processing, it is determined that it is the timing to execute the arithmetic processing. In this configuration, until the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls reaches 60,000, the calculated game history information is displayed in blinking when displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, and the total number of prize balls reaches 60,000. After reaching the point, the calculated game history information may be turned on when displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not a sufficient amount of statistical data is accumulated as a prize ball aggregate value that is the basis for calculating the displayed game history information. Instead of the total number of prize balls, the blinking display may be switched to the lighting display based on the total value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls fired on the game board 30). ..

<Aspect 35>
In step S10807 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, the plurality of processing target candidates of the prize ball aggregation processing are configured to be fixed in advance as eight bits of the buffer area, but the buffer area Eight bits are divided into two groups of four each, one of the two groups is selected as a candidate for multiple processing targets of the prize ball aggregation process, and four bits belonging to the selected group are selected. Two bits may be set as the processing target of the prize ball aggregation processing. However, as in the above aspect 23, if a configuration in which a plurality of processing target candidates for the prize ball aggregation processing are fixed in advance as eight bits of the buffer area, one of the two groups is selected. It is not necessary to execute the processing to be performed, the processing can be simplified, and as a result, the processing speed can be improved. Further, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting one of the two groups.

<Aspect 36>
In the game history process (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, the task (various processes) to be executed in the game history process in the current timer interrupt process is based on the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started. It may be configured to determine the number and type. With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the remaining time until the next timer interrupt processing is started to execute the task.

<Aspect 37>
FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 37 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 37, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to execute the above-mentioned processing for calculating and displaying the game history information (game history processing). Further, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area) as in the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26), and the first area of the main RAM 64 relates to the progress of the game. It is used as an area for storing programs for executing processing and various flags (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.), and the second area of the main RAM 64 is for calculating and displaying game history information. It is used as an area for storing a program for executing the processing (processing for game history) and various numerical information (the above-mentioned total value of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as a bonus ratio, etc.). .. Then, similarly to the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26), the main CPU 62x writes information to the first area of the main RAM 64 when the process related to the progress of the game (process other than the process for the game history) is executed. When the game history process is executed, the information is written only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a non-volatile memory that is rewritable and can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off. A memory 64x is provided. In this embodiment, the NAND type flash memory is used as the flash memory 64x, but a NOR type flash memory may be used. In the game history processing, the main CPU 62x of this embodiment executes a process of writing various numerical information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 to the flash memory 64x at a predetermined timing. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x executes a process of writing various prize ball total values to the flash memory 64x every time the total number of prize balls in the prize ball total value reaches 500. That is, various numerical information (game history information such as prize ball total value, number of balls entered, bonus ratio, etc.) acquired based on the execution of the game is stored in the flash memory 64x.

As described above, according to the configuration of this embodiment, various numerical information (game history information such as prize ball total value, number of balls entered, bonus ratio, etc.) acquired based on the execution of the game is stored in the flash memory 64x. Since it is stored, it is possible to retain these various numerical information even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time. For example, even when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 for a long period of time in the distribution process, a normal game is executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on various numerical information stored in the flash memory 64x. It is possible to inspect whether or not it is.

<Aspect 38>
In the above aspect 37, a pressable flash memory clear button is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, and when the flash memory clear button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it is stored in the flash memory 64x. The existing information (a total value of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as a bonus ratio, etc.) may be deleted.

Specifically, for example, an IC chip for erasing processing that can execute erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and the erasing processing is performed while the flash memory clear button is pressed. The Hi level signal is input to the input terminal of the IC chip. Then, the IC chip for erasing processing is configured to execute erasing processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the Hi level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. .. According to such a configuration, the influence on the processing related to the execution of the game of the main CPU 62x and the operation of the main RAM 64 as compared with the configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by the processing of the main CPU 62x. It is possible to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x while suppressing the above.

Further, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space in which a trace of opening remains. Specifically, for example, the flash memory clear button is stored inside a board box to which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of opening is affixed, and it can be pressed unless the sealing sticker is peeled off and the board box is opened. The configuration may not be possible.

According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. A trace of opening will remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10. That is, there is a possibility that the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 has a trace of opening. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, illegally modified nails), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and the pachinko machine 10 will be further affected. The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the accessory ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as an “inspector”) sets the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Unauthorized modifications made can be found. For this reason, a person who has a request (hereinafter, also referred to as an "illegal person") to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by erasing the information. May exist.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. Then, a trace of opening remains on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, so even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the information is deleted for the purpose of concealing the illegality. There will be traces of possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as making illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game. Can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 may be distributed by transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the pachinko machine 10 (so-called used pachinko machine) for which the game has already been executed are the flash memory of the pachinko machine 10. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information stored in 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only a person who has a request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a legitimate reason (hereinafter, also referred to as a “legitimate person”) erases the trace of opening the board box. If a distribution system that can be used is constructed, it will be possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by constructing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can affix a new sealing sticker, the pachinko machine can be used while ensuring the soundness of the game. It is possible to promote smooth distribution of 10.

The configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the operation of the flash memory clear button is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased. Further, for example, the configuration is such that an IC chip for erasing processing is not provided, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the flash memory clear button is pressed, and the flash memory clear button continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the button is pressed, an erasing program for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be executed to erase the information.

In addition, the flash memory clear button is not limited to the configuration stored inside the board box to which the seal is affixed, but is stored inside the space where the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening / closing) remains. If it is a configuration that is used, another configuration may be used. For example, the flash memory clear button is housed inside a space covered by a lid member, and the flash memory clear button must be operated unless at least a part of the lid member is destroyed to open the space. It may be a configuration that cannot be used. According to such a configuration, in order to operate the flash memory clear button, the lid member must be destroyed to open the space. Therefore, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the flash memory is stored. The destroyed lid member will remain as a trace of the opening of the open space. Further, for example, the flash memory clear button has a joint portion (caulking portion) of a plurality of case bodies (for example, a box-shaped case body and a lid-shaped case body capable of sealing the open portion of the box-shaped case body). As a configuration to be housed inside a board box configured by being connected by, and as a configuration requiring destruction of a predetermined part of the joint portion (caulking portion) when separating a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box. May be good. According to such a configuration, in order to operate the flash memory clear button, it is necessary to break a predetermined part of the joint portion (caulking portion) to separate a plurality of case bodies and open the board box. When the flash memory clear button is pressed, a joint portion (caulking portion) in which a predetermined portion is destroyed remains as a trace that the base box is opened. Further, the flash memory clear button is configured to be housed inside the board box connected by the above-mentioned joint portion (caulking portion), and the adhesive layer remains on the adhesive target during peeling, so that the flash memory clear button is peeled off. A sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the fact may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. According to such a configuration, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the seal is peeled off or the seal is peeled off in addition to the trace of opening of the board box called the joint part (caulking part) where the predetermined part is destroyed. There will be traces of opening of the board box, such as the seal being cut at the boundary between the cases.

<Aspect 39>
In the above aspect 37, the above-mentioned inspection machine 320 (FIG. 10) for inspecting whether or not various game history information is within the normal range is connected to the inspection terminal 65 provided on the main MPU 62. , Information stored in the flash memory 64x when a predetermined signal (for example, an erasure command command) is received from the inspection machine 320 (prize ball total value, number of balls entered, game history information such as bonus ratio, etc.) ) May be deleted.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-described aspect 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing an erasing process for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided and connected to the inspection terminal 65. When the erase command command is transmitted from the inspection machine 320, the erase command command is input to the input terminal of the IC chip for erase processing. Then, the erasing IC chip executes the erasing process of erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of the erasing command command from the input terminal.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the erasing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of the erasing command command from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. , The person who has the inspection machine 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. That is, it is possible to limit the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, illegally modified nails), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and the pachinko machine 10 will be further affected. The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the accessory ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 is, for example, connected the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and inspects the information stored in the flash memory 64x. By confirming with 320, it is possible to detect an illegal modification made to the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, there may be a person (illegal person) who wants to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by erasing the information. ..

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, an inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. By limiting the persons who can have the inspection machine 320, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person, and by extension, the pachinko machine 10 is illegal. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as making various modifications, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be distributed from time to time due to transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the pachinko machine 10 (so-called used pachinko machine 10) for which the game has already been executed are those who want to distribute the flash of the pachinko machine 10. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only a person who has a request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the above-mentioned inspector have the inspection machine 320. If a distribution system that enables this is constructed, it will be possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game.

Further, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. It may be configured as such.

Specifically, for example, the above-mentioned erase processing IC chip indicates that the transmission of information stored in the flash memory 64x is started based on the reception of the erase command command from the input terminal. The command is sent to the inspection machine 320. Upon receiving the transmission start command, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the receivable mode in which information can be received, and transmits the receivable command indicating the receivable mode to the IC chip for erasing processing. The erase processing IC chip that has received the receivable command starts transmitting the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Then, when the transmission of the information is completed, the erasing processing IC chip transmits a transmission completion command to the inspection machine 320. Upon receiving the transmission completion command, the inspection machine 320 confirms that the received information has no error such as data loss, and if there is no error, transmits the reception completion command to the IC chip for erasing processing. The erasing IC chip executes an erasing process for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of the reception completion command.

According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the intention of the person who owns the inspection machine 320, the information is erased from the flash memory 64x. Since the information that has been stored remains in the inspection machine 320, the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320.

The configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations may be adopted. can. For example, in the case where the IC chip for erasing processing is not provided, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the erasing command command is received from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and the erasing command command is received. In addition, an erasing program for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be executed to erase the information. Further, when the main CPU 62x receives the erase command command from the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x transmits the information stored in the flash memory 64x to the inspection machine 320, and then executes an erasing program for erasing the information. Then, the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased.

In this embodiment, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by using the inspection machine 320 for inspecting whether or not various game history information is within the normal range. The configuration is not limited to the configuration using the machine 320, and the configuration may be such that the information is erased by using a dedicated terminal for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 40>
In the above aspect 37, the flash memory clear button stored in the space where the trace of opening remains is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and is predetermined from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. Information (such as prize ball total value, number of balls entered, game history information such as bonus ratio, etc.) stored in the flash memory 64x is erased when a signal (for example, an erase command command) is received. May be good.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-described aspect 38, an IC chip for erasing processing capable of executing erasing processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and the flash memory clear button is pressed. During the period of time, the Hi level signal is input to the input terminal of the IC chip for erasing processing. Then, the erase processing IC chip can execute the erase process of erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the Hi level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. Shift to execution standby mode. When the IC chip for erasing processing receives an erasing command command from the inspection machine 320 in this erasing processing execution standby mode, the erasing processing IC chip executes erasing processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the flash memory clear button is stored inside the board box in which the trace of opening remains, so that the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 can be erased. The board box of the pachinko machine 10 will be opened and the flash memory clear button will be operated, and a trace of opening will remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the erasing IC chip has an inspection machine 320 because it erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. Can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Therefore, there is a possibility that the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 has a trace of opening. It is possible to grasp whether or not the information is present, and it is possible to limit the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, illegally modified nails), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and the pachinko machine 10 will be further affected. The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the accessory ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 is, for example, connected the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and inspects the information stored in the flash memory 64x. By confirming with 320, it is possible to detect an illegal modification made to the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, there may be a person (illegal person) who wants to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by erasing the information. ..

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, an inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. Then, by limiting the persons who can have the inspection machine 320, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. Further, even if an unauthorized person has the inspection machine 320, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the flash memory is used. It is necessary to operate the clear button. Then, since a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information may be erased for fraudulent concealment. Traces such as will remain. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the unauthorized modification performed on the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of motivation such as attempting to illegally modify the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be distributed from time to time due to transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the pachinko machine 10 (so-called used pachinko machine 10) for which the game has already been executed are those who want to distribute the flash of the pachinko machine 10. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only a person who has a request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the above-mentioned inspector have the inspection machine 320. If it is possible to establish a distribution system in which only legitimate persons can erase the traces of opening the board box, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game. It will be possible.

The above configuration is used as a configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the fact that the flash memory clear button accepts a predetermined operation and a predetermined signal is received from the inspection machine 320. Not limited to this, various other configurations can be adopted. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the erase processing IC chip may be configured to shift to the above-mentioned erase processing execution standby mode. Further, for example, when an erasing command is received from the inspection machine 320, the erasing processing IC chip shifts to the above-mentioned erasing processing execution standby mode, and the flash memory clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, in the erasing processing execution standby mode). 10 seconds) When pressed continuously, the erasing process for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be executed. Further, for example, the configuration may be such that the IC chip for erasing processing is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the same function as the IC chip for erasing processing to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

Further, as in the above aspect 39, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasing. It may be configured to be transmitted to the inspection machine 320. According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the intention of the person who owns the inspection machine 320, the information is erased from the flash memory 64x. Since the information that has been stored remains in the inspection machine 320, the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 41>
In the above aspect 37, an operation panel for accepting an operation for inputting authentication information (for example, a password) and a display for displaying the input authentication information are provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, and the authentication information input by the operation panel is provided. Information stored in the flash memory 64x when the authentication information individually set for the pachinko machine 10 matches (game history information such as prize ball total value, input number information, bonus ratio, etc.) May be configured to be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-described aspect 38, an IC chip for erasing processing capable of executing erasing processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and the information is input via the operation panel. The authentication information is input to the input terminal of the IC chip for erasing processing. Then, the erasing IC chip determines whether or not the authentication information input from the operation panel matches the authentication information stored in the ROM of the erasing IC chip, and if the authentication information matches. When the determination is made, an erasing process for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed.

According to the configuration of this aspect, the IC chip for erasing processing is stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the authentication information received by the receiving means and the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 match. Since the information is erased, a person who has the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a person who knows the password set in the pachinko machine 10) is stored in the flash memory 64x. Information can be erased. That is, it is possible to limit the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, illegally modified nails), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and the pachinko machine 10 will be further affected. The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the accessory ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x, and thereby illegally modifies the pachinko machine 10. Can be found. Therefore, there may be a person (illegal person) who wants to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by erasing the information. ..

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10. By limiting the persons who can have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as improper modification of the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be distributed from time to time due to transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the pachinko machine 10 (so-called used pachinko machine 10) for which the game has already been executed are those who want to distribute the flash of the pachinko machine 10. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only a person who has a request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) is set in the pachinko machine 10. If a distribution system capable of having authentication information is constructed, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game.

The authentication information input for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is not limited to the personal identification number, and various authentication information can be adopted. For example, as authentication information, an authentication character (password, passphrase) which is a combination of a plurality of character strings, a bar code of a specific pattern, a password generated according to a predetermined rule (for example, a one-time password), a specific person. Biometric authentication information (password, iris, vein pattern, etc.) can be adopted.

<Aspect 42>
In the above aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 is executed. Of these, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is erased and stored in the second area. The information (information acquired based on the executed game such as the total value of the prize balls, the information on the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, etc.) may not be deleted.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined that the information is stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is deleted, and the information stored in the second area is not deleted. It shall be configured.

According to such a configuration, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. Information (information used to control the execution of a game) can be deleted. Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the game execution, or when the business of the game hall starts or ends, the information used for controlling the game execution is erased to control the game machine. There is a request that the initialization should be executed, but the information acquired based on the executed game should not be deleted. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is possible to perform control initialization.

Further, in addition to the RAM clear button described above, a second RAM clear button for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. If the operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is executed during this state, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased. ..

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the second RAM clear button is pressed, and the state in which the second RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that the time has been determined, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 among the information stored in the main RAM 64 is deleted.

According to such a configuration, the information (information acquired based on the executed game) stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, which cannot be erased by operating the RAM clear button, can be stored. It can be erased by operating the second clear button.

Further, the second RAM clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space in which a trace of opening remains. Specifically, for example, the second RAM clear button is stored inside a board box to which a seal with a trace of opening remains, and can be pressed unless the seal is peeled off and the board box is opened. The configuration may not be possible.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. Therefore, a trace of opening will remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 was opened and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 was erased based on whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 had a trace of opening. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, illegally modified nails), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and the pachinko machine 10 will be further affected. The information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (for example, the accessory ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. The person (inspector) who inspects whether or not the normal game is executed by the pachinko machine 10 confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal modification made to the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, there may be a person (illegal person) who wants to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by erasing the information. ..

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. .. Then, a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, so that even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the information is hidden. Therefore, there will be traces that it may have been erased. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as making illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game. Can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be distributed from time to time due to transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the pachinko machine 10 (so-called used pachinko machine) for which the game has already been executed are the main side of the pachinko machine 10. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the second area of the RAM 64 before distributing it. Therefore, only a person (a legitimate person) who has a request to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 for a legitimate reason can erase the trace of the opening of the board box. If a distribution system is established, it will be possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by constructing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can affix a new sealing sticker, the pachinko machine can be used while ensuring the soundness of the game. It is possible to promote smooth distribution of 10.

As the configuration of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening / closing) remains, various configurations described in the above aspect 38 can be adopted.

<Aspect 43>
In the above aspect 37, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM is within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may not be erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear button is pressed, it is monitored whether or not the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Then, when it is determined that the RAM clear button has not been pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. However, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x can erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. Instead, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

According to such a configuration, by executing a different operation on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, the information of the target to be erased can be selected without providing another operation unit (for example, a button) for selecting the information of the target to be erased, so that the structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. Can be planned.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or when the business of the game hall starts or ends, the information used for controlling the execution of the game (stored in the first area of the main RAM 64). When it is desired to erase the information) and initialize the control of the gaming machine, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed and the predetermined time (for example, 10) is executed. The RAM clear button is not pressed within seconds), while the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased and the game is played. When a new machine is to be distributed, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed remains as it is for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). ) You can continue. By executing different operations on the RAM clear button in this way, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

Since the above-mentioned game history processing cannot be executed while the information erasing processing stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the number of balls entering each entrance of the game ball and the number of balls entering each entrance are increased. There is a possibility that an error may occur in the prize ball total value, etc. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the execution of the game is not started until the erasing process is completed (for example, the configuration for suppressing the firing of the game ball), the occurrence of the error can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If this happens, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and further, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid, and the information is valid. If it is determined that the information is not valid, the information may be deleted, and if it is determined that the information is not valid, the information may be deleted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid. The case where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid is, for example, the case where the number of prize balls for the prize exceeds the total number of prize balls or the total number of prize balls for the continuous prize. This is the case when the number of prize balls is exceeded, the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls, or the total value of prize balls is inconsistent.

<Aspect 44>
In the above aspect 37, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM is within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined to be, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased. Further, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the RAM clear button is pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that there is no such state, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not deleted. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x also erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. ..

According to such a configuration, the information to be erased is selected from the information stored in the main RAM 64 by performing a different operation on the RAM clear button as in the above-described aspect 43. It becomes possible to do. Further, by executing the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main RAM 64 It is possible to erase both the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area.

Since the above-mentioned game history processing cannot be executed while the information erasing processing stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the number of balls entering each entrance of the game ball and the number of balls entering each entrance are increased. There is a possibility that an error may occur in the prize ball total value, etc. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the execution of the game is not started until the erasing process is completed (for example, the configuration for suppressing the firing of the game ball), the occurrence of the error can be suppressed.

<Aspect 45>
In the above aspect 37, when the operation of pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is executed while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON. The information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is deleted.

According to such a configuration, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 without separately providing an operation unit (for example, a button or the like) for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to erase the existing information. While the information erasing process stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be temporarily executed, so that the game ball can be entered into each entry port. There is a possibility that an error may occur in the number of balls entered and the total value of prize balls. Therefore, if the execution of the game is temporarily stopped during the period from the start to the end of the execution of the erasing process (for example, the configuration for temporarily suppressing the launch of the game ball), the occurrence of the error is suppressed. can do.

<Aspect 46>
In each of the above embodiments, the information is acquired based on the executed game such as the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (the prize ball total value, the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, etc.). Whenever the information) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of the game such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is erased. It may be configured. That is, when a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed, or a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed. When the signal is received from another device (for example, the inspection machine 320), the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not only erased but also stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. The information may be deleted without fail.

According to such a configuration, although the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased, it is used for controlling the execution of the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the information (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is maintained as it is without being erased. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the played game is information that serves as collateral for determining the fairness of the game played on the pachinko machine 10, and thus the information that serves as collateral. When is deleted, the information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the information regarding the high probability mode flag indicating the game state and the high frequency support mode flag) is deleted and the pachinko machine 10 is deleted. It is preferable to initialize the gaming state of. According to the configuration of this aspect, when erasing the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64), the information used for controlling the execution of the game (information (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64)). Since the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased even though the information that serves as collateral for judging the fairness of the game is erased. By not erasing (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is.

Further, for example, information used for controlling the execution of the game even though the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) has been erased. When the configuration is such that (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is maintained as it is without being erased, the information acquired based on the executed game (second area of the main RAM 64) is used. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode may be maintained as they are in the pachinko machine 10 even though the information stored in the pachinko machine 10 is deleted. In this case, when the game is executed on the pachinko machine 10, the game is started in the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode in a state where the information acquired based on the executed game is not sufficient as statistical data. , There is a high possibility that the game history information such as the bonus ratio will be calculated as a biased value. Therefore, as in this embodiment, based on the executed game such as the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (the prize ball total value, the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, etc.). When the acquired information) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of the game such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is always used. By adopting the configuration to be erased, it is possible to prevent the game history information such as the bonus ratio from being calculated as a biased value.

As an operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, various operation modes can be adopted. For example, while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Operation, operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the second RAM clear button separately provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, pressing both the RAM clear button and the second RAM clear button, the pachinko machine. An operation of turning on the power of the machine 10 or the like can be adopted.

Further, for example, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (used for controlling the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, etc.) Information to be deleted) is deleted, and information stored in the second area (information acquired based on the executed game such as the prize ball total value, the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, etc.) May be configured not to be erased.

According to such a configuration, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. Information (information used to control the execution of a game) can be deleted. Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the game execution, or when the business of the game hall starts or ends, the information used for controlling the game execution is erased to control the game machine. There is a request that the initialization should be executed, but the information acquired based on the executed game should not be deleted. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is possible to perform control initialization.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of this embodiment. The main CPU 62x executes this main process when the power is turned on.

In step S10901, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is pressed (step S10901: YES), the process proceeds to step S10903, and whether or not the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues. To judge.

In step S10903, when it is determined that the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed has not continued, that is, when it is determined that the state in which the RAM clear button has not been pressed has been determined (step S10903: NO), step S10904. The process proceeds to, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process of the first area is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10903 that the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues (step S10903: YES), the process proceeds to step S10905, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed is held for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). ) Determine if it is continuing.

If it is determined in step S10905 that the pressed state of the RAM clear button has not continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (step S10905: NO), the process returns to step S10903 and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues. Judge whether or not it is done. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (step S10905: YES), the process proceeds to step S10906. That is, if the pressed state of the RAM clear button does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10904 described above, and if the pressed state of the RAM clear button continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it will be described later. Step S10906 will be performed.

In step S10906, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process of the first area is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S10907, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process of the second area is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908 described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. It is determined whether or not it is. Specifically, for example, is the prize ball total value (number of prize balls, continuous prize balls, total number of prize balls), which is information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, valid? Judge whether or not. Here, when the prize ball total value is not valid, when the number of prize balls for the bonus exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, it is continuous. This is the case when the total number of prize balls is inconsistent, such as when the number of prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls. If it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid (step S10902: NO), the process proceeds to step S10906 and step S10907 described above, and the first of the main RAM 64 is the first. The information stored in the area and the information stored in the second area are deleted. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid (step S10902: YES), the process proceeds to step S10908 as it is.

In step S10908, interrupt enable is set in order to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After executing step S10908, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S10909 to S10912. Since the residual processing of steps S10909 to S10912 is the same processing as the residual processing of steps S10104 to S10107 in FIG. 12 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the processing flow described above, it is based on the executed game such as the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (the prize ball total value, the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, etc.). When executing the process of erasing (the process of step S10906), the information (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.) stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 must be executed. A process (process of step S10907) for erasing the information (information used for controlling the execution of the game) will be executed.

<Aspect 47>
In each of the above embodiments, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game such as the prize ball total value, the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, etc.) is erased. When this is done, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of the game such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) may be deleted. .. That is, when an operation for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed, or when a predetermined signal for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is transmitted to another device (for example, the inspection machine 320). ), Not only the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased, but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be erased without fail.

According to such a configuration, the information used for controlling the execution of the game (mainly) even though the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the flash memory 64x) has been erased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the information stored in the first area of the side RAM 64) is maintained as it is without being erased. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the played game is information that serves as collateral for determining the fairness of the game played on the pachinko machine 10, and thus the information that serves as collateral. When is deleted, the information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the information regarding the high probability mode flag indicating the game state and the high frequency support mode flag) is deleted and the pachinko machine 10 is deleted. It is preferable to initialize the gaming state of. According to this configuration, when erasing the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the flash memory 64x), the information used for controlling the execution of the game (the first of the main RAM 64). Since the information stored in the area is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game (the first RAM 64 of the main side RAM 64) is erased even though the information that serves as a guarantee for judging the fairness of the game is erased. By not erasing the information stored in one area), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is.

Further, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is always (high probability mode). In addition to information used to control the execution of games such as flags and high-frequency support mode flags), information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is also available. It may be configured to be erased.

<Aspect 48>
In some of the above aspects, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is for executing processing related to the progress of the game. It is used as an area for storing programs and various flags (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.), and the second area of the main RAM 64 is a process for calculating and displaying game history information (for game history). It is configured to be used as an area for storing a program for executing (processing) and various numerical information (the above-mentioned prize ball total value, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as a bonus ratio, etc.). Instead of the configuration, a RAM (RAM used for game progress processing) responsible for the function of the first area of the main RAM 64 and a RAM (RAM used for game history processing) responsible for the function of the second area of the main RAM 64. And may be provided separately.

<Aspect 49>
In each of the above embodiments, in the embodiment including the flash memory 64x, the flash memory 64x may be stored inside a space in which a trace of opening remains (for example, a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed). .. According to such a configuration, in order to attempt to illegally modify the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the base box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, and the substrate of the pachinko machine 10 is opened. Traces of opening will remain in the box. That is, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 was opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x was illegally modified based on whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 had a trace of opening. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the illegal modification made to the information stored in the flash memory 64x, and eventually, the motive for making the illegal modification to the information stored in the flash memory 64x occurs. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

As the configuration of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening / closing) remains, various configurations described in the above aspect 38 can be adopted.

<Aspect 50>
FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a part of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 50. The main MPU 62 of this embodiment is provided with a ball entry detection IC 62c between the input / output port 62a and the main CPU 62x.

The ball entry detection IC 62c is electrically connected to the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h via the input / output ports 62a, and each entry port is based on the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h. The presence or absence of the game ball entering the ball is determined, and the information indicating the result of the determination (the entry information which is the information regarding the presence or absence of the game ball entering each entry port) is provided to the main CPU 62x and the inspection terminal. Output to the inspection machine 320 connected to 65. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

The ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, which detect the entry of a game ball into each entry port, are electrically connected to the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7, which are eight input bits provided in the input port 62b. The eight input bits D0 to D7 are electrically connected to the eight input bits R0 to R7 provided in the ball entry detection IC 62c, respectively. In this embodiment, a Lo level signal is constantly input to each of the eight input bits R0 to R7 provided in the ball entry detection IC 62c, and the ball of the game ball enters the ball entry port. When detected by the detection sensor, the signal input to the input bit corresponding to the ball entry detection sensor among the eight input bits R0 to R7 is configured to rise from the Lo level to the Hi level.

The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry port based on the signals output from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h. In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c monitors eight input bits R0 to R7 corresponding to the eight ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, respectively, and Lo in the signal input to each input bit. When the rising edge from the level to the Hi level is detected, it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entry port corresponding to the input bit. However, when the rising edge is detected but the Hi level state does not continue for a predetermined period, or when the rising edge is detected but the rising edge is a rising edge generated at a predetermined interval or less from the nearest falling edge. Since there is a high possibility that the detected rising edge is noise, it is determined that the game ball has not entered the ball entry slot corresponding to the input bit. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as a method for determining whether or not the game ball has entered each entry slot, and for example, the same as the above-mentioned entry determination process (FIGS. 16 and 17). The method of may be adopted.

The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball at each entry port at predetermined intervals, and the ball entry information, which is information indicating the result of the determination, is transmitted to the main side by serial transmission communication. It outputs to the CPU 62x and also outputs to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. In this embodiment, since eight ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are provided, the ball entry detection IC 62c has entry information (8) indicating whether or not a game ball has entered at each of the eight entry openings. Bit entry information) is output every predetermined period (every 4 ms). Specifically, the ball entry detection IC 62c constantly outputs a Lo level signal, and outputs a 50 μs Hi level signal as a start bit every predetermined period (every 4 ms) for determining the presence or absence of a ball entry. After that, a 50 μs Hi level signal (with a ball) or a Lo level signal (without a ball) corresponding to the presence or absence of a game ball at each of the eight entrances is output for 8 bits, and finally. A 50 μs Lo level signal is output as a stop bit.

The main CPU 62x, which has received the ball entry information from the ball entry detection IC 62c, performs processing related to the progress of the game such as the above-mentioned winning lottery and the payout of the prize ball, based on the ball entry information of each received ball entry port. Execute. In addition, the main CPU 62x executes the above-mentioned game history processing (FIG. 29), and also executes processing related to calculation and display of game history information such as the ball ejection rate (total), the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio. do. Then, the main CPU 62x stores the numerical information used in the calculation process of the game history information and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x.

Next, an inspection using an inspection machine 320 capable of receiving ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c will be described.

In this embodiment, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 plays a game ball while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the player or the inspector operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10. By using the inspection machine 320 while firing on the board 30 and executing the game as usual, it is inspected whether or not a legitimate game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10 during the period during this inspection. do. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

The inspection machine 320 has a ball entry information receiving mode, which is a mode in which the entry information of a game ball at each entry port is received from the entry detection IC 62c, and the type and prize of the entry opening provided in the pachinko machine 10. Game history information that calculates various game history information described above based on the received ball entry information and the set entry port information, and the entrance information setting mode that sets the entrance information that is information about the number of balls. It is possible to execute the calculation mode.

When the inspector inspects whether or not a legitimate game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the inspector connects the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and the inspector 320 The operation unit 327 of the above-mentioned operation unit 327 is operated to shift the inspection machine 320 to the above-mentioned entry information receiving mode. The player or the inspector operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 to be inspected to launch the game ball onto the game board 30, and continues the execution of the game as usual.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the ball entry information receiving mode, the inspection machine 320 outputs a Hi level signal to the output permission signal line 329b in the connection cable 329. The output permission signal line 329b is electrically connected to the output permission determination bit 62d of the ball entry detection IC 62c via the inspection terminal 65. The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d, and determines that a Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Only during the period of time, the above-mentioned input ball information is output to the information transmission signal line 329a in the connection cable 329 via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission method communication.

In the ball entry information receiving mode, the inspection machine 320 receives ball entry information corresponding to eight ball entry ports at predetermined periods, and measures (counts) the number of game balls entering each ball entry port. And remember. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display information indicating the number of balls entering the game ball into each of the measured (counted) entrances. That is, each time a player or an inspector executes a game and a game ball enters each entry slot, the information indicating the number of entry balls corresponding to each entry slot displayed on the display unit 328 is 1. Is added. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays the number of game balls that have entered each entry port after shifting to the entry information receiving mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (for example, about 10 hours) has elapsed, when the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the ball entry information receiving mode, the inspection machine 320 has the ball entry information. Move to the setting mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entry port information setting mode, the display unit 328 displays an input screen for inputting the type of entry opening and the number of prize balls to the inspector for each entry opening. In this embodiment, since the inspection machine 320 receives 8-bit ball entry information at predetermined period in the ball entry information receiving mode, the display unit 328 displays the ball entry information for each of the eight ball entry ports. An input screen for inputting the type of entry slot and the number of prize balls is displayed. The type of the ball entry port is the type of the ball entry port provided with the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h such as the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the large winning opening 36a, and the discharge passage. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the entrance.

By operating the operation unit 327, the inspector inputs the ball entry port information (type information of the ball entry port and prize ball number information) into the inspection machine 320 for each ball entry port. Specifically, the inspector has information (type information) such as which bit in the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c corresponds to which type of ball entry port, and which type of ball entry information. Information such as how many prize balls should be set at the entrance (prize ball number information) is grasped by the specifications and instructions of the pachinko machine 10, and the grasped information is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. input. When the inspector completes the input of the entrance information, the inspector 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode, the number of game balls entered for each entry port measured (counted) in the entry information reception mode and the type set in the entry opening information setting mode. Various game history information described above is calculated based on the information and the prize ball number information. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball ejection rate (total), accessory ratio, and continuous accessory ratio. When the calculation of various game history information is completed, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated various game history information.

By confirming various game history information displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320, the inspector can confirm whether or not a legitimate game has been executed during the inspection period.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs the ball entry information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x, and thus the inspection machine. The 320 can receive ball entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which ball entry information is output to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 via the main CPU 62x, and the main side is concerned. If a defect has occurred in the CPU 62x or an unauthorized modification has been made, the entry information output to the inspection machine 320 may be affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification. In addition, the reliability of the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x may be low due to the influence of a defect or unauthorized modification of the main CPU 62x.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs the ball entry information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main side CPU 62x, the main side CPU 62x Even if a defect has occurred or an unauthorized modification has been made, the ball entry information output to the inspection machine 320 is not affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification. As a result, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can perform processing based on the ball entry information that is not affected by the defect or unauthorized modification. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 can calculate the game history information based on the ball entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the pachinko machine 10 may have a problem or illegally modified the main CPU 62x, and the game history calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x. Even when the reliability of the information is low, it is possible to confirm the game history information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x by the inspection machine 320. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

Further, according to this aspect, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information corresponding to each of the plurality of entry ports to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 by a serial transmission method. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case of adopting a configuration in which the entry information is output by the parallel transmission method, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 for passing the entry information to the inspection machine 320 can be simplified, and the configuration can be simplified. The configuration of the inspection machine 320 that receives the ball entry information can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which the ball entry information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry ports is output by the parallel transmission method, the inspection terminal 65 is set to the number of the plurality of ball entry ports. It is necessary to provide a corresponding output unit (for example, a bit for output). Similarly, the inspection machine 320 needs to be provided with an input unit (for example, a bit for input) corresponding to the number of the plurality of entry ports. Further, since the number of entrances of the pachinko machine 10 differs depending on the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the inspection machine 320 having a different number of input units for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. Will need to be prepared.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the ball entry detection IC 62c serially transmits ball entry information corresponding to each of the plurality of entry ports to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. The inspection terminal 65 is provided with at least one output unit capable of outputting the ball entry information by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry ports included in the pachinko machine 10. And it is sufficient. Therefore, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 can be simplified. Similarly, if the inspection machine 320 is configured to include at least one input unit capable of inputting the ball entry information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry ports included in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the configuration of the inspection machine 320 can be simplified. Further, even when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the pachinko machines 10 having different numbers of entry ports, the inspection machine 320 inputs the entry information corresponding to each of the plurality of entry ports by the serial transmission method. can do. That is, the inspection machine 320 can be used for other pachinko machines 10 having different numbers of entrances. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the inspection machine 320.

Further, according to this aspect, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs the ball entry information to the inspection machine 320 only when the Hi level signal is received from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. Since it is output, it is possible to prevent the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being output to the outside except when the Hi level signal is being received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being analyzed and misused by a malicious person.

<Aspect 51>
In the above aspect 50, in the ball entry information setting mode of the inspection machine 320, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 to manually input the ball entry port information to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 may receive the ball entry information from the pachinko machine 10 and set it.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entry port information setting mode, a signal requesting transmission of entry port information (injection of entry port information) is performed via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. The request command) is transmitted to the ball entry detection IC 62c. Upon receiving the signal (ball entry port information transmission request command), the ball entry detection IC 62c transmits the ball entry port information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. The inspection machine 320 sets the ball entry port information received from the ball entry detection IC 62c for each ball entry port, and ends the ball entry port information setting mode.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs the ball entry port information (prize ball number information and type information) to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. , It is possible to save the trouble of manually inputting the entry port information (prize ball number information and type information) to the inspection machine 320, and to make an incorrect entry opening information (prize ball number information and prize ball number information) to the inspection machine 320. It is possible to prevent input of type information). As a result, the inspection machine 320 can calculate the game history information based on the entry information and the accurate entry information (prize ball number information and type information).

In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c is configured to transmit the ball entry port information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 based on the reception of a predetermined signal (ball entry port information transmission request command). However, instead of this configuration, the ball entry detection IC 62c is triggered by the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 being connected to the inspection terminal 65 (that is, the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 is for inspection). When it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the terminal 65), the ball entry port information of the pachinko machine 10 may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320. According to this configuration, the inspection machine 320 can promptly execute the process requiring the entry port information after the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65.

Further, in this embodiment, the ball entry port information is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 by the ball entry detection IC 62c, but instead of this configuration, the main CPU 62x is stored in the main ROM 63. The information may be read out and transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 52>
In the above aspect 50, the ball entry detection IC 62c serializes the ball entry information via the inspection terminal 65 only during the period in which it is determined that the Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Although the configuration is set to output by communication of the transmission method, another configuration may be adopted instead of this configuration. For example, the ball entry detection IC 62c serially transmits ball entry information via the inspection terminal 65 only during the period in which it is determined that a signal having a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. It may be configured to output by communication of. Further, for example, when it is determined that a signal having a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs the ball entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission method communication. It may be configured to be used. Further, for example, when a predetermined switch is provided on the inspection terminal 65 and it is determined that the cable terminal having a predetermined shape is connected to the inspection terminal 65 and the predetermined switch is pressed. The ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information via serial transmission type communication via the inspection terminal 65.

<Aspect 53>
In the 50th to 52nd aspects, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to shift to the entry information receiving mode after the setting of the entry information is completed in the entry information setting mode. According to such a configuration, since the type of each entry port is set at the time of transition to the entry information reception mode, each entry port is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 during the entry information reception mode. It is possible to display the type and the number of balls entered.

As a result, the inspector can grasp which type of entry slot the game ball has entered even during the entry information receiving mode. Further, the inspector has one of the information displayed on the display unit 328 (type of each entry slot and the number of entry balls) and the number of game balls actually entered into each entry slot visually confirmed. By confirming whether or not the ball is inserted, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c is genuine.

<Aspect 54>
In aspects 50 to 53, the inspection machine 320 takes the opportunity of the connection cable 329 being connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to shift to the game history information receiving mode, which is a mode for receiving the above-mentioned, and then shift to the above-mentioned entry port information setting mode, entry information receiving mode, and game history information calculation mode.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information reception mode. When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 transmits a signal (game history information transmission request command) requesting transmission of game history information to the main CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. .. Upon receiving the signal (game history information transmission request command), the main CPU 62x inspects the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. Send to. When the inspection machine 320 stores the game history information received from the main CPU 62x in the RAM 326, the inspection machine 320 terminates the game history information reception mode and shifts to the entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entry port information setting mode, the inspection machine 320 sends a signal (entrance information transmission request command) requesting transmission of entry port information via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65 to the main CPU 62x. Send to. Upon receiving the signal (ball entry port information transmission request command), the main CPU 62x transmits the ball entry port information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. When the inspection machine 320 sets the ball entry port information received from the main CPU 62x for each ball entry port, the inspection machine 320 ends the ball entry port information setting mode and shifts to the ball entry information receiving mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the ball entry information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 receives ball entry information corresponding to eight ball entry ports at predetermined intervals, and measures (counts) the number of game balls entering each ball entry port. ) And remember. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display information indicating the number of balls entering the game ball into each of the measured (counted) entrances. That is, each time a player or an inspector executes a game and a game ball enters each entry slot, the information indicating the number of entry balls corresponding to each entry slot displayed on the display unit 328 is 1. Is added. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays the number of game balls that have entered each entry port after shifting to the entry information receiving mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (for example, about 10 hours) has elapsed, when the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the ball entry information receiving mode, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information. Move to mode.

When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode, the number of game balls entered for each entry port measured (counted) in the entry information reception mode and the type set in the entry opening information setting mode. Various game history information described above is calculated based on the information and the prize ball number information. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball ejection rate (total), accessory ratio, and continuous accessory ratio. When the calculation of various game history information is completed, the inspection machine 320 stores various game history information calculated in the game history information calculation mode and various game history information (stored in the flash memory 64x) received in the game history information receiving mode. The game history information) that has been played is displayed on the display unit 328. That is, the game history for the inspection period in which the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 and the ball entry information is received in the ball entry information receiving mode on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320. The information and the game history information for the past predetermined period calculated by the main CPU 62x of the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the flash memory 64x are displayed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 receives the game history information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game history information) stored in the flash memory 64x. Can be displayed. In addition, the inspection machine 320 can execute processing based on the ball entry information received during the inspection period. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the ball entry information received during a predetermined inspection period connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and the game history information (hereinafter referred to as “game history information”). , Also called the second game history information) can be displayed. Therefore, for example, the inspector who inspects the pachinko machine 10 is based on the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x included in the pachinko machine 10 and the ball entry information received by the inspection machine 320 during the predetermined inspection period. It is possible to compare with the second game history information.

Here, if a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or an illegal modification (for example, modification of a nail, etc.) is performed, the characteristics of the game in the pachinko machine 10 are changed. The first game history information (game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x based on the ball entry information in the past predetermined period) stored in the flash memory 64x provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the inspection machine 320 perform a predetermined inspection. There may be a difference from the second game history information calculated based on the ball entry information in the period. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the pachinko machine 10 inspects whether or not a defect or an illegal modification (for example, modification of a nail) has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by paying attention to the difference between the two game history information. can do.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive and set the entry slot information in the above-mentioned entry entry information setting mode, and then shift to the game history information reception mode to receive the game history information. Further, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information reception mode and receives the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x after calculating the game history information in the inspection period in the above-mentioned game history information calculation mode. It may be configured.

<Aspect 55>
In the above aspects 50 to 54, the number of ball entrances included in the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to eight, and may be nine or more, or may be seven or less. Then, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information corresponding to the number of ball entry openings. For example, when the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10 is 7 or less, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information using the first half of the 8 bits output by the serial transmission method. It may be configured to be used. Further, for example, when the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10 is 9 or more, the ball entry detection IC 62c can input 9 or more balls by executing 8-bit output by the serial transmission method a plurality of times. It may be configured to output the ball entry information corresponding to the ball mouth. Further, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to be capable of outputting ball entry information such as 16 bits or 32 bits at a time by a serial transmission method.

<Aspect 56>
In the above aspect 23, the main CPU 62x executes the game history process as one process included in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23: step S10616), but instead of this configuration, the CPU 62x performs the game history process. It may not be executed in the timer interrupt process, but may be executed in the remaining time of the main process described above. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the main CPU 62x in the 56th aspect. In step S11001, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After executing step S11001, the process proceeds to step S11002, and interrupt enable is set in order to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13).

After executing step S11002, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S11003 to S11007. That is, although the main CPU 62x is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process as described above, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the process (residual process) of steps S11003 to S11007 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time (residual time). ..

In step S11003, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S11004 to execute the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI, and the process proceeds to step S11005 to execute the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. Then, the process proceeds to step S11006.

In step S11006, the above-mentioned game history process (FIG. 29) is executed. As described above, the game history processing includes a plurality of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 of FIG. 29) for which the calculation of the game history information is completed by sequentially executing the processes. Then, the main CPU 62x executes a part of the plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history processing included in the residual processing. That is, the main CPU 62x completes the calculation of the game history information set as the calculation target by executing the game history process a plurality of times. After executing step S11006, the process proceeds to step S11007, and interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S11007, the process returns to step S11003, and the processes of steps S11003 to S11007 are repeated.

As described above, according to the present aspect, the residual time in the main process (the period from the end of the execution of one timer interrupt process to the start of the execution of the next timer interrupt process) includes the game history process. Since the processing is repeatedly executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the residual processing including the game history processing from being started even though the execution of one timer interrupt processing is not completed. That is, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the residual processing including the game history processing during the period when the timer interrupt processing is not executed while giving priority to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

Further, if a configuration is adopted in which the game history process is included in the timer interrupt process and executed without adopting the configuration of this embodiment, from the start to the end of one execution of the timer interrupt process. The time required becomes long, for example, a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of execution of one timer interrupt process, and the timing of starting the execution of the next timer interrupt process has come. The execution of one timer interrupt process has not been completed yet, and there is a possibility that the execution of the next timer interrupt process cannot be started until the execution of the one timer interrupt process is completed. In this case, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in the progress of the game because the start of the execution of the next timer interrupt process is delayed.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the game history processing is included in the residual processing and executed, the timer interrupt processing is performed once as compared with the configuration in which the game history processing is included in the timer interrupt processing and executed. It is possible to shorten the time required from the start to the end of the execution of. As a result, for example, a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of execution of one timer interrupt process, and even though the timing of starting the execution of the next timer interrupt process has come, one timer interrupt still remains. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the execution of the process is not completed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation where the execution of the next timer interrupt process cannot be started until the execution of the one timer interrupt process is completed. can do. As described above, according to this aspect, while suppressing the occurrence of a defect in the progress of the game due to the delay in the start of the execution of the next timer interrupt process, the game history is used during the period when the timer interrupt process is not executed. By repeatedly executing the residual processing including the processing, it becomes possible to efficiently and promptly calculate the game history information.

Further, according to this aspect, the game history processing includes a plurality of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in FIG. 29) for which the calculation of the game history information is completed by sequentially executing the games, and the main side thereof. The CPU 62x executes a part of a plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process. Therefore, for example, the CPU 62x is configured to execute all of the plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process. In comparison with the above, the time required from the start to the end of one execution of the game history process can be shortened. Specifically, for example, even if the condition for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process is satisfied during the execution of the game history process, the running game history process ends in a short time, so that the condition is satisfied. It is possible to shorten the time until the execution of the timer interrupt process is started. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the residual processing while suppressing the occurrence of a problem due to the delay in starting the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

Further, according to this aspect, the length of the remaining time changes according to the time length required from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, for example, when the length of one timer interrupt process becomes long, the remaining time from the end of the one timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process becomes short, while one timer interrupt process. When the processing length is shortened, the remaining time from the end of the one timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process becomes long. When the remaining time is short, the number of times the game history process is executed can be reduced, while when the remaining time is long, the number of times the game history process is executed can be increased. That is, the number of times the game history processing is executed can be changed according to the length of the remaining time.

<Aspect 57>
In the first embodiment and each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 may have a plurality of settings having different probabilities of winning a big hit in a winning lottery. Specifically, for example, even in the same low probability mode, there may be a configuration having six stages of lottery settings (“lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”) having different probabilities of winning a big hit in the winning lottery. .. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment includes six types of pass / fail tables for low probability modes corresponding to each of the six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". .. Then, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery with reference to the winning / failing table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the main control device 60 refers to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 1. Execute a winning lottery.

In this embodiment, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 1, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the winning values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. There is. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 2, six values of 0 to 5 are set as the values of winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 3, seven values of 0 to 6 are set as the values of winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 4, eight values of 0 to 7 are set as the values of winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 5, nine values of 0 to 8 are set as the values of winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 6, 10 values of 0 to 9 are set as the values of winning the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199.

That is, in this embodiment, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the winning probability of the winning lottery in the low probability mode.

In this embodiment, regardless of which of the six stages of lottery settings is set, in the high probability mode, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the same winning / failing table. That is, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery is the same regardless of the lottery setting. However, as another aspect, even in the high probability mode, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery.

In this aspect, the change of the lottery setting in six stages is configured to be feasible when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing settings and a button for changing settings. When the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the key for changing the setting is inserted into the keyhole with the power of the pachinko machine 10 turned off. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (for example, in a state of being turned clockwise), the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (hereinafter, also referred to as setting information) is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z described above. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. Then, every time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6". "→" 1 "→" 2 "...".

When the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position while the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is the value desired by the administrator, the game history information display unit It is changed to the lottery setting corresponding to the setting information displayed on 45z. Specifically, for example, when the administrator presses the setting change button and "6" is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, the setting change key is turned from the setting change side to the original position. Then, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "lottery setting 6".

As described above, according to this aspect, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery can be changed by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10. As a result, even with the same pachinko machine 10, the probability that the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory will operate as a result of the winning lottery is changed, so that it is calculated as game history information as described above. The values of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio will converge to the values corresponding to the changed new lottery settings. That is, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10, the game history information such as the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio of the pachinko machine 10 changes. In other words, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by a simple method such as changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10.

In each aspect described below, "game history basic information" includes information on the number of balls entered, information on the number of balls entered, information on the number of balls entered, and the total value of prize balls, which are the information that is the basis for calculating the above-mentioned game history information. Also called.

<Aspect 58>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed), when the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 is changed, various memories (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x, etc.) are used before the lottery setting is changed. The game history basic information stored in the game history basic information may be deleted, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the game history basic information stored in various memories after the lottery setting is changed.

The reason for such a configuration will be described. When the lottery setting (setting of the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery) in the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the probability that the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory will be operated is changed, so that the game history information The values of the above-mentioned bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio calculated as above will converge to the values corresponding to the changed new lottery settings. That is, before and after the change of the lottery setting, the value to be converged of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio changes.

Even after the lottery setting is changed, the game history basic information acquired after the lottery setting is changed is stored without erasing the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed. When the game history information is calculated, the influence of the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is included, and the original pachinko machine 10 after the change of the lottery setting is used. It may take some time for the characteristics of the above to be reflected in the game history information.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lottery setting is changed, the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is deleted, and the game history basic information acquired and stored after the change of the lottery setting is deleted. Based on the above, the game history information is calculated and displayed.

According to this aspect, the game history information such as the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio quickly converges to the value corresponding to the changed lottery setting, and the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can use the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to check the game history information corresponding to the lottery setting currently set in the game at an early stage.

<Aspect 59>
In the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed), even after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information stored in various memories before the change of the lottery setting is stored. Without erasing, the game history basic information acquired after the lottery setting is changed is added to various memories and stored, and the game history basic information stored in various memories before and after the lottery setting change is used. It may be configured to calculate and display the game history information based on the above.

According to this aspect, it is possible to calculate and display the game history information including the influence of the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can find the total game history information including the influence of the change of the lottery setting within an appropriate range as a result of the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 being operated in the game hall. You can check if it fits in.

<Aspect 60>
In the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed), when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is deleted. The game history basic information acquired after the change of the lottery setting this time may be stored, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the stored game history basic information.

In such a configuration, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated up to a predetermined amount. May be configured to record information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter, also referred to as short-term change information) and display the short-term change information.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine again before the total number of prize balls in the total prize ball total value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1000. When the lottery setting of 10 is changed, the short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. .. Further, for example, the game history information display unit 45z may be provided with an LED lamp for displaying short-term change information, and when the short-term change information is recorded, the LED lamp may be made to emit light.

According to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 confirms whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the pachinko machine 10 in a short period of time by confirming whether or not the short-term change information is displayed. can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting based on an illegal intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the inspector, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 does not play much in the gaming machine after the winning probability is changed. Nevertheless, there is a possibility that the lottery setting is changed again and the basic game history information and the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 are deleted. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed again in a short period of time even though the game is not so much executed in the pachinko machine 10 after the change of the lottery setting, the above-mentioned The short-term change information that has been made will be recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector recognizes that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time due to an illegal intention such as erasing the game history basic information and the game history information. It becomes possible to do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting based on an illegal intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

Information indicating that the lottery setting was changed in a short period of time when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed again before the predetermined time elapsed after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed. (Short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10 between the change and the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the predetermined time is between the change and the change of the lottery setting. If it has passed, the short-term change information will not be displayed. Therefore, although the change and change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is relatively long, the game is merely not played in the pachinko machine 10 between the change and the change. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding by the inspector that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time due to an illegal intention.

<Aspect 61>
In the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed), the basic information on the game history and the game history information in the most recent plurality of periods with the change in the past lottery setting as a boundary can be stored and displayed. good. Then, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recent plurality of periods already stored are deleted, and the lottery setting of this time is set. It may be configured to store the game history basic information acquired after the change.

In such a configuration, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated up to a predetermined amount. May be configured to record information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter, also referred to as short-term change information) and display the short-term change information.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine again before the total number of prize balls in the total prize ball total value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1000. When the lottery setting of 10 is changed, the short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. .. Further, for example, the game history information display unit 45z may be provided with an LED lamp for displaying short-term change information, and when the short-term change information is recorded, the LED lamp may be made to emit light.

According to the present embodiment described above, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information for each of a plurality of recent periods with the change of the past lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 as a boundary. .. That is, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range in the process in which the lottery setting has been changed in the past in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, according to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 confirms whether or not the short-term change information is displayed, and thus whether or not the lottery setting is changed in the pachinko machine 10 in a short period of time. Can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting based on an illegal intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the inspector, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly changes the lottery settings in a short period of time, so that a plurality of the latest pachinko machines 10 are inspected. There is a possibility that the basic game history information and the game history information during the period will be deleted. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed repeatedly in a short period of time, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time due to an improper intention. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting based on an illegal intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

Information indicating that the lottery setting was changed in a short period of time when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed again before the predetermined time elapsed after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed. (Short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10 between the change and the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the predetermined time is between the change and the change of the lottery setting. If it has passed, the short-term change information will not be displayed. Therefore, although the change and change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is relatively long, the game is merely not played in the pachinko machine 10 between the change and the change. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding by the inspector that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time due to an illegal intention.

<Aspect 62>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed), after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information which is the basis for calculating the game history information is up to a sufficient amount as statistical data. Until it is accumulated, the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed may be stored (stored) without being erased.

Furthermore, until the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is accumulated to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data, the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed. The game history information calculated based on the information is displayed in blinking on the game history information display unit 45z, and the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is accumulated up to a sufficient amount as statistical data. After that, the game history information is calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information is lit and displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. May be good.

Specifically, for example, until the total number of prize balls in the total prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed reaches 60,000, before the lottery setting is changed. It is assumed that the game history basic information stored in is stored without being erased. Then, until the total number of prize balls in the total prize ball total value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed reaches 60,000, it was stored before the lottery setting was changed. The game history information calculated based on the game history basic information is blinked and displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. After the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls as the basic information of the game history acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed reaches 60,000, the game stored before the lottery setting is changed. The history basic information is deleted, the game history information is calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information is lit and displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. It is configured to be made to.

According to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting from being intentionally deleted by changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the basic game history information acquired and stored before the change of the lottery setting is deleted immediately after the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted, the pachinko machine 10 will be deleted. Before being inspected by the inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting and deletes the game history basic information and the game history information stored before the change of the lottery setting. There is a possibility that it will end up. On the other hand, according to this aspect, as for the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting, the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is sufficient as statistical data. Since it is not erased until it is accumulated up to a predetermined amount, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by the administrator of the pachinko machine due to an illegal intention.

Further, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is acquired after the lottery setting is changed by confirming whether the game history information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is a blinking display or a lighting display. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game history basic information stored in the above is accumulated up to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data.

In addition to the total number of prize balls, various criteria may be adopted as conditions for erasing the basic game history information stored before the lottery setting is changed and switching from the blinking display to the lighting display. can. For example, the total value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls fired on the game board 30) may be adopted as a reference.

<Aspect 63>
In the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed), the basic information on the game history and the game history information in the most recent plurality of periods with the change in the past lottery setting as a boundary can be stored and displayed. good. Then, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated up to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data. Until, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recent plurality of periods already stored are not deleted, and are acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. After the game history basic information is accumulated to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recent multiple periods already stored may be deleted. good.

Specifically, for example, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the total value in the prize ball total value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000, the game history basic information and game history information in the oldest of the most recent multiple periods already stored are not deleted, and the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Game history acquired and stored after the game history of the oldest of the most recent multiple periods already stored after the total number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls as basic information reaches 60,000. The basic information and the game history information may be deleted.

According to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information for each of the latest plurality of periods with the change of the past lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 as a boundary. That is, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range in the process in which the lottery setting has been changed in the past in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, according to this aspect, the game history basic information and the game history information in the most recent plurality of periods with the change of the past lottery setting as a boundary are intentionally changed by repeatedly changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to prevent it from being erased.

For example, if the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period of the most recent plurality of periods with the change of the past lottery setting as a boundary are immediately after the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the configuration to be erased is adopted, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the inspector, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly changes the lottery settings in the latest plurality of periods of the pachinko machine 10. There is a possibility that the basic game history information and the game history information will be deleted.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recent plurality of periods with the change of the past lottery setting as the boundary are obtained after the lottery setting is changed. Since the acquired and stored game history basic information is not deleted until a sufficient amount of statistical data is accumulated, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 due to an unauthorized intention. ..

<Aspect 64>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed), the acquired basic game history information is stored separately for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of acquisition, and the game history information is stored for each lottery setting. It may be configured to be calculated and displayed.

Specifically, for example, when the game history basic information is stored in various memories, information that can specify the lottery setting at the timing when the game history basic information is acquired is added and stored. Then, when calculating and displaying the game history information, the game history basic information may be extracted for each lottery setting, and the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated and displayed.

In addition, as another specific configuration, a storage area corresponding to each lottery setting is provided in various memories, and when the acquired basic game history information is stored, the storage area corresponding to the currently set lottery setting is used. It may be a configuration to be memorized. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1, the acquired basic game history information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lottery setting 1, and the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 2. Stores the acquired basic game history information in the storage area corresponding to the lottery setting 2. Then, when calculating and displaying the game history information, the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated and displayed based on the game history basic information stored in each storage area.

According to such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can use, for example, the game history information calculated based on the game history basic information acquired in the state where the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1. , Each game history calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, such as game history information calculated based on the game history basic information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set in the lottery setting 2. You can check the information. Then, the inspector confirms whether or not each game history information calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is within an appropriate range, so that the game history information is appropriate in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a lottery setting that does not fit within the above range.

<Aspect 65>
In the above aspect 57, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, but separately from the game history information display unit 45z, the lottery setting display unit that displays the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It may be configured to be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 66>
In each of the above embodiments, the calculated numerical value of the game history information itself is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, but the numerical value of the game history information itself is not displayed and the numerical value of the game history information is within a predetermined range. Information indicating whether or not the information is stored may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z or other display units. For example, it may be configured to display in the color of the LED lamp to emit light whether or not the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio as the game history information are within the predetermined ranges.

<Aspect 67>
In each of the above embodiments, the game history information display unit 45z provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured such that four 7-segment displays are arranged adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. The game history information display unit 45z not only displays the game history information, but also displays the setting information instead of the game history information in the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting. It is also called "part 45z".

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the information display unit 45z in the aspect 67. The information display unit 45z is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each of the 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 includes seven segment light emitting units A to G and a DP light emitting unit indicating a decimal point, and "1" is determined by the combination of the presence or absence of light emission of these light emitting units. , "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "0", "b", "L.", "6." It is possible to display various numerical values, characters, symbols, etc. such as. In this embodiment, the seven segment light emitting units A to G and the DP light emitting unit are composed of red LEDs (light emitting diodes).

In the following, the 7-segment display 45z1 arranged at the left end is also referred to as the left-end 7-segment display 45z1, and the 7-segment display 45z2 arranged adjacent to the right side of the left-end 7-segment display 45z1 is the 7-segment display in the middle left. The 7-segment display 45z3, which is also called the display 45z2 and is arranged adjacent to the right side of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2, is also called the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 and is adjacent to the right side of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3. The 7-segment display 45z4 arranged at the right end is also referred to as a right end 7-segment display 45z4.

As shown in FIG. 35, the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 are information for identifying the type of game history information to be displayed when displaying the game history information. Is used as an area for displaying (type information display area). Further, the middle right 7-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 are used as an area (numerical information display area) for displaying numerical information of game history information corresponding to the type displayed in the type information display area. To. Hereinafter, a specific example in which the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z will be described.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing how the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z. In FIG. 36, the lit segment light emitting portion and the DP light emitting portion are shown in a state of being filled with black, and the turned off segment light emitting portion and the DP light emitting portion are not filled with black and are white. It is written without it. The same applies to the drawings after FIG. 37.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control device 60 causes the information display unit 45z to always display the game history information in a state other than the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting described above. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main control device 60 calculates the above-mentioned ball ejection rate (during the normal mode) as the game history information, and the calculated ball ejection rate (during the normal mode) is displayed in the information display unit 45z. To display. The definition of the ball ejection rate (during the normal mode) is as follows.
・ Ball output rate (during normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 during normal mode (= Number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (normal) Number of outs in mode)))
As described above, the normal mode refers to a mode that is neither in the high probability mode nor in the high frequency support mode, nor in the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot winning. Further, in the following, the ball ejection rate (during the normal mode) is also referred to as "base (during the normal mode)".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control device 60 divides a section every time the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage reaches 60,000, and calculates a base (during the normal mode) for each section. Then, the information display unit 45z alternately displays two types of bases (during the normal mode) having different sections to be calculated. Specifically, the information display unit 45z of this embodiment displays the following two types of bases (during the normal mode).

-"BL": Base during measurement (during normal mode)
Outgoing rate calculated in the current section until the number of N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage currently being measured reaches 60,000 (in normal mode)
-"B6": Measured base (during normal mode)
The ball ejection rate calculated in the section immediately before the section currently being measured in the section where the measured number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT has reached 60,000 (during the normal mode).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the information display unit 45z alternately displays "measured base (during normal mode)" and "measured base (during normal mode)" every 5 seconds.

When the information display unit 45z displays "base under measurement (in normal mode)", "bL." Is displayed in the type information display area, and "base under measurement (in normal mode)" is displayed in the numerical information display area. ) ”Is displayed in two digits. Specifically, when "bL." Is displayed in the type information display area, the segment light emitting units C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are in a state of emitting light, and the left middle 7 segments. The segment light emitting parts D, E, F and the DP light emitting part of the display 45z2 are in a state of emitting light. Then, the numerical information of "base under measurement (during normal mode)" is displayed on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 and the right end 7-segment display 45z4 constituting the numerical information display area. In this embodiment, the integer part of the calculated "base under measurement (in normal mode)" rounded to the third decimal place and multiplied by 100 is displayed in the numerical information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.35", and the value of "base during measurement (during normal mode)" rounded off to the third decimal place is It means that it is "0.35". In addition, when the value of "base during measurement (during normal mode)" rounded off to the third decimal place is "1.00" or more, the value multiplied by 100 is 100 or more. In this case, The information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.99."

When the information display unit 45z displays "measured base (in normal mode)", "b6." Is displayed in the type information display area, and "measured base (in normal mode)" is displayed in the numerical information display area. ) ”Is displayed in two digits. Specifically, when "b6." Is displayed in the type information display area, the segment light emitting units C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are in a state of emitting light, and the left middle 7 segments. The segment light emitting parts A, C, D, E, F, G and the DP light emitting part of the display 45z2 are in a state of emitting light. Then, the numerical information of "measured base (during normal mode)" is displayed on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 and the right end 7-segment display 45z4 constituting the numerical information display area. In this embodiment, the integer part of the numerical value obtained by rounding off the value of the third decimal place of the calculated "measured base (in normal mode)" and multiplying it by 100 is displayed in the numerical information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.35", and the value of "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded off to the third decimal place is used. It means that it is "0.35". Also, if the value of the "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded to the third decimal place is "1.00" or more, the value multiplied by 100 will be 100 or more. In this case, The information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.99.".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the information display unit 45z displays the game history information, even if the numerical value to be displayed in the numerical information display area is a single digit value, the middle right 7 "0" is displayed on the segment display 45z3 and the numerical value is displayed in two digits. For example, if the value of "base during measurement (in normal mode)" rounded to the third decimal place is "0.07", the value multiplied by 100 will be 7, so in this case, , The information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.07".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when displaying the game history information, "bL." And "b6." Are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z. Only two types of information are displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when displaying the game history information, the following light emitting units are used among the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 constituting the type information display area. Not done (does not emit light).
[Light emitting part of the type information display area that is not used when displaying game history information]
-Segment light emitting part A, B and DP light emitting part of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1-Segment light emitting part B of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2

In other words, when displaying the game history information, only the following light emitting units are used (light emitting) among the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 constituting the type information display area. ).
[Light emitting part of the type information display area used when displaying game history information]
-Segment light emitting units C, D, E, F, G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1
-Segment light emitting part A, C, D, E, F, G and DP light emitting part of 7-segment display 45z2 in the middle left For reference, FIG. 36 shows the type information display area used when displaying the game history information. The light emitting part is shown in a cross-hatched manner.

Next, the display mode of the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting described above will be described. In this embodiment, in the setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays the setting information which is the information indicating the current lottery setting or the information indicating the changed lottery setting. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

37 and 38 are explanatory views showing how the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode. 37 and 38 show that "1" to "6" are displayed as setting information (numerical information) indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the current lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator presses the setting change button, the information display unit 45z displays the numerical information indicating the changed lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the setting change mode ends, and the information display unit 45z displays the game history information in the numerical information display area again.

In this embodiment, in the setting change mode, "-(two hyphens)" is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, and "1" to "6" are displayed in the numerical information display area. One of the setting information is displayed. The display pattern such as "--- (two hyphens)" displayed in the type information display area in the setting change mode is a display pattern that is not displayed when displaying information related to the type of game history information.

Specifically, in the setting change mode, the segment light emitting unit G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 constituting the type information display area of the information display unit 45z emits light, and the segment light emitting unit of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 emits light. G emits light. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, only the light emitting unit used when displaying the game history information is used in the setting change mode. In other words, the light emitting unit that is not used when displaying the game history information is not used even in the setting change mode.

Further, in this embodiment, of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 and the right end 7 segment display 45z4 constituting the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z, the right middle 7 segment display 45z3 is not used, and the right end 7 segment is not used. Only the display 45z4 is used to display numerical information indicating the lottery setting. That is, the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z can display 2-digit numerical information, but in the setting change mode, "0" is displayed on the 1st digit right middle 7-segment display 45z3. Is turned off without displaying, and the numerical information of any one of "1" to "6" indicating the lottery setting is displayed only on the second digit rightmost 7-segment display 45z4.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and cases where the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. The display mode of the type information display area will be clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly indicate whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or whether the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Further, according to this feature, the light emitting unit of the type information display area that is not used when displaying the game history information (segment light emitting unit A, B, DP light emitting unit A, B, DP light emitting unit of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display). Since the 45z2 segment light emitting unit B) is not used even in the setting change mode, there is an unused light emitting unit (hereinafter referred to as an unused light emitting unit) in the type information display area. Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the unused light emitting portion of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected when a problem occurs in the light emitting portion of the type information display area.

Further, for example, since the light emitting element (LED) serving as an unused light emitting unit does not need to emit light, parts necessary for causing the light emitting element to emit light can be omitted. Therefore, the cost of the information display unit 45z can be reduced.

Further, according to this aspect, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value is different depending on whether the numerical information related to the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area or the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. Since it will be different, even if there is a problem with the display of the type information display area, the administrator is asked whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or setting information. It is possible to clearly distinguish and recognize whether it is. That is, when the two-digit numerical value is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z, the administrator determines that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the game history information, and the numerical value. When a one-digit numerical value is displayed in the information display area, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the setting information.

<Aspect 68>
In the above aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light and display "-(two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode, but instead of this configuration, the setting is changed. In the mode, "-(two hyphens)" may be blinked and displayed in the type information display area.

According to such a configuration, there are cases where the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and the case where the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed, and the type information display area. The display mode of is more clearly different. Therefore, for example, it is clearer to the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. It can be distinguished and recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Further, according to this aspect, in the setting change mode in which the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area, "--- (two hyphens)" in the type information display area blinks, so that the pachinko machine It is possible to alert the administrator of the machine 10 that it is an important state in which the lottery setting should be changed carefully.

<Aspect 69>
In the above aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light and display "-(two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode, but instead of this configuration, the setting is changed. In the mode, nothing may be displayed in the type information display area. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

39 and 40 are explanatory views showing how the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode. 39 and 40 show that "1" to "6" are displayed as numerical information indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, in the setting change mode, all of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 constituting the type information display area of the information display unit 45z. The segment light emitting part and the DP light emitting part are turned off. That is, as described above, in the setting change mode, nothing is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z.

As described above, according to this aspect, the type information is displayed depending on whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. The display mode of the display area will be clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly indicate whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or whether the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Further, according to this aspect, even if there is a problem that some light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to G, etc.) constituting the type information display area do not emit light, all the light emitting parts do not emit light. Unless a serious problem such as the above occurs, the display mode of the type information display area differs between the case where the game history information is displayed and the case where the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if there is a problem that some light emitting parts (LEDs) constituting the type information display area do not emit light to the administrator, all the light emitting parts do not emit light. Unless a serious problem has occurred, it is possible to distinguish whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is the game history information or the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, the administrator determines that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the game history information when at least a part of the light emitting part is emitting light in the type information display area, and displays the type information display area. Only when all the constituent light emitting units are turned off, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the setting information of the lottery setting.

<Aspect 70>
In the above aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light and display "-(two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode, but instead of this configuration, the setting is changed. In the mode, a plurality of types of display patterns may be switched and displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds) in the type information display area. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing how the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode. In the example shown in FIG. 41, "1" is displayed as the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the setting change mode, the following two types of display patterns are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z by switching every 0.5 seconds.

-Display pattern A of the type information display area:
Display pattern / type information display area display pattern B in which the segment light emitting parts C, D, E, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are lit (light emitting) and all the light emitting parts of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 are turned off. :
Display pattern in which all the light emitting parts of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are turned off and the segment light emitting parts C, D, E, and G of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 are turned on (light emission).

The display pattern A and the display pattern B described above are display patterns that are not displayed in the type information display area when the game history information is displayed. Further, in the display pattern A and the display pattern B, only the light emitting unit used when displaying the game history information is used. In other words, in the display pattern A and the display pattern B, the light emitting unit that is not used when displaying the game history information is not used.

As described above, according to this aspect, the type information is displayed depending on whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. The display mode of the display area will be clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly indicate whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or whether the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. can.

Further, according to this aspect, the display pattern in the type information display area is dynamically changed in the setting change mode in which the numerical information related to the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to alert the administrator of the game that it is an important condition to carefully change the lottery settings.

Further, according to this aspect, the light emitting unit of the type information display area that is not used when displaying the game history information (segment light emitting unit A, B, DP light emitting unit A, B, DP light emitting unit of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display). Since the 45z2 segment light emitting unit B) is not used even in the setting change mode, there is an unused light emitting unit (hereinafter referred to as an unused light emitting unit) in the type information display area. Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the unused light emitting portion of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected when a problem occurs in the light emitting portion of the type information display area.

Further, since the light emitting element (LED) serving as the unused light emitting unit does not need to emit light, the parts necessary for causing the light emitting element to emit light can be omitted. Therefore, the cost of the information display unit 45z can be reduced.

In this embodiment, in the setting change mode, two types of display patterns are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, but three or more types of display patterns are sequentially switched. It may be configured to be repeatedly displayed.

<Aspect 71>
In each of the above embodiments, when the "number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (number of outs during the normal mode)" during measurement is, for example, less than 6000, "bL." In the type information display area. May be configured to blink and display 6000 or more. According to such a configuration, the person who confirms the blinking display of "bL." In the type information display area is the "number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs in the normal mode) during measurement. ) ”Is less than 6000, and the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the“ base during measurement (during normal mode) ”calculated in a state where a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated. Can be recognized.

In addition, after setting "bL." In the type information display area to a lighting display, the "number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (number of outs in the normal mode)" during measurement is, for example, less than 6000. In the case of, the numerical value in the numerical information display area may be blinked and displayed, and if the number is 6000 or more, it may be lit and displayed. According to such a configuration, the person who confirms the blinking display of the numerical value in the numerical information display area can determine the "number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs in the normal mode)" during measurement. It is recognized that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area, which is less than 6000, is the "base during measurement (during normal mode)" calculated in a state where a sufficient amount of statistical data is not accumulated. be able to.

In addition, when the "number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (number of outs in the normal mode)" during measurement is, for example, less than 6000, "bL." In the type information display area and numerical information. The numerical value in the display area may be blinked and displayed, and if the number is 6000 or more, it may be lit. According to such a configuration, the person who confirms the blinking display of "bL." In the type information display area and the numerical value in the numerical information display area is the "number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode" during measurement. (Number of outs in normal mode) "is less than 6000, and the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the" base during measurement (measurement) calculated in a state where a sufficient amount of statistical data is not accumulated. It can be recognized as "in normal mode)".

It should be noted that various game history basic information can be adopted as a criterion for determining whether the display is blinking or lit. For example, the “number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (total number of outs)” during measurement may be adopted.

<Aspect 72>
In each of the above embodiments, in the setting change mode, when displaying the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area, all the light emitting units constituting the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 should be turned off. Instead, only the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 was used to display the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in one digit, but instead of this configuration, the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 was also used to display two digits. It may be configured to display the numerical information indicating the lottery setting. For example, when the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is only one digit information, "0" may be displayed on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3.

<Aspect 73>
In each of the above aspects, the lottery setting is not limited to the six types 1 to 6, and the type of the lottery setting may be 5 or less or 7 or more. Further, the number of 7-segment displays constituting the information display unit 45z is not limited to 4, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. Further, the number of the 7-segment displays constituting the type information display area of the information display unit 45z is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Further, the number of 7-segment displays constituting the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Further, the information display unit 45z may be configured by a light emitting element other than the LED such as an organic EL, or may be configured by a display element (display element) that does not emit light. For example, the information display unit 45z may be composed of a liquid crystal display or a display element that employs an electrophoresis method used for electronic paper.

<Aspect 74>
FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 74 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 74, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the above-mentioned game history information. Hereinafter, the details of various configurations included in the main control device 60 will be described, and the other configurations are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the above-described first embodiment and each embodiment, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42, the main ROM 63 includes a program storage means 63a and a program data storage means 63b. The main RAM 64 includes a data storage means 64a and a stack means 64b.

The main CPU 62x includes a register set 62x1 and executes various processes by combining and executing a plurality of types of programs stored in the program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63. Each program is composed of a combination of a plurality of pre-reserved instructions such as an arithmetic instruction, a transfer instruction, a rotate instruction, a shift instruction, a jump instruction, a call instruction, and a return instruction. Execute multiple instructions sequentially in the order defined in the program.

The register set 62x1 includes an A register (accumulator register), an F register (flag register), a general-purpose register, and a stack pointer (SP). The A register and the general-purpose register are formed in a size of 1 byte (8 bits), and the stack pointer (SP) is formed in a size of 2 bytes (16 bits). Further, the register set 62x1 may include other registers, and may further include registers such as an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter.

The A register stores the data (value) to be operated by the operation instruction and the operation result.

The state of the F register automatically changes according to the operation result of an operation instruction or the execution result of a specific instruction such as a load instruction.

General-purpose registers are used in the same way as variables in general programs. Specifically, they temporarily store data (values), configure counters, and specify memory addresses. Used to do.

The stack pointer (SP) is a stack for accessing the first stack area 64b1 (see FIG. 44 described later) and the second stack area 64b2 (see FIG. 44 described later) included in the stack means 64b configured in the main RAM 64. Stores the pointer reference address. Specifically, the stack pointer (SP) stores the first stack area reference address SP1 when accessing the first stack area 64b1, and is used for the second stack area reference when accessing the second stack area 64b2. Stores the address SP2.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main ROM 63. As described above, the main ROM 63 includes a program storage means 63a and a program data storage means 63b.

The program storage means 63a has a first program control area 63a1 that stores the first program 63p1 and a second program control area 63a2 that is different from the first program control area 63a1 and stores the second program 63p2. is doing.

The first program 63p1 includes a game progress program, a storage program, and a change program. Then, the main CPU 62x executes the game progress process for controlling the progress of the game by executing the game progress program, performs the storage process by executing the storage program, and executes the change process by executing the change program. To carry out. The details of the game progress process, the memory process, and the change process will be described later.

The second program 63p2 includes a game history information calculation display program, a save program, and a return program. Then, the main CPU 62x executes the game history information calculation display process of calculating and displaying the above-mentioned game history information by executing the game history information calculation display program, and executes the save process by executing the save program. Then, the return process is executed by executing the return program. Details of the game history information calculation display process, save process, and return process will be described later.

The program data storage means 63b is an area different from the first program data area 63b1 for storing various data necessary for executing the first program 63p1 and the first program data area 63b1 and is different from the second program 63p2. It has a second program data area 63b2 for storing various data necessary for executing the above. In the first program data area 63b1, for example, data such as a win / fail table and a distribution table used in the above-mentioned winning lottery process is stored, and in the second program data area 63b2, for example, in the game history information calculation display process. Various fixed value data to be used are stored.

As described above, the first program data area 63b1 for storing the first program control area 63a1 for storing the first program 63p1 and the data necessary for executing the first program 63p1 and the second program 63p2 for storing the second program 63p2. The second program data area 63b2 for storing the data necessary for executing the two program control areas 63a2 and the second program 63p2 are configured in different areas of the main ROM 63, respectively.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main RAM 64. As described above, the main RAM 64 includes a data storage means 64a and a stack means 64b.

The data storage means 64a corresponds to the first data storage area 64a1 corresponding to the first program 63p1 capable of updating data and the second program 63p2 which is different from the first data storage area 64a1 and can update data. It has a second data storage area 64a2. In the first data storage area 64a1, for example, various data updated in the game progress process (various flags such as the high probability mode flag) are stored, and in the second data storage area 64a2, for example, the game history. Various data updated in the information calculation display process are stored.

The stack means 64b is an area different from the first stack area 64b1 and the first stack area 64b1 that can be accessed by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP), and is a stack pointer (SP). It has a second stack area 64b2 that can be accessed by the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in. The first stack area 64b1 corresponds to the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program), and the second stack area and 64b2 correspond to the second program 63p2 (game history information calculation display program, save program, return program). Program) is supported.

As described above, the first stack area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1 and the second program 63p2 (1st stack area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1) which can update and refer to the data by the processing by the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program) ( The second stack area 64b2 and the second data storage area 64a2, which can update and refer to data by processing by the game history information calculation display program, save program, and return program), are configured in different areas of the main RAM 64, respectively. ing. It should be noted that the data in the second stack area 64b2 and the second data storage area 64a2 cannot be updated by the processing by the first program 63p1, but the data can be referred to, and the first stack by the processing by the second program 63p2. The data in the area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1 cannot be updated, but the data can be referred to.

FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a memory map of the main control device 60. As shown in FIG. 45, the internal ROM area corresponding to the main ROM 63 and the internal RAM area corresponding to the main RAM 64 are allocated to the memory space in this embodiment in this order. In this embodiment, in the built-in ROM area, the first program control area 63a1, the first program data area 63b1, the unused area, the second program control area 63a2, and the second program data area 63b2 are allocated in this order. In the built-in RAM area, the first data storage area 64a1, the first stack area 64b1, the second data storage area 64a2, the second stack area 64b2, and the unused area are allocated in this order.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 62x according to the first embodiment. Also in this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 4 msec as in the first embodiment.

It should be noted that each process described on the left side of the paper in FIG. 46 is a process executed by the main CPU 62x executing the first program 63p1 stored in the first program control area 63a1. Each process described on the right side of the page is a process executed by the second program 63p2 stored in the second program control area 63a2 being executed by the main CPU 62x.

In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes the game progress process, which is a process for advancing the game, by executing the game progress program included in the first program 63p1. Specifically, in the game progress processing, the processing group shown in steps S1061 to S10615 of FIG. 27 described above is carried out. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process by executing the storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage process, the push instruction (PUSH) is used to access the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF that designates the A register and the F register as the transfer target.

After executing step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the evacuation processes 1, 2 and 3 shown in steps S11105 from step S11103 by executing the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In the save process 1 shown in step S11103, the load instruction (LD (W21), SP) causes the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) to be changed to the address W21 of the second data storage area 64a2. Store in the area specified by. At this time, the value of the F flag may change due to the change in the state of the TZ flag of the F register due to the load instruction. After performing the evacuation process 1 in step S11103, the process proceeds to step S11104.

In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since the data is not stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time when the save process 2 is executed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the save process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. It is an address value indicating. After performing the evacuation process 2 in step S11104, the process proceeds to step S11105.

In the save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are designated by the address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by a plurality of load instructions (LD (W22), register). Remember in. A configuration in which the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load instruction using a special code for designating the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register as transfer targets. May be. After performing the process of step S11105, the process proceeds to step S11106.

In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the game history information calculation display process by executing the game history information calculation display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-mentioned game history information is calculated, and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation display processing, the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 of FIG. 29 described above is carried out. At this time, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change in the game history information calculation display process.

After executing the game history information calculation display process in step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the return programs included in the second program 63p2 to perform the return processes 1 and 2 shown in steps S11107 and S11108. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In the return process 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are saved by the multiple load instructions (LD register, (W22)), and the second data storage area is stored by the save process 3 (step S11105). It is set to the value stored in the area specified by the address W22 of 64a2. It should be noted that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by one load instruction using the special code. good. In the return process 1, when the value of the F register is changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is completed is stored in the F register. After performing the process of step S11107, the process proceeds to step S11108.

In the return process 2 shown in step S11108, the first stack area stored in the area designated by the address W21 of the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 1 (step S11103) by the load instruction (LD SP, (W21)). The reference address SP1 is stored in the stack pointer (SP), and the main CPU 62x ends the execution of the second program 63p2. After performing the process of step S11108, the process proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the change process by executing the change program included in the first program 63p1. In the change process, the values of the A register and the F register among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register whose values are set by the return process 1 (step S11107) by the pop instruction (POP) are stored (step S11102). Changes to the value stored in the first stack area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by one pop instruction (POP AF) using the special code. At this time, even if a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is finished is stored in the F register in the return process 1 (step S11107), the value of the F register is the same as that immediately after the game progress process is finished. Can be changed to. After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the evacuation process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46) and the return process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 46) are performed, so that the program returns from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1. At that time, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem due to the change in the value of the register used in the first program 63p1.

Further, according to this aspect, the state of the F register may change before the save process 3 is executed (for example, when the load instruction is executed in the save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46)). Before executing the save process 1, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the storage process by the storage program included in the first program 63p1 (step S11102 in FIG. 46), and after the processing by the second program 63p2 is completed. , The values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the storage process in the change process (step S11109 in FIG. 46) by the change program included in the first program 63p1. Therefore, for example, even if the state of the F register changes in the save process 1, the state of the F register returns to the same state as immediately after the end of the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46) by the first program 63p1. 2 There is no possibility of affecting the processing performed after returning from the processing by the program 63p2. As a result, it becomes possible to independently configure a plurality of programs.

Further, according to this aspect, a game that controls the progress of the game only by adding the game history information calculation display program for executing the game history information calculation display process (step S11106 in FIG. 46) to the second program 63p2. The game history information calculation display process can be added without affecting the progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46). Therefore, the game history information calculation display program can be easily created independently of the game progress program for executing the game progress process.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 45, the memory space used by the processing by the first program 63p1 and the memory space used by the processing by the second program 63p2 are arranged independently of each other. Both memory spaces can be prevented from physically interfering with each other, and for example, fraudulent acts performed on one process (memory space) can be prevented from affecting the other process (memory space). can do.

Further, according to this aspect, in the save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46), all the values of each register may be stored in the second stack area 64b2 by one push instruction (PUSH ALL). However, since the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the load instruction, it is possible to store only the used register in the second data storage area 64a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the value of each register in the save process 3. Further, according to this embodiment, the value of each register is not stored in the second stack area 64b2, but the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2. Therefore, the main RAM 64 It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the second stack area 64b2 occupying the second stack area 64b2 and expand the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2.

Further, for example, when the capacity of the data to be stored in the stack area by the push instruction (PUSH) exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area of the main RAM 64, all the data stored in the stack area is stored. In the case where the reset process for erasing the data is executed, if the save process 3 is configured to store the value of each register in the second stack area 64b2 by the push instruction (PUSH), the reset process is executed. There is a risk that it will be done. Further, in the save process 3, if all the values of each register are stored in the second stack area 64b2 by one push instruction (PUSH ALL), the possibility that the reset process is executed is further increased. It ends up. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the push instruction (PUSH ALL) is not used in the save process 3, and the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the load instruction (LD), so that the stack area is used. It is possible to avoid the risk that the reset process of is executed.

<Aspect 75>
In the configuration shown in the above aspect 74, instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 46, the timer interrupt processing described below may be performed.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 62x according to the first embodiment. The same process as the process included in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46 is assigned the same step number. The main difference from the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46 is that the save process 1 shown in step S11103 of FIG. 46 is omitted and the content of the return process 2 shown in step S11108 of FIG. 46 is different. It is a point. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes the game progress process, which is a process for advancing the game, by executing the game progress program included in the first program 63p1. Specifically, in the game progress processing, the processing group shown in steps S1061 to S10615 of FIG. 27 described above is carried out. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process by executing the storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage process, the push instruction (PUSH) is used to access the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF that designates the A register and the F register as the transfer target.

After executing step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the evacuation processes 2 and 3 shown in steps S11104 and S11105 by executing the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2. That is, in this embodiment, the main CPU 62x does not perform the evacuation process 1 in step S11103 described above. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since the data is not stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time when the save process 2 is executed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the save process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. It is an address value indicating. After performing the evacuation process 2 in step S11104, the process proceeds to step S11105.

In the save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are designated by the address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by a plurality of load instructions (LD (W22), register). Remember in. A configuration in which the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load instruction using a special code for designating the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register as transfer targets. May be. After performing the process of step S11105, the process proceeds to step S11106.

In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the game history information calculation display process by executing the game history information calculation display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-mentioned game history information is calculated, and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation display processing, the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 of FIG. 29 described above is carried out. At this time, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change in the game history information calculation display process.

After executing the game history information calculation display process in step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the return program included in the second program 63p2 to perform the return process 1 and the return process A shown in steps S11107 and S11108a. do. That is, in this embodiment, the main CPU 62x performs the return process A shown in step S11108a instead of the return process 2 in step S11108 described above. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In the return process 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are saved by the multiple load instructions (LD register, (W22)), and the second data storage area is stored by the save process 3 (step S11105). It is set to the value stored in the area specified by the address W22 of 64a2. It should be noted that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by one load instruction using the special code. good. In the return process 1, when the value of the F register is changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is completed is stored in the F register. Further, the special code may not be used, and the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a plurality of load instructions. After performing the process of step S11107, the process proceeds to step S11108a.

In the return process A shown in step S11108a, the first stack area reference address SP1 which is a fixed value is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. Hereinafter, this fixed value will be described.

In this embodiment, when all the processes (processes from step S10601 to step S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 does not exist. Because of the configuration, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

After that, when the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. As a result, it is stored in the stack pointer (SP) at the time immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The first stack area reference address SP1 is an address value that specifies a position moved by a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Since the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the execution of the storage process (step S11102) and the start of the execution of the second program 63p2 is the same every time (for each timer interrupt process), the first stack area The movement amount of the reference address SP1 is also the same every time. Therefore, the first stack stored in the stack pointer (SP) at the time immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The area reference address SP1 has the same address value each time.

The fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment is a time point immediately after the storage process (step S11102) is completed and the execution of the second program 63p2 is started (FIG. 47). In the timing TX1) shown in the above, the address value is set to the same as the address value stored in the stack pointer each time. As a result, even if the save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) is omitted, the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment terminates the storage process (step S11102) of the value of the stack pointer (SP). The value can be restored to the value at the time immediately after the execution of the second program 63p2 is started (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47).

The main CPU 62x ends the process of step S11108a described above, ends the execution of the second program 63p2, starts the execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the change process by executing the change program included in the first program. In the change process, the values of the A register and the F register among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register whose values are set by the return process 1 (step S11107) by the pop instruction (POP) are stored (step S11102). Changes to the value stored in the first stack area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by one pop instruction (POP AF) using the special code. At this time, the value of the F register has changed after the storage process (step S11102) was executed, and in the return process 1 (step S11107), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process was completed was stored in the F register. Even in this case, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress processing is completed. After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects shown in the above-mentioned aspect 74.

In this embodiment, when all the processes (processes from step S10601 to step S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 does not exist. Because of the configuration, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1. Therefore, the first stored in the stack pointer (SP) at the time immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The stack area reference address SP1 has the same address value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, since the fixed value may be stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment, the save process 1 shown in the aspect 74 can be omitted. As a result, the processing of the main CPU 62x can be simplified, and the second data storage area 64a2 required to save the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). The storage capacity can be reduced.

<Aspect 76>
Instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47, the timer interrupt processing described below may be performed.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 62x according to the first embodiment. The same process as the process included in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 47 is assigned the same step number. The main difference from the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 47 is that the save process 3 shown in step S11105 of FIG. 47 is omitted and the return process 1 shown in step S11107 of FIG. 47 is omitted. And, after the processing shown in step S11102 and step S11108a in FIG. 48, a processing for setting the values of all the registers to 0 is added. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes the game progress process, which is a process for advancing the game, by executing the game progress program included in the first program 63p1. Specifically, in the game progress processing, the processing group shown in steps S1061 to S10615 of FIG. 27 described above is carried out. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process by executing the storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage process, the push instruction (PUSH) is used to access the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF that designates the A register and the F register as the transfer target. After performing the process of step S11102, the process proceeds to step S11102-2.

In step S11102-2, the main CPU 62x executes the first clear process by executing the first clear program included in the first program 63p1. In the first clear process, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to 0 by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, 0). The values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to 0 by a single load instruction using a special code.

After executing step S11102-2, the main CPU 62x executes the evacuation process 2 shown in step S11104 by executing the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2. That is, in this embodiment, the main CPU 62x does not perform the evacuation process 1 in step S11103 and the evacuation process 3 in step S11105. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since the data is not stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time when the save process 2 is executed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the save process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. It is an address value indicating. After performing the evacuation process 2 in step S11104, the process proceeds to step S11106. That is, in this embodiment, the main CPU 62x does not perform the evacuation process 3 in step S11105 described above.

In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the game history information calculation display process by executing the game history information calculation display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-mentioned game history information is calculated, and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation display processing, the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 of FIG. 29 described above is carried out. At this time, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change in the game history information calculation display process.

After executing the game history information calculation display process in step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the second clear program included in the second program 63p2 to execute the second clear process shown in step S11107a. That is, in this embodiment, the main CPU 62x does not perform the return process 1 in step S11107 described above.

In the second clear process shown in step S11107a, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to 0 by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, 0). The values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to 0 by a single load instruction using a special code.

After performing the second clear process of step S11107a, the main CPU 62x executes the return program A included in the second program 63p2 to perform the return process A shown in step S11108a.

In the return process A shown in step S11108a, the first stack area reference address SP1 which is a fixed value is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. Hereinafter, this fixed value will be described.

In this embodiment, when all the processes (processes from step S10601 to step S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 does not exist. Because of the configuration, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

After that, when the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. To. As a result, at the time immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts executing the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) has an address value that specifies a position moved by a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Then, the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the execution of the storage process (step S11102), the execution of the first clear process (step S11102-2), and the execution of the second program 63p2 is every time (every timer interrupt process). Since it is the same, the movement amount of the first stack area reference address SP1 is also the same every time. Therefore, the stack pointer immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The first stack area reference address SP1 stored in (SP) has the same address value each time.

Then, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment ends the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2), and the second program 63p2. The address value is set to the same as the address value stored in the stack pointer each time at the time immediately after the start of the execution (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). As a result, even if the above-mentioned save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) is omitted, the value of the stack pointer (SP) is stored in the storage process (step S11102) and the first by the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment. It is possible to return to the value at the time point (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after the 1 clear process (step S11102-2) is completed and the execution of the second program 63p2 is started.

The main CPU 62x ends the process of step S11108a described above, ends the execution of the second program 63p2, starts the execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the change process by executing the change program included in the first program. In the change process, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by the pop instruction (POP). At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by one pop instruction (POP AF) using the special code. At this time, even if the value of the F register changes after the storage process (step S11102) is executed, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process is completed. .. After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects shown in the above-mentioned aspects 74 and 75.

According to this aspect, the first clear process (step S11102-2 in FIG. 48) is performed by the first program 63p1, and the second clear process (step S11107a in FIG. 48) is performed by the second program 63p2. The register value at the time immediately before the start of execution of the second program 63p2 and the value of the register of the second program 63p2 without executing the save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 47) and the return process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 47). It can match the value of the register at the time immediately after the end of execution. Therefore, when returning from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem due to the change in the value of the register used in the first program 63p1. Since the save process 3 and the return process 1 described above can be omitted, the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 required for the save process 3 and the return process 1 can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, in one timer interrupt process, the first clear process is performed after all the various processes included in the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 48) are completed, and after the first clear process. Since the game progress process is not executed, it is possible to avoid a problem in the game progress process by setting the register value to 0 by the first clear process.

<Aspect 77>
In the storage process of step S11102 of the above aspects 74, 75 and 76, the value of the specific register (A register, F register) may be stored in the first data storage area 64a1 by the load instruction. In this case, in the change process of step S11109, the value of the specific register (A register, F register) may be changed to the value stored in the first data storage area 64a1 in the storage process by the load instruction. Further, the specific register to be the target of the storage process of step S11102 and the change process of step S11109 may be a configuration in which only the F register is used.

Further, in the above aspect 74, the execution of the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46) by the first program 63p1 is interrupted in the middle, and the process from the storage process of step S11102 to the change process of step S11109 is interrupted and then interrupted. It may be configured to restart the execution of the game progress process that has been performed.

Further, in the above aspect 76, the first clear process (step S11102-2) may be performed after the game progress process (step S11101) is performed and before the storage process (step S11102) is performed. .. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned aspect 76 can be obtained.

<Aspect 78>
Among each of the above modes, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, various modes can be adopted as a method of starting the pachinko machine 10 as the setting change mode and an operation method in the setting change mode. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing settings and the above-mentioned RAM clear button, and is not provided with the above-mentioned setting change button. .. When the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Then, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, and the key for changing the setting is inserted into the keyhole for changing the setting. Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (for example, clockwise). In this state, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the pachinko machine 10 starts up as a setting change mode.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is activated as a setting change mode when all of the following conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on.
Condition 1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition 2: The keyhole for changing the setting is located on the setting change side. Condition 3: The RAM clear button is pressed. When the power of the machine 10 is turned on, if the condition 3 is satisfied but either the conditions 1 and 2 are not satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 does not start as the setting change mode, and the main RAM 64 is initially initialized. Execute the process to be converted.

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode, information (setting information) indicating the current lottery setting is displayed on the above-mentioned information display unit 45z. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, every time the administrator presses the RAM clear button, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6"-> " It switches in the order of "1" → "2" ....

With the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z set to the value desired by the administrator, the administrator causes the game ball to enter a predetermined entry port (for example, the out opening 43) to enter the predetermined ball. When the detection sensor (for example, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h) detects the game ball, the change to the lottery setting corresponding to the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is confirmed. Specifically, for example, when "6" is displayed as setting information on the information display unit 45z and the discharge passage detection sensor 44h detects a game ball, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting". It will be changed to "6". Then, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the pachinko machine 10 ends the setting change mode.

As described above, according to this aspect, since the setting change button can be omitted, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, according to this aspect, when changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, so that the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, for example. Even if an unauthorized person (hereinafter, also referred to as an illegal person) attempts to change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 illegally, he / she does not have the means to open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14. As long as you can't change the lottery settings. Therefore, the security of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, even if an unauthorized person can open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10 warns that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Sounds and warning sounds (eg, "doors are open") are output so that the administrator can easily notice a situation where an unauthorized person is trying to change the lottery settings. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

In this embodiment, it is one of the conditions that the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode that both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state, but either the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is used. It may be one of the conditions for the pachinko machine 10 to start as the setting change mode that one of them is in the open state.

Further, in this embodiment, the detection of the game ball by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is adopted as a condition for confirming the change of the lottery setting, but the detection is not limited to this configuration and the detection of the game ball by another ball entry detection sensor is drawn. It may be adopted as a condition for confirming the change of the setting. For example, as a condition for confirming the change of the lottery setting, the detection of the game ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 44d may be adopted. The first winning opening detection sensor 44d is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 32a, which is a general winning opening.

Further, in this embodiment, every time the administrator presses the RAM clear button in the setting change mode, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> " The configuration is such that the order is switched in the order of "5" → "6" → "1" → "2" ..., but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a configuration for setting change is provided separately from the RAM clear button for management. Every time a person presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6"-> "1". It may be configured to switch in the order of "→" 2 "...".

Further, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the keyhole for changing the setting is provided, but the configuration may not be provided with the keyhole for changing the setting. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be activated as a setting change mode when the above conditions 1 and 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the above conditions 1 and 3 are satisfied, whether the pachinko machine 10 is started as a setting change mode or a RAM clear process for initializing the main RAM 64 is executed. May be configured to execute a selection mode in which the administrator is made to select. Then, in the selection mode, the RAM clear button is pressed to select whether to start the setting change mode or the RAM clear process is executed, and the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time to confirm the selection. May be good. Further, in the selection mode, the setting is made only when the game ball is inserted into a predetermined entry port (for example, the out port 43) and the game ball is detected by the predetermined entry detection sensor (for example, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h). It may be configured so that it can be selected to be activated as a change mode. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a person other than the administrator from illegally changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 79>
In each of the above aspects, in the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, the configuration may be configured to notify that the setting change mode is in progress during the setting change mode. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this embodiment, when the setting change mode is started, the main control device 60 transmits a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode is started, to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "setting change mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays that the command is received. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress". Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

Then, when the setting change mode is terminated, the main control device 60 transmits a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated, to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and various lamps 47 notify that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode. Therefore, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can use the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Can be easily recognized. Further, even if an unauthorized person illegally shifts the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode, the speaker 46 or the symbol display device 41 notifies that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode. Therefore, the surrounding players and managers can notice that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

Further, when the setting change mode is started, the main control device 60 transmits information indicating that the setting change mode has been started to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has been started, the hall computer displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. Then, when the setting change mode is terminated, the main control device 60 transmits information indicating that the setting change mode is terminated to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal.

According to such a configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 10, the management screen by the hall computer indicates that the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode exists. It becomes possible to recognize. Therefore, for example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can notify that the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode exists by the management screen by the hall computer. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

<Aspect 80>
In each of the above modes, in the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, among the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the end of the setting change mode, It may be configured to initialize except for the information related to the game state. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this embodiment, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is initialized except for the information related to the game state, and the setting change mode is terminated as it is without changing the lottery setting in the setting change mode. In this case, the game shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed without executing the initialization of the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the "information about the game state" that is not initialized is the state of the high probability mode flag, the state of the high frequency support mode flag, and the flag indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress (during big hit). It is in the state of.

As described above, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is initialized, so that the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the lottery It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the progress of the game due to an inconsistency with the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the setting is changed.

Further, according to this aspect, even when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode and the main RAM 64 is initialized, the information regarding the gaming state among the information stored in the main RAM 64 is deleted. Therefore, for example, it is possible to change the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 64 is initialized after the setting change mode ends, but when the operation for starting as the setting change mode is accepted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the setting change mode is received. The main RAM 64 may be initialized by excluding the information regarding the gaming state before starting the game. Even with such a configuration, inconsistency occurs between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery setting is changed. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the progress of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main RAM 64 is initialized, the information related to the game state is not erased, but all the information stored in the main RAM 64 (including the information related to the game state) is initialized. It may be configured to be used.

Further, the "information about the game state" that is not initialized is not limited to the above, and may be configured to include, for example, hold information.

<Aspect 81>
In each of the above modes, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, inconsistency occurs in the information stored in the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like, and when the initialization of the main RAM 64 is executed, the game proceeds. It may be configured to shift to the setting change mode before returning to the possible game progress mode. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a monitoring process for monitoring whether or not an abnormality such as inconsistency has occurred in the information stored in the main RAM 64 in the timer interrupt process. Specifically, for example, in the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a value in a range that should not be stored is stored in each area of the main RAM 64. When it is determined in the monitoring process that an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 64, the process related to the progress of the game is stopped and the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized. Then, after the initialization of the main RAM 64 is completed, the main control device 60 shifts to the above-mentioned setting change mode before shifting to the game progress mode in which the game can progress. The causes of abnormalities such as inconsistency in the information stored in the main RAM 64 include, for example, noise such as electromagnetic waves and a player having an illegal intention bringing a magnet or the like close to the pachinko machine 10. And so on.

Then, similarly to the above-described aspect 79, if the configuration is such that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 decides that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the setting change mode. You can notice. Then, the administrator determines the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the game progress mode.

The reason for such a configuration will be described. When the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is also rewritten to the setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. there is a possibility. If the lottery setting setting information is not initialized (changed) even if the main RAM 64 is initialized, the setting information may still be different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. be. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the setting change mode is set before returning to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Then, the administrator can correct the setting information of the lottery setting to the originally intended setting information before the pachinko machine 10 returns to the game progress mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the above-mentioned information regarding the gaming state may not be initialized. According to such a configuration, even when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the information regarding the game state is not initialized (is not erased), so that the player can play the game. It is possible to resume the game while maintaining the state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the forced initialization of the main RAM 64 caused by noise or the like.

In this embodiment, the setting change mode is set after the initialization of the main RAM 64, but the setting change mode is not changed after the initialization of the main RAM 64, and the lottery setting is set to the initial value (for example, "lottery setting"). After setting to 1 ”), it may be configured to shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed.

Further, in this embodiment, the information regarding the gaming state is not erased when the main RAM 64 is initialized, but the information regarding the gaming state may also be erased when the main RAM 64 is initialized.

<Aspect 82>
In each of the above aspects, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, a configuration may be used to notify whether the lottery setting has been changed or not in the setting change mode. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this embodiment, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 outputs a voice suggesting that the lottery setting has been changed from the speaker 46, and the lottery setting is changed. By displaying the character string suggesting that the lottery has been performed on the symbol display device 41, it is notified that the lottery setting has been changed.

Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts to the setting change mode, the setting information of the current lottery setting is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode is compared with the setting information of the lottery setting before the change which has been saved, and if these setting information are different, the lottery setting is performed. A setting change command, which is a command indicating that is changed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the setting change command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice suggesting that the lottery setting has been changed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "the lottery setting has been changed" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change command, the symbol display device 41 displays information suggesting that the lottery setting has been changed. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "the lottery setting has been changed" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and receives the command. The display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "the lottery setting has been changed". Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change command, the various lamps 47 are controlled so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

On the other hand, when the setting change mode is terminated while the lottery setting is not changed, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 emits a voice suggesting that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed. By outputting from 46 and displaying a character string suggesting that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed on the symbol display device 41, it is notified that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed.

Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts to the setting change mode, the setting information of the current lottery setting is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode is compared with the setting information of the lottery setting before the change which has been saved, and if these setting information match, the lottery is performed. A setting maintenance command, which is a command indicating that the setting has not been changed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice suggesting that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The lottery setting was not changed" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, the symbol display device 41 displays information suggesting that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "the lottery setting was not changed" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and sends the command. The received display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "the lottery setting has not been changed". Further, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to light instead of blinking when the setting maintenance command is received.

As described above, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the manager or the player is notified whether the lottery setting has been changed. Can be confirmed.

In particular, in the above aspect 81, in the setting change mode after the forced initialization of the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like, the player who is playing the game in the pachinko machine 10 is set by the administrator by lottery. It is assumed that he will be skeptical about whether or not it has been changed. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed, the player is notified that the lottery setting has been changed, so that the player can confirm whether or not the lottery setting has been changed. More specifically, it is possible to make the player grasp only whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the setting change mode without letting the player know what kind of setting information the current lottery setting is. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player has to restart the game with anxiety without knowing whether or not the lottery setting has been changed by the administrator.

In this embodiment, when the lottery setting is not changed, it is configured to notify that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed, but when the lottery setting is not changed, nothing is notified. It may be configured not to perform the setting, or it may be configured to notify a different mode from the case where the lottery setting is changed, such as "Exit the setting change mode". Even with such a configuration, the player can determine that the lottery setting has not been changed if there is no notification such as "the lottery setting has been changed", so that the player feels uneasy when playing the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as having to restart.

<Aspect 83>
In the above aspect 82, the main control device 60 may be configured to include the setting information of the changed lottery setting in the setting change command which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been changed. Then, each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a setting change command including the setting information of the lottery setting after the change, the voice emission control device 90 sequentially stores the setting information of the lottery setting after the change in the RAM as a storage means provided by the voice emission control device 90. It may be configured to be used. The voice emission control device 90 may be configured to display the history of changes in the lottery settings on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined operation is received from the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the history of changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 without using the limited storage capacity of the main RAM 64 of the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10. , The administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can easily confirm how the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been operated by the history of the change of the lottery setting displayed on the symbol display device 41. ..

<Aspect 84>
Among the above modes, in the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, the setting confirmation mode in which the lottery setting cannot be changed but the administrator or the like can confirm the current lottery setting can be executed. good. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

When a specific operation is executed under a specific condition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set to a game stop state in which the game cannot proceed, and then shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, the specific condition means a state in which all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1: The special symbol unit 37 is not changing the special symbol Condition 2: The normal symbol unit 38 is not changing the normal symbol Condition 3: The variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory is not operating. Condition 4: The electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory is not operating Condition 5: A predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the last game ball was launched. That is, a specific condition. The lower state is a state in which the result of the game is not affected even if the progress of the game is stopped (interrupted).

Further, in this embodiment, the specific operation is an operation of pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment detects that the RAM clear button has been pressed during the game progress mode in which the game can proceed, it is under the above-mentioned specific conditions. If it is determined whether or not the condition is met and it is determined that the above specific conditions are met, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. Then, when it is detected that the RAM clear button is not pressed again, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game is returned to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the main control device 60 executes random number update processing for updating the jackpot random number counter and power supply monitoring processing, but other processing necessary for the progress of the game (various inputs in timer interrupt processing). The game is stopped (a state in which the game cannot proceed) without being executed (ball processing, etc.), and then setting information indicating the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the information display unit 45z.

Further, in the game progress mode, an accessory that always continues a constant operation (predetermined operation) regardless of the result of the winning lottery or the result of the electric accessory opening lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as a constantly operating accessory). In the pachinko machine 10 provided with the above, the main control device 60 continues the operation of the constantly operating accessory as it is even when the game progress mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, after shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the main control device 60 is configured to continue executing the control process of the constantly operating accessory in addition to the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process. Then, when the main control device 60 exits the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed, the main control device 60 resumes the execution of other processes necessary for the progress of the game that had been avoided. do.

According to such a configuration, even at the timing of shifting from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode and the timing of returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation of the constantly operating accessory is constant without stopping or changing. In order to continue the operation of, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from firing a game ball and obtaining an unfairly advantageous result aiming at the timing when the operation of the constantly operating accessory stops or changes. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the operation of the constantly operating accessory is continued as it is even during the setting confirmation mode, but the operation of the constantly operating accessory is temporarily stopped at the timing of shifting from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode. It may be configured to restart the operation of the constantly operating accessory that has been stopped at the timing of returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the process as compared with the configuration in which the operation of the constantly operating accessory is continued. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the movements of the constantly operating accessories are continuously connected in the game progress mode in which the game can progress. Further, according to such a configuration, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation of the constantly operating accessory is restarted from the same state as the state at the timing of the transition from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the constantly operating accessory is changed from a state different from the state at the timing of shifting from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a state disadvantageous or advantageous to the player). It is possible to avoid that the operation of is restarted and the player has to restart the game from a state different from the state in which the game is stopped.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is adopted as a specific operation for shifting to the setting confirmation mode, but various operations can be adopted as the specific operation. For example, as the specific operation, an operation of inserting the key for changing the setting into the keyhole for changing the setting and turning it to the setting changing side may be adopted. According to such a configuration, a key for changing the setting is required to confirm the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, so that a person who does not have the key for changing the setting can set the lottery for the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the fact that it can be confirmed.

<Aspect 85>
In the above aspect 84, the operation of the constantly operating accessory is continued as it is even in the setting confirmation mode, but when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the constantly operating accessory is shifted to a predetermined initial state ( Alternatively, it may be configured to stop the operation after moving it to the initial position). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

When the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment shifts from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode, the constantly operating bonus is moved to the initial state (or moved to the initial position). Continue the control process of. Then, when the main control device 60 detects that the constantly operating accessory has moved to the initial state (or moved to the initial position), the main control device 60 stops executing the control process of the constantly operating accessory and starts the operation of the constantly operating accessory. Stop it. After that, when the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed, the main control device 60 is necessary for the control process of the constantly operating accessory and the progress of the game that has been avoided. Resume execution of other processing.

When the main control device 60 returns from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode before detecting that the constantly operating accessory has shifted to the initial state (or moved to the initial position), the constantly operating accessory 60 The control process of is continued as it is. That is, in this aspect, the constantly operating accessory is configured so as not to stop the operation in a state other than the initial state (or a position other than the initial position).

According to such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect in a constantly operating accessory that may cause a defect if the operation is stopped in a state other than the initial state (or a position other than the initial position). Can be done.

<Aspect 86>
In each of the above aspects, in the configuration in which the setting confirmation mode can be executed, the configuration may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress during the setting confirmation mode. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this embodiment, when the setting confirmation mode is started, the main control device 60 transmits a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, to the voice emission control device 90.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "setting confirmation mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays that the command is received. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress". Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

Then, when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the main control device 60 transmits a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode is terminated, to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

As described above, according to this aspect, the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and various lamps 47 notify that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can use the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode. Can be easily recognized. Further, even if an unauthorized person illegally shifts the pachinko machine 10 to the setting confirmation mode, the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and various types of the pachinko machine 10 indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode. Since the notification is provided by the lamp 47, the surrounding players and managers can notice that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress confirmation of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

Further, when the setting confirmation mode is started, the main control device 60 transmits information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. Then, when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the main control device 60 transmits information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been terminated to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal.

According to such a configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 10, the management screen by the hall computer indicates that the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode exists. It becomes possible to recognize. Therefore, for example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can notify that the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode exists by the management screen by the hall computer. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to suppress confirmation of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

<Aspect 87>
In each of the above modes, in the configuration in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed only after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off. good. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and a predetermined operation is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. May be. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In addition, the "keyhole for changing the setting" and the "key for changing the setting" in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the case of shifting to the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting in this embodiment and the embodiments described below, and the lottery is performed. Since it is also used when shifting to the setting confirmation mode to confirm the setting, it is also simply called "keyhole for setting" and "key for setting", respectively.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a power switch, a RAM clear button, a keyhole for setting, a button for changing settings, and an information display unit 45z. ing. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the power switch is operated to turn on the power and the execution of the game progress mode in which the game can proceed is started, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off. Otherwise, it is configured so that it cannot shift to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the setting change mode when all of the following conditions A1 to A3 are satisfied when the power is turned on (ON).
Condition A1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition A2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is located on the ON side. Condition A3: The RAM clear button is pressed. What you are doing

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the setting confirmation mode when all of the following conditions B1 to B3 are satisfied when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on).
Condition B1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition B2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is located on the ON side. Condition B3: The RAM clear button is pressed. Not doing

In the following, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 will explain an example of a work process for shifting the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the execution of the game progress mode is started, and then the pachinko machine. An example of the process executed in No. 10 will be described.

FIG. 49 is a process diagram showing a work process when the manager changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

In the process W101, the administrator inserts a key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 whose lottery setting is to be changed and turns it to the open side, and rotates the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 to bring it into the open state. At the same time, the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13 to be in an open state. By rotating the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operation units provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the process proceeds to step W102, and the administrator operates the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn off the power. Next, the process proceeds to step W103.

In the process W103, the administrator inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the setting changing side (hereinafter, also referred to as the ON side). Next, the process proceeds to step W104, and the administrator operates the power switch while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the setting change mode after starting (process W105), and the setting information of the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z (process W106). Specifically, for example, when the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is "1", "1" is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Next, the process proceeds to step W107.

In the process W107, the administrator presses the setting change button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to change the setting information. Specifically, for example, every time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5". → Since the order is switched in the order of “6” → “1” → “2” ..., the administrator presses the setting change button until the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z becomes the desired setting information. .. Next, the process proceeds to step W108.

In the process W108, the administrator confirms that the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the desired setting information, and then presses the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. And confirm the changed setting information. Next, the process proceeds to step W109, and the administrator returns the setting key to the OFF side and removes the key from the setting keyhole. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed (process W110), and the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z (process W111). Next, the process proceeds to step W112, and the manager removes the key from the cylinder lock 17 with the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 closed. By such a process, the manager can change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 50 is a process diagram showing a work process when the manager confirms the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

In the process W201, the administrator inserts the key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 for which the lottery setting is confirmed and turns it to the open side, and rotates the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 to open the open state. At the same time, the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13 to be in an open state. By rotating the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operation units provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the process proceeds to step W202, and the administrator operates the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn off the power. Next, the process proceeds to step W203.

In the process W203, the administrator inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the ON side. Next, the process proceeds to step W204, and the administrator operates the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the setting confirmation mode after starting (process W205), and the setting information of the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z (process W206). Specifically, for example, when the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is "1", "1" is blinking and displayed on the information display unit 45z. The administrator can confirm the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 by confirming the setting information blinking and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Next, the process proceeds to step W207.

In the step W207, the administrator confirms the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z, returns the setting key to the OFF side, and removes the key from the setting keyhole. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed (process W208), and the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z (process W209). Next, the process proceeds to step W210, and the manager removes the key from the cylinder lock 17 with the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 closed. By such a process, the manager can confirm the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a part of the main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 87 when the power is turned on.

In step S11201, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S11202 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. After that, the process proceeds to step S1123 to execute a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and started. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11203, the process proceeds to step S11204.

In step S11204, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S11204 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S11206, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S11206 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11206: YES), the process proceeds to step S11208 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11204 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11204: NO), and when it is determined in step S11206 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11206: NO). ), Proceed to step S11207 to turn on the RAM error flag. That is, the RAM error flag is a flag that is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM determination value is not normal, and the information stored in the main RAM 64 is stored in the main RAM 64. It is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11207, the process proceeds to step S11208.

In step S11208, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11208 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11208: NO), the process proceeds to step S11209, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

If it is determined in step S11209 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11209: NO), the process proceeds to step S11210, and whether or not the RAM error flag is ON. Is determined.

If it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11210: NO), the process proceeds to step S11211, and a power recovery process for returning to the state at the time of the previous power off is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S11211, the process proceeds to step S11212, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11210: YES), the process proceeds to step S11213 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11213, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, the ball entry for the starting port). Processing, game time control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM error flag is ON, the timer interrupt enable setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11209 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11209: YES), the process proceeds to step S11214, and the RAM error flag is ON. Determine if it exists.

If it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11214: NO), the process proceeds to step S11215 to execute the setting confirmation process. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S11215, the process proceeds to step S11216, and the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11217, and the power recovery flag is turned off. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11214: YES), the process proceeds to step S11218 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11218, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power failure monitoring processing) are executed, but other than necessary for the progress of the game. Processing (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game time control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM error flag is ON, the timer interrupt enable setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11208 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11208: YES), the process proceeds to step S11219, and whether the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11219 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11219: NO), the process proceeds to step S11220, and the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11220: NO), the process proceeds to step S11221.

In step S11221, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, the first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11221, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11220: YES), the process proceeds to step S11222 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11222, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power failure monitoring processing) are executed, but other than necessary for the progress of the game. Processing (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game time control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM error flag is ON, the timer interrupt enable setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11219 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11219: YES), the process proceeds to step S11223, and whether the RAM error flag is ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11223: NO), the process proceeds to step S11224, and the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S11225 to execute the setting change process. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed, and a process of accepting the change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11225, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11223: YES), the process proceeds to step S11226 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11226, the process proceeds to step S11227.

In step S11227, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is also deleted. Here, when the RAM error flag is ON, the reason for executing the second RAM clear process for erasing the setting information instead of the first RAM clear process will be described. When the RAM error flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal. For example, the setting information may be rewritten to the setting information not intended by the administrator due to noise or the like, or as the setting information. This is because there is a possibility that a numerical value other than the predetermined range may be stored even though only a numerical value within a predetermined range (for example, a numerical value from 1 to 6) can be taken. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM error flag is also turned off by the second RAM clearing process. After that, the process proceeds to step S11228 to execute the setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11228, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 87. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine in steps S11225 and S11228 in FIG.

In step S11301, the setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress. Please change the setting." Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress. Please change the setting." To the display control device 100. Then, the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress. Please change the setting." Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

Further, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has been started, the hall computer displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S1301, the process proceeds to step S11302.

In step S11302, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S11303, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6". To judge. If it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, when "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, noise or the like. If information other than the numerical value is stored, the process proceeds to step S11304, and the setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as an initial value in the setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S11305.

In step S11305, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined in step S11305 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed (step S11305: NO), the process proceeds to step S11306 to determine whether or not the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307 to update the setting information of the lottery setting. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as the setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". After that, the process returns to step S11303 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated setting information is within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button is not pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the process of step S11307, and the setting information is predetermined. Determine if the value is within the range.

If it is determined in step S11305 described above that the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11305: YES), the process proceeds to step S11308 to determine whether or not the setting key is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11308: NO), step S11308 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key is on the OFF side (step S11308: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309. That is, after the RAM clear button is pressed, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S11309. When the setting key is turned to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step S11309.

In step S11309, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S11310.

In step S11310, the setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

Further, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays the information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11310, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information is displayed on the management screen. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 87. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine in step S11215 of FIG.

In step S11401, the setting confirmation notification start process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "setting confirmation mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays that the command is received. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress". Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

Further, in the setting confirmation notification start process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S11401, the process proceeds to step S11402.

In step S11402, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is blinked and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S11403.

In step S11403, it is determined whether or not the setting key is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11403: NO), step S11403 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key is on the OFF side (step S11403: YES), the process proceeds to step S11404. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S11404. When the setting key is turned to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step S11404.

In step S11404, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S11405.

In step S11405, the setting confirmation notification end process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end processing, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

Further, in the setting confirmation notification end process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended displays the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11405, this setting confirmation process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. , Executes the setting change mode when the RAM clear switch is ON, while when the power is turned on (when the power is ON), the setting key, frame opening switch and door opening switch are all ON. When the setting is set to and the RAM clear switch is turned off, the setting confirmation mode is executed. That is, in this embodiment, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the power of the activated pachinko machine 10 (for example, the game progress mode is being executed) is kept ON. In order to shift the started pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine 10 must be turned off once and then turned on again while performing the above-mentioned predetermined operation. It is configured as follows.

Generally, in the game hall, the equipment is arranged so that a person other than the administrator cannot operate the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the purpose is to obtain an illegal profit. Even if there is a person who tries to change or confirm the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as an illegal person), the illegal person who is not the administrator can use the power supply provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. It is difficult to operate the switch. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally shifting the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a voice or an alarm sound indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been started is output from the speaker 46, so that a lottery setting is made without the unauthorized person not being noticed by the surroundings. Can be made more difficult to change or confirm. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally changing or confirming the lottery setting.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to shift the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is necessary to open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, so that an unauthorized person is not noticed by the surroundings. It can be even more difficult to change or confirm the lottery settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally changing or confirming the lottery setting.

Further, in this embodiment, the start-up process from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the execution of the game progress mode is started (the period during which the processes from step S11201 to step S11228 in FIG. 51 are executed). In (middle), the game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed. That is, during the start-up process, the game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and only the setting information of the lottery setting can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the administrator from wondering whether the information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the setting information of the lottery setting or the game history information during the start-up process. It is possible to prevent the administrator from misunderstanding and recognizing the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z as game history information.

Further, in this embodiment, even if an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is performed when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is normal, and the RAM is determined. If it is determined that the value is not normal, the setting confirmation mode is not executed, the main RAM 64 is notified that it is abnormal, and the game is not shifted to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode and the game progress mode are executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. It can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change mode includes an operation of pressing the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 performs a RAM clear process (RAM clear process) when executing the setting change mode. The first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process) is executed. That is, in order to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode, the administrator must operate the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 also executes the RAM clear process when the setting change mode is executed. Generally, the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 recognizes that the RAM clear process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed. Therefore, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the administrator operates the RAM clear button to execute the setting change mode, not only the setting change mode is executed but also the RAM clear process is executed. It is possible to strongly recognize that it will be done. As a result, for example, when the administrator wants to start the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining the game state such as the high probability mode and restart the game progress mode from the state when the power was turned off last time, that is, the pachinko machine 10. If the RAM clear process should not be executed at startup, it is possible to ensure that the setting change mode that accompanies the execution of the RAM clear process should not be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, the first RAM clear process that does not erase the setting information of the lottery setting and the second RAM clear process that erases the setting information as well can be executed. , Of the information stored in the main RAM 64, the processing process corresponding to both the processing process in which the setting information is left and the other information should be erased and the processing process in which the setting information is also erased. Can be realized. For example, if the setting information is normal and is maintained, and other information is a processing process that should be erased, the first RAM clear processing is executed, and the setting information becomes an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. In the case of a processing process that may have been completed, a configuration for executing the second RAM clear processing can be realized.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the power recovery flag is not ON or the RAM determination value is not normal when the power is turned on, the main RAM 64 sets. After notifying that it is abnormal, it does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again, the operation for executing the setting change mode is performed and the setting change mode is not executed, or the game is played. It is configured not to execute a game progress mode that allows progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. can.

Further, in this embodiment, since the RAM clear process is executed when the setting change mode is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the main before the lottery setting is changed. It is possible to prevent an inconsistency from occurring with the information stored in the side RAM 64 and a problem in the progress of the game.

In this embodiment, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225 after the first RAM clear process is executed in step S11224 of FIG. 51. The configuration may be such that the first RAM clear process is executed after the setting change mode) is executed. With such a configuration, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state stored in the main RAM 64 are deleted while maintaining the setting information of the lottery setting set by the setting change process. Can be done. Further, when it is determined in step S11223 of FIG. 51 that the RAM error flag is not ON, the setting change process is performed after executing the setting change process (setting change mode) and then executing the first RAM clear process. If the setting key is turned to the OFF side and removed from the setting keyhole without changing the lottery setting (or without confirming the changed setting information) in (setting change mode), the first RAM clear process is performed. It may be configured to shift to the game progress mode without executing. According to such a configuration, the setting change process (setting change mode) was executed by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button in a state where the setting key was unintentionally turned to the ON side. Even in this case, by not changing the setting information of the lottery setting (or not confirming the changed setting information), the execution of the first RAM clear process is avoided, and the game progresses from the state when the power was turned off last time. It is possible to restart the mode.

Further, in this embodiment, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225 after the first RAM clear process is executed in step S11224 of FIG. 51. Instead of this configuration, the second RAM clear process is executed. May be configured to execute the setting change process (setting change mode) after executing. Even in such a configuration, after the lottery setting is erased by the second RAM clear process and the initial value (for example, "1") is stored as the setting information, the lottery setting is changed to the desired setting information by the setting change process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while the setting information of the lottery setting remains at the initial value (for example, "1").

Further, in this embodiment, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228 after the second RAM clear process is executed in step S11227 of FIG. 51. The configuration may be such that the first RAM clear process is executed after the setting change mode) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to erase various information stored in the main RAM 64 determined to be abnormal while maintaining the setting information of the lottery setting set by the setting change process.

Further, in this embodiment, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228 after the second RAM clear process is executed in step S11227 of FIG. 51. Instead of this configuration, the first RAM clear process is executed. May be configured to execute the setting change process (setting change mode) after executing. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the setting information of the lottery setting is an abnormal value, and the setting information of the lottery setting is maintained as an abnormal value even after the execution of the first RAM clearing process. However, the setting information of the lottery setting can be reset to an appropriate value by the setting change process (setting change mode).

Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined in steps S11210, S11214 and S11220 of FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality notification process is executed and the game progress mode is not entered. However, instead of this configuration, when it is determined in step S11210, step S11214, and step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality notification process is executed, and then the second RAM clear process is executed to set the lottery. The setting information may be set to an initial value (for example, "1"), and then the game progress mode may be set.

Further, in this embodiment, after the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed in step S11215 of FIG. 51, the power recovery process is executed in step S11216, and the power recovery flag is turned off in step S11217. Instead of this configuration, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) may be executed after the power recovery process and the process of turning off the power recovery flag are executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the setting information is updated when the setting change button is pressed in step S11306 of FIG. 52, and the setting information is fixed when the RAM clear button is pressed in step S11305. The operation for updating and confirming the setting information is not limited to this. For example, the setting information is updated when the RAM clear button is pressed, and the setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or longer. It may be configured to make it. According to this configuration, since the setting change button can be omitted, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, the setting information may be fixed when the setting key is turned off, and the setting information is fixed when the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensor provided at the predetermined entry slot. It may be configured.

Further, in this embodiment, the conditions for executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state, but the inner frame 13 and the front are configured. It is not essential for the condition that the door frame 14 is in the open state. For example, the condition includes that the inner frame 13 is in the open state and that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The configuration may not be included, and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state may be included in the condition, and the configuration that the inner frame 13 is in the open state may not be included in the condition. Further, neither the inner frame 13 nor the front door frame 14 may be configured to be included in the conditions.

Further, in this aspect, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode is a display mode in which the setting information is lit, and the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting confirmation mode is a display mode in which the information display unit 45z blinks. Although there is a certain configuration, the display mode of the setting information in each mode is not limited to these, and for example, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode is a display mode in which the setting information is blinking and is in the setting confirmation mode. The setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, the game progress mode is executed as it is after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are completed. However, instead of this configuration, after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are completed, the game progress mode is executed as it is. A predetermined operation for temporarily turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode in a configuration that shifts to a standby state in which the game cannot be progressed without executing the game progress mode. When the power is turned on without doing this, the game progress mode may be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, in step S11302 of the setting change process (FIG. 52), the setting information of the lottery setting (for example, the setting information at the time of the previous power off) stored in the main RAM 64 is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. However, instead of this configuration, the setting information of the lottery setting is set regardless of the value of the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 at the start of the setting change process. May be set to an initial value (for example, “1”), and the setting information set to the initial value may be lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. With such a configuration, the RAM clearing process of erasing (clearing 0) all the information stored in the main RAM 64 including the setting information of the lottery setting is executed before the setting change processing is executed. It becomes possible to do.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the period when the inner frame 13 is in the open state, the inner frame 13 is irrespective of whether or not the setting change process (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is being executed. May be configured to continue to notify that is in the open state. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "the inner frame is open" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. Similarly, during the period when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the front door frame 14 is operated regardless of whether the setting change process (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is being executed. It may be configured to keep notifying that it is in the open state. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "the door is open" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult for an unauthorized person to execute the setting change process (setting change mode) and the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) on the pachinko machine 10 without being noticed by the surroundings. can.

<Aspect 88>
In the above aspect 87, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the power recovery flag is not ON or the RAM determination value is not normal when the power is turned on, the main RAM 64 is abnormal. After notifying that, the configuration does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed, but instead of this configuration, when the power is turned on, the power recovery flag is not ON. When it is determined or when it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, it is notified that the main RAM 64 is abnormal even if the operation for executing the setting change mode is not performed. Then, the setting change mode may be executed, and then the game progress mode may be set. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a part of the main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 88 when the power is turned on.

In step S11501, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S11502 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. After that, the process proceeds to step S11503, and a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and started is executed. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11503, the process proceeds to step S11504.

In step S11504, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S11504 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11504: YES), the process proceeds to step S11505 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S11506, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S11506 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

In step S11507, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11507 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11507: NO), the process proceeds to step S11508, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

If it is determined in step S11508 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11509 and returns to the state when the power was turned off last time. Execute the power recovery process. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S11509, the process proceeds to step S11510, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11508 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11508: YES), the process proceeds to step S11511 to execute the setting confirmation process. .. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11511, the process proceeds to step S11512, and the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11513, and the power recovery flag is turned off. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

If it is determined in step S11507 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11507: YES), the process proceeds to step S11514, and whether the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11514 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11514: NO), the process proceeds to step S11515.

In step S11515, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, the first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11515, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

If it is determined in step S11514 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11514: YES), the process proceeds to step S11516 and the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process is executed. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S11517 to execute the setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11517k, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11504 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11504: NO), and when it is determined in step S11506 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11506: NO). ), Proceed to step S11518 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11518, the process proceeds to step S11519.

In step S11519, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is also deleted. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S11520 to execute the setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11520, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

As described above, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON even if the operation for executing the setting change mode is not performed when the power is turned on, and , It is determined whether or not the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is normal, and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, the second RAM is cleared after notifying that the main RAM 64 is abnormal. After executing the processing and setting change mode to confirm the setting information, the game shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. can.

For example, when it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON even if the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is performed when the power is turned on, and the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is normal. If it is determined whether or not the RAM is normal and the RAM determination value is not normal, the setting confirmation mode is not executed, the main RAM 64 is notified that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, and then the second RAM clear process is performed. After executing the setting change mode and confirming the setting information, the game shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. can.

<Aspect 89>
In the main process (FIG. 51) in the above aspect 87, after determining whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11208), whether the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. The configuration was set to determine whether or not (step S11209 and step S11219), but instead of this configuration, after determining whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON, the RAM It may be configured to determine whether or not the clear button is pressed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a part of the main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 89 when the power is turned on.

In step S11601, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S11602 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. After that, the process proceeds to step S1163, and a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and started is executed. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11603, the process proceeds to step S11604.

In step S11604, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S11604 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11604: YES), the process proceeds to step S11605 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S11606, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S11606 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11606: YES), the process proceeds to step S11608 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11604 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11604: NO), and when it is determined in step S11606 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11606: NO). ), Proceed to step S11607, and turns on the RAM error flag. That is, the RAM error flag is a flag that is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM determination value is not normal, and the information stored in the main RAM 64 is stored in the main RAM 64. It is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11607, the process proceeds to step S11608.

In step S11608, it is determined whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on. If it is determined in step S11608 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11608: NO), the process proceeds to step S11609, and whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. Is determined.

If it is determined in step S11609 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11609: NO), the process proceeds to step S11610, and it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11611, and a power recovery process for returning to the state when the previous power was turned off is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S11611, the process proceeds to step S11612, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11610: YES), the process proceeds to step S11613 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11613, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, start) are executed. Do not perform the ball entry process for the mouth, the game turn control process, etc.). Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM error flag is ON, the timer interrupt enable setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11609: YES), the process proceeds to step S11614, and it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11614: NO), the process proceeds to step S11615.

In step S11615, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, the first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11615, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11614: YES), the process proceeds to step S11616 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11616, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power failure monitoring processing) are executed, but other than necessary for the progress of the game. Processing (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game time control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM error flag is ON, the timer interrupt enable setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11608 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11608: YES), the process proceeds to step S11617, and whether the RAM clear button is ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11617 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11617: YES), the process proceeds to step S11618 to determine whether or not the RAM error flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11618: NO), the process proceeds to step S11619 to execute the setting confirmation process. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11619, the process proceeds to step S11620, and the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11621, and the power recovery flag is turned off. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11618: YES), the process proceeds to step S11622 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11622, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power failure monitoring processing) are executed, but other than necessary for the progress of the game. Processing (for example, ball entry processing for the starting port, game time control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM error flag is ON, the timer interrupt enable setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11217 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11217: YES), the process proceeds to step S11223, and it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11623: NO), the process proceeds to step S11624, and the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S11625 to execute the setting change process. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed, and a process of accepting the change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11625, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11623: YES), the process proceeds to step S11626 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11626, the process proceeds to step S11627.

In step S11627, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is also deleted. Here, when the RAM error flag is ON, the reason for executing the second clear process for erasing the setting information instead of the first clear process will be described. When the RAM error flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal. For example, the setting information may be rewritten to the setting information not intended by the administrator due to noise or the like, or as the setting information. This is because there is a possibility that a numerical value other than the predetermined range may be stored even though only a numerical value within a predetermined range (for example, a numerical value from 1 to 6) can be taken. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM error flag is also turned off by the second clear process. After that, the process proceeds to step S11628 to execute the setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11628, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

Even with the configuration of this aspect described above, the same effect as that of the above aspect 87 can be obtained. Further, various modified configurations described in the above aspect 87 can also be applied to this aspect.

<Aspect 90>
In the main process (FIG. 54) in the above aspect 88, after determining whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11507), whether the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. The configuration was set to determine whether or not (step S11508 and step S11514), but instead of this configuration, after determining whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON, the RAM It may be configured to determine whether or not the clear button is pressed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a part of the main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 90 when the power is turned on.

In step S11701, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S11702 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. After that, the process proceeds to step S11703, and a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and started is executed. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11703, the process proceeds to step S11704.

In step S11704, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S11704 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11704: YES), the process proceeds to step S11705 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S11706, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S11706 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11706: YES), the process proceeds to step S11707.

In step S11707, it is determined whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on. If it is determined in step S11707 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11707: NO), the process proceeds to step S11708, and whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. Is determined.

If it is determined in step S11708 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11708: NO), the process proceeds to step S11709, and a power recovery process for returning to the state when the previous power was turned off is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S11709, the process proceeds to step S11710 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11708 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11708: YES), the process proceeds to step S11711 to execute the first RAM clear process. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, the first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11711, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

If it is determined in step S11707 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11707: YES), the process proceeds to step S11712, and whether the RAM clear button is ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11712 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11712: NO), the process proceeds to step S11713 to execute the setting confirmation process. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11713, the process proceeds to step S11714, and the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11715, and the power recovery flag is turned off. After that, it shifts to the normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt disable setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can be progressed (the game progress mode is started).

If it is determined in step S11712 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11712: YES), the process proceeds to step S11716 to execute the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process. After that, the process proceeds to step S11717 to execute the setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11717, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11704 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11704: NO), and when it is determined in step S11706 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11706: NO). ), Proceed to step S11718 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11718, the process proceeds to step S11719.

In step S11719, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is also deleted. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step S11720 to execute the setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11720, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game processing.

Even with the configuration of this aspect described above, the same effect as that of the above aspect 88 can be obtained. Further, various modified configurations described in the above aspect 88 can also be applied to this aspect.

<Aspect 91>
In the setting change process (FIG. 52) in each of the above embodiments, the setting information of the lottery setting is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11305), but instead of this configuration, the setting key is used. When it is turned off, the setting information of the lottery setting may be fixed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 91. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes included in the setting change process shown in FIG. 52. The main difference from the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 is that in FIG. 52, the process of confirming the changed setting information is to press the RAM clear button (step S11305), whereas in this embodiment, the process is to press the RAM clear button. The process of confirming the changed setting information is to set the setting key to the OFF side (step S11305a), and the process of step S11308 of FIG. 52 is omitted accordingly. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S11301, the setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "setting change mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays that the command is received. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress". Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to blink by alternately repeating turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

Further, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has been started, the hall computer displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S1301, the process proceeds to step S11302.

In step S11302, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S11303, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6". To judge. If it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305a. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, when "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, noise or the like. If information other than the numerical value is stored, the process proceeds to step S11304, and the setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as an initial value in the setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S11305a.

In step S11305a, it is determined whether or not the setting key is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11305a that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11305a: NO), the process proceeds to step S11306, and it is determined whether or not the setting change button is pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307 to update the setting information of the lottery setting. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as the setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". After that, the process returns to step S11303 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated setting information is within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button is not pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the process of step S11307, and the setting information is predetermined. Determine if the value is within the range.

If it is determined in step S11305a described above that the setting key is on the OFF side (step S11305a: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309, and control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is performed. finish. Then, the process proceeds to step S11310.

In step S11310, the setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end processing, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

Further, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended, the hall computer displays the information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11310, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information is displayed on the management screen. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change.

According to the configuration of this embodiment described above, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button in order to confirm the changed setting information can be omitted, so that the work required for the administrator to change the setting information. The process can be simplified.

<Aspect 92>
In each of the above modes, in the configuration in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed, the main display unit 45 can advance the game while the setting change mode is being executed and the setting confirmation mode is being executed. A display pattern (display mode) that is not displayed during execution of the mode may be displayed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

As described above, the main display unit 45 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units. Specifically, the main display unit 45 includes a first symbol display unit 37a composed of a plurality of segment light emitting units, a second symbol display unit 37b composed of a plurality of segment light emitting units, and a first hold composed of a plurality of LED lamps. It is composed of a display unit 37c, a second hold display unit 37d composed of a plurality of LED lamps, a normal drawing unit 38 composed of a plurality of LED lamps, and a round display unit 39 composed of a plurality of LED lamps.

Then, the main display unit 45 controls each light emitting unit so as to reflect the progress of the game during the execution of the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. During the execution of the progress mode, all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 are not turned on at the same time, and all the light emitting units are not in a synchronously blinking state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main display unit 45 executes control to simultaneously turn on all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 while the setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed is being executed. During the execution of the setting confirmation mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be confirmed, the control of synchronously blinking all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the administrator or the like to identify whether the current pachinko machine 10 is in the game progress mode, the setting change mode, or the setting confirmation mode. Further, according to such a configuration, for example, it is not necessary to newly add a light emitting unit for mode display for identifying the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the main display unit 45, so that the pachinko machine 10 does not have to be newly added. By only changing the control program of the pachinko machine 10 without changing the hardware configuration, it is possible to change the configuration so that the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be identified by an administrator or the like.

The main display unit 45 executes a control to simultaneously blink all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 while the setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed is being executed, and the lottery setting is performed. During the execution of the setting confirmation mode in which the setting information of the above can be confirmed, the control for simultaneously lighting all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 may be executed.

Further, if the display mode displayed by the main display unit 45 during the execution of the setting change mode and the execution of the setting confirmation mode is a display mode (lighting pattern) that is not displayed during the execution of the game progress mode, the main display unit The configuration is not limited to lighting and blinking all the light emitting units constituting the 45, and other display modes may be used.

Further, one light emitting unit (for example, LED) for mode display is added to the main display unit 45, the light emitting unit is turned off while the game progress mode is being executed, and the light emitting unit is turned on while the setting change mode is being executed. , The light emitting unit may be blinked while the setting confirmation mode is being executed. With such a configuration, the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be clearly recognized by an administrator or the like, and the pachinko machine can be pachinko machined by using the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100, and the symbol display device 41. The configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration for notifying the current mode of the machine 10.

In addition, two light emitting units (for example, LEDs) for mode display are added to the main display unit 45 (first light emitting unit and second light emitting unit), and the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit are added while the game progress mode is being executed. The first light emitting part is turned on and the second light emitting part is turned off while the setting change mode is being executed, and the second light emitting part is turned on while the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The first light emitting unit may be turned off. With such a configuration, the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be clearly recognized by an administrator or the like, and the pachinko machine can be pachinko machined by using the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100, and the symbol display device 41. The configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration for notifying the current mode of the machine 10. Further, since it is only necessary to control the two light emitting units added to the main display unit 45, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity due to the addition of a control program or a lighting pattern.

<Aspect 93>
In each of the above embodiments, in the configuration in which the information display unit 45z includes four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are set for a predetermined time ( For example, it may be lit for 3 seconds and then blinked synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds).

With such a configuration, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection in the light emitting unit constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a light emitting part that is always lit due to a malfunction and does not turn off. For example, if the segment light emitting unit G and the segment light emitting unit D of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 do not light up due to a problem, the control to display "3" on the right middle 7 segment display 45z3 is executed. Even in this case, since the segment light emitting unit G and the segment light emitting unit D are not lit, "7" is displayed on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the administrator may misidentify the numerical information of the game history information. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection in the light emitting unit constituting the information display unit 45z. In addition to this, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a light emitting unit that is always lit and does not turn off due to a defect, so that such misidentification can be suppressed.

Further, an information display unit inspection button for inspecting the information display unit 45z is provided, and when the information display unit inspection button is pressed, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are set for a predetermined time (for example, 3). It may be configured to light up for a second) and then blink synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds).

According to such a configuration, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is not turned on, by pressing the information display unit inspection button, the light emitting unit constituting the information display unit 45z does not light up due to a defect such as disconnection. It is possible to confirm whether or not the part is present, and it is also possible to confirm whether or not there is a light emitting part that is always lit and does not turn off due to a defect. That is, it is not necessary to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once and then turn it on in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the information display unit 45z, so that the work efficiency of the administrator can be improved.

Further, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned base (during the normal mode) is calculated and stored, and the stored base (during the normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the main control device 60 measures the number of passages through the discharge passage N _OUT . The section is divided every time the number reaches 60,000, and the base (during the normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section. The information display unit 45z has a plurality of types of bases (normal mode) having different calculation target sections. It may be configured to switch and display middle).

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment calculates and stores a base (during the normal mode) of a maximum of seven sections, and the information display unit 45z has a base corresponding to a maximum of seven sections (normal mode). Middle) is switched and displayed. The seven sections are as follows.

-"BL": Base during measurement (during normal mode)
Outgoing rate calculated in the current section until the number of N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage currently being measured reaches 60,000 (in normal mode)
・ "B1": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
The ball ejection rate calculated in the section immediately before the section currently being measured in the section where the measured number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT has reached 60,000 (during the normal mode).
・ "B2": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
The ball ejection rate calculated in the section two before the section currently being measured in the section where the measured number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT has reached 60,000 (during the normal mode).
・ "B3": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
The ball ejection rate calculated in the section three times before the section currently being measured in the section where the measured number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT has reached 60,000 (during the normal mode).
・ "B4": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
The ball ejection rate calculated in the section four times before the section currently being measured in the section where the measured number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT has reached 60,000 (during the normal mode).
・ "B5": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
The ball ejection rate calculated in the section 5 before the section currently being measured in the section where the measured number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT reached 60,000 (during the normal mode).
・ "B6": Base measured in the previous section (during normal mode)
The ball ejection rate calculated in the section 6 before the section currently being measured in the section where the measured number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT reached 60,000 (during the normal mode).

In the initial state where the game history basic information such as the number of balls entered into each ball entry section is not stored, the measurement of the section corresponding to "bL" is started, and in the section corresponding to "bL" at any time at a predetermined timing. Calculate the base (during normal mode). When the number of passing through the discharge passages N _OUT during measurement reaches 60,000, the game history basic information stored as the section for "bL" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b1", and the section corresponding to "bL" is newly assigned. Start measurement. Then, when the number of exit passages N _OUT reaches 60,000 in the section corresponding to the newly started measurement "bL", the game history basic information stored as the section for "b1" corresponds to "b2". The game history basic information stored as a section for "bL" is shifted to a section corresponding to "b1", and measurement of a section corresponding to "bL" is newly started. In this way, every time the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000, the game history basic information for each section is shifted, and the game history basic information is transferred up to the section corresponding to "b6" at the maximum. Remember. Then, when the game history basic information is stored as a section corresponding to "b6" and the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passages during measurement reaches 60,000, it is stored as a section corresponding to "b6". The game history basic information is deleted, and the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "b5" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b6".

That is, in this embodiment, the game history basic information up to the measurement of the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in a maximum of 60,000 × 7 sections is accumulated and stored.

Then, in this embodiment, the information display unit 45z switches and displays the base (during the normal mode) of the stored plurality of sections every 5 seconds. Specifically, for example, when the bases (during the normal mode) of the five sections of "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3", and "b4" are stored, the information display unit 45z Is 5 in the order of "bL.31"-> "b1.31"-> "b2.31"-> "b3.31"-> "b4.30"-> "bL.31"-> "b1.31" ... The base of each section (during normal mode) is repeatedly displayed while switching every second.

According to such a configuration, the inspector or the manager of the gaming machine can compare the bases (during the normal mode) for each section by checking the display of the information display unit 45z. As a result, for example, when the value of the base (during the normal mode) becomes an abnormal value due to a malfunction or fraud in the pachinko machine 10, at what timing in the past the malfunction occurred. Can be predicted.

In this embodiment, the section is divided every time the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage reaches 60,000, the base (during the normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and the base (normal mode) stored for each section is stored. The middle) is switched every predetermined time (for example, every 5 seconds) and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Instead of this configuration, RTC96 is provided to divide the section every time the date changes and divide it by date. The base (during the normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and the base (during the normal mode) stored for each date (for each section) is switched to every predetermined time (for example, every 5 seconds) and the information display unit 45z. It may be configured to be displayed on. Specifically, for example, "bL" is the section of the day, "b1" is the section one day ago, "b2" is the section two days ago, "b3" is the section three days ago, and "b4" is the section four days ago. , "B5" is defined as a section 5 days ago, and "b6" is defined as a section 6 days ago.

According to such a configuration, the inspector or the manager of the gaming machine can compare the bases (during the normal mode) for each section divided by date by checking the display of the information display unit 45z. Is possible. As a result, for example, when the value of the base (during the normal mode) becomes an abnormal value due to a malfunction or fraud in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict the date on which the malfunction or the like occurred. It will be possible.

In addition, basic game history information such as the number of balls entered into each entry section and game history information such as the base (during normal mode) are stored in the main RAM 64, and the pachinko machine is in a state where the RAM clear button is pressed. After the game history basic information and the game history information are erased in the configuration in which the game history basic information and the game history information are erased (cleared) by the RAM clearing process executed by turning on the power of 10. Until the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), when the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the type information of the game history information is displayed, but the game is played. The numerical information of the history information may not be displayed.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored as game history information, and the stored base (during normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the game history basics are performed by RAM clear processing. After the information and the game history information are deleted, "bL." Is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z until the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches 300, and the numerical information display area. May be configured to display "--- (two hyphens)".

According to such a configuration, when the inspector or the manager of the gaming machine displays "bL .--" on the information display unit 45z, the gaming history basic information and the gaming history information are deleted. Later, or after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer's factory, it can be recognized that the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage has not reached 300. Further, for example, when a manufacturer ships a pachinko machine 10, a number of gaming balls may be inserted into each entry portion to check the operation. In this case, the number of game balls that have entered each entry section is measured in a situation that is not the case when the game is played properly. Therefore, for example, the first measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT is 300. Until the number is reached, there is a possibility that the check by the manufacturer will have a large effect on the basic game history information and the game history information. Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, "bL .--" is displayed on the information display unit 45z until the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage reaches 300, and the base (during the normal mode) is displayed. Since the numerical information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the administrator from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 may have a problem by checking the numerical value that was greatly affected by the check by the manufacturer. can do.

<Aspect 94>
In each of the above modes, in the configuration in which the game history information is calculated for each of a plurality of sections, the game history basic information corresponding to the section is stored up to the upper limit, and after the game history information is calculated and stored, the game in the section is stored. The game history basic information, which is the basis for calculating the history information, may be deleted. Specifically, for example, after the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 and the game history information is calculated and stored, the game history basic information that is the basis for calculating the game history information is It may be configured to be erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the game history basic information.

<Aspect 95>
In each of the above aspects, in a configuration in which the information display unit 45z switches and sequentially displays a plurality of bases (during normal mode) corresponding to each of the plurality of sections, the information display unit 45z is displayed for a predetermined time at the time of the switching. All the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to H and DP light emitting units) of the constituent 7-segment display may be turned off for a predetermined time. Hereinafter, the configuration of this embodiment will be specifically described.

FIG. 58 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z. In FIG. 58, the bases of the three sections “bL”, “b1”, and “b2” (during the normal mode) are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the bases of these three sections (normal mode) are stored in the main RAM 64. An example is shown in which (middle) is switched and displayed by the information display unit 45z.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 45z circulates and repeatedly displays the base (during the normal mode) in the order of going back to the past section. More specifically, after displaying "bL", which is the base under measurement (during normal mode) corresponding to the latest section, until a predetermined display duration (for example, 5000 ms) elapses, it is displayed in the previous section. After displaying the base (during normal mode) in the retroactive order and displaying the base (during normal mode) corresponding to the oldest section among the sections stored in the main RAM 64, the latest measurement is being performed again. "BL" which is the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to the section of is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the information display unit 45z starts displaying the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to one of the plurality of sections, and the display duration of the base (during the normal mode) (for example, 5000 ms). ) Has elapsed, after turning off all the light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to H and DP light emitting parts) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z for a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms), 1 The display of the base (during normal mode) corresponding to the previous section is started. That is, in this embodiment, when switching the display of the base corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) to the display of the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode), the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z is displayed. All the light emitting parts (segment light emitting parts A to H and DP light emitting parts) of the device are turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms).

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the information display unit 45z continuously displays "bL", which is the base under measurement (during normal mode) corresponding to the section currently being measured, in a display mode such as "bL.31" for 5000 ms. The lighting is displayed, and then all the light emitting parts are turned off for 300 ms. After that, "b1", which is the measured base (during normal mode) corresponding to the previous section, is continuously lit for 5000 ms in a display mode such as "b1.30", and then all the light emitting parts are displayed for 300 ms. Turns off. After that, "b2", which is the measured base (during normal mode) corresponding to the previous section, is continuously lit for 5000 ms in a display mode such as "b2.31", and then all the light emitting parts are displayed. Turns off for 300 ms. After that, again, "bL", which is the base under measurement (during the normal mode) corresponding to the section currently being measured, is continuously lit and displayed for 5000 ms in a display mode such as "bL.31". In this way, the information display unit 45z circulates and repeatedly displays the base (during the normal mode) of each section stored in the main RAM 64 while sandwiching the all-off state of 300 ms.

Next, a case where the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages during measurement reaches 60,000 will be described.

FIG. 59 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z when the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. In FIG. 59, the bases (during normal mode) of the three sections “bL”, “b1”, and “b2” are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the information display unit 45z displays “b1”. The display shows an example in which the number of N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000.

In this embodiment, when the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages in the section currently being measured reaches 60,000 while the base corresponding to any section (during the normal mode) is being displayed, the information display unit 45z is displayed. Even before the display duration (5000 ms) of the displayed base (during the normal mode) has elapsed, the display of the displayed base (during the normal mode) is terminated. Then, the display according to the display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT of the number passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 is started, and the display mode is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms). In this aspect, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000. Then, during the period until the predetermined period (for example, 2000 ms) in which the four hyphens are turned on elapses, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 is on the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to the section currently being measured. A new "bL" is calculated after executing the process of calculating the final value as a certain "bL" and the process of shifting the base (in the normal mode) corresponding to each section to the past section one by one. The process of measuring the number of game balls entering each entrance in the current section and calculating the current value of "bL" is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 59, the number of discharge passages N _OUT in the section being measured is 60,000 before the lapse of 5000 ms, which is the display duration of the “b1” while displaying “b1”. The information display unit 45z ends the display of the "b1", starts the display in the display mode in which the four hyphens are lit, and continues the display mode for 2000 ms.

After that, in this embodiment, the circulation display is started from the newly started "bL" based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) from the start of the display mode in which the four hyphens are turned on. That is, after the display in the display mode in which the four hyphens are turned on is completed, the display is restarted from the newly started "bL" regardless of the section of the base (during the normal mode) in which the display is interrupted. ..

In this embodiment, the number of discharge passages N _OUT in the section being measured is 60,000 at the timing before 300 ms has elapsed from the start of the display mode in which all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off. When it reaches, the information display unit 45z ends the display mode in which all the light emitting units are turned off, and shifts to the display mode in which the above-mentioned four hyphens are lit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the information display unit 45z has a display mode (for example, a display mode for displaying "bL") that displays the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to one of the plurality of sections. After shifting to a display mode that does not display any base (during normal mode) (for example, a display mode in which all segment light emitting parts are turned off), a display that displays the base (during normal mode) corresponding to other sections. The mode shifts to a mode (for example, a display mode for displaying "b1"). Therefore, according to this aspect, for the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10, the base displayed on the information display unit 45z (during the normal mode) corresponds to another section (during the normal mode). It is possible to clearly recognize that the switch has been made to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator and the like from erroneously recognizing the displayed base (in normal mode) section without noticing that the displayed base (in normal mode) section has been switched. can do. In particular, in this embodiment, even if the base (in normal mode) section is different, the base (in normal mode) numerical value itself may be the same, and the base being displayed in this situation (in normal mode) is in the same situation. ) Is switched, only the display of the second character (for example, L, 1, 2, etc.) indicating the section of the base (during the normal mode) is changed. Assuming that the display mode directly shifts from the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode), the administrator etc. It becomes difficult to notice that the section of the displayed base (during normal mode) has been switched. On the other hand, in this embodiment, before shifting from the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode), Since it shifts to a display mode in which none of the bases (during normal mode) is displayed (for example, a display mode in which all segment light emitting parts are turned off), even if the values of the bases (during normal mode) before and after switching are the same. , The administrator and the like can clearly recognize that the base displayed on the information display unit 45z (during the normal mode) has been switched to the base corresponding to another section (during the normal mode).

Further, in this aspect, the transition mode in the case of shifting from the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode) is This is a transitional mode in which all light emitting units are turned off for 300 ms. On the other hand, the transition mode in the case of shifting the display mode based on the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 is the shift mode in which the four hyphens are lit for 2000 ms. That is, in this aspect, a transition mode in which the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) is changed to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode) is used. The transition mode is different from the case where the display mode is shifted based on the fact that the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000. Therefore, according to this aspect, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the display mode of displaying the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to the other section by recognizing the difference in the transition mode. Or, it is possible to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the display mode changes based on the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages in the section being measured reaches 60,000. As a result, for example, the manager or the like shifts the base of each section (during the normal mode) to the past section one by one because the number of discharge passages N _OUT in the section being measured reaches 60,000. It is possible to suppress the continuation of the confirmation work of the base (during the normal mode) without noticing it.

Further, in this embodiment, when the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages in the section being measured reaches 60,000 while the base (during the normal mode) is being displayed, the display of the base being displayed (during the normal mode) is continued. Even before the lapse of time, the display mode (display mode in which four hyphens are lit) corresponding to the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000. Therefore, according to this aspect, the manager or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize at an early stage that the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section during the measurement has reached 60,000. Further, according to this aspect, it is possible to display the base (during the normal mode) of each section after the shift due to the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages in the section being measured reaching 60,000 at an early stage. Therefore, the manager or the like can confirm the base (during the normal mode) for each section after the shift due to the number N _OUT of the number of passing through the discharge passages in the section being measured reaching 60,000 at an early stage. The efficiency of inspection for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, when the number of discharge passages N _OUT in the section being measured reaches 60,000, the display corresponding to the number N _OUT corresponding to the number of passages in the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000. Since the mode (display mode in which the four hyphens are turned on) is continued for a predetermined time (2000 ms in this mode), the final value as "bL" is used by the main CPU 62x by using the period until the predetermined time elapses. It is possible to secure the time for executing the process of calculating the above and the process of shifting the base (in the normal mode) corresponding to each section to the past section one by one. Further, if the configuration is such that after the final value as "bL" is calculated, the game history basic information that is the basis of the calculation of the "bL" is deleted, the memory required to store the game history basic information is stored. The capacity can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of bases (during the normal mode) corresponding to each of the plurality of sections are sequentially switched and displayed according to a predetermined order such as going back to the previous section, and the emission in the section being measured is displayed. When the number of passages N _OUT reaches 60,000, the most recent measurement is started regardless of which section is the base (during normal mode) that should be displayed next in a predetermined order. The display is started from "bL" which is the base corresponding to the section (during the normal mode). Therefore, according to this aspect, the manager or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can recognize that the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured has reached 60,000, and from “bL”. It is possible to confirm with priority.

In this aspect, between the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one of a plurality of sections (during the normal mode) and the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode). As the display mode in the above, the display mode in which all the segment light emitting units are turned off is adopted, but other display modes may be adopted as long as the display mode does not display the base (during the normal mode) of any section. For example, a display mode in which the four hyphens are turned on or a display mode in which the four hyphens are blinked may be adopted. According to such a configuration, for the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10, the base displayed on the information display unit 45z (during the normal mode) corresponds to another section (during the normal mode). It is possible to make it more clearly recognized that the switch has been made to.

Further, in this embodiment, as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted, but other display modes are used. It may be adopted. For example, as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, a display mode in which four hyphens are blinked may be adopted. Further, for example, as a display mode corresponding to the number of N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, all the light emitting units (segment light emitting unit A) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z. ~ H and DP light emitting unit) may be turned off.

Further, in this embodiment, a transition mode in which four hyphens are lit for 2000 ms is adopted as a transition mode in the case of shifting the display mode based on the number of discharge passage passages N _OUT reaching 60,000 in the section being measured. However, other transition modes may be adopted. For example, as a transition mode in the case of shifting the display mode based on the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, all the light emitting units of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z. A transition mode in which (segment light emitting units A to H and DP light emitting units) are turned off for 300 ms may be adopted. According to such a configuration, a transition mode in which the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to one section (during the normal mode) is changed to the display mode for displaying the base corresponding to the other section (during the normal mode) is performed. And, since the transition mode can be the same as the transition mode when the display mode shifts based on the number N _OUT of the number of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, the administrator or the like feels uncomfortable. The display mode can be changed without giving.

Further, in this embodiment, the base (during the normal mode) is displayed as the game history information, but the game history information to be displayed is not limited to the base (during the normal mode), and various games shown in the first embodiment are displayed. It may be configured to display historical information (for example, a bonus ratio, a continuous bonus ratio, etc.).

Further, in this embodiment, the section is divided based on the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage reaching 60,000, but the section may be divided based on the condition that other predetermined conditions are satisfied. .. For example, the section may be divided based on the number of N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage reaching 10,000, or the section may be divided based on the change of the date.

<Aspect 96>
In the above aspect 95, when the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages in the section currently being measured reaches 60,000 while displaying the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to any section, the information display unit 45z is displayed. , Even before the display duration (5000 ms) of the base being displayed (during normal mode) has elapsed, the display of the base being displayed (during normal mode) is finished, and the passage through the discharge passage in the section being measured. The configuration is such that the display is started in the display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT reaching 60,000, but instead of this configuration, the base corresponding to any section (during the normal mode) is currently being displayed. When the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages in the section being measured reaches 60,000, the information display unit 45z is measuring after the display duration (5000 ms) of the base being displayed (during the normal mode) has elapsed. The display may be started in a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUTs passing through the discharge passages in the section of 60,000. Hereinafter, the configuration of this embodiment will be specifically described.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z when the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. In FIG. 60, the bases (during the normal mode) of the three sections of “bL”, “b1”, and “b2” are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the information display unit 45z displays “b1”. The display shows an example in which the number of N _OUTs passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the base (during the normal mode) corresponding to any section is displayed and the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section currently being measured reaches 60,000, information is provided. The display unit 45z has a display mode corresponding to the fact that the number of passages N _OUT of the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 after the display duration (5000 ms) of the base being displayed (during the normal mode) has elapsed. Start displaying. In this aspect, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000.

In the example shown in FIG. 60, the number of discharge passages N _OUT in the section being measured is 60,000 before the lapse of 5000 ms, which is the display duration of the “b1” while displaying “b1”. After the display duration (5000 ms) of the "b1" has elapsed, the information display unit 45z starts the display in the display mode in which the four hyphens are lit, and continues the display mode for 2000 ms. Then, similarly to the above-mentioned aspect 95, the circulation display is started from the newly started “bL”.

In this embodiment, the number of discharge passages N _OUT in the section being measured is 60,000 at the timing before 300 ms has elapsed from the start of the display mode in which all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off. When it reaches, the information display unit 45z shifts to the display mode in which the above-mentioned four hyphens are lit after 300 ms has elapsed from the start of the display mode in which all the light emitting units are turned off.

As described above, in this embodiment, even when the number of discharge passages N _OUT in the section being measured reaches 60,000 during the display of the base (during the normal mode), the base (in the normal mode) being displayed. Since the display of the base (during the normal mode) is continued until the display duration of the pachinko machine (in the normal mode) elapses, for example, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can display the base (during the normal mode) being displayed. ) Is confirmed and the display of the base (during normal mode) ends at the timing when the transfer to the inspection table is attempted, and the base (during normal mode) cannot be transferred to the inspection table. The occurrence can be suppressed.

<Aspect 97>
All the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) when the power is turned on, and then for a predetermined time (for example, for example). The following processing flow may be adopted as a processing flow for realizing a configuration in which blinking is performed synchronously (for 2 seconds). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

61 and 62 are flowcharts showing a main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 97 when the power is turned on. The main difference from the main process shown in FIG. 51 is that after the power recovery process is executed, a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z (lighting / blinking process) is executed. ..

In step S11801, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S11802 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. After that, the process proceeds to step S11803, and a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and started is executed. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11803, the process proceeds to step S11804.

In step S11804, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S11804 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11804: YES), the process proceeds to step S11805 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S11806, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S11806 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11806: YES), the process proceeds to step S11808 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11804 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11804: NO), and when it is determined in step S11806 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11806: NO). ), Proceed to step S11807, and turns on the RAM error flag. That is, the RAM error flag is a flag that is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM determination value is not normal, and the information stored in the main RAM 64 is stored in the main RAM 64. It is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11807, the process proceeds to step S11808.

In step S11808, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11808 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11808: NO), the process proceeds to step S11809, and whether or not all the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

If it is determined in step S11809 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11809: NO), the process proceeds to step S11810, and whether or not the RAM error flag is ON. Is determined.

If it is determined in step S11810 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11810: NO), the process proceeds to step S11811, and a power recovery process for returning to the state when the previous power was turned off is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S11811, the process proceeds to step S11812, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11812-2, and a lighting / blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z, is executed. In the lighting / blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then blinked synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S11812-2, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11810 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11810: YES), the process proceeds to step S11813 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11813, the process proceeds to the process of step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11809 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11809: YES), the process proceeds to step S11814, and the RAM error flag is ON. Determine if it exists.

If it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11814: NO), the process proceeds to step S11815 to execute the setting confirmation process. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Since the details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11815, the process proceeds to step S11816, and the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11817 to turn off the power recovery flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S11817-2, and the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process is executed. After executing step S11817-2, the process proceeds to the process of step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11814: YES), the process proceeds to step S11818 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11818, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11808 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11808: YES), the process proceeds to step S11819, and whether the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11819 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11819: NO), the process proceeds to step S11820, and the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11820: NO), the process proceeds to step S11821.

In step S11821, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, the first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11821, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11820: YES), the process proceeds to step S11822 and the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11822, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

If it is determined in step S11819 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11819: YES), the process proceeds to step S11823, and whether the RAM error flag is ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11823: NO), the process proceeds to step S11824, and the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S11825 to execute the setting change process. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed, and a process of accepting the change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Since the details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11825, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11823: YES), the process proceeds to step S11826 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11826, the process proceeds to step S11827.

In step S11827, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is also deleted. Here, when the RAM error flag is ON, the reason for executing the second RAM clear process for erasing the setting information instead of the first RAM clear process will be described. When the RAM error flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal. For example, the setting information may be rewritten to the setting information not intended by the administrator due to noise or the like, or as the setting information. This is because there is a possibility that a numerical value other than the predetermined range may be stored even though only a numerical value within a predetermined range (for example, a numerical value from 1 to 6) can be taken. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM error flag is also turned off by the second RAM clearing process. After that, the process proceeds to step S11828 to execute the setting change process. Since the details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11828, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

In the processing after step S11829 shown in FIG. 62, when the RAM error flag is not ON, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processing, and power failure monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) of the timer interrupt processing are executed. Then, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) described above is also executed. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the game shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. On the other hand, when the RAM error flag is ON, various random number update processes and power failure monitoring processes are executed, but the interrupt enable setting of the timer interrupt process is not executed, so the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) is executed. Not done. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode. Hereinafter, the processes after step S11829 will be specifically described.

In step S11829 shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11829 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11829: NO), the process proceeds to step S11830 to execute an interrupt permission setting that permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S11831 to execute an interrupt prohibition setting that prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S11832, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11829 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11829: YES), the process proceeds to step S11832 without executing the processes of step S11830 and step S11831.

In step S11832, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, 1 is added to the read numerical information, and then the added numerical information is overwritten on the read source counter. To execute. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting 0 in the read source counter is executed. After executing step S11832, the process proceeds to step S11833.

In step S11833, the power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied. It is determined that the switch has been turned off or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. .. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After that, without proceeding to step S11834 described later, the infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. The power supply device 85 of this embodiment is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output the regulated voltage of the volt. As the time for outputting this stabilized voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the process until the above-mentioned RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process in step S11833 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S11834 as it is.

In step S11834, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11834 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11834: NO), the process proceeds to step S11835 described above, and interrupt permission setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. After that, the process returns to step S11831 described above, and the interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11834 that the RAM error flag is ON (step S11834: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11835 for executing the interrupt permission setting, but returns to step S11832 for executing various random number update processes. ..

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process is executed, there is a light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that is always lit due to a defect and does not turn off. For example, if the segment light emitting unit G and the segment light emitting unit D of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 do not light up due to a problem, the control to display "3" on the right middle 7 segment display 45z3 is executed. Even in this case, since the segment light emitting unit G and the segment light emitting unit D are not lit, "7" is displayed on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the administrator may misidentify the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z, for example. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, there is no light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that is always lit and does not turn off due to a defect, so that such misidentification can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the lighting / blinking process is executed triggered by the execution of the power recovery process. Therefore, when the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 turns off the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 whose power is turned on and then turns it on again, the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed and the power recovery process is performed. The lighting / blinking process is executed when the execution is triggered. That is, the administrator or the inspector can cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the lighting / blinking process by a simple operation of turning the power switch off and on. Further, when the administrator or the inspector performs an operation of turning the power switch off and on in order to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the lighting / blinking process, the power recovery process is executed in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (state of high probability mode flag, etc.) is also maintained. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if the player is playing a game in the pachinko machine 10, the lighting / blinking process can be executed without causing any disadvantage to the player, and the administrator can execute the lighting / blinking process. Alternatively, the inspector can inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on or a light emitting unit that does not turn off due to a defect in the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 98>
All the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) when the power is turned on, and then for a predetermined time (for example, for example). The following processing flow may be adopted as a processing flow for realizing a configuration in which blinking is performed synchronously (for 2 seconds). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 98 when the power is turned on. The main difference from the main processing shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is that instead of executing the lighting / blinking processing triggered by the execution of the power recovery processing, any of the processing flows branched into a plurality of processing flows is used. Even if it is executed, the lighting / blinking process is executed.

In step S11901, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S11902, and the internal function register setting process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S11903, and a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and started is executed. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11903, the process proceeds to step S11904.

In step S11904, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S11904 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11904: YES), the process proceeds to step S11905 to calculate the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S11906, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S11906 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11906: YES), the process proceeds to step S11908 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11904 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11904: NO), and when it is determined in step S11906 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11906: NO). ), Proceed to step S11907, and turns on the RAM error flag. That is, the RAM error flag is a flag that is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM determination value is not normal, and the information stored in the main RAM 64 is stored in the main RAM 64. It is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11907, the process proceeds to step S11908.

In step S11908, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11908 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11908: NO), the process proceeds to step S11909, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

If it is determined in step S11909 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11909: NO), the process proceeds to step S11910, and whether or not the RAM error flag is ON. Is determined.

If it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11910: NO), the process proceeds to step S11911, and a power recovery process for returning to the state when the previous power was turned off is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S11911, the process proceeds to step S11912, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11910: YES), the process proceeds to step S11913 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11913, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11909 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11909: YES), the process proceeds to step S11914, and the RAM error flag is ON. Determine if it exists.

If it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11914: NO), the process proceeds to step S11915 to execute the setting confirmation process. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Since the details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11915, the process proceeds to step S11916, and the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11917, and the power recovery flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11914: YES), the process proceeds to step S11918 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11918, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11908 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11908: YES), the process proceeds to step S11919, and whether the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11919 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11919: NO), the process proceeds to step S11920, and the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11920: NO), the process proceeds to step S11921.

In step S11921, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, the first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11921, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11920: YES), the process proceeds to step S11922 and the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11922, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11919 described above that the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON (step S11919: YES), the process proceeds to step S11923, and is the RAM error flag ON? Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11923: NO), the process proceeds to step S11924, and the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S11925 to execute the setting change process. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed, and a process of accepting the change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Since the details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11925, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11923: YES), the process proceeds to step S11926 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11926, the process proceeds to step S11927.

In step S11927, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) all the information including the setting information of the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like, the setting information of the lottery setting is also deleted. Here, when the RAM error flag is ON, the reason for executing the second RAM clear process for erasing the setting information instead of the first RAM clear process will be described. When the RAM error flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal. For example, the setting information may be rewritten to the setting information not intended by the administrator due to noise or the like, or as the setting information. This is because there is a possibility that a numerical value other than the predetermined range may be stored even though only a numerical value within a predetermined range (for example, a numerical value from 1 to 6) can be taken. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM error flag is also turned off by the second RAM clearing process. After that, the process proceeds to step S11928 to execute the setting change process. Since the details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11928, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

In step S11928-2 shown in FIG. 64, a lighting / blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z, is executed. In the lighting / blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then blinked synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S11928-2, the process proceeds to step S11929.

In the processing after step S11929, when the RAM error flag is not ON, the interrupt enable setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processing, and power failure monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) of the timer interrupt processing are executed, and are described above. Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) is also executed. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the game shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. On the other hand, when the RAM error flag is ON, various random number update processes and power failure monitoring processes are executed, but the interrupt enable setting of the timer interrupt process is not executed, so the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) is executed. Not done. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. In this state, the administrator temporarily turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole, turns it to the ON side, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. Then, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the setting change mode. Hereinafter, the processes after step S11929 will be specifically described.

In step S11929 shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11929: NO), the process proceeds to step S11930 to execute an interrupt permission setting that permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S11931 to execute an interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S11932, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11929: YES), the process proceeds to step S11932 without executing the processes of steps S11930 and S11931.

In step S11932, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, 1 is added to the read numerical information, and then the added numerical information is overwritten on the read source counter. To execute. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting 0 in the read source counter is executed. After executing step S11932, the process proceeds to step S11933.

In step S11933, the power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied. It is determined that the switch has been turned off or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. .. Then, when the evacuation of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, the RAM determination value (for example, the checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is set to the main RAM 64. Remember. After that, the process does not proceed to step S11934, which will be described later, and the infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. The power supply device 85 of this embodiment is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output the regulated voltage of the volt. As the time for outputting this stabilized voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the process until the above-mentioned RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process in step S11933 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S11934 as it is.

In step S11934, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S11934: NO), the process proceeds to step S11935 described above, and interrupt permission setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. After that, the process returns to step S11931 described above, and the interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM error flag is ON (step S11934: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11935 for executing the interrupt permission setting, but returns to step S11932 for executing various random number update processes. ..

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process is executed, there is a light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that is always lit due to a defect and does not turn off. For example, if the segment light emitting unit G and the segment light emitting unit D of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 do not light up due to a problem, the control to display "3" on the right middle 7 segment display 45z3 is executed. Even in this case, since the segment light emitting unit G and the segment light emitting unit D are not lit, "7" is displayed on the middle right 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the administrator may misidentify the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z, for example. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, there is no light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that is always lit and does not turn off due to a defect, so that such misidentification can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the process is branched into a plurality of processes based on the operation mode of each operation unit (RAM clear switch, setting key) when the power switch is turned on and the power supply from the outside is started. Execute one of the processing flows. For example, when the RAM clear switch is ON when the power is turned ON, the setting key is on the ON side, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state, the setting change process is performed. Executes the processing flow that includes. Then, in this embodiment, the lighting / blinking processing is executed regardless of which of the processing flows branched into the plurality of processing flows is executed. Therefore, according to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to execute the lighting / blinking process regardless of what kind of operation mode each operation unit accepts when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, when the manufacturer ships the pachinko machine 10, the RAM clear switch is turned on, the setting key is set to the ON side, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are set to the open state. By turning on the power in, the pachinko machine 10 may be made to execute the setting change process (setting change mode) to check the operation such as whether or not the lottery setting can be changed. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process after executing the setting change process (setting change mode), so that the manufacturer's administrator confirms the operation in the setting change mode. After that, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on or a light emitting unit that does not turn off due to a defect in the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the inspection efficiency of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of shipment can be dramatically improved. As described above, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 may be included in the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z regardless of the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn on or a light emitting part that does not turn off due to a defect. That is, it is possible to suppress that the inspection cannot be performed depending on the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on.

Further, according to this aspect, based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply from the outside is started, steps S11901 to S11928 of the main process (FIGS. 63 and 64) including the lighting / blinking process are started. -After the processing groups up to -2 are executed and the execution of the processing group is completed, the interrupt permission setting is executed and the processing group included in the timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed, so that the power supply from the outside is started. After that, the lighting / blinking process can be executed only once. If the lighting / blinking process is included in the processing group of the timer interrupt process, the lighting / blinking process will be repeatedly executed, and the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 will increase. Further, if the lighting / blinking process is repeatedly executed, there is a possibility that the period during which various information can be displayed on the information display unit 45z is reduced. On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the lighting / blinking process can be executed only once after the supply of electric power from the outside is started, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. The administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on or a light emitting unit that does not turn off due to a defect in the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z.

Further, according to this aspect, after the power switch is turned on and the power supply from the outside is started, before the interrupt enable setting is executed and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) is started to be executed. Executes lighting and blinking processing. Therefore, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 may turn off or turn off the light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect in the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z before the game can proceed in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light emitting part that does not. If the configuration is such that the lighting / blinking process is executed after the timer interrupt process is started, the player can inspect the information display unit 45z before the administrator or the inspector can inspect the information display unit 45z. It becomes possible to start the game with the pachinko machine 10. In this case, after the player starts the game on the pachinko machine 10, the administrator or the inspector inspects the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 and finds a defect in the light emitting unit of the information display unit 45z. There is a risk that it will end up. If the administrator or the inspector finds a defect in the light emitting unit of the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10, the player suspends or cancels the game in order to repair or replace the information display unit 45z. You will need to get it. As a result, the player may be strongly uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to this aspect, the manager or the inspector may inspect the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 before the player can start the game on the pachinko machine 10. Since it is possible, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable by interrupting or stopping the game.

Further, according to this aspect, after executing the lighting / blinking processing, the interrupt permission setting is executed, and the game history processing (step S10616 in FIG. 27) included in the timer interrupt processing is executed. That is, in this embodiment, the lighting / blinking process is executed before the game history information such as the base (during the normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, so that the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can use the pachinko machine. Before the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in 10, it is inspected whether there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on or a light emitting unit that does not turn off due to a defect among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. can do. As a result, the game displayed on the information display unit 45z without noticing that there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on or a light emitting unit that does not turn off due to a defect among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to prevent the history information from being confirmed.

In this embodiment, the setting change process (setting change mode) (step S11925 in FIG. 63, step S11928) is executed, and then the lighting / blinking process (step S11928-2 in FIG. 64) is executed. Alternatively, the lighting / blinking process may be executed before the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change process (setting change mode). Specifically, for example, the lighting / blinking process in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64 is omitted, and the lighting / blinking process is executed prior to the execution of the process of step S11908 of FIG. 63 (the process of determining the state of the RAM clear button). It may be configured to be used. According to such a configuration, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can use a plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z before the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn on or a light emitting part that does not turn off due to a defect. As a result, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is confirmed without noticing that there is a light emitting unit that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to suppress that. Similarly, according to this configuration, in the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), the lighting / blinking process is executed before the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z. The setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is confirmed without noticing that there is a light emitting unit that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, by configuring the lighting / blinking process to be executed in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64, the lighting / blinking process may be executed regardless of which of the processing flows branched into a plurality of processes is executed. However, by adopting another configuration, not limited to this configuration, a configuration that executes lighting / blinking processing regardless of which processing flow among the processing flows branched into multiple branches is executed. May be. For example, the lighting / blinking process in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting / blinking process may be executed prior to the execution of the process of step S11908 of FIG. 63 (the process of determining the state of the RAM clear button). .. Further, for example, the lighting / blinking process in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64 is omitted, and the lighting / blinking process is omitted, between steps S11909 and S11910 in FIG. 63, between steps S11909 and S11914 in FIG. 63, and steps S11919 and step in FIG. It may be configured to execute the lighting / blinking process between S11920 and between step S11919 and step S11923 in FIG. 63.

<Aspect 99>
In the above aspects 97 and 98, the administrator or the inspector inspects whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on or a light emitting unit that does not turn off due to a defect in the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. Although the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process is adopted as the inspection process, the inspection process is not limited to the lighting / blinking process, and various control modes can be adopted. For example, as an inspection process, the control of blinking the light emitting unit is not executed, and all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are simultaneously shifted from the extinguished state to the lit state, and from the lit state after a predetermined time has elapsed. You may execute the control to shift to the turned-off state at the same time. Further, for example, as an inspection process, a control may be executed in which all light emitting units are synchronously blinked. Further, for example, as an inspection process, control may be executed in which all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on in order and then turned off. That is, as the inspection process, it is sufficient to execute the control of shifting all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z from the off state to the on state at least once and then shifting to the off state. Even by executing the inspection process of such a control mode, the administrator or the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can turn on or off the light emitting unit that does not turn on due to a defect in the plurality of light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a light emitting part that does not.

<Aspect 100>
Of the above modes, various main processes and timer interrupt processes can be adopted in the configuration in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S12001, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S12002 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. After that, the process proceeds to step S12003, and a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on and started is executed. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12003, the process proceeds to step S12004.

In step S12004, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON and a predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S12004: YES), the process proceeds to step S12005, and a predetermined operation is executed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. By doing so, the RAM determination value is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S12006, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S12006: YES), the process proceeds to step S12007.

In step S12007, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", so if the setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6", , When it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, while "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or when information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like. Determines that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step S12007 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12007: YES), the process proceeds to step S12008.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12004 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12004: NO), when it is determined in step S12006 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S12006: NO), and If it is determined in step S12007 that the setting information is not within a predetermined range (step S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12015 and the RAM error flag is turned ON. That is, the RAM error flag is a flag that turns ON when the recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. This is a flag indicating that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

Hereinafter, the flow of processing to be executed when the RAM error flag is not turned ON will be described, and then the flow of processing to be executed when the RAM error flag is turned ON will be described.

In step S12008, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON at the start of the setting change process (setting change mode) described later and turns OFF at the end of the setting change process (setting change mode). Here, the situation in which the setting changing flag is ON in step S12008 means that the setting change process (setting change mode) described later is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on last time, and the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. The power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting change mode), so that the setting changing flag is kept on.

If it is determined in step S12008 that the setting changing flag is ON (step S12008: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018, and the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed, and a process of accepting the change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12008 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009.

In step S12009, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12009 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12009: NO), the process proceeds to step S12010, and whether or not all the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is located on the ON side. Further, the frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

If it is determined in step S12010 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12010: NO), the process proceeds to step S12011.

In step S12011, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON at the start of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later and turns OFF at the end of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S12011 means that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on last time, and the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed. The power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation mode), so that the setting confirmation flag is kept on.

If it is determined in step S12011 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S12011: NO), the process proceeds to step S12013 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12010 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON (step S12010: YES), and in step S12011, the setting confirmation flag is ON. If it is determined (step S12011: YES), the process proceeds to step S12012. That is, when the RAM clear button is turned off when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are turned on, and the previous power supply of the pachinko machine 10. The setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed at the time of turning on, and the setting is being confirmed because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). If the flag is kept ON, the process proceeds to step S12012.

In step S12012, the setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S12012, the process proceeds to step S12013.

In step S12013, a power recovery process for returning to the state at the time of the previous power off is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S12013, the process proceeds to step S12014, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12009 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12009: YES), the process proceeds to step S12017, and the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. Determine if it exists. If it is determined in step S12017 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S12017: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018 described above, and the setting change process (setting change) described above is performed. Mode) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12017 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12017: NO), the process proceeds to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process proceeds to step S12020 to execute the first RAM clear process. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, the first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear processing execution command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear processing has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12020, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process proceeds to step S12021 to execute the RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12021, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON, the process does not proceed to step S12021.

In step S12022, a lighting / blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z, is executed. In the lighting / blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then blinked synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S12022, the process proceeds to step S12023.

In step S12023, an interrupt enable setting that permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. After that, the infinite loop is repeated and waited, and the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM error flag is turned ON in step S12015 will be described.

As described above, when it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12004: NO), when it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S12006: NO), and step. If it is determined in S12007 that the setting information is not within a predetermined range (step S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12015 and the RAM error flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S12016.

In step S12016, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12016: YES), the process proceeds to step S12017, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. If it is determined in step S12017 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S12017: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018 described above, and the setting change process (setting change) described above is performed. Mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12016: NO), and in step S12017, it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. In the case (step S12017: NO), the process proceeds to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process proceeds to step S12020, and the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process is executed. After executing step S12020, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S12020.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process proceeds to step S12021 to execute the above-mentioned RAM abnormality notification process. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022.

In step S12022, the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process is executed. After executing step S12022, the process proceeds to step S12023 to execute the interrupt enable setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the infinite loop process is repeatedly waited for, and the timer interrupt process described later is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is in the state where the RAM clear switch is pressed (in the ON state), and the setting key (keyhole). This is an operation to turn on the power switch with all of the frame open switch and the door open switch turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is that the RAM clear switch is not pressed (OFF state), and the setting key (keyhole), frame opening switch, and door opening are performed. This is an operation to turn on the power switch with all the switches turned on. The operation for executing the first RAM clear process is to press the RAM clear switch (ON state) and turn off any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch in the state of.

An example of the processing flow realized by executing the above-mentioned main processing will be described below.

-It is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied when the power supply is started (step S12004, step S12006, step S12007), but the setting change process (setting change mode). When the operation for executing the setting is performed, the setting change processing is performed regardless of whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied and regardless of the state of the setting checking flag. (Setting change mode) is executed (step S12018).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12004, step S12006, step S12007), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. If it is determined that is not satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting changing flag is ON (step S12008: YES), an operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode), a setting confirmation process The setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not the operation for executing the (setting confirmation mode) and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process are performed (step S12018). ..

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12004, step S12006, step S12007), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), and when an operation for executing the first RAM clear process is performed (step S12009). : YES, step S12017: NO, step S12019: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag (step S12020).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12004, step S12006, step S12007), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), and an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. (Step S12009: NO, step S12010: YES) executes the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step S12012).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12004, step S12006, step S12007), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not performed. Even if there is, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12011: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12012).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12004, step S12006, step S12007), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is satisfied and the RAM error flag is turned ON (step S12015), the first RAM clear process is performed even if the operation for executing the first RAM clear process is performed. The RAM abnormality notification process is executed without being executed (step S12021).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12004, step S12006, step S12007), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is satisfied and the RAM error flag is turned ON (step S12015), the setting is made even when the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. The RAM error notification process is executed without executing the confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step S12021).

Next, the details of the setting change process shown in step S12018 of FIG. 65 will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine in step S12018 of FIG.

In step S12101, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting changing flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not been completed yet. Is. After executing step S12101, the process proceeds to step S12102.

In step S12102, the initial setting process at the start of setting change is executed. At the start of setting change In the initial setting process, the initial settings required to start the setting change process are executed. Further, in this embodiment, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM error flag is ON, the RAM error flag is turned off. To. After executing step S12102, the process proceeds to step S12103.

In step S12103, the setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "setting change mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays that the command is received. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress". Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

Further, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has been started, the hall computer displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S12103, the process proceeds to step S12104.

In step S12104, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as the setting information for updating. Specifically, in this embodiment, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is used in an area other than the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Copy to the update setting information storage area. After executing step S12104, the process proceeds to step S12105.

In step S12105, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the update setting information is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S12106, and it is determined whether or not the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", is the update setting information a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6"? Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S12106 that the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12106: YES), the process proceeds to step S12108. On the other hand, in step S12106, when it is determined that the update setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12106: NO), for example, when "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information. If information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step S12107, and the update setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S12108.

In step S12108, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, the signal indicates the High level during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. The signal indicating the Low level is monitored inside, and when the signal detects a falling edge falling from the High level to the Low level, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S12108 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: NO), the process proceeds to step S12109 and whether or not the setting change button is pressed. To judge. If it is determined in step S12109 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S12109: YES), the process proceeds to step S12110 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the update setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as the update setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". After that, the process returns to step S12106 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated update setting information is within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12109 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S12109: NO), the process returns to step S12106 described above without executing the process of step S12110, and the update setting information is displayed. It is determined whether or not the value is within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S12108 described above that the setting key (keyhole) has moved from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: YES), the process proceeds to step S12111.

In step S12111, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as the setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. do. After executing step S12111, the process proceeds to step S12112, and the control for displaying the update setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12113.

In step S12113, the setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

Further, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays the information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12113, the process proceeds to step S12114. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information is displayed on the management screen. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change.

In step S12114, the first RAM clear process is executed. In the first RAM clearing process, information other than the lottery setting setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clear process is executed, the above-mentioned setting changing flag is also cleared (turned off). After executing step S12114, this setting change process ends.

Next, the details of the setting confirmation process shown in step S12012 of FIG. 65 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine in step S12012 of FIG.

In step S12201, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not been completed yet. Is. After executing step S12201, the process proceeds to step S12202.

In step S12202, the setting confirmation notification start process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "setting confirmation mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and displays that the command is received. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress". Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

Further, in the setting confirmation notification start process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S12202, the process proceeds to step S12203.

In step S12203, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is blinked and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S12204.

In step S12204, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, the signal indicates the High level during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. The signal indicating the Low level is monitored inside, and when the signal detects a falling edge that falls from the High level to the Low level, the setting key (keyhole) has moved from the ON side to the OFF side. judge. If it is determined in step S12204 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: NO), step S12204 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12204 that the setting key (keyhole) has moved from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: YES), the process proceeds to step S12205. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S12205. When the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step S12205. move on.

In step S12205, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12206.

In step S12206, the setting confirmation notification end process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end processing, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

Further, in the setting confirmation notification end process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended displays the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12206, the process proceeds to step S12207, and the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, this setting confirmation process ends.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x) will be described.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) executes timer interrupt processing at a cycle of 4 ms.

In step S12301, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is used. After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the added numerical value to the reading source counter is executed. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting 0 in the read source counter is executed. After executing step S12301, the process proceeds to step S12302.

In step S12302, the power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied. It is determined that the switch has been turned off or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. .. Then, when the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON and a predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, the process does not proceed to step S12303, which will be described later, and the infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. The power supply device 85 of this embodiment is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output the regulated voltage of the volt. As the time for outputting this stabilized voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the process until the above-mentioned RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process in step S12302 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S12303 as it is.

In step S12303, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S12303: NO), the process proceeds to step S12304. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM error flag is ON (step S12303: YES), the timer interrupt processing is terminated without executing the processing after step S12304. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process for enabling the progress of the game after step S12304 is not executed, and the configuration does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. There is. Hereinafter, the processes after step S12304, which are the processes for enabling the progress of the game, will be described.

In step S12304, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step S12305.

In step S12305, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S12306.

In step S12306, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and the ball entry detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball entry detection process is the same as the ball entry detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12306, the process proceeds to step S12307.

In step S12307, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S12308 to execute the output setting process of the prize ball command. Then, the process proceeds to step S12309.

In step S12309, the ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the start port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Along with acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S12309, the process proceeds to step S12310.

In step S12310, the ball entry process for the through gate accompanying the entry (passage) of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is used in the RAM 64. Store in the electric service holding area 64d. After executing step S12310, the process proceeds to step S12311.

In step S12311, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are performed. After executing step S12311, the process proceeds to step S12312.

In step S12312, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, a process of shifting the game state to an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is executed. After executing step S12312, the process proceeds to step S12313.

In step S12313, an electric service support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (electric accessory opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S12313, the process proceeds to step S12314.

In step S12314, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process for launching a game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S12314, the process proceeds to step S12315.

In step S12315, the external information setting process is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. After executing step S12315, the process proceeds to step S12316.

In step S12316, a game history process for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history process is the same as the game history process shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12316, this timer interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the above other aspects.

According to this aspect, the setting change mode is started based on the acceptance of the operation for executing the setting change mode, the setting changing flag is set to the ON state at the start of the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is set. At the end of, the setting changing flag is changed to the OFF state. Then, the main RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting changing flag even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 The setting changing flag stored in is maintained in the ON state.

Then, according to this aspect, the setting change mode is started based on the determination that the setting changing flag is in the ON state when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside (FIG. FIG. 65 steps S12008). That is, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the setting is changed. Even if the operation for executing the mode is not accepted, the setting change mode will be started.

Therefore, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside during the execution of the setting change mode, in order to cause the pachinko machine 10 to start the setting change mode again, the electric power to the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is possible to save the trouble that the administrator has to perform the operation for executing the setting change mode again after the supply of the machine is restarted.

Further, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside during the execution of the setting change mode, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 may be in a state not intended by the administrator. However, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed from the outside, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 does not perform an operation for executing the setting change mode again. However, since the setting change mode is started, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being overlooked in a state not intended by the administrator.

Further, according to this aspect, the setting confirmation mode is started based on the acceptance of the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting confirmation flag is set to the ON state and the setting is made. When the confirmation mode ends, the setting confirmation flag is changed to the OFF state. Then, the main RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting confirmation flag even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside. Therefore, for example, if the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the setting confirmation mode, the main RAM 64 The setting confirmation flag stored in is maintained in the ON state.

Then, according to this aspect, the setting confirmation mode is started based on the determination that the setting confirmation flag is in the ON state when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside (FIG. FIG. Step S12011 of 65). That is, according to this aspect, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the setting confirmation mode and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the setting confirmation is performed. Even if the operation for executing the mode is not accepted, the setting confirmation mode will be started.

Therefore, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside during the execution of the setting confirmation mode, the electric power to the pachinko machine 10 is to be restarted in order to cause the pachinko machine 10 to start the setting confirmation mode again. It is possible to save the trouble that the administrator has to perform the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode again after the supply of the machine is restarted.

Further, according to this aspect, at the start of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the same information as the setting information is used as the update setting information in the main RAM 64. It is stored in the setting information storage area for updating. Then, by accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button, the update setting information stored in the update setting information of the main RAM 64 is updated, and when the setting change mode is terminated, the update setting information and the update setting information are updated. The same information is stored as setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, even if the power supply from the outside is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored before the setting change mode is started. Can be maintained at the value of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being different from the value intended by the administrator due to the power supply from the outside being cut off during the execution of the setting change mode. can do. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

Temporarily, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored by accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button in the configuration in which the update setting information is not used during the execution of the setting change mode. When the configuration to change directly is adopted, the power supply from the outside is cut off at the timing when the setting information is different from the value intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 during the execution of the setting change mode. In that case, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 will be a value different from the value intended by the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the setting information itself stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not changed until the setting change mode ends, and the setting information for updating the main RAM 64 is stored. Since the update setting information stored in the area is changed, the update setting information is changed to a value different from the value intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting change mode is being executed. Even when the power supply from the main RAM 64 is cut off, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is maintained at the value before the setting change mode is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being different from the value intended by the administrator due to the power supply from the outside being cut off during the execution of the setting change mode. be able to.

Further, according to this aspect, the update setting information stored in the update information storage area of the main RAM 64 is displayed on the information display unit 45z during the execution of the setting change mode, so that the administrator can use the information. While checking the update setting information displayed on the display unit 45z, the operation of pressing the setting change button can be performed.

Further, according to this aspect, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON, the game progress process (processes from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed while the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, resulting in a problem in the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 10. can do. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the player and the manager from being inflicted with an unexpected loss.

Further, according to this aspect, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the RAM error flag is turned ON, the first RAM clear process is not executed even when the operation for executing the first RAM clear process is accepted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the execution of the first RAM clearing process while the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

Even if it is determined that the setting information is not within the predetermined range, if the configuration for executing the first RAM clear processing is adopted, the setting is made among the various information stored in the main RAM 64. Even though the RAM error flag, which is information indicating that the information is not within the specified range, is erased (OFF), the setting information is not within the specified range. After the execution of the first RAM clear processing, the game progress processing (processing from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) on the premise that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range is executed, and a problem occurs. There is a possibility that it will end up.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the first RAM is the first RAM even if the operation for executing the first RAM clear processing is accepted. Since the clear process is not executed, it is assumed that the first RAM clear process is executed even though the setting information is not within the predetermined range, and the setting information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the first RAM clearing process being executed while the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range.

Further, according to this aspect, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that, even if the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is accepted, the setting confirmation mode is not executed. Therefore, even though the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode for displaying the setting information from being executed. ..

Further, according to this aspect, when the power supply from the outside is cut off, a predetermined operation is executed based on a predetermined information group (including setting information in this embodiment) stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the RAM determination value (hereinafter, also referred to as the first RAM determination value), which is the result of the predetermined operation, is stored in the main RAM 64. Then, when the power supply from the outside is started, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 (in this embodiment, the setting information is included and the first RAM determination value is not included). Is executed, and it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value (hereinafter, also referred to as the second RAM determination value), which is the result of the predetermined operation, matches the first RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. When it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006: YES in FIG. 65), and it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12007 in FIG. 65). : YES), the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON, and the game progress process (process from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) is executed. In other words, when it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006: YES in FIG. 65), but it is determined that the setting information is not within a predetermined range (FIG. 65). Step S12007: NO), the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015 in FIG. 65), and the game progress process (process from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed even though the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, but the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the game progress processing being executed even though the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

When the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, the content of the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 when the power supply from the outside is started and the previous power supply There is a high possibility that the content of the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 is the same when the power is cut off, and the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 supplies power from the outside. It is highly possible that the power was maintained normally even when the power was cut off. However, even when the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 is not normally maintained, the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value may accidentally match.

Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, but whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range is not determined. Even if the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value may accidentally match, and the game progress process may be executed. As a result, there is a possibility that a fatal defect may occur in the progress of the game.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the game progresses based on the determination that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, and that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. Execute the process. In other words, although the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, the game progress process is not executed when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed even though the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match, but the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the game progress processing being executed even though the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range.

Further, according to this aspect, the setting change mode is terminated based on the detection of the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the setting key (keyhole) during the execution of the setting change mode (). Step S12108: YES) in FIG. 66, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from ending immediately after the start. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

For example, a case will be described in which a configuration different from this embodiment is adopted, in which the setting change mode is terminated when it is detected that the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state. When this configuration is adopted and the setting change mode is started based on the operation for starting the setting change mode including the fact that the setting key (keyhole) is ON. The setting change mode continues until the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON state to the OFF state. However, if the setting change mode is started based on the fact that the setting changing flag is ON when the power supply is started, the setting is changed while the setting key (keyhole) is OFF. The mode may be started. In this case, immediately after the setting change mode is started, it is detected that the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state, and the setting change mode ends. That is, the setting change mode ends immediately after the start, and it becomes difficult to change the setting information of the lottery setting in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the setting change mode is terminated based on the detection of the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the setting key (keyhole), so that the setting key (keyhole) Even if the setting change mode is started with the keyhole) turned off, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 or the like shifts the setting key (keyhole) from the OFF state to the ON state, and then again. The setting change mode continues until the state is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is started with the setting key (keyhole) turned off, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from ending immediately after the setting change mode is started. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to change the setting information of the lottery setting because the setting change mode ends immediately after the start.

Further, according to this aspect, even when the setting change mode is started based on the fact that the setting changing flag is ON when the power supply is started, the setting key is held. Only those who are able to exit the setting change mode. Therefore, the security of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, according to this aspect, not only the setting change mode is started based on the operation for starting the setting change mode including the state that the setting key (keyhole) is ON. , The setting change mode is started based on the fact that the setting changing flag was ON when the power supply was started. Therefore, the setting change mode can be started not only when the setting key (keyhole) is in the ON state but also when the setting key (keyhole) is not in the ON state.

In this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change mode is that the RAM clear switch is pressed (turned on), and the setting key (keyhole), frame opening switch, and door opening switch are used. The operation of turning on the power switch is adopted with all of them turned on, but various operations can be adopted as the operation for executing the setting change mode. For example, as an operation for executing the setting change mode, the power switch is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed (turned on) and the setting key (keyhole) turned on. The operation may be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, as an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear switch is not pressed (OFF state), and the setting key (keyhole), frame opening switch and door opening are performed. Although the operation of turning on the power switch is adopted with all the switches turned on, various operations can be adopted as the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode. For example, as an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode, the power switch is turned on with the RAM clear switch not pressed (OFF state) and the setting key (keyhole) turned on. You may adopt the operation to.

Further, in this embodiment, as an operation for executing the first RAM clear process, the RAM clear switch is in the pressed state (ON state), and the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are set. Although the operation of turning on the power switch with any one of the above turned off is adopted, various operations can be adopted as the operation for executing the first RAM clearing process. For example, as an operation for executing the first RAM clear process, the power switch is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed (turned on) and the setting key (keyhole) turned off. You may adopt the operation to do.

Further, in this embodiment, the setting information is included in the target for calculating the RAM judgment value (checksum value), but instead of this configuration, the setting information is included in the target for calculating the RAM judgment value (checksum value). It may be configured not to be included.

Further, in this embodiment, the RAM determination value (checksum value) calculated when the power supply is cut off is stored in the main RAM 64, but instead of this configuration, the power supply is cut off. The RAM determination value (checksum value) calculated at this time may be stored in a non-volatile storage means other than the main RAM 64.

Further, in this embodiment, at the start of the setting change mode, the same information as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is used as the update setting information in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Although it is configured to be stored, the information stored as the update setting information does not have to be completely the same as the setting information, and may be any information corresponding to the setting information. For example, when the setting information is "1", "A" is stored as the update setting information as the value corresponding to the setting information, and when the setting information is "2", it is stored as the value corresponding to the setting information. The configuration may be such that "B" is stored as update setting information.

Similarly, in this embodiment, at the end of the setting change mode, the same information as the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is used as the setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. However, the information to be stored as the setting information does not have to be completely the same as the update setting information, and may be any information corresponding to the update setting information. For example, when the update setting information is "A", "1" is stored as the setting information as the value corresponding to the setting information, and when the update setting information is "B", it is stored in the update setting information. A configuration may be configured in which "2" is stored as setting information as the corresponding value.

<Aspect 101>
In each of the above embodiments, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a configuration in which the voice emission control device 90 includes an RTC 97 (real-time clock) capable of measuring the current date and time may be adopted. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 according to the first embodiment. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted.

The voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90 outputs the MPU 92, which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire voice emission control device 90, and the current date and time information, which is information that can specify the current date and time. It is equipped with a possible RTC97 (real-time clock). The MPU 92 and the RTC 97 are connected to each other so as to be able to communicate with each other via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is an element having a CPU 92x, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. The CPU 92x executes various control programs stored in the main ROM 63. The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the CPU 92x. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with various table storage areas in which the effect pattern table and the like are stored. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the CPU 92x executes a control program. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a for storing various flags, an activation date / time information storage area 94b for storing activation date / time information described later, and the like. It is not essential that the CPU 92x, ROM 93, and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip, and each may be individually chipped.

The RTC 97 has a function of measuring the current date and time, and has an RTC control unit 97a, a register 97b, and an RTC power supply 97c.

The RTC control unit 97a uses (controls) the register 97b to perform various controls such as timekeeping of the current date and time. The register 97b has a register table including a plurality of registers, and the register table includes a timekeeping register 97b1 and an activation date / time information storage area 97b2.

The timekeeping register 97b1 is a register for clocking the current date and time, and the register value as the current date and time information is updated every second. In this embodiment, the current date and time information in the timekeeping register 97b1 includes information that can specify the current "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second".

The start date / time information storage area 97b2 is a storage area in which the current date / time information measured by the timekeeping register 97b1 is written at the timing immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is started. In the following, the current date and time information read from the timekeeping register 97b1 and written in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 is referred to as activation date and time information. In this embodiment, the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 includes the "year", "month", "day", "hour", and "hour" at a predetermined timing after the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 is started. It contains information that can identify "minutes" and "seconds". The details of the process in which the current date and time information timed by the timekeeping register 97b1 is written as the activation date and time information in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 will be described later.

The RTC power supply 97c is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 97, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control unit 97a and the register 97b even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the timekeeping register 97b1 can update the current date and time information even in the power cut state, and the start date and time information storage area 97b2 holds the stored start date and time information even in the power cut state. Is possible. In this embodiment, a button type battery is used for the RTC power supply 97c.

The voice emission control board 91 is provided with input / output ports, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the voice emission control board 91, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and receives a predetermined signal from the effect operation button 24. .. A speaker 46, various lamps 47, and a display control device 100 are connected to the output side of the voice emission control board 91.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 101 when the power is turned on.

In step S12401, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S12402 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. Then, the process proceeds to step S12403.

In step S12403, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. It is saved in a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. Then, when the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON and a predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the backup power supply such as a capacitor. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power-off is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of power-on.

If it is determined in step S12403 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S12403: YES), the process proceeds to step S12404, and a predetermined operation is executed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. By doing so, the RAM determination value is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step S12405, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step S12405 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S12405: YES), the process proceeds to step S12406.

In step S12406, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", so if the setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6", , When it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, while "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or when information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like. Determines that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step S12406 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12406: YES), the process proceeds to step S12407.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12403 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12403: NO), when it is determined in step S12405 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S12405: NO), and If it is determined in step S12406 described above that the setting information is not within a predetermined range (step S12406: NO), the process proceeds to step S12415 and the RAM error flag is turned ON. That is, the RAM error flag is a flag that turns ON when the recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. This is a flag indicating that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

Hereinafter, the flow of processing to be executed when the RAM error flag is not turned ON will be described, and then the flow of processing to be executed when the RAM error flag is turned ON will be described.

In step S12407, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON at the start of the setting change process (setting change mode) described later and turns OFF at the end of the setting change process (setting change mode). Here, the situation in which the setting changing flag is ON in step S12407 means that the setting change process (setting change mode) described later is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on last time, and the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. The power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting change mode), so that the setting changing flag is kept on.

If it is determined in step S12407 that the setting changing flag is ON (step S12407: YES), the process proceeds to step S12418 to execute the setting change process (setting change mode). In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed, and a process of accepting the change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12407 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), the process proceeds to step S12408.

In step S12408, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12408 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12408: NO), the process proceeds to step S12409, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is located on the ON side. Further, the frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

If it is determined in step S12409 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12409: NO), the process proceeds to step S12410.

In step S12410, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON at the start of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later and turns OFF at the end of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S12410 means that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on last time, and the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed. The power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation mode), so that the setting confirmation flag is kept on.

If it is determined in step S12410 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S12410: NO), the process proceeds to step S12411, and a normal activation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The normal start command is not determined to be a RAM error, and the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 60) is in a normal state in which none of the setting change processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the first RAM clear processing, which will be described later, is executed. Is a command that indicates that has been started. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the normal activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated in the normal state. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "normally starts" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12411, the process proceeds to step S12413, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12409 described above that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON (step S12409: YES), and in step S12410, the setting confirmation flag is ON. If it is determined (step S12410: YES), the process proceeds to step S12412. That is, when the RAM clear button is turned off when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are turned on, and the previous power supply of the pachinko machine 10. The setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed at the time of turning on, and the setting is being confirmed because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). If the flag is kept ON, the process proceeds to step S12412.

In step S12412, the setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S12412, the process proceeds to step S12413.

In step S12413, a power recovery process for returning to the state at the time of the previous power off is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step S12413, the process proceeds to step S12414 to turn off the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step S12423, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12408 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12408: YES), the process proceeds to step S12417, and the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON. Determine if it exists. If it is determined in step S12417 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S12417: YES), the process proceeds to step S12418 described above, and the setting change process (setting change) described above is performed. Mode) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S12423 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12417 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S12417: NO), the process proceeds to step S12419.

In step S12419, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S12419: NO), the process proceeds to step S12420 to execute the first RAM clear process. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step S12420, the process proceeds to step S12421, and a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12421, the process proceeds to step S12423, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12419: YES), the process proceeds to step S12422, and a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is emitted by voice. It is transmitted to the control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." After executing step S12422, the process proceeds to step S12423. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON, the process does not proceed to step S12422 described above.

In step S12423, a lighting / blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G and DP light emitting units) constituting the information display unit 45z, is executed. In the lighting / blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then blinked synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step S12423, the process proceeds to step S12424.

In step S12424, an interrupt enable setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. After that, the infinite loop is repeated and waited, and the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM error flag is turned ON in step S12415 will be described.

As described above, when it is determined in step S12403 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12403: NO), when it is determined in step S12405 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S12405: NO), and step. If it is determined in S12406 that the setting information is not within a predetermined range (step S12406: NO), the process proceeds to step S12415 and the RAM error flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S12416.

In step S12416, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12416 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12416: YES), the process proceeds to step S12417, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. If it is determined in step S12417 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S12417: YES), the process proceeds to step S12418 described above, and the setting change process (setting change) described above is performed. Mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12422. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12416 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12416: NO), and in step S12417, it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. In the case (step S12417: NO), the process proceeds to step S12419.

In step S12419, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S12419: NO), the process proceeds to step S12420, and the above-mentioned first RAM clearing process is executed. After executing step S12420, the process proceeds to step S12421, and a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S12421, the process proceeds to step S12422. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S12420 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12419: YES), the process proceeds to step S12422, and a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is emitted by voice. It is transmitted to the control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, in this embodiment, the speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode." After executing step S12422, the process proceeds to step S12423.

In step S12423, the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process is executed. After executing step S12423, the process proceeds to step S12424 to execute the interrupt enable setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the infinite loop process is repeatedly waited for, and the timer interrupt process described later is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is in the state where the RAM clear switch is pressed (in the ON state), and the setting key (keyhole). This is an operation to turn on the power switch with all of the frame open switch and the door open switch turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is that the RAM clear switch is not pressed (OFF state), and the setting key (keyhole), frame opening switch, and door opening are performed. This is an operation to turn on the power switch with all the switches turned on. The operation for executing the first RAM clear process is to press the RAM clear switch (ON state) and turn off any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch in the state of.

An example of the processing flow realized by executing the above-mentioned main processing will be described below.

-It is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied when the power supply is started (step S12403, step S12405, step S12406), but the setting change process (setting change mode). When the operation for executing the setting is performed, the setting change processing is performed regardless of whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied and regardless of the state of the setting checking flag. (Setting change mode) is executed (step S12418).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12403, step S12405, step S12406), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. If it is determined that is not satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting changing flag is ON (step S12407: YES), an operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode), a setting confirmation process The setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not the operation for executing the (setting confirmation mode) and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process are performed (step S12418). ..

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12403, step S12405, step S12406), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), and when an operation for executing the first RAM clear process is performed (step S12408). : YES, step S12417: NO, step S12419: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step S12420) regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag, and the RAM clear command is transmitted (step S12421).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12403, step S12405, step S12406), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), and an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. (Step S12408: NO, step S12409: YES) executes the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step S12412).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12403, step S12405, step S12406), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not performed. Even if there is, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12410: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12412).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12403, step S12405, step S12406), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is satisfied and the RAM error flag is turned ON (step S12415), the first RAM clear process is performed even if the operation for executing the first RAM clear process is performed. The RAM error command is transmitted without being executed (step S12422).

-When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step S12403, step S12405, step S12406), and the condition for turning on the RAM error flag. When it is determined that is satisfied and the RAM error flag is turned ON (step S12415), the setting is made even if the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. The RAM error command is transmitted without executing the confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step S12422).

Next, the details of the setting change process shown in step S12418 of FIG. 70 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 101. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine in step S12418 of FIG.

In step S12501, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the setting change mode has been started. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The setting change mode has started" is output from the speaker 46, and then a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, in this embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "setting change mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and receives the command. The display control device 100 displays a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress" on the symbol display device 41. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

After the setting change mode start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting change mode has been started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S12501, the process proceeds to step S12502.

In step S12502, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting changing flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not been completed yet. Is. After executing step S12502, the process proceeds to step S12503.

In step S12503, the initial setting process at the start of setting change is executed. At the start of setting change In the initial setting process, the initial settings required to start the setting change process are executed. Further, in this embodiment, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM error flag is ON, the RAM error flag is turned off. To. After executing step S12503, the process proceeds to step S12504.

In step S12504, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as the setting information for updating. Specifically, in this embodiment, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is used in an area other than the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Copy to the update setting information storage area. After executing step S12504, the process proceeds to step S12505.

In step S12505, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the update setting information is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. After that, the process proceeds to step S12506, and it is determined whether or not the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", is the update setting information a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6"? Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S12506 that the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12506: YES), the process proceeds to step S12508. On the other hand, in step S12506, when it is determined that the update setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12506: NO), for example, when "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information. If information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step S12507, and the update setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S12508.

In step S12508, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, the signal indicates the High level during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. The signal indicating the Low level is monitored inside, and when the signal detects a falling edge falling from the High level to the Low level, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S12508 that the setting key (keyhole) has not moved from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12508: NO), the process proceeds to step S12509 and whether or not the setting change button is pressed. To judge. If it is determined in step S12509 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S12509: YES), the process proceeds to step S12510 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the update setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as the update setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". After that, the process returns to step S12506 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated update setting information is within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12509 that the setting change button is not pressed (step S12509: NO), the process returns to step S12506 described above without executing the process of step S12510, and the update setting information is displayed. It is determined whether or not the value is within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S12508 described above that the setting key (keyhole) has moved from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12508: YES), the process proceeds to step S12511.

In step S12511, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as the setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. do. After executing step S12511, the process proceeds to step S12512, and the control for displaying the update setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12513.

In step S12513, the first RAM clear process is executed. In the first RAM clearing process, information other than the lottery setting setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clear process is executed, the above-mentioned setting changing flag is also cleared (turned off). After executing step S12513, the process proceeds to step S12514.

In step S12514, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the setting change mode has ended. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output of the voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is terminated from the speaker 46, and the voice such as "The setting change mode is terminated" is output from the speaker 46. In addition, the control for notifying that the symbol display device 41 and various lamps 47 are in the setting change mode is terminated.

After the setting change mode end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be configured to display the information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

After executing step S12514, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information is displayed on the management screen. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change.

Next, the details of the setting confirmation process shown in step S12412 of FIG. 70 will be described.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 101. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine in step S12412 of FIG.

In step S12601, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the setting confirmation mode has been started. Specifically, in this embodiment, the voice such as "the setting confirmation mode has started" is output from the speaker 46, and then the voice such as "the setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, in this embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "in the setting confirmation mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and receives the command. The display control device 100 displays a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress" on the symbol display device 41. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off by the maximum brightness.

After the setting confirmation mode start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S12601, the process proceeds to step S12602.

In step S12602, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not been completed yet. Is. After executing step S12602, the process proceeds to step S12603.

In step S12603, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is blinked and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S12604.

In step S12604, it is determined whether or not the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, the signal indicates the High level during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side. The signal indicating the Low level is monitored inside, and when the signal detects a falling edge that falls from the High level to the Low level, the setting key (keyhole) has moved from the ON side to the OFF side. judge. If it is determined in step S12604 that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12604: NO), step S12604 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12604 that the setting key (keyhole) has moved from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12604: YES), the process proceeds to step S12605. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (keyhole) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S12605. move on.

In step S12605, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12606.

In step S12606, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S12607.

In step S12607, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output of the voice such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress" is terminated from the speaker 46, and the voice such as "The setting confirmation mode is terminated" is output from the speaker 46. In addition, the control for notifying that the symbol display device 41 and the various lamps 47 are in the setting confirmation mode is terminated.

After the setting confirmation mode end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be configured to display the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12607, this setting confirmation process ends.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x) will be described.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment 101. In this embodiment, the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) executes timer interrupt processing at a cycle of 4 ms.

In step S12701, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is used. After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the added numerical value to the reading source counter is executed. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting 0 in the read source counter is executed. After executing step S12701, the process proceeds to step S12702.

In step S12702, the power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied. It is determined that the switch has been turned off or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. .. Then, when the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON and a predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, the process does not proceed to step S12703, which will be described later, and the infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. The power supply device 85 of this embodiment is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output the regulated voltage of the volt. As the time for outputting this stabilized voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the process until the above-mentioned RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process of step S12702 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S12703 as it is.

In step S12703, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12703 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step S12703: NO), the process proceeds to step S12704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12703 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12703: YES), the timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes after step S12704. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process for enabling the progress of the game after step S12704 is not executed, and the configuration does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. There is. Hereinafter, the processes after step S12704, which are the processes for enabling the progress of the game, will be described.

In step S12704, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step S12705.

In step S12705, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S12706.

In step S12706, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and the ball entry detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball entry detection process is the same as the ball entry detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12706, the process proceeds to step S12707.

In step S12707, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S12708 to execute the output setting process of the prize ball command. Then, the process proceeds to step S12709.

In step S12709, the ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the start port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Along with acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S12709, the process proceeds to step S12710.

In step S12710, the ball entry process for the through gate accompanying the entry (passage) of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is used as the electric power of the RAM 64. Store in the hold area 64d. After executing step S12710, the process proceeds to step S12711.

In step S12711, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are performed. After executing step S12711, the process proceeds to step S12712.

In step S12712, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, a process of shifting the game state to an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is executed. After executing step S12712, the process proceeds to step S12713.

In step S12713, an electric service support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (electric accessory opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S12713, the process proceeds to step S12714.

In step S12714, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process for launching a game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S12714, the process proceeds to step S12715.

In step S12715, the external information setting process is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. After executing step S12715, the process proceeds to step S12716.

In step S12716, a game history process for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history process is the same as the game history process shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S12716, the timer interrupt process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is started, the above-mentioned normal start command, RAM abnormality command, RAM clear command, setting change mode start command, and setting are performed. One of the five commands of the confirmation mode start command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 that received any one of these five commands started the main control device 60 based on the type of the received command (what type). It is possible to grasp whether the startup process of is executed). That is, the above-mentioned five commands of the normal start command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command are commands indicating the type of start processing executed by the main control device 60. Therefore, these five commands are collectively referred to as a "startup type command".

Next, the process executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the first embodiment 101. In step S12801, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power, the determination of whether or not the sound / light side RAM 94 functions normally, and the like are executed. After executing step S12801, the process proceeds to step S12802.

In step S1282, the start date / time information acquisition process is executed. In the start date / time information acquisition process, a process of reading the start date / time information from the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 and storing it in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the main RAM 64 is executed. The details of the start date / time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S12802, the process proceeds to step S12803.

In step S12803, the activation type notification process is executed. In the activation type notification process, the activation type of the main control device 60 is notified based on the activation type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The details of the activation type notification process will be described later. After executing step S12803, the process proceeds to step S12804.

In step S12804, the permission of the timer interrupt is set. As a result, the execution of the timer interrupt processing described later is permitted. After that, it enters an infinite loop.

Next, the details of the start date / time information acquisition process shown in step S1282 of FIG. 74 will be described.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a start date / time information acquisition process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the first embodiment 101. In step S12901, it is determined whether or not the activation type command has been received from the main MPU 62. Specifically, in this embodiment, one of the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command, is performed from the main MPU 62. Determine if a command has been received. If it is determined in step S12901 that any of the above five commands has been received (step S12901: YES), the process proceeds to step S12902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12901 that none of the five commands described above has been received (step S12901: NO), the process returns to step S12901 again. That is, it waits until it is determined that any of the above-mentioned five commands has been received, and when it is determined that any of the above-mentioned five commands has been received, step S12902 is performed. move on.

In step S12902, it is determined whether or not the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is either a normal activation command or a RAM error command. If it is determined in step S12902 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is either a normal activation command or a RAM error command (step S12902: YES), the process proceeds to step S12903. Here, when the command received as the start type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal start command or a RAM error command, the setting change process (setting change mode) is performed when the power supply from the outside is started. This is the case where none of the operations for executing the operation, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process are accepted. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S12903.

In step S12903, the current date and time information is read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the start date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. After that, the process proceeds to step S12905, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step S12902, when it is determined that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is neither a normal activation command nor a RAM error command (step S12902: NO), that is, as an activation type command from the main MPU 62. If the received command is any of the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command, the process proceeds to step S12904. Here, when the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is one of the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command, it is mainly the power from the outside. An operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode), an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), and an operation for executing the first RAM clear process when the supply is started. This is the case when any of the operations of is accepted. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S12904.

In step S12904, it is determined whether or not the start date / time information is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. Here, the case where the start date / time information is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is a case where the date / time can be read from the information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2. When the start date / time information is not stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, for example, when the power is turned on for the first time in the pachinko machine 10, or the information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 is stored. This is a case where the date and time cannot be read normally because it is destroyed by noise or the like. If it is determined in step S12904 that the start date / time information is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S12904: YES), the process of step S12903 described above (overwriting the current date / time information as the start date / time information). The process proceeds to step S12905 without executing (avoiding) the process of performing.

In step S12905, the start date / time information is read from the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the read start date / time information is written (stored) in the start date / time information storage start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. After that, the main startup date / time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S12904 described above that the activation date / time information is not stored in the activation date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S12904: NO), the process of step S12903 described above (current date / time information is read). After executing the process of overwriting the start date and time information in step S12905, the process proceeds to step S12905 described above. The reason for this is that if the configuration proceeds to step S12905 described above while the start date / time information is not stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, it should be written in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound / optical side RAM 94. This is because there is a problem that the target start date / time information does not exist.

Next, the details of the activation type notification process shown in step S12803 of FIG. 74 will be described.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an activation type notification process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the first embodiment 101. In step S13001, it is determined whether or not the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal activation command. If it is determined in step S13001 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal activation command (step S13001: YES), the process proceeds to step S13002.

In step S13002, the normal start notification process is executed. In the normal start notification process, the pachinko machine 10 (main) is in a normal state in which the main RAM 64 is not determined to be abnormal and none of the above-mentioned setting change process, setting confirmation process, and first RAM clear process is executed. The process of notifying that the control device 60) has been started is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "normally starts" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S13002, the activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13001 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not a normal activation command (step S13001: NO), the process proceeds to step S13003 and is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the command is a RAM error command. If it is determined in step S13003 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a RAM error command (step S13003: YES), the process proceeds to step S13004.

In step S13004, RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a process for notifying that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is controlled so as to be repeatedly output from the speaker 46, and an infinite loop is entered. That is, in the RAM abnormality notification process, the notification of the type to be started next in the pachinko machine 10 is continued until the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the power supply is cut off.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13003 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not a RAM error command (step S13003: NO), the process proceeds to step S13005 and is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the command is a RAM clear command. If it is determined in step S12005 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a RAM clear command (step S13005: YES), the process proceeds to step S13006.

In step S13006, the RAM clear notification process is executed. In the RAM clear notification process, a process of notifying the main RAM 64 that the RAM clear process has been executed is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The RAM of the main controller has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After that, the activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13005 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not a RAM clear command (step S13005: NO), the process proceeds to step S13007 and is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. Judges whether the command is the setting change mode start command. If it is determined in step S13007 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the setting change mode start command (step S13007: YES), the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, the setting change mode start notification process is executed. In the setting change mode start notification process, a process for notifying that the setting change mode has been started is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The setting change mode has started" is output from the speaker 46, and then a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, in the setting change mode start notification process, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, in this embodiment, the display control device 100 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "in the setting change mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and receives the command. Display a character string such as "In setting change mode" on the symbol display device 41. Further, in the setting change mode start notification process, the various lamps 47 are controlled to blink by alternately repeating turning on and off with the maximum brightness. After that, the process proceeds to step S13009, and it is determined whether or not the setting change mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S13009 that the setting change mode end command has been received (step S13009: YES), the process proceeds to step S13010. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13009 that the setting change mode end command has not been received (step S13009: NO), the process returns to step S13009 again. That is, it waits until it is determined that the setting change mode end command has been received, and when it is determined that the setting change mode end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S13010.

In step S13010, the setting change mode end notification process is executed. In the setting change mode end notification process, a process for notifying that the setting change mode has ended is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output of the voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is terminated from the speaker 46, and the voice such as "The setting change mode is terminated" is output from the speaker 46. In addition, the control for notifying that the symbol display device 41 and various lamps 47 are in the setting change mode is terminated. After that, the activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S13007, when it is determined that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not the setting change mode start command (step S13007: NO), in other words, it is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. If the command is a setting confirmation mode start command, the process proceeds to step S13011.

In step S13011, the setting confirmation mode start notification process is executed. In the setting confirmation mode start notification process, a process for notifying that the setting confirmation mode has been started is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the sound such as "the setting confirmation mode has started" is output from the speaker 46, and then the sound such as "the setting confirmation mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Further, in the setting confirmation mode start notification process, the symbol display device 41 displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, in this embodiment, the display control device 100 transmits a command for displaying a character string such as "in the setting confirmation mode" to the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100, and receives the command. Display a character string such as "In setting confirmation mode" on the symbol display device 41. Further, in the setting confirmation mode start notification process, the various lamps 47 are controlled to blink by alternately repeating turning on and off with the maximum brightness. After that, the process proceeds to step S13012, and it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S13012 that the setting confirmation mode end command has been received (step S13012: YES), the process proceeds to step S13013. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13012 that the setting confirmation mode end command has not been received (step S13012: NO), the process returns to step S13012 again. That is, it waits until it is determined that the setting confirmation mode end command has been received, and when it is determined that the setting confirmation mode end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S13013.

In step S13013, the setting confirmation mode end notification process is executed. In the setting confirmation mode end notification process, a process for notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output of the voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is terminated from the speaker 46, and the voice such as "The setting change mode is terminated" is output from the speaker 46. In addition, the control for notifying that the symbol display device 41 and the various lamps 47 are in the setting confirmation mode is terminated. After that, the activation type notification process is terminated.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the first embodiment 101. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (2 msec in this embodiment). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S13101, the command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S13101, the process proceeds to step S13102.

In step S13102, the RTC effect processing is executed. In the RTC effect processing, the RTC effect is performed for a predetermined time (5 minutes in this embodiment) every predetermined time (every hour in this embodiment) after the pachinko machine 10 is started (after the power supply is started). Perform the process to execute. The details of the RTC effect processing will be described later. After executing step S13102, the process proceeds to step S13103.

In step S13103, the game rotation effect processing is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing related to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is performed. After executing step S13103, the process proceeds to step S13104.

In step S13104, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step S13104, the process proceeds to step S13105.

In step S13105, the customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process for displaying a demo movie on the symbol display device 41 is executed when the game times have not been executed for a predetermined time. After executing step S13105, the process proceeds to step S13106.

In step S13106, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step S13106, the process proceeds to step S13107.

In step S13107, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step S13107, the timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the details of the RTC effect processing shown in step S13102 of FIG. 77 will be described.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an RTC effect processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the first embodiment 101.

In step S13201, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect executing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The RTC effect executing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the RTC effect described later is being executed, and is turned ON at the start of the RTC effect and turned OFF at the end of the RTC effect. If it is determined in step S13201 that the RTC effect executing flag is not ON (step S13201: NO), that is, if the RTC effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S13202.

In step S13202, the current date and time information is read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC97. After that, the process proceeds to step S1303, and the elapsed time from the start date / time to the current date / time is based on the read current date / time information and the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. Calculate the elapsed startup time. Specifically, for example, the current date and time information read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 indicates "December 15, 2017 11:53:45", and the start date and time information stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. When indicates "08:42:35 on December 15, 2017", the elapsed activation time is "3 hours 11 minutes 10 seconds". If the calculated startup elapsed time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, it will be 24 hours 00 minutes 00 from the startup elapsed time until the startup elapsed time becomes a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less. Subtract the value corresponding to the second. For example, if the calculated startup elapsed time is "51 hours 35 minutes 24 seconds", the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted twice, and the new startup elapsed time is "3 hours 35 minutes". It will be "24 seconds". The reason for adopting such a process will be described later. After executing step S13023, the process proceeds to step S13204.

In step S13204, the RTC effect execution determination table stored in the sound / light side ROM 93 is referred to, and it is determined in step S13205 whether or not it is the timing to start the RTC effect. In the RTC effect execution determination table, the elapsed activation time and the type of RTC effect are stored in association with each other.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an RTC effect execution determination table. As described above, in the RTC effect execution determination table, the activation elapsed time and the type of RTC effect are stored in association with each other. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, different types of RTC effects are set for each hour of the elapsed activation time. For example, "RTC effect A" is set corresponding to the activation elapsed time "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", and "RTC effect B" is set corresponding to the activation elapsed time "2 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds". Has been done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed activation time exceeds 24 hours 00:00, the elapsed activation time starts from the elapsed activation time until the elapsed activation time becomes 24 hours 00:00 or less. Subtract the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds. Therefore, since it is not necessary to make the RTC effect execution determination table correspond to the portion where the activation elapsed time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the storage capacity of the sound / light side ROM 93 required for storing the RTC effect execution determination table. Can be reduced.

The explanation is returned to FIG. 78. In step S13205, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the RTC effect. Specifically, when the activation elapsed time calculated in step S1303 matches the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table, it is determined that it is the start timing of the RTC effect, and they match. If not, it is determined that it is not the start timing of the RTC effect. For example, when the start elapsed time calculated in step S1323 is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", it is determined that it is the start timing of the RTC effect A.

If it is determined in step S13205 that it is not the timing to start the RTC effect (step S13205: NO), the RTC effect process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13205 that it is time to start the RTC effect (step S13205: YES), the process proceeds to step S13206.

In step S13206, it is set to start the RTC effect of the type corresponding to the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table. For example, when the elapsed activation time is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", the control of the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 is started so as to be an effect mode corresponding to the RTC effect A, and a moving image corresponding to the RTC effect A is started. A command for starting the display of is transmitted to the display control device 100. In this aspect, the RTC effect A is an effect in which the character A appears and sings the music A for 5 minutes. The other RTC effect set in the RTC effect execution determination table is an effect in which another character appears and sings another song for 5 minutes. That is, the characters and songs that appear in each type of RTC production are different. Then, the process proceeds to step S13207.

In step S13207, the RTC effect executing flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S13208, and "150,000" is set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr. The RTC effect timer counter Tr is a counter for managing the remaining time of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed, as will be described later. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, so that "150,000" set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr corresponds to 5 minutes. After that, the processing for this RTC effect is completed.

When it is determined in step S13201 described above that the RTC effect executing flag is ON (step S13201: YES), that is, in the timer interrupt process after turning on the RTC effect executing flag in step S13207 described above. If the process proceeds to step S13201, the process proceeds to step S13209.

In step S13209, 1 is subtracted from the value set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr. After that, the process proceeds to step S13210, and it is determined whether or not the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is 0. If it is determined in step S13210 that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is not 0 (step S13210: NO), that is, if it is determined that the RTC effect end timing has not yet been reached, the RTC effect process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13210 that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is 0 (step S13210: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the RTC effect, the process proceeds to step S13211. Set to end the running RTC effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S13212, the RTC effect executing flag is turned off, and the RTC effect process ends.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the above other aspects.

Prior to the explanation of the effect of this embodiment, a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed will be described. Generally, in a game hall, power is started to be supplied to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once (at the same time). Specifically, for example, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in so-called island equipment with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island equipment (hereinafter, also referred to as island power switch) is used. When turned on, power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time).

According to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 10, and the read current date and time information. Is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 as start date / time information (process shown in step S12903 in FIG. 75, hereinafter also referred to as “start date / time information storage process”). Then, the start date / time information storage process is executed based on the start date / time information including the date and time when the start date / time information storage process is executed and the current date / time information timed by the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC97. The activation elapsed time, which is the elapsed time since then, is calculated (step S13203 in FIG. 78), and the execution of the RTC effect is started based on the calculated activation elapsed time (steps S13204 to S13206 in FIG. 78). The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

Temporarily, the configuration for starting the execution of the RTC effect based on the current date and time information timed in the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC97 (for example, in the current date and time information) instead of the start elapsed time after the start date and time information storage process is executed. A case where the RTC effect is started at the timing when the included time becomes 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, when the time included in the current date and time information of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is different (for example, it is included in the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10A at a certain moment). When the time is 11:00:00 and the time included in the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the RTC effect is started is the timing of each pachinko machine 10. There is a problem that it is different for each, and it gives a sense of discomfort to the player who expected that the RTC production is started all at once (at the same time) in each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is based on the fact that the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is started, and the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 is started. The current date and time information is read from, and the start date and time information storage process for storing the read current date and time information as the start date and time information in the start date and time information storage area 97b2 is executed. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power switch, the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment is started all at once (at the same time), and the island equipment is supplied with electric power. Each of the installed pachinko machines 10 simultaneously (simultaneously) executes the start date / time information storage process.

According to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is timed by the start date / time information including the date and time when the start date / time information storage process is executed and the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC97. Based on the current date and time information, the elapsed startup time since the activation date and time information storage process was executed is calculated. As described above, since each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) executes the start date / time information storage process, the start date / time information storage process calculated in each pachinko machine 10 is executed. The elapsed start time since then is the same (or substantially the same) even if the time included in the current date and time information timed in the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated.

Then, according to this aspect, since each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated start-up elapsed time, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility all at once. It is possible to start the RTC effect (at the same time).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to hold the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 even during the power interruption state in which the power supply from the outside is cut off. Further, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 avoids the execution of the above-mentioned start date / time information storage process when the type of the start process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is a specific start process. It is configured (step S12902 in FIG. 75). Specifically, in this embodiment, when the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 receives a RAM clear command, a setting change mode start command, or a setting confirmation mode activation type command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Avoids executing the above-mentioned start date / time information storage process. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case where a configuration without a function for avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned start date / time information storage process is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the power supply to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts to be supplied all at once (at the same time). ) Executes startup date and time information storage processing. After that, the manager of the game hall performs a specific activation process (for example, a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM clear process) for the pachinko machine 10 of one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility. ) Is once turned off, and then a specific start-up process is executed for the one pachinko machine 10 (for example, a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode). As a state in which an operation for executing the RAM clear process is being accepted), the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 may be turned on to execute a specific start process. In this case, the one pachinko machine 10 executes the start date / time information storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. Then, the start-up elapsed time calculated in the one pachinko machine 10 will be different from the start-up elapsed time calculated in the other pachinko machine 10, and the timing at which the RTC effect is started in the one pachinko machine 10 will be set. There is a problem that the timing at which the RTC effect is started in the other pachinko machine 10 is different, and the player playing the game in the one pachinko machine 10 feels uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if the manager of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 and puts it in a power-off state, the start date / time information of the RTC 97 of the one pachinko machine 10 is stored. The activation date / time information stored in the area 97b2 is retained. After that, when the administrator turns on the power switch with the one pachinko machine 10 in a state where a specific start process is executed, the specific start process is executed in the one pachinko machine 10 and the start date / time information storage process is performed. Since the execution is avoided, the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 of the one pachinko machine 10 is not overwritten, and power is supplied simultaneously (at the same time) with the other pachinko machines 10. The start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage process executed when the start is started is maintained. As a result, the elapsed start time calculated for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the one pachinko machine 10 is the same (or substantially the same).

Then, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated start-up elapsed time, so that the power switch is once turned off and then turned on again. It is possible to start the RTC effect all at once (at the same time) in each of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility including the pachinko machine 10.

Further, according to this aspect, when a specific start-up process is executed by the main control device 60, information regarding the type of start-up process to be executed at the start of the next power supply is notified. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the activation process including the process of transmitting the RAM error command (step S12422 in FIG. 70) is executed by the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is "RAM error". The speaker 46 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "Please start in the setting change mode." Therefore, the administrator can grasp the type of start processing to be executed at the start of the next power supply, and after terminating the power supply to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is again used. At the time of starting the power supply of the above, it is possible to execute the activation process (setting change mode in this embodiment) of the notified type.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 in which the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12415 of FIG. 70 is terminated and then the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started again, the notification is given. If the activation process (setting change mode) of the specified type is not executed, it is determined again that the RAM is abnormal, and the main control device 60 sends a RAM error command to the voice emission control device 90 (Fig.). 70 step S12422). Then, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the above-mentioned activation date / time information storage process (step S12903 in FIG. 75) again, and the timing of the start of the RTC effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 is a plurality of other. The timing of the start of the RTC effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the above is different. However, in this embodiment, since the information regarding the type of start processing to be executed at the start of the next power supply is notified, the administrator causes the pachinko machine 10 to execute another type of start processing. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the timing of starting the RTC effect in the pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the other plurality of pachinko machines 10.

Further, in this embodiment, the notification of the type of start processing to be executed at the start of the next power supply is notified until the power supply from the outside to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (for example, the power switch is used). It is configured to continue (until it is turned off). The effect of such a configuration will be described.

If the notification of the type of start processing to be executed at the start of the next power supply is set to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), for example, in a large game hall, the administrator After turning on the power of the island power switch of the island equipment and starting the power supply from the outside to the pachinko machine 10, the notification ends before the administrator reaches the pachinko machine 10, and the next time. The administrator may not be able to grasp the type of startup process that should be executed when the power supply starts.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, the notification of the information regarding the type of start processing to be executed at the start of the next power supply is continued until the power supply from the outside to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the notification is terminated before the administrator reaches the pachinko machine 10, and the administrator cannot grasp the type of start processing to be executed at the start of the next power supply. It can be avoided.

In this embodiment, in step S12905 of FIG. 75, the start date / time information is read from the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the read start date / time information is written in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94 (storage). Although the configuration is such that the processing is executed, the processing in step S12905 may be omitted. In this case, in step S13203 of FIG. 78, the start date / time information storage process is performed based on the current date / time information read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 and the start date / time information read from the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. The configuration may be such that the elapsed startup time, which is the elapsed time from the execution date and time to the current date and time, is calculated. However, if the process of step S12905 is executed, the frequency of access to the RTC 97 by the sound light side MPU 92 can be reduced, so that the processing load of the sound light side MPU 92 can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, in step S13202 of FIG. 78, the current date and time is grasped by reading the current date and time information from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97. The current date and time information may be grasped by reading the current date and time information from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the above and then counting the elapsed time from the current date and time information read at the time of startup based on the internal clock. According to such a configuration, the frequency of access to the RTC 97 can be reduced, so that the processing load of the sound light side MPU 92 can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, not only when the setting change mode is executed based on the acceptance of the operation for executing the setting change mode, but also the setting change mode is set based on the setting changing flag being ON. Even if it is executed, the configuration is such that the execution of the startup date / time information storage process is avoided, but when the setting change mode is executed based on the acceptance of the operation for executing the setting change mode. As long as it is, the configuration may be such that the execution of the start date / time information storage process is avoided. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall turned on the island power switch, and the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment was started all at once (at the same time). In this case, even though each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility should execute the start date / time information storage process all at once (at the same time), the setting changing flag is ON. It is possible to prevent the 10 from avoiding the execution of the start date / time information storage process.

Similarly, the configuration may be such that the execution of the start date / time information storage process is avoided only when the setting confirmation mode is executed based on the acceptance of the operation for executing the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall turned on the island power switch, and the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment was started all at once (at the same time). In this case, even though each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility should execute the start date / time information storage process all at once (at the same time), the setting confirmation flag is ON. It is possible to prevent the 10 from avoiding the execution of the start date / time information storage process.

<Aspect 102>
The activation date / time information acquisition process shown in FIG. 75 of the above aspect 101 may be replaced with the activation date / time information acquisition process shown in FIG. 79 below. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a start date / time information acquisition process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the first embodiment 102. In step S13301, it is determined whether or not the activation type command has been received from the main MPU 62. Specifically, in this embodiment, any one of the above-mentioned five commands from the main MPU 62: the normal start command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command. Determine if a command has been received. If it is determined in step S13301 that any of the five commands described above has been received (step S13301: YES), the process proceeds to step S13302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13301 that none of the above five commands has been received (step S13301: NO), the process returns to step S13301 again. That is, it waits until it is determined that any of the above-mentioned five commands has been received, and when it is determined that any of the above-mentioned five commands has been received, step S13302 is performed. move on.

In step S13302, it is determined whether or not the start date / time information is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. Here, the case where the start date / time information is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is a case where the date / time can be read from the information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2. When the start date / time information is not stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, for example, when the power is turned on for the first time in the pachinko machine 10, or the information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 is stored. This is a case where the date and time cannot be read normally because it is destroyed by noise or the like. If it is determined in step S13302 that the start date / time information is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S13302: YES), the process proceeds to step S13303.

In step S13303, the start date / time information is read from the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the current date / time information is read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97. Then, it is determined whether or not the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information. Specifically, for example, the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is "December 8, 2017 08:12:32", and the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information is the next day "December 2017 12". If it is "08:15:11 on the 9th of the month", it is determined that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information. On the other hand, the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is "December 8, 2017 08:12:32", and the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information is "December 8, 2017 08:25:21" on the same day. In the case of "seconds", it is determined that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has not passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the start date and time information. If it is determined in step S13303 that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information (step S13303: YES), the process proceeds to step S13304.

In step S13304, the current date and time information is read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the start date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. After that, the process proceeds to step S13305 described later. That is, when the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information, the information indicating the date and time when the pachinko machine 10 is activated (current date and time information) is activated. It is stored in the activation date / time information storage area 97b2 as date / time information. After that, the process proceeds to step S13305 described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13303 that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information has not elapsed more than 30 minutes from the date and time indicated by the start date and time information (step S13303: NO), the process of step S13304 described above (step S13303: NO). The process proceeds to step S13305 without executing (avoiding) the process of reading the current date and time information and overwriting it as the start date and time information.

In step S13305, the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is read, and the read start date / time information is written (stored) in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound light side RAM. After that, the main startup date / time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S13302 described above that the activation date / time information is not stored in the activation date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S13302: NO), the process of step S13303 described above (current date / time information indicates). The process of determining whether or not the current date and time has passed 30 minutes or more from the date and time indicated by the start date and time information) is avoided, and the process proceeds to step S13304. The reason for this is that if the configuration proceeds to step S13303 described above while the start date / time information is not stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, there is start date / time information to be compared with the current date / time information. This is because there is a problem of not doing so. Further, the reason for executing the process of step S13304 is that if the configuration proceeds to step S13305 described above while the start date / time information is not stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, the sound / light side RAM 94 is started. This is because there is a problem that the start date / time information to be written does not exist in the date / time information storage area 94b.

As described above, according to this aspect, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the above other aspects.

According to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 10, and the read current date and time information. Is stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 as start date / time information (the process shown in step S13304 in FIG. 79, hereinafter also referred to as “start date / time information storage process”). Then, the start date / time information storage process is executed based on the start date / time information including the date and time when the start date / time information storage process is executed and the current date / time information timed by the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC97. The activation elapsed time, which is the elapsed time since then, is calculated (step S13203 in FIG. 78), and the execution of the RTC effect is started based on the calculated activation elapsed time (steps S13204 to S13206 in FIG. 78). Since the effect of adopting this configuration is the same as the effect described in the above aspect 102, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to retain the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 even during the power failure state, and the voice emission control device 90. When the MPU 92 receives the activation type command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the date and time included in the current date and time information in the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 is included in the activation date and time information stored in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2. If a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment) has not elapsed from the date and time, the execution of the above-mentioned activation date and time information storage process is avoided (step S13303 in FIG. 79). The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case where a configuration without a function for avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned start date / time information storage process is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the power supply to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts to be supplied all at once (at the same time). ) Executes startup date and time information storage processing. After that, the manager of the game hall once turns off the power switch of one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility for various reasons, and then turns off the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 again. The power switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be turned on. Specifically, for example, in order to execute the setting change mode and change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 of one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility. After turning off once, the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 may be turned on to execute the setting change mode while the operation for executing the setting change mode of the one pachinko machine 10 is being accepted. be. In this case, the one pachinko machine 10 executes the start date / time information storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. Then, the start-up elapsed time calculated in the one pachinko machine 10 will be different from the start-up elapsed time calculated in the other pachinko machine 10, and the timing at which the RTC effect is started in the one pachinko machine 10 will be set. There is a problem that the timing at which the RTC effect is started in the other pachinko machine 10 is different, and the player playing the game in the one pachinko machine 10 feels uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if the manager of the game hall turns off the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 and puts it in a power-off state, the start date / time information of the RTC 97 of the one pachinko machine 10 is stored. The activation date / time information stored in the area 97b2 is retained. After that, if the administrator turns on the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 within a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment), the execution of the start date / time information storage process is avoided, so that the one pachinko machine 10 is used. In the start date / time information storage process executed when the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is not overwritten and the power supply is started simultaneously (at the same time) with the other pachinko machine 10. The stored startup date and time information is maintained. As a result, the elapsed start time calculated for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the one pachinko machine 10 is the same (or substantially the same).

Then, according to this aspect, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated start-up elapsed time. Therefore, once the power switch is turned off, the power switch is turned on again. It is possible to start the RTC effect all at once (at the same time) in each of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facilities including the pachinko machine 10.

That is, the administrator turns on the island power switch of the island facility, starts supplying power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility all at once (at the same time), and then starts supplying power for a predetermined time (at the same time). Within 30 minutes) in this embodiment, among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility, one of the pachinko machines 10 whose lottery setting is to be changed is once turned off, and then the one is turned off. If the operation for executing the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 is accepted and the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 is turned on to execute the setting change mode, the lottery setting of the one pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to change the above, and at the same time (at the same time) in each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility including the one pachinko machine 10 in which the power switch is turned off and then turned on again. It is possible to start the RTC production.

In this embodiment, in step S13303 of FIG. 80, the time as a criterion for determining whether or not to avoid the execution of the activation date / time information storage process (step S13304) is set to 30 minutes. The length of time may be changed. According to such a configuration, the length of time as the determination criterion can be appropriately changed according to the number and size of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall, and the game is, for example. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time used as the determination criterion elapses before the work of changing the lottery settings for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is completed.

<Aspect 103>
In each of the above modes, in a configuration in which the lottery setting of the winning lottery can be changed, it is determined whether or not the setting information for determining the lottery setting is a numerical value within a predetermined range, after the progress of the game is started. It may also be configured to be executed. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 that can take any value of "1" to "6" as the setting information for determining the lottery setting, the setting information is abnormal other than "1" to "6" due to the influence of noise or the like. It may be configured to execute the determination as to whether or not the value is (for example, 7 or B, etc.) even at the stage after the progress of the game is started.

In this embodiment, the determination of the setting information is executed at the time of entering the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (more accurately, immediately before the execution of the winning lottery). do. In the following, the determination of the setting information executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 is referred to as "setting information determination at the time of entering the ball", and at the start of the change of the symbol (winning lottery). Judgment about the setting information to be executed immediately before (execution) is called "setting information judgment at the start of fluctuation". Hereinafter, the configuration of this embodiment will be specifically described.

First, the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball to be executed in this embodiment will be described.

When the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment acquires special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the said Prior to the execution of the look-ahead determination process (so-called look-ahead) based on the acquired special information, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range (1 to 6 in this embodiment). (Numerical value of) is determined. In addition, as will be described later, the prior determination process is based on the reserved special information before the reserved special information (pending information) is subject to the winning lottery (the winning determination processing described later). This is a process for determining whether or not there is a big hit, the type of big hit, and whether or not a reach has occurred.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, the advance determination process is executed based on the acquired special information, and the advance determination is performed. A hold command including the processing result is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, that is, the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to the influence of noise or the like ( For example, if it is determined to be 7 or B, etc.), the execution of the prior determination process is avoided, and the abnormal hold command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The error hold command determines that the setting information is an abnormal value at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and that the execution of the prior determination process is avoided. This is the command to show.

Next, the variable start setting information determination executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment is based on special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like) acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. When executing the winning lottery (hit determination processing described later), is the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 a numerical value within a predetermined range prior to the execution of the winning lottery? Execute the judgment of whether or not.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, a winning lottery is performed based on the special information as in the normal pachinko machine 10. Execute.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, that is, the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to the influence of noise or the like ( For example, if it is determined that the value is 7 or B, etc.), a game stop command indicating to stop the progress of the game is issued on the sub side of the voice emission control device 90 or the like after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery. It sends to the control device and executes the process for stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the player cannot continue the game. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

As described above, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the execution of the prior determination process is avoided, so that the setting information is obtained. Suppressing that the pre-judgment process is executed with an abnormal value that is not a numerical value within a predetermined range and the pass / fail table cannot be referred to, resulting in a defect in the result of the pre-judgment process. Can be done.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being executed in a state where the winning / failing table cannot be referred to because it is an abnormal value other than a numerical value, and a defect occurs in the result of the winning lottery.

Further, according to this aspect, if it is determined in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the progress of the game is stopped, so that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range. It is possible to prevent the player's disadvantage from expanding due to the progress of the game with an abnormal value that is not.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, while the setting information is used in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball. If it is determined that the value is not within the predetermined range, the progress of the game is not stopped. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case where a configuration is adopted in which the progress of the game is stopped even when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball will be described. In this configuration, for example, a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 while the symbol is changing or the opening / closing execution mode (round game) is being executed, and the ball enters the ball as a trigger. If it is determined in the time setting information determination that the setting information is not within a predetermined range, the symbol is changed or the open / close execution mode (round game) being executed is interrupted, and the game is stopped, which is large for the player. It will cause discomfort and disadvantage.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, even if it is determined in the ball entry setting information determination that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the progress of the game is not stopped, so that the ball entry setting is made. There is no change in the symbol or the opening / closing execution mode (round game) that has already been executed before the entry of the game ball that triggered the information determination. Then, as in this embodiment, even if the progress of the game is stopped when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the symbol is changing or the opening / closing is executed. Since the mode is not being executed, the discomfort and disadvantage given to the player is greater than the case where the setting information is not within the predetermined range and the game is stopped in the setting information judgment at the time of entering the ball. Is not big. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to stop the progress of the game after reducing the discomfort and disadvantage given to the player. Then, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormal value in which the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, and the disadvantage of the player is expanded.

Next, an effect to be executed in cooperation with the display control device 100 when the voice emission control device 90 of this embodiment receives a hold command or an abnormal hold command will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like) acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is the target of the winning lottery. A reserved image indicating that the special information is suspended is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 (FIG. 4) on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Let me. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to display the reserved images of the following five types of display modes as the display modes of the reserved images.
Type 1 hold image (blue hold image in this embodiment)
Type 2 hold image (green hold image in this embodiment)
Type 3 hold image (red hold image in this embodiment)
Type 4 hold image (golden hold image in this aspect)
Type 5 hold image (rainbow-colored hold image in this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the first type reserved image, the second type reserved image, the third type reserved image, the fourth type reserved image, and the fifth type reserved image are arranged in ascending order of expectation. The degree of expectation means a high probability that the special information corresponding to the reserved image will be won as a big hit when the reserved image of the display mode is displayed. In this aspect, the type 5 reserved image is configured to be displayed only when the corresponding special information is won, and not displayed when the corresponding special information is missed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type 5 reserved image is a reserved image suggesting that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, and when the type 5 reserved image is displayed, the jackpot is displayed. Winning is confirmed.

Then, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 sets the hold effect pattern based on the result of the prior determination process included in the hold command. In the hold effect pattern, information such as which type of hold image is displayed first at the timing when the hold command is received, and what kind of display mode (type) of the hold image is displayed until the winning lottery is applied. It contains information such as whether to change with a pattern.

In this aspect, various hold effect patterns are set. The following is an example of a hold effect pattern that can be set in this embodiment.
-A hold effect pattern that displays the first-class hold image with the lowest expectation at the timing of receiving the hold command and keeps the first-class hold image unchanged after that.-Expectation at the timing of receiving the hold command. After displaying the lowest type 1 hold image of, the hold change suggestion effect suggesting that the type 1 hold image may change to another type of hold image is executed, and then the type 1 hold is performed. Hold effect pattern that executes a hold change effect that changes the image to a hold image with higher expectation (for example, type 2 hold image) ・ Hold image with high expectation from the beginning (for example, type 3) at the timing when the hold command is received. Hold image) display Hold effect pattern ・ After displaying a hold image with high expectations (for example, type 3 hold image) from the beginning when the hold command is received, the hold image changes to another type of hold image. After executing the hold change suggestion effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the hold change effect is executed, the hold change effect that changes the hold image into a hold image with a higher expectation (for example, a type 4 hold image) is executed. A hold change that suggests that the hold image may change to another type of hold image after displaying a hold image with high expectations (for example, type 3 hold image) from the beginning when the command is received. A hold effect pattern that executes a hold change effect that changes the hold image to a hold image with a lower expectation (for example, a type 1 hold image) after executing the suggestion effect. Executes a hold change suggestion effect that suggests that may change to another type of hold image, but the hold effect pattern that keeps the displayed hold image unchanged after that. A hold change effect that changes (promotes) a low hold image to a hold image with high expectations is also called a hold promotion effect, and a hold change effect that changes (demotions) a hold image with high expectations to a hold image with low expectations. In particular, it is also called a hold demotion effect.

In this embodiment, since the hold effect pattern as described above is set, the player plays the game while expecting that the hold image having a higher expectation is displayed. In addition, when the player recognizes the hold change suggestion effect, he / she expects the hold image to change to a higher expectation, while he / she does not want the hold image to change to a lower expectation hold image. I will hold it.

Next, a case where the voice emission control device 90 receives the abnormal hold command will be described.

Upon receiving the abnormal hold command, the voice emission control device 90 displays the first-class hold image having the lowest expectation in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 (FIG. 4) on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. ), And it is determined whether or not the reserved image of the second kind or more is included in the reserved image already displayed. Then, when it is determined that the second or more kinds of reserved images are displayed, the pending change suggestion effect and the reserved change effect can be executed within the period until the currently executed symbol change is completed. Judge whether or not. In this embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect is 5 seconds, so if the remaining time of the change of the current symbol is 5 seconds or more, the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect Is determined to be feasible. Then, when it is determined that the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change suggestion effect can be executed, the hold change suggestion effect is executed, and then the displayed second or higher type hold image (for example, gold hold) is displayed. A hold change effect (hold demotion effect) for changing (demotion) to a type 1 hold image (for example, blue hold) is executed.

As described above, the fact that the abnormal hold command is transmitted from the main control device 60 means that the game ball to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 that triggered the transmission of the abnormal hold command is It means that the setting information is determined to be abnormal (not a numerical value within a predetermined range) at the time of entering the ball. Therefore, the set information is within the predetermined range at the timing immediately before the currently changing symbol is stopped and the special information held as the target of the next winning lottery becomes the target of the winning lottery and the fluctuation of the symbol starts. It is determined that the value is not the value of, and the progress of the game is stopped as it is.

Here, in this embodiment, the reason for adopting the configuration for executing the above-mentioned hold change suggestion effect and hold change effect (hold demotion effect) when an abnormal hold command is received will be described.

First, unlike this embodiment, a case where the above-mentioned hold change suggestion effect and hold change effect (hold demotion effect) are not executed even when an abnormal hold command is received will be described. In this configuration, for example, when the player receives the abnormal hold command in the situation where the symbol is changing and the hold image with high expectation is displayed as the target of the winning lottery from the next time onward, the player receives the abnormal hold command. Winning of special information corresponding to the high-expected reserved image Even though there is a strong expectation for the lottery, the changing symbol stops and the special information corresponding to the high-expected reserved image The game stops at the moment when is the target of the winning lottery, or at the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image that is the target of the winning lottery is the target of the winning lottery before the reserved image with high expectation. In the end, the player is very angry and disappointed that the game has stopped without the winning lottery being executed based on the special information corresponding to the reserved image with high expectation that had a strong sense of expectation. You will have a feeling, and eventually a feeling of distrust. Then, after the game is stopped, when the manager of the game hall restarts the pachinko machine 10 as the above-mentioned setting change mode in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to a state in which the game can proceed, it is stored in the main RAM 64. Various information will be erased, and special information corresponding to the high-expected reserved image that the player had a strong expectation for will also be erased. As a result, even after the pachinko machine 10 is restarted, the winning lottery based on the special information corresponding to the reserved image with high expectation that the player had a strong expectation will not be executed, and the player The feeling of anger and disappointment will be further strengthened.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned configuration for executing the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect when the abnormal hold command is received is adopted as in this embodiment, the special hold image corresponding to the highly expected hold image is adopted. The hold image with the highest expectation is the hold image with the lowest expectation before the information is the target of the lottery, that is, before the fluctuation of the symbol based on the special information corresponding to the hold image with the highest expectation starts. Changes to. Therefore, the player initially had a strong expectation for the reserved image with high expectation, but the reserved image with high expectation is changed to the reserved image with low expectation, so that the reserved image is changed. It will change the recognition that the special information corresponding to was not so high-expected. After that, the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image is the target of the winning lottery, or the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image which is the target of the winning lottery before the reserved image is the target of the winning lottery. Even if the game is stopped, the player does not already have a strong expectation for the special information corresponding to the reserved image, so the special information corresponding to the reserved image is subject to the lottery. Even if the game is stopped at the moment when the special information corresponding to the reserved image that is the target of the lottery is hit before the reserved image is the target of the lottery, the feeling of anger and disappointment is so great. You don't have to hold it. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player for the game being stopped, and the special information corresponding to the reserved image is erased by restarting the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to reduce the player's anger and disappointment with respect to the matter.

Further, in this embodiment, at the timing when the special information corresponding to the reserved image is the target of the lottery, the reserved image is the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is configured to move to a display area different from the above (also referred to as a holding display area during change) and continue to display the holding image. Then, in this embodiment, the type 5 reserved image (rainbow-colored reserved image in this embodiment), which has the highest expectation, is the target of the winning lottery and displays the reserved image after moving to the changing pending display area. When the reserved image is displayed only in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2, the fifth type reserved image is not displayed. As a hold effect pattern in which the 5th kind hold image with the highest expectation is displayed, for example, in the 1st hold display area Ds1 or the 2nd hold display area Ds2, it is displayed as the 4th kind hold image, but it is a hit. An example in which a hold change suggestion effect and a hold change effect are executed after moving to the changing hold display area as a target of a lottery, and the type 4 hold image changes to the type 5 hold image with the highest expectation. Can be mentioned. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this aspect, a case where a configuration in which the reserved image with the highest expectation can be displayed can be displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 will be described. In this configuration, when the hold image with the highest expectation is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2, the voice emission control device 90 receives an abnormal hold command to suggest a hold change. When the effect is executed, the player who recognizes the hold change suggestion effect has no room to change the hold image having the highest expectation to the hold image having a higher expectation, and therefore, after the hold change suggestion effect. It becomes possible to predict that the hold change effect to be executed changes the hold image with the highest expectation to the hold image with the lower expectation, and the player's expectation for the hold change suggestion effect. It will reduce the feeling. Further, in the situation where the hold image having the highest expectation and confirmed to win the jackpot is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2, the voice emission control device 90 is abnormal. By receiving the hold command, the hold change effect is executed, and when the hold image that is confirmed to win the jackpot changes to the hold image with the lowest expectation, the player wins the jackpot. The unbelievable event that the reserved image that should have been confirmed changes to the reserved image with the lowest expectation has occurred, and the reserved image that should have been confirmed to win the jackpot You will be very angry and disappointed that the game has stopped without the winning lottery being executed based on the special information corresponding to.

On the other hand, when the above-described configuration of the present embodiment is adopted, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds always changes to a reserved image with higher expectation. Since there is room, even if the hold change suggestion effect is executed by the voice emission control device 90 receiving the abnormal hold command, the player who recognizes the hold change suggestion effect It cannot be determined that the hold change effect executed after the hold change suggestion effect changes to a hold image with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, according to this aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for the pending change suggestion effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 is configured so that the reserved image, which has the highest expectation and is confirmed to win the jackpot, is not displayed. Even if the hold change effect is executed by the voice emission control device 90 receiving the abnormal hold command, the hold image with the highest expectation displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 is the most. The phenomenon of changing to a reserved image with a low degree of expectation cannot occur. Therefore, according to this aspect, the event that the reserved image that should have been confirmed to win the jackpot changes to the reserved image with the lowest expectation, or the winning the jackpot should be confirmed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event such as the game being stopped without the winning lottery being executed based on the special information corresponding to the reserved image, which makes the player feel great anger and disappointment. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. In this embodiment, when the special information becomes the target of the winning lottery and the fluctuation of the symbol starts, the lottery result of the winning lottery is displayed even if the setting information becomes an abnormal value after the fluctuation of the symbol starts. Until the next special information becomes the target of the winning lottery, or if the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning, the opening / closing execution mode executed based on the big winning winning is terminated and the next special information is displayed. The game does not stop until it is the target of the winning lottery. Therefore, if it is a hold image after moving to the changing hold display area, even if the hold image (type 5 hold image) suggesting that the big hit is confirmed is displayed, the player It does not cause the above-mentioned great anger or disappointment. Therefore, according to this aspect, the pending image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed in the variable pending display area while suppressing the player from having a great anger or disappointment. By displaying it, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation and joy.

Further, in this embodiment, when the abnormal hold command is received, it is determined whether or not the hold effect pattern already set before receiving the abnormal hold command exists, and when it is determined that the hold effect pattern exists, the relevant state is determined. Cancel the setting of the hold effect pattern. Specifically, when an abnormal hold command is received, it is determined whether or not there is a hold change suggestion effect or hold change effect that has already been set to be executed but has not yet been executed, and is still executed. If it is determined that there are pending change suggestion effects and pending change effects that have not been performed, the execution schedule of these pending change suggestion effects and pending change effects is cancelled. According to this configuration, although the player's expectation for the hold image changed by executing the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect is increased, the special information corresponding to the hold image is It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust because the game is stopped without the winning lottery being executed.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this embodiment will be described. The main MPU 62 of this embodiment executes the main process and the timer interrupt process. The main process is a process executed when the power is turned on, and the main process executed by the main MPU 62 of this embodiment is the same as the main process (FIG. 70) described in the embodiment 101, so the description thereof will be omitted.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 103. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S20101, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is used. After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the added numerical value to the reading source counter is executed. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting 0 in the read source counter is executed. After executing step S20101, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied. It is determined that the switch has been turned off or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. .. Then, when the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON and a predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, the process does not proceed to step S20103, which will be described later, and the infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. The power supply device 85 of this embodiment is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output the regulated voltage of the volt. As the time for outputting this stabilized voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the process until the above-mentioned RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power failure monitoring process in step S20102 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S20103 as it is.

In step S20103, it is determined whether or not at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the RAM error flag is a flag that turns ON when it is determined that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal in the main process executed when the power is turned on. As will be described later, the game stop flag is a flag that is turned ON in order to stop the progress of the game when it is determined that the setting information is not normal before the execution of the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S20103 that both the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag are not ON (step S20103: NO), the process proceeds to step S20104. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20103 that at least one of the RAM error flag and the game stop flag is ON (step S20103: YES), the timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes after step S20104. do. That is, when at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON, the process for enabling the progress of the game after step S20104 is not executed, and the game progress mode in which the game can proceed is set. Is configured so that it does not migrate. Hereinafter, the processes after step S20104, which are the processes for enabling the progress of the game, will be described.

In step S20104, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step S20105.

In step S20105, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S20106.

In step S20106, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and the ball entry detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. Since the ball entry detection process is the same as the ball entry detection process shown in FIG. 28, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S20106, the process proceeds to step S20107.

In step S20107, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S20108.

In step S20108, the ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the start port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Along with acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S20108, the process proceeds to step S20109.

In step S20109, the ball entry process for the through gate accompanying the entry (passage) of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is used in the RAM 64. Store in the electric service holding area 64d. After executing step S20109, the process proceeds to step S20111.

In step S20111, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are performed. After executing step S20111, the process proceeds to step S20111.

In step S20111, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, a process of shifting the game state to an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is executed. After executing step S20111, the process proceeds to step S20112.

In step S20112, an electric service support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (electric accessory opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S20112, the process proceeds to step S2011.

In step S2013, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process for launching a game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S2013, the process proceeds to step S20114.

In step S20114, a command output process for outputting (transmitting) a command set as a transmission target in the current timer interrupt process to each control device on the sub side is executed. For example, when commands related to effects such as variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, these are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S20114, the process proceeds to step S2015.

In step S2015, a game history process for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. Since the game history process is the same as the game history process shown in FIG. 29, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S2015, the timer interrupt process ends.

[Ball entry process for starting port]
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 81: S20108).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step S20201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S2020.

If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S2020.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S2020, when the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), that is, when the start hold number N is not more than the upper limit value, the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S2020, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S20211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20101 (FIG. 81) are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step. In S20210, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20101 (FIG. 81). The value is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 81) are set. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 is in 6 stages from "1" to "6", the setting information is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5". , "6" is determined. If it is determined in step S20213 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S20213: YES), the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the information before the reserved information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step S20214, the process proceeds to step S20215.

In step S20215, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command.

The hold command holds the determination result by the prior determination process based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm the information before the information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114).

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 displays the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in response to an increase in the number of pending items is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20213 that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, for example, the setting information such as "7" or "B" in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 due to the influence of noise or the like may be used. If it is determined that an impossible value is stored (step S20213: NO), the process proceeds to step S20216 without executing the pre-determination process of step S20214 described above, and an abnormal hold command is set. The abnormal hold command is a command indicating that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range at the time when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The abnormal hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). After executing step S20216, the ball entry process for the main starting port is completed.

[First judgment process]
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: S20214) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the determination results such as the winning / failing determination of the winning lottery, the determination of the type of the jackpot, and the determination of the presence / absence of the reach are determined, and the pending information is the hit by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step S20301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the entry of the game ball into the start opening in the entry process for the start opening (FIG. 82) is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the pre-judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probability change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball. By determining, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step S20302 that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is the low probability mode (S20302: YES), the process proceeds to step S20303 and the setting information is supported. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. As described above, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has six types of low-probability modes corresponding to each of the six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". The main MPU 62 includes a table, and refers to a winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the pass / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. .. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Since an example of the six types of pass / fail tables for the low probability mode has already been described in the aspect 57, the description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20302 that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is not the low probability mode (S20302: NO), the process proceeds to step S20304 for the high probability mode. Refer to the pass / fail table of. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. In this embodiment, one type of high-probability mode win / fail table is referred to regardless of the lottery setting, but the number of high-probability modes corresponding to the lottery setting is the same as the low-probability mode win / fail table. It is also possible to prepare a winning / failing table for the high probability mode and refer to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting.

If it is determined in step S20305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20305: YES), the process proceeds to step S20306, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the distribution table for the first starting port Refer to the distribution table for the second starting port when the ball is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. After executing step S20307, the process proceeds to step S20308.

In step S20308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read out this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S20308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S20308: YES), the process proceeds to step S20309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S20308: NO), the process proceeds to step S20310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20305: NO), the process proceeds to step S20311, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S20313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step S20313 that the reach generation is supported (S20313: YES), the process proceeds to step S20314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20313 that the reach generation is not supported (S20313: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

[Incoming ball processing for through gate]
Next, the ball entry process for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 81: S20109).

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a through gate. In step S20401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) through the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S20401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S20401: YES), the process proceeds to step S20402, and whether the number of reserved items SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S20401: NO), the ball entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step S20404.

In step S20404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S20101 (FIG. 81) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through gate is completed.

On the other hand, in step S20402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (S2402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

[Game times control processing]
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 81: step S20111).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S20501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the open / close execution mode flag is turned on at the timing when the change of the symbol in the game times in which the jackpot is won ends and shifts to the open / close execution mode, and is turned off at the timing when the open / close execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S20501 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S20501: YES), it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and this game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S2052. End the control process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game rotation is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S20501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2052.

In step S2052, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is in variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting variable display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S2052 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S2052: NO), the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S20503 to S20505. In step S20503, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S20503 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S20503: YES), the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20503 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is not "0" (S20503: NO), the process proceeds to step S20504.

In step S20504, the hold information shift process for setting the data stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20505. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step S20505, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S20506.

In step S20506, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S20506, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2052 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S2052: YES), the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20507, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 89) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step S20507 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S20507: NO), the process proceeds to step S20508 to execute the fluctuation display process. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S20508, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20507 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S20507: YES), the process proceeds to step S20509 to execute the fluctuation end processing. In the variable end processing, the stop symbol determined in the collision determination process (FIG. 88), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 as a result of the current game round. After executing step S20509, the process proceeds to step S20510.

In step S20510, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the hit determination process (FIG. 88) described later. If it is determined in step S20510 that any of the jackpot flags is ON (S20510: YES), the process proceeds to step S20511 and the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20510 that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S20510: NO), the process proceeds to step S20512.

In step S20512, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. If it is determined in step S20512 that the total number of reserved items CRN is "0" (S20512: YES), the process proceeds to step S20513, and a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol change (game round) is completed. It is a command that contains the information of. The customer waiting command set in step S20513 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20512 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S20512: NO), the game round control process is terminated.

[Holding information shift processing]
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 85: S20504) of the game times control process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) in time series, the hold information stored first is stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series. When the reserved information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reserved area first, it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20601, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

If it is determined in step S20601 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step S20601: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps S20602 to S20607 is executed. On the other hand, in step S20601, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S20601: NO). ), The hold information shift process for the second hold area of step S20608 to step S20613 is executed.

In step S20602, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold quantity Ra in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20603 and the total hold quantity CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S20604. In step S20604, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S20605.

In step S20605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S20605, the process proceeds to step S20606.

In step S20606, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. After that, the process proceeds to step S20607.

In step S20607, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20607 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step S20601, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S20601: NO). Step S20608 proceeds.

In step S20608, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S20609. In step S20609, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S20610, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S20611.

In step S20611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S20611, the process proceeds to step S20612.

In step S20612, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step S20613.

In step S20613, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20613 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 85: S20505) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S20701, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S20701: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702.

In step S20702, the hit determination process is executed. The hit determination process is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area AE in the hold information shift process. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step S20702, the process proceeds to step S20703.

In step S20703, the variable time setting process is executed. In the variation time setting process, the variation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, is set based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of reach. The details of the fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step S20703, the process proceeds to step S20704.

In step S20704, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20704 that the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S20704: NO), the process proceeds to step S20705, and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S20703 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20704 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S20704: YES), the process proceeds to step S20706, and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S20703 are included. After executing step S20705 or step S20706, the process proceeds to step S20707.

In step S20707, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or missed result information as the jackpot type information.

The variable command and the type command set in steps S20705 to S20707 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S20707, the process proceeds to step S20708.

In step S20708, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S20708, this fluctuation start process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20701 described above that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S20709 and the game stop command is issued to the sub side. It is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90, which are the control devices of the above. The game stop command is a command for causing the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the progress of the game is stopped. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (process group from step S20104 to step S2016 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the game progresses. It will be stopped. After executing step S20710, this fluctuation start process ends.

[Collision detection processing]
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 87: S2072).

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step S20801, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, when the jackpot is won and the open / close execution mode is started, it is turned off. If it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is high probability mode (S20801: YES), the process proceeds to step S20802.

In step S20802, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Then, the process proceeds to step S20804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20803.

In step S20803, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the pass / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. Make a pass / fail judgment. In the winning / failing determination, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. do. Then, the process proceeds to step S20804.

In step S20804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step S20802 or step S20803 is a big hit winning. In step S20804, when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (S20804: YES), in steps S20805 to S20812, in order to set the process for setting the game result in the case of the big hit winning and the stop result. Executes the processing of.

In step S20805, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20805 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S20805: NO), the process proceeds to step S20806, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 8A) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20805 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S20805: YES), the process proceeds to step S20807, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in. After executing the process of step S20806 or step S20807. The process proceeds to step S20808.

In step S20808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S20808 that the game result is a probabilistic jackpot (S20808: YES), the process proceeds to step S20809.

In step S20809, the stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probabilistic jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the probabilistic jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20809, the process proceeds to step S20810.

In step S20810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation flag is ON. After that, the final hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20808, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S20808: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step. Proceed to S20811.

In step S20811, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. After that, the final hit determination process is terminated.

In step S20804, if the result of the winning lottery in step S20802 or step S20803 is not a big hit (S20804: NO), the process proceeds to step S20813, and the stop result setting process for the time of a loss is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement is to end the variable display in the state where either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game time which is the disengagement result. It is a process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-order time in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20813, the final hit determination process is terminated.

[Variation time setting process]
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 87: S20703) of the variation start process.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step S20901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S20902.

In step S20902, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game round is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S20902: YES), the process proceeds to step S20903.

In step S20903, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the winning lottery is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S20904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20902 that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a winning (S20902: NO), the process proceeds to step S20905, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S20905) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won in step S20902, in step S20905, reach occurs among the game rounds not won in the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach will occur (S20905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S20906. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S20906, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S20904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20905 that reach does not occur in the current game round (S20905: NO), the process proceeds to step S20907, and the variation time table storage area 63d is stored with reference to the variation time table for non-reach generation. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S20904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach non-generation fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that the shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of losing reach may be different. good. Further, the variable time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the variable time table for the normal jackpot, the variable time table for the missed reach, and the variable time table for the complete miss may be set individually.

[Game state transition process]
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 81: S20111).

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the beginning of the ending period and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21002 to determine whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is turned on at the start of the open / close processing period and turned off at the end of the open / close processing period.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (S21002: NO), the process proceeds to step S21003, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21003: NO), the process proceeds to step S21004, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step S21004 that it is not the timing when the variation display is finished (S21004: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S21004 that it is the timing when the variation display is finished (S21004: YES), the process proceeds to step S21005, and the result of the winning lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21005 that the result of the winning lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21006, and the high probability mode flag and high frequency Of the support mode flags, the ON flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S21007. If both the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are OFF in step S21006, the process proceeds to step S21007 as it is.

In step S21007, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. In the present embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S21007, the process proceeds to step S21008.

In step S21008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step S21008, the process proceeds to step S21009, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is ON (S21003: YES), the process proceeds to step S21010.

In step S21010, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S21010 that the opening period has ended (S21010: YES), the process proceeds to step S21011 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S21012, the process proceeds to step S21013.

In step S21013, the number of rounds of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flags is determined by various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. It is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. After executing step 13913, the process proceeds to step S21014.

In step S21014, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S21015, and the release start command is set. The set release start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). This release start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect of the content corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received release start command, and controls various devices so that the round effect of the set content is executed. Start. After executing step S21015, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the open / close process period flag is ON (S21002: YES), the process proceeds to step S21016 to execute the large winning opening open / close process. Specifically, when the large winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is set to the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, and the large winning is won. Open the mouth 36a. Further, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a, or the opening limit number of game balls has been entered. The drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the large winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the opening and closing process of the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21017: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21017: YES), the process proceeds to step S21018 and the open / close processing period flag is turned off. After executing step S21018, the process proceeds to step S21019.

In step S21019, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. In the present embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step S21021, the process proceeds to step S21022.

In step S21022, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is ON (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21023.

In step S21023, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21020), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S21023: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S21023: YES), the process proceeds to step S21024.

In step S21024, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S21025, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21025, the process proceeds to step S21026 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S21027.

In step S21027, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. If it is determined in step S21027 that the total number of reserved items CRN is "0" (S21027: YES), the process proceeds to step S21028 and a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b when the open / close execution mode ends. It is a command. The customer waiting command set in step S21028 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21027 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S21027: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

[Large winning opening opening / closing process]
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 89: S21016) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step S21101, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S21101 that the large winning opening 36a is not open (S21101: NO), the process proceeds to step S21102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S21102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21102: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21102: NO), the process proceeds to step S21103.

In step S21103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21103: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21103: YES), the process proceeds to step S21104, and the variable winning drive unit is used to open the large winning opening 36a. The drive state is 36c. Then, the process proceeds to step S21105.

In step S21105, the setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, "7500" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S20107) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, in a cycle of 4 msec. After executing step S21105, the process proceeds to step S21106.

In step S21106, an open command is set. After that, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. The release command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has started, and is a command described above. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and also displays the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 with the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening of. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a indicates the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what was started.

If it is determined in step S21101 that the large winning opening 36a is open (step S21101: YES), the process proceeds to step S21107, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21107: NO), the process proceeds to step S21108.

In step S21108, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S21108 that no ball has been entered (S21108: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21108 that a ball has been entered (S21108: YES), the process proceeds to step S21109, and the value of the winning counter area PC is subtracted by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S21110.

In step S21110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S21110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S21110: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step S21107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21107: YES), or when it is determined in step S21110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". (S21110: YES), the process proceeds to step S21111, and the large winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to a non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S21112.

In step S21112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S21113, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S21113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21113: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21113: NO), the process proceeds to step S21114, and the first timer counter area T1 is "500" (that is, 2 sec). To set. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. After executing step S21114, the process proceeds to step S2115 to set the closing command. After that, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening is completed.

This set closing command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed, and is described above. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and at the same time, the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed with the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

[Migration process at the end of the ending period]
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 90: S21025) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S2121, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S21201 that the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21202 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. .. After executing step S21202, the process proceeds to step S21203.

In step S2123, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S21204, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It should be noted that these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, the process proceeds to step S21205.

In step S21205, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S21210, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2121 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S22011: NO), the process proceeds to step S21206 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S21207.

In step S21207, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S21208, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step S21209.

In step S21209, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. Then, the process proceeds to step S21210.

In step S21210, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

[Processing for electrical support]
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 81: S20112).

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S2301 that the supporting flag is not ON (S2301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21302.

In step S21302, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step S21302 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21302: NO), the process proceeds to step S21303.

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S20107) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, in a cycle of 4 msec.

If it is determined in step S21303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21303: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21303: YES), the process proceeds to step S21304.

In step S21304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S21304 that it is the end timing of the variation display (S21304: YES), the process proceeds to step S21305, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21304 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (S21304: NO), the process proceeds to step S21306.

In step S21306, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step S21306 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (S21306: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21306 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (S21306: YES), the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S21308 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step S21307 (S21307: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step S21308 (S21308: YES), the process proceeds to step S21309 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "375" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step S21310.

In step S21310, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S21309 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S21310 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S21310: YES), the process proceeds to step S21311, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64d of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S21312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21310 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support winning (S21310: NO), the process proceeds to step S21312 without executing the process of step S21311.

In step S21312, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21312 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S21312: YES), the process proceeds to step S21313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21312 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S21312: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step S21313, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is "0". The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S21313 that the game count counter area is not "0" (S21313: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21313 that the game count counter area is "0" (S21313: YES), the process proceeds to step S21314 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S21315.

In step S21315, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S21315 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 81: step S20114). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support mode command, and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S21307 that the open / close execution mode is set (S21307: YES), or if it is determined in step S21318 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S21308: NO), the process proceeds to step S21316 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "7375" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process proceeds to step S21317.

In step S21317, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S21316 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S21317 that the support is not won (S21317: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21317 that the support is won (S21317: YES), the process proceeds to step S21318, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step S21302 that the support winning flag is ON (S21302: YES), the process proceeds to step S21319, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step S21319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21319: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21319: YES), the process proceeds to step S21320.

In step S21320, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21321, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the supporting flag is ON (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21322, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

[Electric service open / close control process]
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: S21322) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402.

In step S21402, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21402: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step S21402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21402: YES), the process proceeds to step S21403, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S21403, the process proceeds to step S21404.

In step S21404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S21405, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S21405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S21405: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S21405: YES), the process proceeds to step S21406 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21401 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21407, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21407: NO), the main power opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21407: YES), the process proceeds to step S21408 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S21409.

In step S21409, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S21409: NO), the process proceeds to step S21410 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S21410 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S21410: YES), the process proceeds to step S21411, and "400" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21409 that the open / close execution mode is set (S21409: YES), or if it is determined in step S21410 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S21410: NO), the process proceeds to step S21412, and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "50" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of this embodiment will be described.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S23101, the command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S23101, the process proceeds to step S23102.

In step S23102, the process for holding effect is executed. In the hold effect processing, processing related to the effect to be executed when a hold command or an abnormal hold command is received is performed. The details of the process for holding effect will be described later. After executing step S23102, the process proceeds to step S23103.

In step S23103, the game rotation effect processing is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing related to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is performed. After executing step S23103, the process proceeds to step S23104.

In step S23104, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step S23104, the process proceeds to step S23105.

In step S23105, the customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process for displaying a demo movie on the symbol display device 41 is executed when the game times have not been executed for a predetermined time. After executing step S23105, the process proceeds to step S23106.

In step S23106, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step S23106, the process proceeds to step S23107.

In step S23107, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step S23107, the timer interrupt process ends.

[Processing for hold production]
Next, the process for holding effect will be described. The hold effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 95: S23102).

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the process for holding effect. In step S23201, it is determined whether or not the hold command has been received. If it is determined in step S23201 that the hold command has not been received (step S23201: NO), the process proceeds to step S23203, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23201 that the hold command has been received (step S23201: YES), the process proceeds to step S23202.

In step S23202, the hold effect pattern setting process is executed. In the hold effect pattern setting process, first, a random number for determining the hold effect pattern is acquired from the counter of the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, with reference to the hold effect pattern table stored in the sound / light side ROM 93, the judgment result of the prior judgment process included in the hold command received this time (whether or not there is a big hit, the type of big hit, whether or not there is reach, etc.), Select the hold effect pattern corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the hold effect pattern. Then, the selected hold effect pattern is set as the hold effect pattern to be executed. More specifically, the hold image included in the hold effect pattern set as the execution target is displayed, and the hold change suggestion effect included in the hold effect pattern set as the execution target. Set to execute the hold change effect. After executing step S23202, the process proceeds to step S23203.

In step S23203, it is determined whether or not the abnormal hold command has been received. If it is determined in step S23203 that the abnormal hold command has not been received (S2323: NO), the hold effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23203 that the abnormal hold command has been received (S23203: YES), the process proceeds to step S23204.

In step S23204, the first type reserved image is set to be displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2. After that, the process proceeds to step S23204.

In step S23205, it is determined whether or not there is a hold change suggestion effect and a hold change effect that have already been set to be executed but have not yet been executed. If it is determined in step S23205 that there is a hold change suggestion effect and a hold change effect that have already been set to be executed but have not yet been executed (step S23205: YES), the process proceeds to step S23206. The setting for executing the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect is canceled. As a result, the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect that are set to be executed are not executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S23207 described later. On the other hand, in step S23205, when it is determined that the pending change suggestion effect and the pending change effect that have already been set to be executed but have not been executed do not exist (step S23205: NO), the above step S23206 is performed. Step S23207 without executing.

In step S23207, it is determined whether or not a reserved image having a second or higher degree of expectation is displayed. If it is determined in step S23207 that the reserved image of the second kind or higher degree of expectation is displayed (step S23207: YES), the process proceeds to step S23208, and the above-mentioned pending change suggestion effect and pending change effect (pending demotion) are performed. It is determined whether or not the effect) can be executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned hold change suggestion effect and hold change effect (hold demotion effect) can be executed in the remaining change time of the currently changing symbol. If it is determined in step S23208 that the above-mentioned hold change suggestion effect and hold change effect (hold demotion effect) can be executed (step S23208: YES), the process proceeds to step S23209, and the above-mentioned hold change suggestion effect and hold Set to execute the change effect (holding demotion effect). As a result, the hold change suggestion effect is executed, and then the hold change effect (hold change effect) is executed, and the hold image of the second or higher degree of expectation is changed to the first type hold image.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S23207 that the reserved image of the second or higher degree of expectation is not displayed (step S23207: NO), and in step S23208, the above-mentioned pending change suggestion effect and pending change effect (pending demotion effect). ) Is not feasible (step S23208: NO), the process for holding effect is terminated without executing step S23209 described above.

The example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 92 of this embodiment has been described above.

In this embodiment, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the abnormal hold command, the normal type 1 hold image is displayed. However, instead of this configuration, the normal hold command is received. In some cases, a hold image that is not displayed (for example, a hold image marked with a black cross) may be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize at an early stage that some abnormality has occurred in the game. Further, in this configuration, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the abnormal hold command, the hold image already displayed is not displayed when the above-mentioned normal hold command is received (for example, black). It may be configured to be changed to a reserved image marked with a cross.

Further, in this embodiment, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the abnormal hold command, the hold change suggestion effect that is set to be executed before receiving the abnormal hold command but has not been executed yet. It is determined whether or not there is a hold change effect, and if it is determined that there is a hold change suggestion effect or a hold change effect that has not been executed yet, the execution schedule of the hold change suggestion effect or the hold change effect is canceled. Although it is configured, the hold change effect for which the execution schedule is canceled may be only the hold promotion effect. Even with such a configuration, the player's discomfort can be reduced because the hold promotion effect, which would cause discomfort to the player if executed before the game is stopped, is not executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbol display device 41 is configured to display the reserved image, but instead of this configuration, a lamp indicating that special information is reserved is provided, and the light emitting mode (for example, lighting) of the lamp is provided. It may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of special information corresponding to the lamp by the color of time, the interval of blinking, etc.). Also with this configuration, the above-mentioned pending change effect can be executed by changing the light emitting mode of the lamp.

Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the game stop flag is turned ON after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery (hit determination processing). However, instead of this configuration, the game may be stopped by turning on the game stop flag after executing the hit lottery (hit determination process). Even with such a configuration, as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormal value in which the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, and the disadvantage of the player is expanded. be able to. However, as in this embodiment, if it is determined that the setting information is not within the predetermined range, it is better to avoid the execution of the winning lottery (hit determination processing) by executing the winning lottery. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from becoming in a non-free state (freeze state or runaway state).

Further, in this embodiment, the hold image (type 5 hold image) which has the highest expectation and is confirmed to win the jackpot is not displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2. Although it is configured, even if the hold image with the highest expectation is displayed, it is a pachinko machine 10 that may come off, that is, even if the hold image with the highest expectation is displayed, it is a big hit. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 whose winning is not confirmed, the reserved image with the highest expectation may be displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2. According to such a configuration, the hold image with the highest expectation becomes the hold image with the lower expectation for the player who initially had a strong expectation for the hold image with the highest expectation. Even if it changes, it is possible to change the recognition that the special information corresponding to the reserved image was not so highly expected.

<Aspect 104>
In the fluctuation start setting information determination executed in the above aspect 103, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 6) due to the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to detect that the value) has been rewritten to an abnormal value other than the specified range (for example, 7 or B), but the setting information has changed from a normal value within the specified range to another normal value. When the setting information is rewritten, for example, when the setting information is rewritten from "1" to "6", the rewriting of the setting information cannot be detected, and the rewritten setting information is used. There is a problem that the winning lottery (winning determination process) is executed based on the above.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration described below is adopted in order to solve this problem.

First, the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball to be executed in this embodiment will be described. The ball entry setting information determination executed in this embodiment is the same as the ball entry setting information determination executed in the above-mentioned aspect 103.

That is, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment has special information (big hit random number counter) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, as in the above-described aspect 103. When the value of C1 etc.) is acquired, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is within a predetermined range prior to the execution of the advance determination process (so-called look-ahead) based on the acquired special information. It is determined whether or not it is a numerical value (a numerical value from 1 to 6 in this embodiment).

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, the advance determination process is executed based on the acquired special information, and the advance determination is performed. A hold command including the processing result is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, that is, the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to the influence of noise or the like ( For example, if it is determined to be 7 or B, etc.), the execution of the prior determination process is avoided, and the abnormal hold command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Since the process (effect) executed by the voice emission control device 90 that has received the abnormal hold command is the same as that of the above-described aspect 103, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the variable start setting information determination executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment acquires and holds special information (value of jackpot random number counter C1 or the like) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. When storing in the information storage area 64b, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b together with the special information. Hereinafter, the set value stored together with the special information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is also referred to as “setting information at the time of entry”.

Then, when the winning lottery is executed based on the acquired special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like), the setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 prior to the execution of the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the information and the special information to be the target of the winning lottery and the setting information at the time of entering the ball stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) match.

If it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of entering the ball match, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information as in the normal pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of entering the ball do not match, the voice emission control device issues a game stop command indicating to stop the progress of the game after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery. It is transmitted to a control device on the sub side such as 90, and a process for stopping the progress of the game is executed. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the player cannot continue the game. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the setting information matches the setting information at the time of entering the ball in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, so that the setting information has a predetermined range due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the normal value in the above is rewritten to another normal value, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected. Specifically, it is set between the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the timing when the special information acquired based on the entry is the target of the winning lottery. When the information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value, the setting information and the setting information at the time of entering the ball do not match in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation. Rewriting can be detected.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is a normal other numerical value not intended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being executed in the state of being rewritten as.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, so that the setting information becomes another normal numerical value not intended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing in the rewritten state.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the execution of the prior determination process is avoided, so that the setting information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the result of the pre-determination process because the pre-determination process is executed with an abnormal value other than the numerical value of.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, while the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball. If it is determined that the game is not, the progress of the game is not stopped. The reason and effect of adopting such a configuration are the same as the reason and effect described in the above aspect 103, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, a process different from the process described in the above aspect 103 will be described, and a description of the same process as the above aspect 103 will be omitted. As will be described below, in this aspect, the contents of the ball entry process for the starting port and the variation start process are different from those in the above aspect 103.

[Ball entry process for starting port]
The ball entry process for the starting port performed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 104 will be described.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a starting port executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 104. Since the process from step S20201 to step S20211 is the same as the ball entry process for the starting port in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S20212a, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding hold area, that is, 1 in step S20210. Store in the storage area corresponding to the added hold quantity. Specifically, when the first start hold quantity RaN is set as the processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are first. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. Further, when the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the second hold area Rb. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing step S20212a, the process proceeds to step S20213. Since the processing after step S20213 is the same as the ball entry processing for the starting port in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 104 will be described.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 104. In step S20701a, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the setting information at the time of entering the ball shifted to the execution area AE together with the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information shift process. Determine if they match. If it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of entering the ball match (step S20701a: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702. Since the processing from step S20702 to step S20708 is the same as the fluctuation start processing in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 87, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in step S20701a, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information shift processing are shifted to the execution area AE at the time of entry. If it is determined that the information does not match (step S20701a: NO), the process proceeds to step S20709, and the game stop command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90, which are the control devices on the sub side. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (process group from step S20104 to step S2016 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the game progresses. It will be stopped. After executing step S20710, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Aspect 105>
In the fluctuation start setting information determination executed in the above aspect 104, it is detected that the setting information has been rewritten depending on the timing at which the setting information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value. May not be possible. For example, if the setting information is rewritten during the period when the symbol does not change, there is a problem that the rewriting of the setting information cannot be detected.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration described below is adopted in order to solve the above problems.

First, the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball to be executed in this embodiment will be described. The ball entry setting information determination executed in this embodiment is the same as the ball entry setting information determination executed in the above-mentioned aspect 103.

That is, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment has special information (big hit random number counter) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, as in the above-described aspect 103. When the value of C1 etc.) is acquired, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is within a predetermined range prior to the execution of the advance determination process (so-called look-ahead) based on the acquired special information. It is determined whether or not it is a numerical value (a numerical value from 1 to 6 in this embodiment).

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range, the advance determination process is executed based on the acquired special information, and the advance determination is performed. A hold command including the processing result is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, that is, the setting information is an abnormal value other than 1 to 6 due to the influence of noise or the like ( For example, if it is determined to be 7 or B, etc.), the execution of the prior determination process is avoided, and the abnormal hold command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Since the process (effect) executed by the voice emission control device 90 that has received the abnormal hold command is the same as that of the above-described aspect 103, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the variable start setting information determination executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment acquires and holds special information (value of jackpot random number counter C1 or the like) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. When storing in the information storage area 64b, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b together with the special information. Hereinafter, the set value stored together with the special information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is also referred to as “setting information at the time of entry”.

Then, when the winning lottery is executed based on the acquired special information, the entry stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 6) together with the special information subject to the winning lottery prior to the execution of the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the ball time setting information matches the previous hit determination processing setting information stored in the main RAM 64 as the setting information at the time when the previous hit lottery (hit determination processing) is executed.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process do not match, the game stop command indicating that the progress of the game is stopped after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery. Is transmitted to a control device on the sub side such as the voice emission control device 90, and a process for stopping the progress of the game is executed. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the player cannot continue the game. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball and the setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing match, the setting information is read from the setting information storage area after executing the hit lottery (hit judgment processing). , The read setting information is written in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit determination process. The setting information written in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit judgment processing (setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing) is the judgment (setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing) executed prior to the next hit lottery. It is used to determine whether or not they match).

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the ball entry setting information and the previous hit determination processing setting information match in the fluctuation start setting information determination, so that the setting is made due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected. Specifically, according to this aspect, the timing of the execution of the previous winning lottery (the timing of the start of fluctuation of the symbol) and the timing of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. When the setting information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value in the interval, the setting information at the time of entry and the setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing are one in the setting information judgment at the start of fluctuation. Since it will not be done, it is possible to detect the rewriting of the setting information. That is, according to this aspect, even if the setting information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value during the period when the symbol does not change, the setting information is rewritten. Can be detected.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is a normal other numerical value not intended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being executed in the state of being rewritten as.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, so that the setting information becomes another normal numerical value not intended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing in the rewritten state.

Further, according to this aspect, when it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the execution of the prior determination process is avoided, so that the setting information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the result of the pre-determination process because the pre-determination process is executed with an abnormal value other than the numerical value of.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, but the value is not within the predetermined range in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball. If it is determined, the progress of the game is not stopped. The reason and effect of adopting such a configuration are the same as the reason and effect described in the above aspect 103, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, a process different from the process described in the above aspect 103 will be described, and a description of the same process as the above aspect 103 will be omitted. As will be described below, in this aspect, the contents of the ball entry process for the starting port and the variation start process are different from those in the above aspect 103.

[Ball entry process for starting port]
The ball entry process for the starting port performed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 105 will be described.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a starting port executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 105. Since the process from step S20201 to step S20211 is the same as the ball entry process for the starting port in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S20212b, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding hold area, that is, 1 in step S20210. Store in the storage area corresponding to the added hold quantity. Specifically, when the first start hold quantity RaN is set as the processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are first. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. Further, when the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the second hold area Rb. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing step S20212b, the process proceeds to step S20213. Since the processing after step S20213 is the same as the ball entry processing for the starting port in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 105 will be described.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 105. In step S20701b, the ball entry time setting information shifted to the execution area AE together with special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information shift process and the previous hit determination process setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 are stored. It is judged whether or not it matches with the setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing. If it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process match (step S20701b: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702 and the hit determination process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S20702-2b, the setting information is read from the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64, and the read setting information is written in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit determination process. Then, the process proceeds to step S20703. Since the processing from step S20703 to step S20708 is the same as the fluctuation start processing in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 87, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20701b that the ball entry setting information and the previous hit determination processing setting information do not match (step S20701b: NO), the process proceeds to step S20709, and the game stop command is controlled on the sub side. It is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90, which are the devices. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (process group from step S20104 to step S2016 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the game progresses. It will be stopped. After executing step S20710, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Aspect 106>
In the fluctuation start setting information determination executed in the above aspect 105, it is detected that the setting information has been rewritten depending on the timing at which the setting information is rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value. May not be possible. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting information is set to "1", the winning lottery is executed, the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination processing becomes "1", and the symbol is changed based on the execution of the winning lottery. The game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, one special information is reserved, and the setting information at the time of entering the ball becomes "1". After that, the setting information is rewritten from "1" to "6" due to the influence of noise, etc., and then the fluctuation ends, and when the winning lottery for the reserved special information is executed, the setting at the time of entering the ball Since both the information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing are "1", it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the ball and the setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing match. The winning lottery has a problem that the setting information is executed in the state of "6".

Further, in the ball entry setting information determination executed in the above aspects 103 to 105, the setting information changes from a numerical value within a predetermined range to an abnormal value other than the predetermined range (for example, 7 or B) due to the influence of noise or the like. Although it is possible to detect that the setting information has been rewritten, if the setting information has been rewritten from a normal numerical value within a predetermined range to another normal numerical value, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected. There is a problem that the pre-determination process is executed based on the rewritten setting information.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration described below is adopted in order to solve the above problems.

First, the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball to be executed in this embodiment will be described.

When the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment acquires special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the said. Before executing the look-ahead determination process (so-called look-ahead) based on the acquired special information, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the previous winning lottery (hit determination process) were executed. It is determined whether or not the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process, which is stored in the main RAM 64 as the setting information at the time point, matches.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination processing match, the prior determination processing (pre-determination processing) is performed based on the acquired special information. (So-called look-ahead) is executed, and a hold command including the result of the look-ahead determination process is set as a command to be transmitted to the control device on the sub-side.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 does not match the setting information at the time of the previous collision determination processing, the execution of the prior determination processing is avoided and an error is suspended. The command is transmitted to the control device on the sub side such as the voice emission control device 90. The error hold command determines that the setting information has been rewritten to another value at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the execution of the prior determination process is performed. This command indicates that it has been avoided. Since the process (effect) executed by the voice emission control device 90 that has received the abnormal hold command is the same as that of the above-described aspect 103, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the variable start setting information determination executed in this embodiment will be described.

The main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of this embodiment is based on special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like) acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. When the winning lottery is executed, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area and the setting information at the time when the previous winning lottery (hit determination processing) is executed are stored prior to the execution of the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process that has been set matches.

Then, when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process do not match, the game stop command indicating to stop the progress of the game is emitted by voice after avoiding the execution of the winning lottery. It is transmitted to a control device on the sub side such as the control device 90, and a process for stopping the progress of the game is executed. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the player cannot continue the game. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the game stop command notifies that the game has stopped due to an abnormality in the setting information and that the pachinko machine 10 should be restarted in the setting change mode. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination processing match, the setting information is read from the setting information storage area after the winning lottery (hit judgment processing) is executed, and the reading is performed. The setting information is written in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous collision judgment processing. The setting information written in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit judgment processing (setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing) is the judgment (setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing) executed prior to the next hit lottery. It is used to determine whether or not they match).

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the setting information matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination processing in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, so that the setting information is predetermined due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the normal numerical value within the range of is rewritten to another normal numerical value, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected. Specifically, according to this aspect, from the time of execution of the previous winning lottery (hit determination processing) (that is, at the start of the change of the previous symbol) to immediately before the execution of the current winning lottery (hit determination processing) (that is,). When the setting information is rewritten from a normal value within a predetermined range to another normal value during the period until (immediately before the start of the change of the symbol this time), the setting information and the previous collision detection process are performed in the setting information judgment at the start of the change. Since the time setting information does not match, it is possible to detect the rewriting of the setting information. That is, according to this aspect, it is possible to detect the rewriting of the setting information during the entire period during which the game is being played.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the execution of the winning lottery is avoided, so that the setting information is a normal other numerical value not intended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being executed in the state of being rewritten as.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, so that the setting information becomes another normal numerical value not intended by the administrator. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing in the rewritten state.

Further, according to this aspect, since it is determined whether or not the setting information matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination processing in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the setting information is within a predetermined range due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the normal numerical value of is rewritten to another normal numerical value, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, the execution of the prior determination process is avoided, so that the setting information is not intended by the administrator and is normal. It is possible to prevent the prior determination process from being executed in the state of being rewritten to a numerical value.

Further, according to this aspect, when the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, the progress of the game is stopped, while the rewriting of the setting information is detected in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball. Does not stop the progress of the game. The reason and effect of adopting such a configuration are the same as the reason and effect described in the above aspect 103, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, a process different from the process described in the above aspect 103 will be described, and a description of the same process as the above aspect 103 will be omitted. As will be described below, in this aspect, the contents of the ball entry process for the starting port and the variation start process are different from those in the above aspect 103.

[Ball entry process for starting port]
The ball entry process for the starting port performed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 106 will be described.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a starting port executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 106. Since the process from step S20201 to step S20211 is the same as the ball entry process for the starting port in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 82, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S20212c, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding hold area, that is, 1 in step S20210. Store in the storage area corresponding to the added hold quantity. Specifically, when the first start hold quantity RaN is set as the processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are first. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. Further, when the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the special information such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area are stored in the second hold area Rb. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing step S20212c, the process proceeds to step S20213c.

In step S20213c, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 matches the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process stored in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit determination process. judge. If it is determined in step S20213c that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process match (step S20213c: YES), the process proceeds to step S20214 to execute the prior determination process. After that, the process proceeds to step S20215, a hold command is set, and the ball entry process for the main starting port is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20213c that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process do not match (step S20213c: NO), the process proceeds to step S20216 and the abnormality hold command is set. After that, the ball entry process for the main starting port is completed.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 106 will be described.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 of the aspect 106. In step S20701c, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination processing stored in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit determination processing of the main RAM 64 match. Judge whether or not. If it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process match (step S20701c: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702 to execute the hit determination process. After that, the process proceeds to step S20702-2c, the setting information is read from the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64, and the read setting information is written in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit determination process. Then, the process proceeds to step S20703. Since the processing from step S20703 to step S20708 is the same as the fluctuation start processing in the aspect 103 shown in FIG. 87, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in step S20701c, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 and the setting information at the time of the previous hit determination process stored in the setting information storage area at the time of the previous hit determination process of the main RAM 64 are If it is determined that they do not match (step S20701c: NO), the process proceeds to step S20709, and a game stop command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90, which are control devices on the sub side. After executing step S20709, the process proceeds to step S20710, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 81) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (process group from step S20104 to step S2016 in FIG. 81) is avoided, and the game progresses. It will be stopped. After executing step S20710, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Aspect 107>
From the above aspect 103 to the above aspect 106, the change start setting information determination (step S20701 in FIG. 87, step S20701a in FIG. 98, step S20701b in FIG. 100, step S20701c in FIG. 102) is performed by a winning lottery (hit determination processing, FIG. 87, FIG. 98, FIG. 100, FIG. 102, the configuration to be executed immediately before step S20702)) was adopted, but the execution timing of the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation does not have to be immediately before the winning lottery (hit determination processing). good. For example, after executing the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation, another process may be executed, and then a winning lottery (hit determination process) may be executed. That is, a plurality of other processes may intervene between the change start setting information determination and the winning lottery (winning determination process). Further, the execution timing of the change start setting information determination may be after the execution of the winning lottery (hit determination processing), and may be plural between the winning lottery (hit determination processing) and the variation start setting information determination. Other processing may intervene. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing in an abnormal state in which the setting information is not intended by the administrator, as in the case of the above-described 103 to 106.

<Aspect 108>
From the above aspect 103 to the above aspect 106, the pre-determination process (FIG. 82, FIG. 97, FIG. 99, FIG. Although the configuration to be executed immediately before step S20214)) of 101 is adopted, the execution timing of the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball does not have to be immediately before the prior determination process. For example, it may be configured to execute another process after executing the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball, and then execute the first determination process. That is, a plurality of other processes may intervene between the ball entry setting information determination and the prior determination process. Further, the execution timing of the ball entry setting information determination may be after the execution of the advance determination process, and a plurality of other processes are interposed between the advance determination process and the ball entry setting information determination. You may. Even with such a configuration, as in the case of the above aspect 103 to the above aspect 106, whether or not the setting information is in an abnormal state not intended by the administrator is notified to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 of the game ball. It can be detected by the entry of the ball.

<Aspect 109>
From the above aspect 103 to the above aspect 106, the setting information is in an abnormal state in the change start setting information determination (step S20701 in FIG. 87, step S20701a in FIG. 98, step S20701b in FIG. 100, step S20701c in FIG. 102). When it is determined (not within the specified range, does not match), a configuration is adopted to execute the process of stopping the progress of the game (process of turning on the game stop flag), but the setting information is in an abnormal state. If it is determined that the above is the case, the configuration may be such that the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is not executed, or the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is executed and then another process is executed.

Further, in the above aspects 103 to 106, the setting information is in an abnormal state (predetermined range) in the setting information determination at the time of entering the ball (step S20213 in FIGS. 82, 97, 99, and step S20213c in FIG. 101). If it is determined that it is not inside, it does not match), the configuration to set the abnormal hold command is adopted, but if it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state, the process of setting the abnormal hold command is executed. It may be configured to execute another process after executing the process of setting the abnormal hold command without doing so.

For example, if it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state in the change start setting information determination or the ball entry setting information determination, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is not executed or the predetermined game is played. It may be configured to notify that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected after executing a process of stopping the progress of the above. Specifically, the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10 outputs a voice or alarm sound such as "The setting information is abnormal. Please restart in the setting change mode.", And various lamps 47 blink at the maximum brightness. A character string such as "The setting information is abnormal. Please restart in the setting change mode." May be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the player and the manager can easily grasp that the abnormality of the setting information is detected in the pachinko machine 10, and the manager can play the game in the pachinko machine 10. After explaining the situation to the player who is performing, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted in the setting change mode.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state in the fluctuation start setting information determination or the ball entry setting information determination, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is not executed or the predetermined state is determined. After executing the process of stopping the progress of the game, information indicating that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected may be transmitted to the hall computer installed in the game hall. Then, the information of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the machine number of the pachinko machine 10) in which the abnormality of the setting information is detected may be displayed on the screen of the monitor of the hall computer that has received the information. With such a configuration, the administrator who manages the hall computer can easily grasp which of the many pachinko machines installed in the game hall has the abnormality in the setting information detected. It will be possible.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the setting information is in an abnormal state in the fluctuation start setting information determination or the ball entry setting information determination, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is not executed or the predetermined state is determined. After executing the process of stopping the progress of the game, the information indicating that an abnormality in the setting information is detected and the information indicating the date and time when the abnormality is detected may be stored in the memory. Specifically, the information indicating that an abnormality in the setting information has been detected and the information indicating the date and time when the abnormality has been detected are not erased even if the above-mentioned RAM clearing process is executed in the storage area of the main RAM 64. If the information is stored in a storage area or a non-volatile memory such as a flash ROM and the stored information can be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined operation is received, such information can be stored. Since it is not easily erased and can be confirmed, for example, after the game hall is closed, it is a clue to find out the situation and the cause of the abnormal state of the setting information.

<Aspect 110>
Various functions described in each of the above embodiments (for example, a function of storing the number of game balls entering each entry port and payout as a prize ball based on the entry of game balls into each entry port). A function to calculate the number of game balls played, a function to memorize the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, a function to calculate game history information such as a bonus ratio, a function to memorize the calculated game history information, The game history management chip 300 realizes at least a part of the functions of displaying the stored game history information, erasing various information stored in various storage means such as RAM and flash memory, etc.). The configuration may be realized by the main CPU 62x (main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), or may be realized by the inspection machine 320. Further, the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), and the inspection machine 320 share or cooperate with each other to realize at least a part of these various functions. May be.

<Aspect 111>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 but also to other types of gaming machines. For example, it can be applied to a rotating body type gaming machine such as a pachinko type slot machine. Specifically, for example, the number of game medals won at the time of the bonus, the number of game medals obtained by the child actor drawn during the normal section, and the advantageous section (AT, ART) different from the bonus. For a configuration in which a ratio to the number of obtained game medals is calculated and the ratio is displayed on a liquid crystal display device, or a configuration in which the ratio is output to an inspection machine and the ratio is displayed on the display unit of the inspection machine. Can be applied.

<Aspect 112>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a configuration may be configured in which a part or all of the functions realized by software (realized by the CPU executing a program) are realized by hardware. For example, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. With such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the calculation process for calculating the game history information, and at the same time, the occurrence of fraud such as the calculation program being tampered with and the correct game history information not being calculated is generated. It can be suppressed. The hardware may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. If it is composed of an analog circuit, the arithmetic processing can be further speeded up as compared with a digital circuit.

<Aspect 113>
A configuration may be adopted in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the first embodiment and the above-described 1 to 112 are appropriately replaced or combined. Further, one or more configurations included in the first embodiment and the above-mentioned first to 112 aspects may be combined with one or more configurations included in embodiments other than the first embodiment. Further, among the configurations included in the first embodiment and the above embodiments 1 to 112, non-essential configurations can be appropriately omitted as long as the purpose is not deviated.

B. Application to other configurations:
When a pachinko machine of another type different from each of the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Further, a part of the functions realized by the software in the above embodiment may be realized by the hardware, or a part of the functions realized by the hardware may be realized by the software.

C. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) that is stored inside the housing of the game machine and non-volatilely stores the detection information that is the information acquired based on the detection by the detection means. )When,
A transmission means (CPU 308) that transmits information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, the processing execution means includes an information storage means for non-volatilely storing the detection information which is the information acquired based on the detection by the detection means. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the executed game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature A1, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored inside the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may retain information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The gaming machine of the feature A1 stores the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine can be used as a hall computer. Detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body even when it is not connected. That is, the gaming machine of feature A1 is in a state in which the gaming machine and the detection information are always linked one-to-one regardless of the state in which the gaming machine is placed (the state of being installed in the gaming hall or the distribution state). It is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine described in Feature A1.
It is equipped with a control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game.
The processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates by the same power source as the control means.

According to the feature A2, since the processing execution means operates by the same power source as the control means, for example, when the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the hall computer can be used to provide information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. If there is a problem with the power supply system of the hall computer, or if there is a problem with the processing of the hall computer, the power is being supplied to the gaming machine. , Detection information can be acquired. If the control means and the process execution means are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem in the power supply of the process execution means, the detection information is acquired even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that it cannot be done. On the other hand, according to the feature A2, since the control means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source, the detection information can be always acquired if the game can be executed. Therefore, the reliability of the detection information can be improved.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that the detection information is stored for each period until a predetermined number (500) of game balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h).

According to the feature A3, since the detection information for each period until the specified number of game balls are detected by the predetermined detection means is stored, the time until the specified number of game balls are detected by each game machine varies. Even if there is, it is possible to acquire detection information that does not affect the variation in time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the game ball is fired, it is possible to acquire highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected by the difference.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized by storing the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour).

According to the feature A4, since the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period, it is possible to perform statistical processing using the concept of time using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that the detection information is stored for each period from the start of supplying power to the gaming machine to the time when the power is cut off.

According to the feature A5, the information storage means stores the detection information for each period from the start of the power supply to the gaming machine to the occurrence of the power cutoff. Therefore, for example, the gaming machine is placed in the gaming hall. If it is installed, it is possible to acquire detection information for each business day of the game hall.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A5.
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
Equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information for acquiring prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Acquisition method and
An operation executing means (CPU 308) that executes a predetermined operation based on the detection information and the prize ball number information, and
Equipped with
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it stores calculation result information which is information on a calculation result (character ratio and the like) by the calculation execution means.

According to the feature A6, the processing execution means stores the calculation result information. Since the calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the prize ball number information, the information regarding the prize ball number paid out by the gaming machine is reflected. Therefore, according to the feature A6, it is possible to acquire the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the paid out prize balls. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the paid out prize balls.

<Characteristic B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game, and
An arithmetic execution means (CPU308) that executes arithmetic processing based on the first information acquired based on the executed game and the preset second information to acquire the third information, and
An information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that non-volatilely stores the third information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to the feature B1, the first information is the information acquired based on the executed game, and the third information is the information acquired based on the first information. Therefore, the third information includes information about the played game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including the information about the executed game, the information about the game executed in the past is used by using the third information stored in the information storage means. It is possible to get. Therefore, by using the third information, it is possible to manage the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. Since the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired if the power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, or if there is a problem in the power supply of the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means, the game is executed by the gaming machine. Nevertheless, there is a problem that the third information cannot be obtained. On the other hand, according to the feature B2, since the arithmetic execution means, the information storage means, and the control means are operated by the same power source, the third information is always acquired if the game can be executed. be able to. Therefore, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of the inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the gaming can be improved.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine described in feature B1.
A gaming machine comprising a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to the feature B2, since the transmission means for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine is provided, the third information can be stored by using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the used gaming machine.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2.
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
Equipped with
The first information is information acquired based on the detection by the detection means.
The second information is information on the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means.
The third information is information on the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to the feature B3, the third information is the information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls actually paid out by using the third information stored in the information storage means.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game, and
Information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) that non-volatilely stores the first information acquired based on the executed game, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is housed inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the information storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is modified through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the first information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine is used. It is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the first information by someone even in a situation where the pachinko machine is distributed. Further, since the first information is the information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the game by using the first information. Therefore, according to the feature C1, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing an unauthorized modification of the first information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine described in Feature C1.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates by the same power source as the control means.

According to the feature C2, since the information storage means operates by the same power source as the control means, the first information can be acquired if the power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, if there is a problem in the power supply of the information storage means, the first information is executed even though the game is executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that it cannot be obtained. On the other hand, according to the feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power source, the first information can be always acquired if the game can be executed. Therefore, the reliability of the first information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of the inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the gaming can be improved.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2.
A gaming machine comprising a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to the feature C3, since the transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine is provided, the first information can be stored by using the predetermined device. It is possible to manage and inspect the game-related characteristics of the game machine used.

<Characteristic D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
First prize ball number information storage for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Means (main side ROM 63) and
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
The prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, and the prize ball number information acquisition means.
A second prize ball number information storage means (memory for storing prize ball number data 306) that stores the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means, and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
By executing the calculation based on the information regarding the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means, the game is played. Calculation execution means (CPU308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to the history of
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The prize ball number information set in the gaming machine is generally set to a different value for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to the feature D1, since the processing execution means acquires the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, different prize ball number information is set for each type (model) of the gaming machine. Even so, the processing execution means can calculate the correct game history information by using the prize ball number information set for each type of game machine.

If the gaming machine is illegally modified or the like, the calculated gaming history information may have an unnatural value different from the expected value. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with by checking the gaming history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine described in feature D1.
The prize ball number information transmission means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means to the processing execution means is provided.
The acquisition means is a gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information is acquired by receiving the signal transmitted from the prize ball number information transmitting means.

According to the feature D2, since the signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means is transmitted to the processing execution means, the processing execution means accesses the first prize ball number storage means. Even if the configuration cannot be performed or the processing execution means cannot grasp the storage position (memory address) of the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the processing execution means. Can acquire the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature D3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to the feature D3.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature D4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4.
The launching means is configured so that the launching of a game ball cannot be executed until the processing executing means completes the storage of the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D5, since the game ball is not fired until the storage of the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means is completed, the game ball leaks from the calculation target of the game history information by the calculation execution means. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

<Characteristic E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
Every time the number of game balls (number of passing through discharge passages N _OUT ) detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means reaches a specified value (500), the said number information storage means. Information on the history of the game by executing a calculation based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. An arithmetic execution means (CPU308) for calculating game history information (role ratio, etc.), which is
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the game history information is calculated every time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detection means reaches the specified value, so that the number of game balls detected by each game machine reaches the specified value. Even if there is a variation in the time, it is possible to calculate the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the game ball is detected, it is possible to calculate highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the highly accurate gaming history information, and can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in the feature E1.
First calculation execution condition storage means (main side ROM 63) that stores information about the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) and the specified values (500 pieces) as calculation execution conditions that are conditions for executing the calculation. )
The processing execution means is
An operation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, and an operation execution condition acquisition means.
A second operation execution condition storage means (memory for storing operation execution conditions 307) for storing the acquired operation execution conditions, and
Equipped with
The calculation execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the calculation is executed when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

Since the characteristics of the game are different depending on the type (model) of the game machine, the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to the feature E2, since the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, the calculation execution condition set for each type (model) of the game machine is satisfied. You can perform the operation if.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine comprising: an erasing means for erasing information regarding the number of gaming balls stored in the number information storage means after the calculation executing means executes the calculation.

According to the feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes the calculation, the information regarding the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is deleted, so that the information regarding the number of game balls is stored in the number information storage means again. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the number information storage means can be reduced.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature E4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature E5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
Every time a predetermined time (1 hour) elapses, it is based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A calculation execution means (CPU308) that calculates game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to the game history, by executing the calculation.
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, since the game history information is calculated every time a predetermined time elapses, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information calculated by the statistical processing using the concept of time. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature F2]
Feature The gaming machine described in F1.
As an operation execution condition which is a condition for executing the operation, a first operation execution condition storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing information regarding a time interval for executing the operation is provided.
The processing execution means is
An operation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage means, and an operation execution condition acquisition means.
A second operation execution condition storage means (memory for storing operation execution conditions 307) for storing the acquired operation execution conditions, and
Equipped with
The calculation execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the calculation is executed when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

Since the characteristics of the game are different depending on the type (model) of the game machine, the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to the feature F2, since the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of the game machine are satisfied. You can perform the operation if.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.
A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the calculation is executed, and
A determination means for determining whether or not a game is being played by a player,
Equipped with
The measuring means is a gaming machine characterized in that the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted during a period in which it is determined by the determining means that the game is not being performed.

According to the feature F3, during the period when it is determined that the game is not performed, the measurement of the elapsed time from the execution of the calculation is interrupted, so that the game is targeted only during the period when the game is actually performed. History information can be calculated.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F3.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature F4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F4.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature F5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
A monitoring means (power failure monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
When the monitoring means detects the occurrence of power interruption, the information regarding the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A calculation execution means (CPU308) that calculates game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to the game history, by executing a calculation based on
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, since the game history information is calculated when the occurrence of the power cutoff is detected, it is detected during the period from the start of the power supply to the game machine to the occurrence of the power cutoff. The game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start to the end of the business of the game hall, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp whether or not the characteristics of the gaming history information have changed over the business days of the gaming hall, and the gaming machine has not been tampered with. It becomes possible to judge appropriately. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature G2, since the supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after the power is cut off is provided, the calculation of the game history information by the calculation execution means and the game history information storage means of the game history information. You can be sure to complete the memory of.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or the feature G2.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature G3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to the feature G3.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature G4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic H1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A notification means that notifies in a predetermined case, and
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
Game history information which is information about the history of the game based on the information about the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A calculation means (CPU308) for calculating (role ratio, etc.) and
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
Equipped with
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature H1, since the game history information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic H2]
Feature The gaming machine described in H1.
The notification means is characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range. Machine.

According to the feature H2, when the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine notifies that the specific value included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a gaming machine that is no longer included in. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic H3]
Feature The gaming machine described in H2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature H3, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine determines which specific value included in the gaming history information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether the degree is different.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H3.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature H4, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H4.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature H5, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H5.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature H6, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
Each time the game ball is detected by the detection means, the ball entry information storage means (memory 309b for ball entry information storage) that sequentially stores the entry information, which is information indicating that the game ball is detected by the detection means. When,
For a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine, the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means and the prize ball stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A transmission means (CPU308) for transmitting numerical information and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, since the ball entry information and the prize ball number information are transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device is information regarding the game history based on the ball entry information and the prize ball number information. The game history information can be calculated in any range. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated in an arbitrary range by a predetermined device, and it is appropriate whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. It becomes possible to judge. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine described in Feature I1.
It is equipped with a date and time information acquisition means (RTC96) for acquiring date and time information, which is information about the date and time.
The ball entry information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the ball entry information is stored, the date and time information corresponding to the date and time detected by the detection means is added and stored.

According to the feature I2, the predetermined device that has received the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added can specify the range of the date and time and calculate the game history information. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can perform a detailed inspection based on the gaming history information in which the range of the date and time is specified. Further, if the predetermined device displays the entry information to which the date and time information is added, the inspector of the gaming machine can also grasp the date and time when the gaming ball is detected by each detection means. ..

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means.

According to the feature I3, since the ball entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can enter the ball of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the ball entry information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
Prize ball number information storage means (mainly) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Side ROM 63) and
Game progress processing (winning lottery processing, electric motor opening lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, design on the main display unit 45), which is a processing for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. (Variation display processing, opening / closing processing of the opening / closing door 36b, the electric accessory 34a, etc.) are executed, and the detection information of the game ball detected by the detection means and the prize ball stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes a process of calculating game history information (feature ratio, etc.), which is information related to the game history by executing an operation based on numerical information.
A game history information storage means (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x) that is stored in the housing of the game machine main body and stores the game history information calculated by the processing execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, the game history information storage means for storing the game history information is provided. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the game history information is different for each game machine and is information unique to the game machine. That is, the game history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the game machine. According to the feature J1, the game history information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the gaming history information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. Feature The J1 gaming machine stores game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the gaming history information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is connected to the hall computer. The game history information can be acquired from the game machine main body even if it is not in the state. That is, according to the feature J1, it is possible to associate the gaming machine with the gaming history information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature J1, since a single processing execution means executes the game progress processing and the processing for calculating the game history information, it is necessary to provide another calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation processing. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

[Feature J2]
Feature J1 is the gaming machine described in
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming progress process is not executed even when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined region.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that it is not preferable to execute the game progress process in parallel with the game progress process. In the second mode, it is possible to execute a process, a process in which a problem is likely to occur when the process is executed in parallel with the game progress process, and the like. Further, according to the feature J2, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when the game progress process is executed in parallel when developing a program for the process to be executed in the second mode. Since it is not necessary to consider countermeasures, it is possible to greatly improve the development efficiency of the processing program to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature J3]
Features The gaming machine described in J2.
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the game history information.

The game history information is information whose contents change when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process of outputting game history information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress is performed while the inspector of the game machine is inspecting the characteristics of the game machine by the game history information. The processing may be executed and the content of the game history information may change at any time, making it difficult to smoothly carry out the inspection. On the other hand, according to the feature J3, the game history information is output in the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that the game history information is output. It is possible to prevent the content of the game history information from changing during the period. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can smoothly carry out the inspection.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J3.
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button. When the operation of performing the operation is executed, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when the predetermined time is reached), the timing when the second condition is satisfied (the pattern variation display processing is completed). At the timing when the game progress processing such as the timing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage, and the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to play.

According to the feature J4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is changed to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when migrating to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the first mode is adopted. If the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed is satisfied during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being executed in the mode of, the second is in the middle of the symbol variation display. It becomes difficult to control the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol. On the other hand, according to the feature J4, for example, the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the first mode is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the mode shifts to the second mode at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variation display processing is not executed, that is, the timing after the symbol being displayed in variation is stopped. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

[Feature J5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J4.
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
When the third condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed after shifting to the inspection mode), an operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode. Even when the transition operation (operation of pressing the mode switching button, operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the first mode is changed from the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to transition to a mode.

According to the feature J5, when the third condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the transition operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the shift operation from not being executed and not returning to the first mode. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute the transition operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person cannot play a game with the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
Features The gaming machine described in J5.
The third condition is a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined time point (10 minutes elapses from the time when the inspection mode is entered).

According to the feature J6, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time during the second mode, the transition operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. However, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably suppress that the shift operation is not executed and the mode does not return to the first mode. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to execute the transition operation after the transition to the second mode, if a predetermined time elapses from the predetermined time, the first Since the mode is restored, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed and the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine.

[Feature J7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J6.
A game progress processing information storage means (main side RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the game machine main body and stores information related to the game progress process.
The game is based on the execution of an erasing operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button), which is an operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means. An erasing means that erases the information stored in the progress processing information storage means,
Equipped with
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
The erasing means is in a state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (a state in the inspection mode, a state in which the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode). A gaming machine characterized in that the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased even when the erasing operation is executed.

According to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is executed. Even in such a case, since the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the first mode is set. Even if the erasing operation is mistakenly executed in an attempt to migrate, it is possible to prevent the information from being erroneously erased.

For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button, and the first mode and the second mode In a configuration in which the operation for shifting between modes is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is used to shift from the second mode to the first mode. I intend to press the power button while pressing, but there is a risk that the power button will be pressed while pressing the erase button by mistake. However, according to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the operation of pressing the power button while erroneously pressing the erasing button is executed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress process executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress process is temporarily stopped. When a configuration is adopted in which the information for resuming the game after returning to the second mode is stored in the game progress processing information storage means, the transition button is pressed in an attempt to return from the second mode to the first mode. If you intend to press the power button while pressing it, but accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for restarting the game progress process will be deleted, and the second After returning to the mode of, the game progress process cannot be restarted, which may give a disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, according to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the button for erasing is erroneously pressed in an attempt to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while the power button is pressed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being accidentally erased, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the memory from being lost.

[Feature J8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J7.
A gaming machine including a display means (design display device 41) for displaying the game history information.

According to the feature J8, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

[Feature J9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J8.
The game history information storage means is characterized in that it is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) capable of holding the memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature J9, since the game history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the power is not supplied to the gaming machine). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the gaming history information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature J10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J9.
The gaming history information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature J10, the game history information storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the game history information storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is modified through physical contact with the game history information storage means, it is necessary to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the game history information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the gaming history information storage means is stored inside the housing in which traces of opening and closing remain. Even in a situation where gaming machines are distributed one after another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of gaming history information by someone. Further, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the game machine by using the game history information. Therefore, according to the feature J10, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized modification of the gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J11]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J10.
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature J11, since the game history information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J12]
Features The gaming machine described in J11.
The notification means is characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range. Machine.

According to the feature J12, when the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine notifies that the specific value included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a gaming machine that is no longer included in. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J13]
Features The gaming machine described in J12.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature J13, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine determines which specific value included in the gaming history information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether the degree is different.

[Feature J14]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J11 to the feature J13.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature J14, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
Game progress processing (winning lottery processing, electric motor opening lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, design on the main display unit 45), which is a processing for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65. The second mode (inspection mode), which is the mode executed when is connected, when the predetermined time comes, and when the predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming progress process is not executed even when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined region.

According to the feature K1, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that it is not preferable to execute the game progress process in parallel with the game progress process. In the second mode, it is possible to execute a process, a process in which a problem is likely to occur when the process is executed in parallel with the game progress process, and the like. Further, according to the feature K1, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when the game progress process is executed in parallel when developing a program for the process to be executed in the second mode. Since it is not necessary to consider countermeasures, it is possible to greatly improve the development efficiency of the processing program to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature K2]
Features The gaming machine described in K1.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, entry number information, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the game machine and is based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. ) Is provided with storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature K2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature K2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. Feature The K2 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature K2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, the detection information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process of outputting detection information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress process is performed while the inspector of the game machine inspects the characteristics of the game machine by the detection information. It may be executed and the content of the detection information may change at any time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature K2, the detection information is output in the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that the detection information is output. It is possible to prevent the content of the detection information from changing during that time. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can smoothly carry out the inspection.

[Feature K3]
Features The gaming machine described in K2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature K3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3.
The storage means is a non-volatile memory capable of retaining storage even when the power supply is cut off (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, flash). A gaming machine characterized by being composed of a memory 64x).

According to the feature K4, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the detection information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K2 to the feature K4.
The storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is modified through physical contact with the storage means, it becomes possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine can be used. Even in a situation where the information is distributed from one place to another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature K5, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K2 to the feature K5.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notifying means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature K6, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K7]
Features The gaming machine described in K6.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range, the notifying means is notified.

According to the feature K7, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K8]
Features The gaming machine described in K7.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature K8, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature K9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K6 to the feature K8.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature K9, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
Game progress processing (winning lottery processing, electric motor opening lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, design on the main display unit 45), which is a processing for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button. When the operation of performing the operation is executed, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when the predetermined time is reached), the timing when the second condition is satisfied (the pattern variation display processing is completed). At the timing when the game progress processing such as the timing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage, and the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to play.

According to the feature L1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is changed to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when migrating to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the first mode is adopted. If the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed is satisfied during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being executed in the mode of, the second is in the middle of the symbol variation display. It becomes difficult to control the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol. On the other hand, according to the feature L1, for example, the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the first mode is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the mode shifts to the second mode at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variation display processing is not executed, that is, the timing after the symbol being displayed in variation is stopped. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine described in the feature L1.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, entry number information, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the game machine and is based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. ) Is provided with storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature L2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature L2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The L2 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature L2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine described in the feature L2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature L3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3.
The storage means is a non-volatile memory capable of retaining storage even when the power supply is cut off (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, flash). A gaming machine characterized by being composed of a memory 64x).

According to the feature L4, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the detection information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L2 to the feature L4.
The storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is modified through physical contact with the storage means, it becomes possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine can be used. Even in a situation where the information is distributed from one place to another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature L5, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L2 to the feature L5.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notifying means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature L6, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L7]
Feature The gaming machine described in L6,
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range, the notifying means is notified.

According to the feature L7, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L8]
Feature The gaming machine described in L7,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature L8, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature L9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L6 to the feature L8.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature L9, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
Game progress processing (winning lottery processing, electric motor opening lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, design on the main display unit 45), which is a processing for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
When the second condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed after shifting to the inspection mode), a predetermined setting for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is performed. Even when the operation (operation of pressing the mode switching button, operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the second mode is changed to the first mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to migrate.

According to the feature M1, when the second condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the player from not returning to the first mode without executing a predetermined operation. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
Feature The gaming machine described in M1.
The second condition is that a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined time point (10 minutes elapses from the time when the inspection mode is entered).

According to the feature M2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time during the second mode, a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. Even if there is, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably suppress the return to the first mode without executing a predetermined operation. For example, even if the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute a predetermined operation after the transition to the second mode, the first is as long as a predetermined time elapses from the predetermined time. Since the mode returns to the above mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed and the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, entry number information, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the game machine and is based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. ) Is provided with storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature M3, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature M3, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. Feature The M3 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature M3, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature M3, after the inspector of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine by the detection information output in the second mode, the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine plays the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game on the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which the progress processing can be executed.

[Feature M4]
Features The gaming machine described in M3.
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature M4, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to the feature M3 or the feature M4.
The storage means is a non-volatile memory capable of retaining storage even when the power supply is cut off (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, flash). A gaming machine characterized by being composed of a memory 64x).

According to the feature M5, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the detection information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature M6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M3 to the feature M5.
The storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is modified through physical contact with the storage means, it becomes possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine can be used. Even in a situation where the information is distributed from one place to another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature M6, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M3 to the feature M6.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notifying means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature M7, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M8]
Features The gaming machine described in M7.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range, the notifying means is notified.

According to the feature M8, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M9]
Features The gaming machine described in M8.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature M9, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature M10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M7 to the feature M9.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature M10, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
Game progress processing (winning lottery processing, electric motor opening lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, design on the main display unit 45), which is a processing for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
A storage means (main side RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the game machine and stores information about the game progress process, and
An erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means based on the execution of a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button).
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65. The second mode (inspection mode), which is the mode executed when is connected, when the predetermined time comes, and when the predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
The erasing means is in a state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (a state in the inspection mode, a state in which the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode). A gaming machine characterized in that the information stored in the storage means is not erased even when the predetermined operation is executed.

According to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is executed. Even if there is, since the information stored in the storage means is not erased, it is erroneously determined to shift to the first mode in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode. Even if the operation of is executed, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

For example, a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button, and is between the first mode and the second mode. In a configuration in which the operation for shifting the mode is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is pressed in an attempt to shift from the second mode to the first mode. While I intend to press the power button, there is a risk that I accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the operation of pressing the power button while erroneously pressing the erasing button is executed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress process executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress process is temporarily stopped. When a configuration is adopted in which information for resuming the operation after returning to the second mode is stored in the storage means, the power supply is performed while pressing the transition button in an attempt to return from the second mode to the first mode. If you intend to press the button, but accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for restarting the game progress process will be erased, and you will enter the second mode. After returning, the game progress process cannot be restarted, which may be disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, according to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the button for erasing is erroneously pressed in an attempt to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while pressing the power button, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the storage means from being accidentally erased, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suppressed.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine described in Feature N1.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, number of balls entered, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the gaming machine and is based on the detection of the gaming ball by the detection means. ) Is equipped with a detection information storage means to store
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that the detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball entry number information, accessory ratio, etc.) is output.

According to the feature N2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature N2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the detection information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The N2 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the detection information detection information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is connected to the hall computer. The detection information can be acquired from the main body of the gaming machine even in the non-existing state. That is, according to the feature N2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine described in Feature N2.
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature N3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3.
The detection information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is housed inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the detection information storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is modified through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed in various ways, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the game is played. Even in a situation where machines are distributed one after another, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature N4, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N2 to the feature N4.
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature N5, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine described in Feature N5.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that when a specific value (payout ratio or the like) contained in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range, the notification means is notified.

According to the feature N6, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine described in Feature N6.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature N7, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature N8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N5 to the feature N7.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature N8, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

The inventions of the feature A group to the feature N group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of improving the interest of games.

In addition to improving the interest of the game, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

For example, if an illegal act (so-called goto act) is performed by a player, or if a nail provided on the game board of a pachinko gaming machine is illegally bent and remodeled, each entry such as a general winning opening or a starting opening is entered. The ratio of game balls entering the ball mouth may be different from what was initially assumed, and the performance and playability expected of the pachinko gaming machine may be impaired. However, it was very difficult to find such fraud.

Such fraud may be committed by the player during the business hours of the game hall. In addition, somebody may make an illegal modification after the opening hours of the game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where illegal modifications are made to the gaming machines in transit before they are installed in the gaming hall. Furthermore, there are cases where illegal modifications are made to the gaming machines before they are shipped to the gaming hall. There is also the possibility that unauthorized modifications will be made before that.

Based on such a situation, the purpose is to detect illegal acts and unauthorized modifications to the gaming machine and improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A gaming machine provided with a processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (interval of 4 msec).
The process execution means can execute a specific process (arithmetic process that is a process of calculating game history information) as one process included in the predetermined process.
The specific process is composed of a plurality of process stages (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29).
The processing execution means is
In one execution of the predetermined process, one of the plurality of process steps constituting the specific process can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that all of the plurality of processing stages constituting the specific processing are executed by executing the predetermined processing a plurality of times.

According to the feature O1, in one execution of a predetermined process, one of a plurality of process stages constituting a specific process can be executed, and by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times, the predetermined process can be executed. Since all of the plurality of processing stages constituting the specific processing are executed, the predetermined processing is performed as compared with the configuration in which all of the plurality of processing stages constituting the specific processing are executed in one execution of the predetermined processing. The time required for one execution can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. It is possible to suppress such things.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine described in Feature O1.
The specific process is composed of a series of processes in which the order of execution is defined.
The plurality of processing steps are divided into the series of processes constituting the specific process.
The processing execution means executes one of the plurality of processing stages (task 1 in FIG. 29), and then executes the processing stage next to the one processing stage (task 2 in FIG. 29). A gaming machine characterized by specifying.

According to the feature O2, a series of processes in which the order of execution is determined is divided, and in one execution of a predetermined process, one of the plurality of process stages is executed, and then the one is executed. Since the processing stage to be executed next to the processing stage is specified, even if it is a series of processing in which the time required to execute the predetermined processing becomes longer than the predetermined interval when incorporated into the predetermined processing. , Can be incorporated into a predetermined process to be executed at a predetermined interval.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine described in Feature O2,
The process executing means can execute a game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of the game, as a process included in the predetermined process.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing is a processing (arithmetic processing) different from the game progress processing.

According to the feature O3, when a process different from the game progress process (process other than the game progress process) is incorporated into the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Even in a gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to incorporate a process different from the game progress process into a predetermined process executed at a predetermined interval and execute the process. Further, since the process different from the game progress process does not affect the progress of the game even if all the processing steps are not executed in one execution of the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process. Can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved. As the process different from the game progress process, various arbitrary processes can be adopted. For example, a process for calculating game history information, which is information related to the game history, or a process installed in the game hall. It is possible to adopt a transmission process or the like in which information regarding the status of the game is transmitted to the hall computer at a predetermined timing.

[Feature O4]
Feature The gaming machine described in O3,
The specific process is a calculation process (calculation process) that is a process of calculating game history information, which is information related to the game history.

According to the feature O4, when the calculation process for calculating the game history information is incorporated into the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Also in the machine, the calculation process can be incorporated into a predetermined process executed at a predetermined interval and executed. Further, the calculation process for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all the processing steps are not executed in one execution of the predetermined process, so that the calculation process is required for one execution of the predetermined process. The time can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A gaming machine provided with a processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (interval of 4 msec).
The processing execution means is
As one process included in the predetermined process, a specific process (prize ball aggregation process) can be executed.
In one execution of the predetermined process, some of the process target candidates (two bits) from the plurality of process target candidates (8 bits in the buffer area) are subjected to the specific process (prize ball). It is possible to set it as a processing target for (aggregation processing) and execute the specific processing for the set processing target.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing is executed for all of the plurality of processing target candidates by executing the predetermined processing a plurality of times.

According to the feature P1, in one execution of a predetermined process, a part of the process target candidates from a plurality of process target candidates is set as a process target of a specific process, and the set process target is set. It is possible to execute a specific process, and by executing a predetermined process a plurality of times, a specific process is executed for all of a plurality of processing target candidates. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for one execution of the predetermined process as compared with the configuration in which the specific process is executed for all of the plurality of processing target candidates in one execution of the predetermined process. As a result, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. It is possible to suppress such things.

[Feature P2]
Feature The gaming machine described in P1.
The plurality of processing target candidates are gaming machines characterized in that they are fixed in advance.

According to the feature P2, since a plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance, it is not necessary to execute a process of selecting a plurality of processing target candidates, and the processing can be simplified. As a result, the processing speed can be reduced. Can be improved. Further, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting a plurality of processing target candidates.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2.
The processing target setting means is characterized in that, when setting a part of the processing target candidates from the plurality of processing target candidates as the processing target of the specific processing, the processing target setting means is set in a predetermined order. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature P3, when some processing target candidates are set as processing targets of a specific processing from a plurality of processing target candidates, they are set in a predetermined order, so that the processing target of the specific processing is set. It is not necessary to execute the determination process of which process target candidate is set, the process can be simplified, and as a result, the process speed can be improved. Further, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for executing the determination process.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to the feature P3.
Equipped with multiple entry sections where game balls can enter
Each of the plurality of processing target candidates corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry portions.
Each of the processing target candidates is information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each entry portion (ball entry detection information stored in each bit of the buffer area).
The processing executing means performs the predetermined processing a plurality of times (about 18 msec) in a time shorter than the shortest interval (about 18 msec) in which two gaming balls continuously enter one of the ball entry portions and are detected. (4 times) A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific process for all of the process target candidates by executing the process.

According to the feature P4, the shortest time required for a specific process to be executed for all the processing target candidates is detected by two game balls continuously entering one ball entry section. Since the interval can be made shorter than the interval of, the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into each entry portion is that the entry of one game ball is detected. It can be stored as information to be updated based on it. Specifically, it is updated based on the fact that when two game balls enter the ball entry section in succession, the entry of the first first game ball is detected in the entry section. Even if the information is set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, and then the remaining other processing target candidates are set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, the next second game All of these specific processes can be terminated before the ball's entry is detected at the entry portion. That is, when the information updated based on the fact that the entry of the second game ball is detected in the entry portion is set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, one is already present. The specific processing for the updated information based on the fact that the entry of the game ball of the eye is detected in the entry section has been completed, and the entry of the second game ball is detected in the entry section. The information updated based on the above can be treated as updated information based on the fact that the entry of a new first game ball is detected in the entry portion. Therefore, the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into each entry portion is stored as the information updated based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. be able to. As a result, for example, it is possible to store the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into each entry portion as binary information indicating the presence or absence of entry. In this case, the storage capacity for storing the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into each entry portion can be reduced, and the processing speed of a specific process can be improved. be able to.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
A process execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing a specific process (process for game history) and a process other than the specific process (process related to the progress of the game), and
A storage area (main RAM 64) to which information can be written, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The process execution means includes holding means (register) for holding information (register information) for executing the process.
The specific process is
The first process (save process) of writing the information held by the holding means for executing the other process (register information) to the storage area, and
A second process (return process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process.
A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature Q1, since the specific process includes the first process of writing the information held by the holding means and the information for executing the other process to the storage area, the process executing means is the specific process. At the start, if the holding means holds information for executing other processing that was being executed immediately before the start of a particular process, for the execution of other processing held by the holding means. Information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it in the storage area. Therefore, it is possible to erase the information for executing other processes held in the holding means, and to have the holding means hold the information for executing the specific process when the process executing means executes the specific process. can. Further, since the specific process includes the second process of causing the holding means to retain the information written in the storage area in the first process, it is necessary to execute another process when the specific process is terminated. The information can be retained by the holding means again, and other processes that were executed before the start of the specific process can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of the specific process. Further, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, a game in which other processes other than the specific process are executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. Machines can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing a specific process without modifying the program for executing the process other than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so as not to execute a specific processing, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine which does not execute a specific processing, design changes are minimized. It becomes possible to do.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine described in Feature Q1.
The processing execution means is
In the first process included in the specific process, information for executing the other process is written in a predetermined specific area (second area) of the storage area, and the information is described. A gaming machine characterized in that information is written in a specific process only to the specific area (second area) of the storage area.

According to the feature Q2, in the first process included in the specific process, the process execution means writes the information for executing the other process to the predetermined specific area of the storage area, and , Since the writing of information in a specific process is executed only for a specific area of the storage area, the information written in the other area of the storage area other than the specific area is the specific process. It is possible to prevent it from being rewritten by executing. Therefore, when the process using the other area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting the process.

[Characteristic Q3]
The gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2.
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that writing of information in the other processing is performed only to an area (first area) other than the specific area of the storage area.

According to the feature Q3, since the writing of the information in the other processing is executed only to the area other than the specific area in the storage area, the information written in the specific area in the storage area is executed. However, it is possible to prevent it from being rewritten by executing other processing. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process execution means using the specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Q1 to the feature Q3.
The specific process is different from the game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of the game.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the other processing is the game progress processing.

According to the feature Q4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress processing is executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the processing different from the game progress processing is deleted. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so as not to execute a process different from the game progress process, or when developing a new gaming machine which does not execute a process different from the game progress process, the design change is minimized. It is possible to limit it. As the process different from the game progress process, various arbitrary processes can be adopted. For example, a process for calculating and displaying game history information, which is information related to the game history, or a game hall. It is possible to adopt a transmission process or the like in which information regarding the status of the game is transmitted to the installed hall computer at a predetermined timing.

[Feature Q5]
Feature Q4 is the gaming machine described in Q4.
The specific process is a game history information-related process (game history process) that calculates and displays game history information (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio) that is information related to the game history. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature Q5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming progress processing is executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the gaming history information-related processing is deleted. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history information-related processing. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so as not to execute the game history information-related processing, or when developing a new gaming machine which does not execute the game history information-related processing, design changes should be minimized. Is possible.

<Characteristic R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
A process execution means (main CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of processes including a specific process (game history process), and
A storage area (main RAM 64) to which information can be written, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that information is written only to a predetermined specific area (second area) of the storage area in the specific process.

According to the feature R1, since the processing execution means writes information in a specific process only to a predetermined specific area in the storage area, other than the specific area in the storage area. It is possible to prevent the information written in the area of from being rewritten by executing a specific process. Therefore, when a process using an area other than the specific area of the storage area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to suppress the influence of the specific process on the process. can.

[Feature R2]
Feature The gaming machine described in R1.
The processing execution means is
Writing information in a process other than the specific process (process related to the progress of the game) is executed only for an area (first area) other than the specific area in the storage area. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature R2, since the processing execution means executes the writing of information in the processing other than the specific processing only to the area other than the specific area in the storage area, the processing execution means is executed in the storage area. It is possible to prevent the information written in the specific area of the above from being rewritten by the execution of the other processing. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process execution means using the specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature R3]
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2.
The processing execution means is
A holding means (register) for holding information (register information) for executing a process is provided, and the specific process and the other process are exclusively executed.
The specific process is
The first process (save process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for executing the other process to the specific area, and
The second process (return process) of causing the holding means to hold the information written in the specific area in the first process.
A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature R3, since the specific process includes the first process, when the process executing means starts the specific process, the holding means executes another process immediately before the start of the specific process. When the information of is held, it can be temporarily moved (evacuated) by writing the information for executing other processing held by the holding means to a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to erase the information for executing other processes held in the holding means, and to have the holding means hold the information for executing the specific process when the process executing means executes the specific process. can. Further, since the specific process includes the second process, when the specific process is finished, the information for executing the other process is held again in the holding means, and the information is executed before the start of the specific process. Other processes can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of a specific process. Further, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, a game in which other processes other than the specific process are executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. Machines can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing a specific process without modifying the program for executing the process other than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so as not to execute a specific processing, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine which does not execute a specific processing, design changes are minimized. It becomes possible to do.

[Feature R4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to the feature R3.
The specific process is different from the game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of the game.
A gaming machine characterized in that the processing other than the specific processing is the game progress processing.

According to the feature R4, the process execution means writes information in a process different from the game progress process only in a predetermined specific area of the storage area, so that the game progress process executes the process. When executed by means, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being affected by a process different from the game progress process.

[Feature R5]
Feature The gaming machine described in R4,
The specific process is a game history information-related process (game history process) that calculates and displays game history information (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio) that is information related to the game history. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature R5, since the processing execution means executes the writing of the information in the game history information-related processing only to a predetermined specific area in the storage area, the game progress processing is performed by the processing execution means. When executed, it is possible to prevent the game history information-related processing from affecting the game progress processing.

<Characteristic S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A ball entry detection means (ball entry detection sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and a ball entry detection sensor.
Parameter storage means (buffer for prize ball total) that stores predetermined parameters (prize ball total value),
A gaming machine provided with a processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (interval of 4 msec).
The processing execution means is
As the predetermined process,
Parameter update processing (prize ball aggregation processing) for updating the predetermined parameter stored in the parameter storage means when the game ball enters the ball entry portion.
Calculation processing (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating game history information, which is information related to the game history based on the predetermined parameter stored in the parameter storage means, and
Is feasible and
A gaming machine characterized in that the calculation process is not executed when the parameter update process is executed in one predetermined process.

According to the feature S1, when the parameter update process is executed in one predetermined process, the calculation process is not executed. That is, since both the parameter update process and the calculation process are not executed in one predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. It is possible to suppress such things. Further, according to the feature S1, the parameter update process in which the ball entry status of the game ball and the processing load correlate is executed with priority over the calculation process in which the ball entry status of the game ball and the processing load do not correlate. Suppressing that the interval between executions of the parameter update process becomes large, and as a result, the process result (prize ball aggregate value) of the parameter update process cannot accurately reflect the entry status of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine described in the feature S1.
A determination means (process of step S10810 in FIG. 29) for determining whether or not to execute the calculation process is provided.
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the calculation process is executed when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines that the calculation process is to be executed.

According to the feature S2, since the calculation process is executed when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines that the calculation process is to be executed, neither the parameter update process nor the calculation process is executed in the predetermined process. In addition, in the situation, instead of the parameter update process and the calculation process, other processes independent of these processes (for example, the updated parameters, the process of determining the validity of the calculation result of the calculation process, etc.) are performed. It will be possible to execute. Further, if the configuration is such that when either the parameter update process or the calculation process is executed in one predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process is shorter than the predetermined interval, the situation is concerned. In the above, by executing a process having a shorter processing time than the parameter update process and the calculation process, it is possible to surely suppress that the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Can be done.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2.
Although the processing executing means can calculate a plurality of types of game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio) in the calculation process, in the calculation process in one predetermined process. Is a gaming machine characterized by executing a process (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating the gaming history information of one type.

According to the feature S3, although it is possible to calculate a plurality of types of game history information in the calculation process, in the calculation process in one predetermined process, the process for calculating one type of game history information is performed. Is executed, so that the time required for one execution of the predetermined process is shortened as compared with the configuration in which the process for calculating the game history information of a plurality of types is executed in the calculation process in one predetermined process. be able to. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. It can be suppressed. In addition, the storage capacity for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine described in the feature S3.
The processing execution means is
By executing the process for calculating the game history information of one type (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) over the predetermined process a plurality of times, the game history information of the one type is calculated. A gaming machine characterized by doing.

According to the feature S4, the game history information of one type is calculated by executing the process for calculating the game history information of one type over a plurality of predetermined processes, so that the game history information of one type is calculated once. It is possible to shorten the time required to execute one predetermined process as compared with the configuration in which the calculation of one type of game history information is completed in the calculation process in the predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for executing the predetermined process from exceeding the interval for executing the predetermined process.

The inventions of the feature O group to the feature S group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, there are various structures, controls, productions, etc. for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing sounder games. It is rare.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (main side CPU 62x in the aspect 38 of the first embodiment) and
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, bonus ratio, number of balls entered, etc.), and
An operation means (flash memory clear button) that accepts a predetermined operation, and
An erasing means (IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the operating means has received the predetermined operation.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The operating means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) where a trace of opening remains.

According to the feature T1, since the operating means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is concerned. The operating means will be operated in the open state, and a trace of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine. That is, there is a possibility that the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means is erased based on whether or not the space of the gaming machine has a trace of opening. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears on the executed game, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as an "inspector") is applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized modifications can be found. For this reason, there is a person who has a request (hereinafter, also referred to as "illegal person") to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified by erasing the information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the gaming machine and operate the operation means. Then, a trace of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, the information may have been erased for fraudulent concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications made to the gaming machine, and by extension, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation such as making unauthorized modifications to the gaming machine, improving the soundness of the game. Can be made to.

In addition, the gaming machines may be distributed by transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the gaming machines (so-called used gaming machines) that have already been played are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machines. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information that has been sent before distributing it. Therefore, if only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a valid reason can eliminate the traces of the opening of the space, the soundness of the gaming will be achieved. It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the characteristics.

[Feature T2]
Feature The gaming machine described in T1.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature T2, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the executed game can be retained, so that the gaming machine can be used, for example, in the distribution process. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (prize ball aggregate value).

According to the feature T3, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the game machine by using the information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls.

[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T3.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which a trace of opening remains.

According to the feature T4, since the information storage means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to attempt to illegally modify the information stored in the information storage means, the said person concerned. The space of the game machine will be opened, and a trace of opening will remain in the space of the game machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means is illegally modified. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and eventually, there is a motive to make unauthorized alterations to the information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature U1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (main side CPU 62x according to the first embodiment 39) and
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, bonus ratio, number of balls entered, etc.), and
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected, and
An erasing means (IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receiving a predetermined signal (erasing command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature U1, since the erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means, the predetermined device. Can erase the information stored in the information storage means. That is, it is possible to limit the erasure of the information by a person who does not have a predetermined device.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears on the executed game, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as an "inspector") is applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized modifications can be found. For this reason, there is a person who has a request (hereinafter, also referred to as "illegal person") to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified by erasing the information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine is required. Then, by limiting the persons who can have the predetermined device, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and by extension, it is illegal for the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as remodeling, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, the gaming machines may be distributed by transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the gaming machines (so-called used gaming machines) that have already been played are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machines. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information that has been sent before distributing it. Therefore, if only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a legitimate reason can have a predetermined device, the soundness of the gaming can be improved. While ensuring, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines.

[Characteristic U2]
Features The gaming machine described in U1.
Prior to erasing the information stored in the information storage means, the erasing means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to the feature U2, the transmission means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation contrary to the intention of a person having a predetermined device, the information is erased from the information storage means. The information can be confirmed by the predetermined device.

[Feature U3]
The gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature U3, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the executed game can be retained, so that the gaming machine can be used, for example, in the distribution process. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature U4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features U1 to the feature U3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (prize ball aggregate value).

According to the feature U4, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the game machine by using the information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls.

[Feature U5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features U1 to the feature U4.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which a trace of opening remains.

According to the feature U5, since the information storage means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to attempt to illegally modify the information stored in the information storage means, the said person concerned. The space of the game machine will be opened, and a trace of opening will remain in the space of the game machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means is illegally modified. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and eventually, there is a motive to make unauthorized alterations to the information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (main side CPU 62x according to the first embodiment 40) and
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, bonus ratio, number of balls entered, etc.), and
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected, and
An operation means (flash memory clear button) that accepts a predetermined operation, and
An erasing means (IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The operating means is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) where a trace of opening remains.
The erasing means is based on the fact that the operating means receives the predetermined operation and receives a predetermined signal (erasing command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A gaming machine comprising means for erasing the information stored in the machine.

According to the feature V1, since the operating means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is concerned. The operating means will be operated in the open state, and a trace of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine. Further, since the erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means, a person having the predetermined device , The information stored in the information storage means can be erased. Therefore, there is a possibility that the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means is erased based on whether or not the space of the gaming machine has a trace of opening. It is possible to grasp whether or not the information is present, and it is possible to limit the erasure of the information by a person who does not have a predetermined device.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears on the executed game, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as an "inspector") is applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized modifications can be found. For this reason, there is a person who has a request (hereinafter, also referred to as "illegal person") to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified by erasing the information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine is required. Then, by limiting the persons who can have the predetermined device, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person. Further, even if an unauthorized person has a predetermined device, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine is opened and operated. It is necessary to operate the means. Then, a trace of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, the information may have been erased for fraudulent concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the unauthorized modification of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of motivation such as improper modification of the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machines may be distributed by transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the gaming machines (so-called used gaming machines) that have already been played are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machines. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information that has been sent before distributing it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a valid reason can have a predetermined device and erase the trace of the opening of the space. If a possible distribution system is constructed, it will be possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of gaming.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine described in Feature V1.
Prior to erasing the information stored in the information storage means, the erasing means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to the feature V2, the transmission means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation contrary to the intention of a person having a predetermined device, the information is erased from the information storage means. The information can be confirmed by the predetermined device.

[Feature V3]
The gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature V3, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the executed game can be retained, so that the gaming machine can be used, for example, in the distribution process. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features V1 to the feature V3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (prize ball aggregate value).

According to the feature V4, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the game machine by using the information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls.

[Feature V5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features V1 to the feature V4.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which a trace of opening remains.

According to the feature V5, since the information storage means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to attempt to illegally modify the information stored in the information storage means, the said person concerned. The space of the game machine will be opened, and a trace of opening will remain in the space of the game machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means is illegally modified. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and eventually, there is a motive to make unauthorized alterations to the information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature W1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (main side CPU 62x according to the first embodiment 46) and
Based on the first information (information used for the game progress process stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game. Information storage means for storing the second information (the prize ball total value stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, the number of balls entered, etc.) which is the acquired information. (Main RAM 64) and
An erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The erasing means is characterized by comprising means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means when erasing the second information stored in the information storage means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature W1, since the erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, the second information which is the information acquired based on the executed game is the second information. Despite being erased, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first information, which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game, is not erased and is maintained as it is.

Specifically, for example, the second information, which is information acquired based on the played game, is information that serves as a guarantee for determining the fairness of the game played on the gaming machine. When the second information is deleted, the first information used for controlling the execution of the game in the gaming machine (for example, information regarding the high probability mode flag indicating the gaming state and the high frequency support mode flag) is used. It is preferable to erase and initialize the gaming state of the gaming machine. According to this feature, since the erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, the second information serving as collateral for determining the fairness of the game is erased. However, since the first information is not erased, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained as it is.

[Feature W2]
Features The gaming machine described in W1.
The erasing means is a gaming machine including means for erasing the first information among the information stored in the information storage means and not erasing the second information.

According to the feature W2, since the erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information among the information stored in the information storage means, the erasing means is acquired based on the executed game. It is possible to delete the first information, which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game, while leaving the second information, which is the obtained information.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or when the business of the game hall starts or ends, the first information which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game is deleted. There is a request that the player wants to initialize the control of the gaming machine, but does not want to delete the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game. According to this feature, while leaving the second information which is the information acquired based on the executed game, the first information which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased and the game machine is concerned. It is possible to perform control initialization.

<Characteristic X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature X1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (main side CPU 62x according to the first embodiment 42) and
Based on the first information (information used for the game progress process stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game. Information storage means for storing the second information (the prize ball total value stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, the number of balls entered, etc.) which is the acquired information. (Main RAM 64) and
The first operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) that accepts the first operation (operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed), and
An erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The erasing means erases the first information among the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of the first operation by the first operating means, and the second erasing means. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for not erasing the information of.

According to the feature X1, the erasing means erases the first information among the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of the first operation by the first operating means, and the second. Since the information of is provided with a means for not erasing, the first information which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game is deleted while leaving the second information which is the information acquired based on the executed game. Is possible.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or when the business of the game hall starts or ends, the first information which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game is deleted. There is a request that the player wants to initialize the control of the gaming machine, but does not want to delete the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game. According to this feature, the information used for controlling the execution of the game while leaving the second information which is the information acquired based on the executed game by operating the first operating means. It is possible to erase the information of 1 and execute the initialization of the control of the gaming machine.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine described in Feature X1.
It is provided with a second operating means (second RAM clear button) that accepts a second operation (an operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON).
The erasing means is characterized by comprising means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of the second operation by the second operating means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature X2, the erasing means includes a means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the second operating means has received the second operation. The second information that cannot be erased by operating the operating means can be erased by operating the second operating means.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine described in Feature X2.
The second operating means (second RAM clear button) is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) where a trace of opening remains.

According to the feature X3, since the second operating means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, it is necessary to erase the second information. The second operating means will be operated with the space of the gaming machine open, and a trace of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine. That is, it is possible that the space of the gaming machine is opened and the second information stored in the information storage means is erased based on whether or not a trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a sex.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears on the executed game, and the second is stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. The information in the above may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as an "inspector") is applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized modifications can be found. For this reason, there is a person who has a request (hereinafter, also referred to as "illegal person") to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified by erasing the information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the gaming machine and operate the second operating means. Then, a trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the second information stored in the information storage means is deleted, there is a possibility that the information is deleted for fraudulent concealment. There will be a trace that there is. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications made to the gaming machine, and by extension, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation such as making unauthorized modifications to the gaming machine, improving the soundness of the game. Can be made to.

In addition, the gaming machines may be distributed by transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the gaming machines (so-called used gaming machines) that have already been played are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machines. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the second information provided before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is constructed in which only those who have a desire to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a valid reason can erase the traces of the opening of the space. While ensuring the soundness of the game, it is possible to promote the smooth distribution of the game machine.

<Characteristic Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (main side CPU 62x of aspects 43 and 44 of the first embodiment) and
Based on the first information (information used for the game progress process stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game. Information storage means for storing the second information (the prize ball total value stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the game history information such as the bonus ratio, the number of balls entered, etc.) which is the acquired information. (Main RAM 64) and
Operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) that accepts predetermined operations,
An erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The erasing means
The operation means is the first operation (the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The first information stored in the information storage means is erased based on the acceptance of the operation).
A second operation in which the operating means is different from the first operation (an operation in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed is continued for a predetermined time). A gaming machine comprising a means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the receipt of the above.

According to the feature Y1, the erasing means erases the first information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the operating means receives the first operation, and the operating means is the first operation. Provides a means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the acceptance of a different second operation. Therefore, by performing a different operation on the operation means, the information storage means It is possible to select the information to be deleted from the information stored in. That is, since the information of the target to be erased can be selected without providing another operating means for selecting the information of the target to be erased, the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or when the business of the game hall starts or ends, the first information which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game is deleted. When it is desired to execute the initialization of the control of the gaming machine, the first operation is executed, while the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game, is deleted and the gaming machine is newly renewed. If you want to distribute it to the pachinko machine, you can perform the second operation. By performing different operations on the operating means in this way, it is possible to select the information to be deleted from the information stored in the information storage means.

[Feature Y2]
Feature The gaming machine described in Y1.
The erasing means accepts the second operation (an operation in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed is continued for a predetermined time). Based on this, a gaming machine characterized by comprising means for erasing the first information in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means.

According to the feature Y2, the erasing means erases the second information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the operating means has received the second operation. Since the means for erasing the information is provided, both the first information and the second information can be erased by performing the second operation on the operating means.

<Characteristic Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (main side CPU 62x according to the first embodiment 41) and
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, bonus ratio, number of balls entered, etc.), and
An erasing means (IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means, and
Reception means for accepting authentication information (password) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The erasing means is a gaming machine including a means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the authentication information received by the receiving means satisfying a predetermined condition.

According to the feature Z1, the erasing means includes a means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the authentication information received by the receiving means satisfies the predetermined condition. A person who has the authentication information to be satisfied can erase the information stored in the information storage means. That is, it is possible to restrict the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information satisfying the predetermined condition.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears on the executed game, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as an "inspector") is applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized modifications can be found. For this reason, there is a person who has a request (hereinafter, also referred to as "illegal person") to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified by erasing the information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to have the authentication information satisfying the predetermined condition. Then, by limiting the persons who can have the authentication information satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and by extension, the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as improper modification of the machine, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, the gaming machines may be distributed by transactions, and those who want to newly distribute the gaming machines (so-called used gaming machines) that have already been played are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machines. In some cases, there is a legitimate request to erase the information that has been sent before distributing it. Therefore, if only a person who has a request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a legitimate reason can have the authentication information satisfying the predetermined condition, the distribution system can be established. While ensuring the soundness of the game, it is possible to promote the smooth distribution of the game machine.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine described in Feature Z1.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature Z2, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the executed game can be retained, so that the gaming machine can be used, for example, in the distribution process. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature Z3]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (prize ball aggregate value).

According to the feature Z3, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the game machine by using the information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls.

[Feature Z4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Z1 to the feature Z3.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which a trace of opening remains.

According to the feature Z4, since the information storage means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to attempt to illegally modify the information stored in the information storage means, the said person concerned. The space of the game machine will be opened, and a trace of opening will remain in the space of the game machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means is illegally modified. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and eventually, there is a motive to make unauthorized alterations to the information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

The inventions of the feature T group to the feature Z group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, the structure, control, etc. are used for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various perspectives such as production.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a sounder game, and the like. Improvement of technology is desired.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αA1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
Signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) that outputs a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Judgment information output means (for ball entry detection) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry portion based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) that is information based on the determination. IC62c) and
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination information, and
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αA1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the predetermined device is affected by the control means. It is possible to receive the judgment information that has not been received.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this feature, a configuration is adopted in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to the connecting means via the control means, a problem occurs in the control means. If the information is modified or improperly modified, the judgment information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the improper modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the control means has a problem. Even if it has occurred or has been tampered with, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or tampering. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can execute the process based on the determination information that is not affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification.

[Characteristic αA2]
Features The gaming machine described in αA1.
Each of the plurality of ball entry portions capable of entering the game ball and the signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion are provided.
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry portions based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, and determines whether or not the game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry portions. The determination information (ball entry information), which is information based on the determination and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry portions, is transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for outputting by.

According to the feature αA2, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, for example. As compared with the case where the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified, and the determination information is received. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units is output by the parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs the output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. It is necessary to have a part. Similarly, a predetermined device needs to include an input unit corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. In addition, since the number of ball slots provided in the gaming machine differs for each type of gaming machine (for each model), it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type of gaming machine (for each model). Occurs.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is a means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball input units included in the gaming machine. , The configuration of a predetermined device can be simplified. Further, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball entry units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units by a serial transmission method. Can be done. That is, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball entry portions. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Characteristic αA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αA1 or the feature αA2.
The connecting means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a bonus ratio) which is information related to the game history based on the determination information. A game machine.

According to the feature αA3, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information that is not affected by the control means by the predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αB1]
Multiple entry sections where game balls can enter,
A plurality of signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the ball entry of the game ball into each of the plurality of ball entry portions, and a plurality of signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h).
Based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry portions, and the information is based on the determination. Judgment information output means (IC62c for ball entry detection) that outputs determination information (ball entry information) that is information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions.
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination information, and
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The determination information output means is characterized by comprising means for outputting the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. A game machine to play.

According to the feature αB1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, for example. As compared with the case where the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified, and the determination information is received. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units is output by the parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs the output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. It is necessary to have a part. Similarly, a predetermined device needs to include an input unit corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. In addition, since the number of ball slots provided in the gaming machine differs for each type of gaming machine (for each model), it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type of gaming machine (for each model). Occurs.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is a means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball input units included in the gaming machine. , The configuration of a predetermined device can be simplified. Further, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball entry units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units by a serial transmission method. Can be done. That is, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball entry portions. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Characteristic αB2]
Features The gaming machine described in αB1.
The connecting means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a bonus ratio) which is information related to the game history based on the determination information. A game machine.

According to the feature αB2, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information that is not affected by the control means by the predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Characteristic αB3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αB1 or the feature αB2.
The gaming machine characterized in that the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αB3, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the predetermined device is affected by the control means. It is possible to receive the judgment information that has not been received.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this feature, a configuration is adopted in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to the connecting means via the control means, a problem occurs in the control means. If the information is modified or improperly modified, the judgment information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the improper modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the control means has a problem. Even if it has occurred or has been tampered with, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or tampering. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can execute the process based on the determination information that is not affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αC1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
Signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) that outputs a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Judgment information output means (for ball entry detection) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry portion based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) that is information based on the determination. IC62c) and
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination information, and
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The determination information output means is determined only when the relationship with the predetermined device connected to the connection means satisfies a predetermined condition (when a Hi level signal is input from the inspection machine 320). A gaming machine provided with an output control means for outputting the determination information to the device of the above.

According to the feature αC1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device only when the relationship with the predetermined device connected to the connection means satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being output to the outside except when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by a malicious person.

[Characteristic αC2]
Features The gaming machine described in αC1.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined condition includes receiving a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to the feature αC2, the determination information of the gaming machine is output to the outside when a predetermined condition including receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connecting means is not satisfied. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by a malicious person.

[Characteristic αC3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αC1 or the feature αC2.
Each of the plurality of ball entry portions capable of entering the game ball and the signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion are provided.
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry portions based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, and determines whether or not the game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry portions. The determination information (ball entry information), which is information based on the determination and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry portions, is transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for outputting by.

According to the feature αC3, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, for example. As compared with the case where the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified, and the determination information is received. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units is output by the parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs the output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. It is necessary to have a part. Similarly, a predetermined device needs to include an input unit corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. Further, since the number of input units provided in the gaming machine differs for each type of gaming machine (for each model), a predetermined device having different numbers of input portions for each type of gaming machine (for each model) is prepared. Need arises.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is a means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball input units included in the gaming machine. , The configuration of a predetermined device can be simplified. Further, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball entry units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units by a serial transmission method. Can be done. That is, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball entry portions. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Characteristic αC4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αC1 to the feature αC3.
The connecting means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a bonus ratio) which is information related to the game history based on the determination information. A game machine.

According to the feature αC4, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information that is not affected by the control means by the predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Characteristic αC5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αC1 to the feature αC4.
The gaming machine characterized in that the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αC5, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the predetermined device is affected by the control means. It is possible to receive the judgment information that has not been received.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this feature, a configuration is adopted in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to the connecting means via the control means, a problem occurs in the control means. If the information is modified or improperly modified, the judgment information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the improper modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the control means has a problem. Even if it has occurred or has been tampered with, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or tampering. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can execute the process based on the determination information that is not affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αD group>
The feature αD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αD1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
Signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) that outputs a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Judgment information output means (for ball entry detection) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry portion based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) that is information based on the determination. IC62c) and
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination information, and
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.
The gaming machine further
The number of prize balls, which is information that can specify the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the ball entry portion with respect to the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a prize ball number information output means for outputting information.

Feature According to αD1, since the prize ball number information output means for outputting the prize ball number information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means is provided, it is troublesome to manually input the prize ball number information to the predetermined device. It is possible to suppress the input of incorrect prize ball number information to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute the process based on the determination information and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Characteristic αD2]
Features The gaming machine described in αD1.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a type information output means for outputting type information, which is information that can specify the type of the ball entry portion, to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

Feature According to αD2, since the type information output means for outputting the type information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means is provided, it is possible to save the trouble of manually inputting the type information to the predetermined device. , It is possible to prevent incorrect type information from being input to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute the process based on the determination information output from the determination information output means and the accurate type information output from the type information output means. The type of the ball entry section is, for example, a ball entry section provided with signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) such as a first start port, a second start port, a large winning opening, and a discharge passage. It is a type.

[Characteristic αD3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αD1 or the feature αD2.
Each of the plurality of ball entry portions capable of entering the game ball and the signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion are provided.
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry portions based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, and determines whether or not the game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry portions. The determination information (ball entry information), which is information based on the determination and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry portions, is transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for outputting by.

According to the feature αD3, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, for example. As compared with the case where the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified, and the determination information is received. The configuration of the device can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units is output by the parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs the output corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. It is necessary to have a part. Similarly, a predetermined device needs to include an input unit corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entry units. In addition, since the number of ball slots provided in the gaming machine differs for each type of gaming machine (for each model), it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type of gaming machine (for each model). Occurs.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means is a means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of ball entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit capable of outputting determination information by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit capable of inputting the determination information output by the serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball input units included in the gaming machine. , The configuration of a predetermined device can be simplified. Further, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of ball entry units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry units by a serial transmission method. Can be done. That is, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of ball entry portions. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Characteristic αD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αD1 to the feature αD3.
The prize ball number information output means is a means for outputting the prize ball number information based on the reception of a predetermined signal (ball entry port information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A game machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature αD4, the prize ball number information output means includes a means for outputting the prize ball number information based on the reception of a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connecting means, which is an inappropriate situation. It is possible to prevent the prize ball number information from being output to the outside at the timing.

[Feature αD5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αD1 to the feature αD4.
The prize ball number information output means is provided with a means for outputting the prize ball number information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

According to the feature αD5, the prize ball number information output means includes a means for outputting the prize ball number information when a predetermined device is connected to the connection means, so that the predetermined device is connected to the connection means. After that, the prize ball number information can be obtained promptly. Therefore, for example, a predetermined device can promptly execute a process that requires the prize ball number information after being connected to the connecting means.

[Feature αD6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αD1 to the feature αD5.
The connecting means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a bonus ratio) which is information related to the game history based on the determination information. A game machine.

According to the feature αD6, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information that is not affected by the control means by the predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Characteristic αD7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αD1 to the feature αD6.
The gaming machine characterized in that the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αD7, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the predetermined device is affected by the control means. It is possible to receive the judgment information that has not been received.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this feature, a configuration is adopted in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to the connecting means via the control means, a problem occurs in the control means. If the information is modified or improperly modified, the judgment information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the improper modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the control means has a problem. Even if it has occurred or has been tampered with, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or tampering. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can execute the process based on the determination information that is not affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification.

[Characteristic αD8]
Features The gaming machine described in αD2.
The type information output means is characterized by comprising means for outputting the type information based on receiving a predetermined signal (ball entry port information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A game machine.

According to the feature αD8, the type information output means includes means for outputting the type information based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means, and therefore the type is in an inappropriate situation or timing. It is possible to prevent the information from being output to the outside.

[Characteristic αD9]
The gaming machine according to the feature αD2 or the feature D8.
The type information output means is a gaming machine including a means for outputting the type information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

According to the feature αD9, the type information output means includes a means for outputting the type information when a predetermined device is connected to the connection means, so that the predetermined device is promptly connected to the connection means. Type information can be acquired. Therefore, for example, a predetermined device can promptly execute a process that requires the type information after being connected to the connection means.

<Characteristic αE group>
The feature αE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αE1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
Signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) that outputs a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, and
Judgment information output means (for ball entry detection) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry portion based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) that is information based on the determination. IC62c) and
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination information, and
A calculation means (main side CPU 62x, game history management chip 300) for calculating game history information (game history information such as a bonus ratio), which is information related to the game history based on the determination information, and
A storage means (flash memory 64x, game history management chip 300) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.
The gaming machine further
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game history information output means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

Feature According to αE1, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means is provided with a means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means and a means for outputting the determination information, so that the device is connected to the connecting means. The predetermined device can receive the game history information stored in the storage means, and can execute the process based on the determination information.

Specifically, for example, the predetermined device can display the game history information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game history information) stored in the storage means of the game machine. Further, the predetermined device calculates the game history information based on the determination information received in the predetermined inspection period connected to the connection means of the game machine, and the game history information (hereinafter, also referred to as the second game history information). Call) can be displayed. Therefore, for example, an inspector who inspects a gaming machine may use the first gaming history information stored in the storage means provided in the gaming machine and the second gaming based on the determination information received by the predetermined device during the predetermined inspection period. It becomes possible to compare with the history information.

Here, if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine or an illegal modification (for example, modification of a nail) is performed to change the characteristics of the gaming machine, the gaming machine is changed. Based on the first game history information (game history information calculated by the calculation means based on the determination information in the past predetermined period) and the determination information in the predetermined inspection period by the predetermined device. There may be a difference from the second game history information calculated in the above. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the gaming machine should pay attention to the difference between the two gaming history information to inspect whether the gaming machine has a defect or an unauthorized modification (for example, a modification of a nail). Can be done.

[Characteristic αE2]
Features The gaming machine described in αE1.
The number of prize balls, which is information that can specify the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the ball entry portion with respect to the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a prize ball number information output means for outputting information.

Feature According to αE2, since the prize ball number information output means for outputting the prize ball number information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means is provided, it is troublesome to manually input the prize ball number information to the predetermined device. It is possible to suppress the input of incorrect prize ball number information to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute the process based on the determination information output from the determination information output means and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Characteristic αE3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αE1 or the feature αE2.
The connecting means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as a bonus ratio) which is information related to the game history based on the determination information. A game machine.

According to the feature αE3, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can calculate the game history information based on the determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information that is not affected by the control means by the predetermined device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Characteristic αE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αE1 to the feature αE3.
The gaming machine characterized in that the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to the feature αE4, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the predetermined device is affected by the control means. It is possible to receive the judgment information that has not been received.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this feature, a configuration is adopted in which determination information is output to a predetermined device connected to the connecting means via the control means, a problem occurs in the control means. If the information is modified or improperly modified, the judgment information output to the predetermined device may be affected by the defect or the improper modification.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to a predetermined device connected to the connection means without using the control means, so that the control means has a problem. Even if it has occurred or has been tampered with, the determination information output to the predetermined device is not affected by the defect or tampering. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connecting means can execute the process based on the determination information that is not affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αF group>
The feature αF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αF1]
The first processing group execution means for repeatedly executing the first processing group (residual processing of the main processing), and
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous execution of the second processing group), the second processing group (game progress processing including the game round control processing) is described above. A second processing group execution means that interrupts and executes the first processing group,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first processing group execution means sets the first processing group in a period (remaining time) from the end of the execution of the second processing group to the start of the execution of the next second processing group. Equipped with means to execute repeatedly
The first processing group includes game history information-related processing (game history processing), which is processing related to calculation of game history information (character ratio, continuous character ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature αF1, the first processing group including the game history information-related processing is repeatedly executed during the period from the end of the execution of the first second processing group to the start of the execution of the next second processing group. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the first processing group including the game history information-related processing from being started even though the execution of the first second processing group has not been completed. That is, while giving priority to the execution of the second processing group, the game history information is promptly executed by repeatedly executing the first processing group including the game history information-related processing during the period when the second processing group is not executed. It becomes possible to calculate.

Further, if a configuration is adopted in which the game history information-related processing is included in the second processing group and executed without adopting the configuration of this feature, the execution of the second processing group once is performed. The time required from the start to the end becomes long, and for example, the execution of the second processing group is still completed at the timing when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of the execution of the next second processing group is satisfied. Therefore, it may not be possible to start the execution of the next second processing group until the execution of the first second processing group is completed. In this case, a problem may occur because the start of execution of the next second processing group is delayed.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the game history information-related processing is included in the first processing group and executed, it is compared with the configuration in which the game history information-related processing is included in the second processing group and executed. , The time required from the start to the end of one execution of the second processing group can be shortened. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the first second processing group has not been completed at the timing when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of the execution of the next second processing group is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the next second processing group cannot be started until the execution of the first second processing group is completed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a delay in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

Based on the above, according to this feature, while suppressing the occurrence of problems due to the delay in the start of execution of the next second processing group, the game history information is related during the period when the second processing group is not executed. By repeatedly executing the first processing group including the processing, it becomes possible to efficiently and promptly calculate the game history information.

[Characteristic αF2]
Features The gaming machine described in αF1.
The second processing group is a gaming machine including a game progress processing which is a processing related to the progress of a game.

According to the feature αF2, it is possible to prevent the start of the execution of the second processing group including the game progress processing, which is the processing related to the progress of the game, from being delayed, so that a problem occurs in the progress of the game. While suppressing this, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group including the game history information-related processing during the period when the second processing group is not executed.

[Characteristic αF3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αF1 or the feature αF2.
The game history information-related processing includes a plurality of processing stages (a plurality of types of tasks) in which the calculation of the game history information is completed by sequentially executing the processing.
The first processing group execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in one execution of the game history information-related processing, a part of the processing stages among the plurality of processing stages is executed.

According to the feature αF3, the first processing group execution means executes a part of the processing stages among the plurality of processing stages in one execution of the game history information-related processing. Therefore, for example, the game history information-related processing. It is possible to shorten the time required from the start to the end of one execution of the game history information-related processing as compared with the configuration in which all of the plurality of processing stages are executed in one execution of. Specifically, for example, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the game history information-related process, the executed game history information-related process is completed in a short time. It is possible to shorten the time until the execution of the processing group of 2 is started. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group while suppressing the occurrence of problems due to the delay in the start of execution of the second processing group. ..

[Characteristic αF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αF1 to the feature αF3.
The predetermined condition is a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous execution of the second processing group.

According to the feature αF4, since the predetermined condition includes the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the previous execution of the second processing group, the second processing group can be executed periodically. Then, in the period after the execution of the second processing group is completed and the predetermined time elapses from the start of the execution of the second processing group, the first processing group including the game history information-related processing is performed. By repeatedly executing the game history information, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information.

The inventions of the feature αA group to the feature αF group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical aspects such as structure, control, and production are technically aimed at improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of the technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, providing a sounder game, and the like.

<Characteristic αG group>
The feature αG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αG1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history based on the detection information, and
A display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and a display means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability as a boundary.
The calculation means includes means for calculating game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods.
The display means is a gaming machine including means for displaying based on the game history information in each of the plurality of periods.

According to the feature αG1, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability in the gaming machine as the boundary. For example, when the display based on the game history information is a numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector finds that the game history information falls within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the past in the game machine. It is possible to confirm whether or not there was a situation that did not occur.

<Characteristic αH group>
Features The αH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αH1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history based on the detection information, and
A display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and a display means.
When the winning probability is changed again after the winning probability is changed and before the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated up to a predetermined amount, the predetermined information (short-term change information) is displayed. Prescribed information display means and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αH1, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information is accumulated up to the predetermined amount by confirming the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the winning probability based on an illegal intention by the manager of the gaming machine.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information stored before the change in the winning probability is deleted based on the change in the winning probability, the gaming machine is not inspected by the inspector. In addition, the administrator of the gaming machine changes the winning probability again even though the game is not executed so much in the gaming machine after the winning probability is changed, and is stored in the gaming machine. There is a possibility that the detected information will be erased. However, according to this aspect, when the winning probability is changed again in a short period of time even though the game is not so much executed in the gaming machine after the winning probability is changed, the above-mentioned description is made. Short-term change information will be recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the winning probability may have been changed in a short period of time due to an illegal intention such as erasing the detection information. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the winning probability based on an illegal intention by the manager of the gaming machine.

[Characteristic αH2]
Features The gaming machine described in αH1.
An erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means is provided.
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability as a boundary.
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information in each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information in each of the plurality of periods.
The display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information in each of the plurality of periods.
The erasing means is a gaming machine including means for erasing the detection information in the oldest period among the plurality of periods when the winning probability is changed.

According to the feature αH2, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability in the gaming machine as the boundary. For example, when the display based on the game history information is a numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector finds that the game history information falls within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the past in the game machine. It is possible to confirm whether or not there was a situation that did not occur.

Further, according to this feature, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information is accumulated up to the predetermined amount by confirming the predetermined information. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the winning probability based on an illegal intention by the manager of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, before the gaming machine is inspected by the inspector, the manager of the gaming machine repeatedly changes the winning probability in a short period of time, and the change in the winning probability of the gaming machine is the boundary. There is a possibility that the detection information in multiple periods will be deleted. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability is changed repeatedly in a short period of time, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by confirming the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the winning probability may have been changed in a short period of time due to an improper intention. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change of the winning probability based on an illegal intention by the manager of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αI group>
The feature αI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αI1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history based on the detection information, and
A display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and a display means.
An erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the winning probability is changed, the erasing means changes the winning probability after the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated up to a predetermined amount after the winning probability is changed. A gaming machine comprising a means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means before the operation.

According to the feature αI1, the detection information stored in the storage means before the winning probability is changed until the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated up to a predetermined amount after the winning probability is changed. Since it is not erased, it is possible to prevent the detection information stored before the change of the winning probability from being intentionally erased by changing the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information acquired and stored before the change in the winning probability is deleted immediately after the change in the winning probability of the gaming machine is adopted, the gaming machine is inspected by the inspector. There is a possibility that the administrator of the gaming machine may change the winning probability and erase the detection information stored before the change of the winning probability. On the other hand, according to this feature, the detection information stored before the change of the winning probability is until the detection information acquired and stored after the change of the winning probability is accumulated up to a predetermined amount. Is not erased, so that it is possible to suppress a change in the winning probability due to an improper intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

[Characteristic αI2]
Features The gaming machine described in αI1.
An erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means is provided.
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability as a boundary.
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information in each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information in each of the plurality of periods.
The display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information in each of the plurality of periods.
When the winning probability is changed, the erasing means has, after the detection information stored in the storage means has been accumulated up to a predetermined amount after the winning probability has been changed, out of the plurality of periods. A gaming machine comprising means for erasing the detection information in the oldest period of the game.

According to the feature αI2, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability in the gaming machine as the boundary. For example, when the display based on the game history information is a numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector finds that the game history information falls within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the past in the game machine. It is possible to confirm whether or not there was a situation that did not occur.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the detection information in a plurality of periods bordered by the change of the winning probability from being intentionally deleted by repeatedly changing the winning probability of the gaming machine. can. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information in the oldest period among a plurality of periods with a change in the winning probability as a boundary is deleted immediately after the change in the winning probability of the gaming machine is adopted, the gaming machine can be used. Before being inspected by the inspector, the manager of the gaming machine may repeatedly change the winning probability to erase the detection information of the gaming machine in a plurality of periods. On the other hand, according to this feature, the detection information in the oldest period among the plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability as the boundary is predetermined as the detection information acquired and stored after the winning probability is changed. Since it is not erased until it is accumulated up to the amount of, it is possible to suppress the change of the winning probability due to an improper intention by the manager of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αJ group>
The feature αJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αJ1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history based on the detection information, and
A display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and a display means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information separately for each winning probability at the time when the detection means detects a game ball.
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each winning probability.
The display means is a gaming machine including means for displaying based on the game history information for each winning probability.

According to the feature αJ1, for example, when the display based on the game history information is the numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector of the game machine is appropriate for each game history information calculated and displayed for each winning probability. It is possible to confirm whether or not it is within the above range. That is, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a winning probability setting in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range in the game machine.

The inventions of the feature αG group to the feature αJ group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical aspects such as structure, control, and production are technically aimed at improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of the technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, providing a sounder game, and the like.

<Characteristic αK group>
The feature αK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αK1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
It has a first display area and a second display area composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting unit, CP light emitting unit), and predetermined information is transmitted to the first display area and the second display area. Displayable display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means is
When displaying the game history information, information regarding the type of the game history information is displayed in the first display area using the display element, and the game history information is displayed in the second display area. A means for displaying numerical information using the display element, and
When the winning probability is changed, the display mode is not displayed when the information regarding the type of the game history information is displayed in the first display area, and the information regarding the type of the game history information is displayed. A means for displaying a display mode using only the display element used at the time, and displaying numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability in the second display area using the display element.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αK1, there are cases where the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means and the case where the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed, and the first display area. The display mode of is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine clearly indicates whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the gaming machine from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

Further, according to this feature, display elements of the first display area that are not used when displaying game history information (for example, segment light emitting units A, B, DP light emitting units A, B, DP light emitting unit of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1, middle left 7). Since the segment light emitting unit B) of the segment display 45z2 is not used even when the winning probability is changed, an unused display element (hereinafter referred to as an unused display element) exists in the first display area. .. Therefore, for example, even if a defect occurs in the unused display element in the first display area, the display mode in the first display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected when a defect occurs in the display element of the first display area.

Further, for example, when a light emitting element such as an LED is adopted as the display element, the light emitting element which is an unused display element does not need to emit light, so that the parts necessary for causing the light emitting element to emit light are omitted. Can be done. Therefore, the cost of the display means can be reduced.

<Characteristic αL group>
The feature αL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αL1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means is
When displaying the game history information, a means for displaying information regarding the type of the game history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the game history information in the second display area. ,
When the winning probability is changed, nothing is displayed in the first display area, and numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed in the second display area.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αL1, there are cases where the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means and the case where the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed, and the first display area. The display mode of is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine clearly indicates whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the gaming machine from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

Further, according to this feature, for example, a first display area is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs), and when a predetermined light emitting element emits light, predetermined information is displayed and all the light emitting elements are turned off. Therefore, in the case of a configuration in which nothing is displayed, even if there is a problem that some of the light emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, a serious problem that all the light emitting elements do not emit light. Unless the above occurs, the display mode of the first display area is different between the case where the game history information is displayed and the case where the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. Therefore, according to this feature, even if there is a problem that some of the light emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light to the administrator, it is serious that all the light emitting elements do not emit light. As long as no problem has occurred, it is possible to distinguish whether the numerical information displayed in the second display area is the game history information or the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability. That is, the administrator determines that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is the game history information when at least a part of the light emitting elements are emitting light in the first display area, and the first Only when all the light emitting elements constituting the display area are turned off, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability.

<Characteristic αM group>
The feature αM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αM1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means having a predetermined display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the predetermined display area,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means is
When displaying the game history information, a means for displaying the numerical information of the game history information in a predetermined number of digits (two digits) in the predetermined display area.
A means for displaying numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined display area with a number of digits (1 digit) different from the predetermined number of digits when the winning probability is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αM1, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value is different depending on whether the numerical information related to the game history information is displayed in the predetermined display area or the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed. It will be different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine clearly distinguishes whether the numerical information regarding the game history information is displayed in the predetermined display area of the display means or the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. Can be recognized. As a result, the administrator of the gaming machine misunderstands the numerical information displayed in the predetermined display area of the display means between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability. It can be suppressed.

<Characteristic αN group>
The feature αN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αN1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A changing means capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means is
When displaying the game history information, a means for displaying information regarding the type of the game history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the game history information in the second display area. ,
When the winning probability is changed, a plurality of types of display modes (display pattern A and display pattern B) that are not displayed when displaying information regarding the type of game history information is switched in the first display area. A means for repeatedly displaying and displaying numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability in the second display area,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αN1, there are cases where the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means and the case where the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed, and the first display area. The display mode of is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine clearly indicates whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the gaming machine from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

Further, according to this feature, the display mode in the first display area dynamically changes during the period in which the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed in the second display area. It is possible to alert the manager of the game that it is an important condition to carefully change the winning probability.

<Characteristic αO group>
The feature αO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αO1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.), which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means.
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and a display means.
The game history in the display means based on the amount of information of the detection information (the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs in the normal mode)), which is the basis for calculating the game history information. Determining means for determining the display mode (lighting display or blinking display) of the display based on information, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αO1, the manager of the gaming machine can grasp how much the detection information which is the basis of the calculation of the gaming history information is accumulated by confirming the display mode in the display means. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the numerical value of the displayed game history information is calculated in a state where a sufficient amount of statistical data is accumulated.

The inventions of the feature αK group to the feature αO group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical aspects such as structure, control, and production are technically aimed at improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of the technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, providing a sounder game, and the like.

<Characteristic αP group>
The feature αP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αP1]
A gaming machine equipped with a control means for controlling a gaming machine.
The control means is
A CPU (main CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer and executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program.
A program storage means (main side ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is an area different from the first program storage area. Program storage means 63a) and
The first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer and the area different from the first stack area are stored in the stack pointer. A stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by the second stack area reference address, and
A first data storage area corresponding to the first program in which data can be updated, and a second data storage area corresponding to the second program in which data can be updated, which is an area different from the first data storage area. The data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) is provided.
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case.
In the process by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referred to, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referred to. It has become
In the process by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referred to, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referred to. It has become
The CPU
By executing the program included in the first program, the first process (game progress process) is executed.
After performing the first process, by executing the program included in the first program, a storage process for storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area is performed.
By executing the program included in the second program after performing the storage process, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer is stored in the second data storage area, and the above is described. A save process is performed in which the second stack area reference address is stored in the stack pointer and the values of each of the plurality of registers are stored in the second data storage area.
After executing the evacuation process, the second process (game history information calculation display process) is executed by executing the program included in the second program.
After performing the second process, by executing the program included in the second program, the value of each of the plurality of registers is set to the value stored in the second data storage area by the save process, and the said. A return process is performed to store the first stack area reference address stored in the second data storage area in the stack pointer by the save process.
By executing the program included in the first program after performing the return processing, the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers whose values are set by the return processing is stored in the storage process. A gaming machine characterized in that a change process for changing to a value stored in one stack area or the first data storage area is performed.

Feature According to αP1, save processing and return processing are performed, so when returning from the second program to the first program, the value of the register used in the first program has changed. Can be avoided.

Further, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes at the timing after the storage process is performed and before the save process is performed, the change process is performed to obtain the flag register. Since the value returns to the same value as immediately after the end of the first process by the first program, there is no possibility of affecting the process by the first program executed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it becomes possible to independently configure a plurality of programs.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to add the second process without affecting the process by the first program only by adding the program for carrying out the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for carrying out the second process independently of the first program.

Further, for example, when the capacity of the data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area, a reset process for erasing all the data stored in the stack area is executed. In the case of the configuration, if the value of each of the plurality of registers is stored in the second stack area in the save process, the reset process may be executed. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the values of each of the plurality of registers are stored in the second data storage area in the save process, it is possible to avoid the risk that the stack area reset process is executed.

<Characteristic αQ group>
The feature αQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αQ1]
A gaming machine equipped with a control means for controlling a gaming machine.
The control means is
A CPU (main CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer and executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program.
A program storage means (main side ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is an area different from the first program storage area. Program storage means 63a) and
The first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer and the area different from the first stack area are stored in the stack pointer. A stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by the second stack area reference address, and
A first data storage area corresponding to the first program in which data can be updated, and a second data storage area corresponding to the second program in which data can be updated, which is an area different from the first data storage area. The data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) is provided.
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case.
In the process by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referred to, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referred to. It has become
In the process by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referred to, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referred to. It has become
The CPU
By executing the program included in the first program, the first process (game progress process) is executed.
After performing the first process, by executing the program included in the first program, a storage process for storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area is performed.
By executing the program included in the second program after performing the storage process, the second stack area reference address is stored in the stack pointer, and the values of the plurality of registers are set to the second data. Performs a save process to store in the storage area,
After executing the evacuation process, the second process (game history information calculation display process) is executed by executing the program included in the second program.
By executing the program included in the second program after performing the second process, the value of each of the plurality of registers is set to the value stored in the second data storage area by the save process and fixed. A return process for storing the first stack area reference address, which is a value, in the stack pointer is performed.
By executing the program included in the first program after performing the return processing, the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers whose values are set by the return processing is stored in the storage process. A gaming machine characterized in that a change process for changing to a value stored in one stack area or the first data storage area is performed.

Feature According to αQ1, save processing and return processing are performed, so when returning from the second program to the first program, the value of the register used in the first program has changed. Can be avoided.

Further, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes at the timing after the storage process is performed and before the save process is performed, the change process is performed to obtain the flag register. Since the value returns to the same value as immediately after the end of the first process by the first program, there is no possibility of affecting the process by the first program executed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it becomes possible to independently configure a plurality of programs.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to add the second process without affecting the process by the first program only by adding the program for carrying out the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for carrying out the second process independently of the first program.

Further, for example, when the capacity of the data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area, a reset process for erasing all the data stored in the stack area is executed. In the case of the configuration, if the value of each of the plurality of registers is stored in the second stack area in the save process, the reset process may be executed. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the values of each of the plurality of registers are stored in the second data storage area in the save process, it is possible to avoid the risk that the stack area reset process is executed.

Further, according to this feature, since the first stack area reference address, which is a fixed value in the return process, is stored in the stack pointer, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer in the save process is stored in the second stack pointer. There is no need to save it in the data storage area. Therefore, the processing of the CPU can be simplified, and the storage capacity of the second data storage area required for saving the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer can be reduced. ..

<Characteristic αR group>
The feature αR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αR1]
A gaming machine equipped with a control means for controlling a gaming machine.
The control means is
A CPU (main CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer and executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program.
A program storage means (main side ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is an area different from the first program storage area. Program storage means 63a) and
The first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer and the area different from the first stack area are stored in the stack pointer. A stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by the second stack area reference address, and
A first data storage area corresponding to the first program in which data can be updated, and a second data storage area corresponding to the second program in which data can be updated, which is an area different from the first data storage area. The data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) is provided.
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case.
In the process by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referred to, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referred to. It has become
In the process by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referred to, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referred to. It has become
The CPU
By executing the program included in the first program, the first process (game progress process) is executed.
After performing the first process, by executing the program included in the first program, a storage process for storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area is performed.
After executing the storage process, the program included in the first program is executed to perform the first clear process of setting the value of each of the plurality of registers to 0.
After executing the first clear processing, by executing the program included in the second program, the first storage processing for storing the second stack area reference address in the stack pointer is executed.
After executing the first storage process, the second process (game history information calculation display process) is executed by executing the program included in the second program.
After executing the second process, by executing the program included in the second program, the second storage process of storing the first stack area reference address, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer is executed.
After executing the second storage process, the program included in the second program is executed to execute the second clear process of setting the value of each of the plurality of registers to 0.
By executing the program included in the first program after performing the second clear process, the value of the flag register is stored in the first stack area or the first data storage area by the storage process. A gaming machine characterized by performing a change process to change to a value.

Feature According to αR1, the first clear process is executed by the program included in the first program, and the second clear process is executed by the program included in the second program. Therefore, at the time immediately before the start of execution of the second program. The value of each of the plurality of registers can be matched with the value of each of the plurality of registers at the time immediately after the end of the execution of the second program. Therefore, when returning from the second program to the first program, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem due to the change in the value of each of the plurality of registers used in the first program.

Further, according to this feature, since the storage process and the change process are performed, the value of the flag register returns to the same value as immediately after the end of the first process by the first program. Therefore, there is no possibility of affecting the processing by the first program to be executed after returning from the processing by the second program. As a result, it becomes possible to independently configure a plurality of programs.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to add the second process without affecting the process by the first program only by adding the program for carrying out the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for carrying out the second process independently of the first program.

Further, according to this feature, in the return process, the first stack area reference address, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer. Therefore, in the save process, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer is stored. It is not necessary to save it in the second data storage area. Therefore, the processing of the CPU can be simplified, and the storage capacity of the second data storage area required for saving the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer can be reduced. ..

<Characteristic αS group>
The feature αS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αS1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode in which a winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process can be changed to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information regarding the progress of the game, and
A detection means for detecting an abnormality in the storage means and
An initialization means that initializes the storage means when the detection means detects the abnormality, and an initialization means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The gaming machine comprising the means for executing the change mode even when the predetermined operation is not accepted when the initialization is executed.

If the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means, the setting information of the winning probability may have been rewritten to the setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. .. If the setting information of the winning probability is not initialized (changed) even if the storage means is initialized, the setting information may still be different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. ..

According to the feature αS1, when the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means, the change mode is executed. Therefore, the manager of the gaming machine can perform the change mode before the game is restarted in the gaming machine. In, it is possible to change the setting information of the winning probability to the originally intended setting information.

[Characteristic αS2]
Features The gaming machine described in αS1.
The initialization means is characterized in that, when the storage means is initialized, among the information stored in the storage means, the information regarding the gaming state is not initialized.

According to the feature αS2, even when the storage means is initialized, the information regarding the gaming state is not initialized, so that the player can restart the game while maintaining the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the initialization of the storage means.

[Characteristic αS3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αS1 or the feature αS2.
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying that the winning probability has been changed when the winning probability is changed in the change mode.

When the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means and the change mode is executed, the player who is playing the game in the game machine is the administrator in the change mode after the initialization of the storage means. It is assumed that you will be skeptical about whether or not the winning probability has been changed. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability is changed, the player is notified that the winning probability has been changed, so that the player can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed. More specifically, let the player not know what kind of setting information the current winning probability setting information is, but only grasp whether or not the winning probability has been changed in the change mode. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player has to restart the game with anxiety without knowing whether or not the winning probability has been changed by the administrator.

<Characteristic αT group>
The feature αT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αT1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode in which a winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process can be changed to a different winning probability by accepting a predetermined operation from the outside.
When the winning probability is changed in the change mode, the notification means for notifying that the winning probability has been changed and the notification means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αT1, the player can recognize that the winning probability has been changed in the change mode. Specifically, for example, it is possible to make the player grasp only whether or not the winning probability has been changed in the change mode without letting the player know what the current winning probability setting is. can.

[Characteristic αT2]
Features The gaming machine described in αT1.
A gaming machine comprising a second notifying means for notifying in a mode different from the notifying by the notifying means when the winning probability is not changed in the changed mote.

According to the feature αT2, the player can recognize that the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

[Characteristic αT3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αT1 or the feature αT2.
The second notification means is a gaming machine including means for notifying that the winning probability has not been changed when the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

According to the feature αT3, the player can clearly recognize that the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

<Characteristic αU group>
The feature αU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αU1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode in which the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process can be changed to a different winning probability by accepting the first operation from the outside.
An information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode for displaying information on the winning probability in a mode in which the progress of the game is stopped by accepting a second operation different from the first operation from the outside.
An accessory that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The accessory is a gaming machine characterized in that the constant operation is continued even during the information display mode.

According to the feature αU1, even at the start and end timings of the information display mode in which the progress of the game is stopped, the operation of the accessory is not stopped or changed, and the constant operation is continued. Therefore, for example, the accessory It is possible to prevent the player from firing a game ball at the timing when the operation is stopped or changed to obtain an unfairly advantageous result.

<Characteristic αV group>
The feature αV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αV1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode in which the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process can be changed to a different winning probability by accepting the first operation from the outside.
An information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode for displaying information on the winning probability in a mode in which the progress of the game is stopped by accepting a second operation different from the first operation from the outside.
An accessory that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The accessory is a gaming machine characterized in that, during the information display mode, the player is in a predetermined state and stops the constant operation.

According to the feature αV1, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect in an accessory that may cause a defect if the operation is stopped in a state other than a predetermined state.

The inventions of the feature αP group to the feature αV group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the efficiency of game machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that takes the player into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the interest of the game is improved, the processing load of the gaming machine is reduced, the processing is optimized, the control is simplified, the structure is simplified, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and problems occur. Further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines that are friendly to players, and providing sounder games.

<Characteristic αW group>
The feature αW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αW1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting change mode executing means has the first condition (all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON, and the RAM clear button is ON) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The setting change mode is executed when the above-mentioned setting change mode is satisfied, but the setting change mode is not executed even when the first condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. A gaming machine featuring.

Feature According to αW1, in order for a gaming machine that has already been turned on to execute the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn off the power of the gaming machine and then turn it on again. Generally, in a gaming hall, it is difficult for a person other than the administrator of the gaming machine to operate the power switch provided on the back of the gaming machine to temporarily turn off the power and then turn on the power again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine from being illegally changed by a person who is not the administrator of the gaming machine and has an illegal intention.

[Characteristic αW2]
Features The gaming machine described in αW1.
The setting information display mode execution means for executing the setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting information which is the information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed is provided.
The setting information display mode executing means has a second condition (all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON, and the RAM clear button is pressed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The setting information display mode is executed when (OFF) is satisfied, but the setting information display mode is not executed even when the second condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature αW2, in order for a gaming machine that has already been turned on to execute the setting information display mode, it is necessary to turn off the power of the gaming machine and then turn it on again. Generally, in a gaming hall, it is difficult for a person other than the administrator of the gaming machine to operate the power switch provided on the back of the gaming machine to temporarily turn off the power and then turn on the power again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine from being illegally known by a person who is not the administrator of the gaming machine and has an illegal intention.

[Characteristic αW3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αW1 or the feature αW2.
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a notification means for notifying the gaming machine when the power is turned on.

According to the feature αW3, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who is not the administrator of the gaming machine and has an unjust intention to turn off the power of the gaming machine and then turn it on again without being noticed by the surroundings. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent a person who is not the administrator of the gaming machine and has an unjust intention from changing or confirming the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αX group>
The feature αX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside, and
The setting information display mode execution means for executing the setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting information which is the information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed.
A storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information including the setting information, and
A determination process executing means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process of calculating a RAM determination value to determine whether or not it is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the setting information display mode executing means, even when the condition for executing the setting information display mode is satisfied, the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (result that the RAM determination value is not normal). ), The gaming machine is provided with means for not executing the setting information display mode.

When the result of a predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. It may be. According to the feature αX1, the setting information display mode is executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. It can be suppressed.

<Characteristic αY group>
The feature αY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αY1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside, and
An operating means (RAM clear button) that accepts a predetermined operation (pressing operation), and
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information regarding the progress of the game, and
An erasing process (RAM clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on while the operating means has received the predetermined operation (a state in which the RAM clear button is pressed). Erasing process execution means to execute
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the setting change mode executing means, all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are turned on by a predetermined condition including that the operating means has accepted the predetermined operation (when the power is turned on, the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all turned on. And when the RAM clear button is pressed) is satisfied, the setting change mode is provided.
The gaming machine comprising the means for executing the erasing process before or after the execution of the setting change mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Generally, when the administrator who manages the gaming machine turns on the power of the gaming machine while the operating means has received a predetermined operation, an erasing process for erasing the information stored in the storage means is executed. I am aware of that. Therefore, according to the feature αY1, when the administrator executes the setting change mode by satisfying a predetermined condition including the state that the operation means has accepted the predetermined operation, the setting change mode is executed. It becomes possible to strongly recognize that not only the erasing process is executed but also the erasing process is executed. As a result, for example, when the administrator wants to start the gaming machine while maintaining the gaming state such as the high probability mode and restart the game from the state when the power was turned off last time, that is, the erasing process is performed when the gaming machine is started. If you do not want to execute, you can make sure that you should not execute the setting change mode. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose operation is easy for the administrator to understand.

<Characteristic αZ group>
The feature αZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic αZ1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside, and
A storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information including setting information which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and
An erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The erasing means
Among the information stored in the storage means, the first erasing process (first RAM clearing process) for erasing information other than the setting information without erasing the setting information,
A second erasing process (second RAM clearing process) for erasing information including the setting information among the information stored in the storage means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the feature αZ1, among the information stored in the storage means, in any of the processing steps in which the setting information is left and the other information should be erased, and the processing step in which the setting information is included and should be erased. The corresponding processing process can be realized. For example, if the setting information is normal and is maintained, but other information is a processing process that should be deleted, the setting information is not deleted and the setting information becomes an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. In the case of a processing process that may be performed, it is possible to realize a configuration in which information including setting information is deleted.

[Characteristic αZ2]
Features The gaming machine described in αZ1.
A determination processing execution means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process of calculating a RAM determination value to determine whether or not it is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means is provided.
The erasing means is characterized by comprising means for executing the second erasing process when the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (result that the RAM determination value is not normal). Machine.

When the result of a predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. It may be. According to the feature αZ2, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. Can be done.

<Characteristic βA group>
The feature βA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βA1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside, and
A storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information including setting information which is information related to the setting of the lottery probability, and
A determination process executing means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process of calculating a RAM determination value to determine whether or not it is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting change mode executing means is in a state where a predetermined operation for executing the setting change mode (all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON, and the RAM clear button is pressed). Even if the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10) is not accepted, if the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (result that the RAM determination value is not normal). , A gaming machine comprising means for executing the setting change mode.

When the result of a predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. It may be. According to the feature βA1, when the result of the predetermined determination process is the predetermined result, the setting change mode is executed, so that the administrator can change the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βB group>
The feature βB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βB1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside, and
A display means (main display unit 45) for displaying information related to the game including the result of the predetermined lottery process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying a first display mode (display pattern in which all LEDs are lit) that is not displayed when displaying information related to the game while the setting change mode is being executed.

According to the feature βB1, it is possible to notify the administrator and the player that the setting change mode is being executed by using the display means for displaying the information about the game. Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means for displaying information related to the game, the setting change mode can be changed only by changing the control program of the gaming machine without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. It is possible to change the configuration so that the manager or the player can be notified of what is being executed. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a dedicated display means for notifying that the setting change mode is being executed is additionally provided.

[Characteristic βB2]
Features The gaming machine described in βB1.
The setting information display mode execution means for executing the setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting information which is the information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed is provided.
The display means is
During the execution of the setting information display mode, a second display mode (display mode in which all LEDs blink at the same time), which is a display mode that is not displayed when displaying information related to the game and is different from the first display mode. ) Is provided as a means for displaying a gaming machine.

According to the feature βB2, it is possible to notify the administrator and the player that the setting information display mode is being executed instead of the setting change mode by using the display means for displaying the information about the game. Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means for displaying information related to the game, the setting information display mode can be obtained only by changing the control program of the gaming machine without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. Can be changed to a configuration that can notify the administrator and the player that is being executed. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a dedicated display means for notifying that the setting information display mode is being executed is additionally provided.

<Characteristic βC group>
The characteristic βC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βC1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
A control means for controlling the display means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units.
The control means includes means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means are turned on based on the power of the gaming machine being turned on. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βC1, the administrator of the gaming machine confirms whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection in the light emitting unit constituting the display means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. be able to.

[Characteristic βC2]
Features The gaming machine described in βC1.
The control means is characterized by comprising a means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means are in a blinking state based on the power of the gaming machine being turned on. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βC2, when the manager of the gaming machine turns on the power of the gaming machine, is there a light emitting unit that is always lit and does not turn off due to a defect in the light emitting unit constituting the display means? Can be confirmed.

<Characteristic βD group>
The feature βD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βD1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
A control means for controlling the display means and
An operation means (information display unit inspection button) that accepts a predetermined operation from the outside,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units.
The control means is characterized by comprising a means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means are turned on based on the reception of the predetermined operation by the operation means. A gaming machine.

According to the feature βD1, the administrator of the gaming machine always confirms by operating the operating means whether or not there is a light emitting part that does not light due to a defect such as disconnection in the light emitting part constituting the display means. Can be done.

[Characteristic βD2]
Features The gaming machine described in βD1.
The control means is characterized by comprising a means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means are in a blinking state based on the reception of the predetermined operation by the operation means. A gaming machine.

According to the feature βD2, the administrator of the gaming machine can always check whether or not there is a light emitting unit that is always lit due to a malfunction and does not turn off in the light emitting unit constituting the display means by operating the operating means. You can check.

<Characteristic βE group>
The feature βE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βE1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary.
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information in each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information in each of the plurality of periods.
The display means is a gaming machine including means for switching and displaying a plurality of the game history information in each of the plurality of periods.

According to the feature βE1, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm a plurality of gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary in the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range in a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary in the game machine.

[Characteristic βE2]
Features The gaming machine described in βE1.
The predetermined timing is a gaming machine characterized in that the date is changed.

According to the feature βE2, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm a plurality of gaming history information for each date on the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can confirm for each date whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range.

<Characteristic βF group>
The characteristic βF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βF1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
An erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means when a predetermined operation is received, and an erasing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The display means, after the detection means is erased by the erasing means, until a predetermined condition is satisfied (until the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches a predetermined number), the game history information. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for not displaying the numerical information of.

According to the feature βF1, when the inspector of the gaming machine does not display the numerical information of the game history information on the display means, the predetermined condition is not satisfied after the detection means is erased by the erasing means. Can be recognized.

The inventions of the feature αW group to the feature βF group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the efficiency of game machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that takes the player into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the interest of the game is improved, the processing load of the gaming machine is reduced, the processing is optimized, the control is simplified, the structure is simplified, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and problems occur. Further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines that are friendly to players, and providing sounder games.

<Characteristic βG group>
The feature βG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βG1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The calculation means is based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods with the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches a predetermined number) as a boundary. A means for calculating a plurality of the game history information corresponding to each of the periods of
The display means is
It is a means for switching and displaying the plurality of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods, and when switching the display of the game history information, the said one corresponding to one of the plurality of periods. After shifting from the display mode of displaying the game history information (display mode of displaying the base corresponding to the bL section) to the display mode of not displaying any of the plurality of game history information (all turned off), the plurality of periods A gaming machine comprising a means for shifting to a display mode (display mode for displaying a base corresponding to a section of b1) for displaying the game history information corresponding to another period of the above.

According to the feature βG1, when switching the display of the game history information, the display means displays the game history information corresponding to one of the plurality of periods, and the display means any of the plurality of game history information. After shifting to the display mode that does not display, the display mode shifts to the display mode that displays the game history information corresponding to other periods among the plurality of periods. It is possible to clearly recognize that the displayed game history information has been switched to the game history information corresponding to another period. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the administrator or the like from erroneously recognizing the period and checking the game history information without noticing that the displayed game history information period has been switched to another period. be able to.

<Characteristic βH group>
The characteristic βH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βH1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The calculation means is based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods with the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches a predetermined number) as a boundary. A means for calculating a plurality of the game history information corresponding to each of the periods of
The display means is
From the display mode (display mode for displaying bL) that displays the game history information corresponding to one of the plurality of periods, the game history information corresponding to the other period of the plurality of periods can be obtained. In the case of shifting to the display mode to be displayed (display mode for displaying b1), a means for shifting the display mode in the first transition mode (transition mode in which all lights are turned off for 300 ms) and
When the display mode is shifted based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second transition mode different from the first transition mode (transition mode in which the hyphen lighting display of 3000 ms is sandwiched and shifted) is used. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for shifting a display mode.

According to the feature βH1, the transition mode in which the display mode for displaying the game history information corresponding to one period is changed to the display mode for displaying the game history information corresponding to another period, and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Since the transition mode is different when the display mode is shifted based on the above, the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine recognizes the difference in the transition mode and obtains the game history information corresponding to other periods. It is possible to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the display mode shifts to the display mode or the display mode shifts based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the administrator or the like from continuing the confirmation work of the game history information without noticing that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic βI group>
The characteristic βI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βI1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The calculation means is based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods with the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches a predetermined number) as a boundary. A means for calculating a plurality of the game history information corresponding to each of the periods of
The display means is
It is a means for switching and displaying the plurality of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the elapse of a predetermined display duration (5000 ms), and the predetermined while displaying the game history information. When the condition of is satisfied, the display mode (hyphen lighting) corresponding to the condition of satisfying the predetermined condition even before the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed. , A gaming machine characterized by having a means to shift to (all lights off).

According to the feature βI1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while displaying the game history information, the predetermined condition is satisfied even before the predetermined display duration of the displayed game history information has elapsed. Since the display mode is changed to correspond to the satisfaction, the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine can be made to recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied at an early stage. Further, for example, it is possible to display the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition is satisfied at an early stage after shifting to the display mode corresponding to the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. .. As a result, the administrator or the like can confirm the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition is satisfied at an early stage, so that the inspection efficiency of the game machine can be improved.

<Characteristic βJ group>
The characteristic βJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βJ1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The calculation means is based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods with the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches a predetermined number) as a boundary. A means for calculating a plurality of the game history information corresponding to each of the periods of
The display means is
It is a means for switching and displaying the plurality of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the elapse of a predetermined display duration (5000 ms), and the predetermined while displaying the game history information. When the condition of is satisfied, the display mode corresponding to the condition of satisfying the predetermined condition after the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed (hyphen lighting, all extinguishing). A gaming machine characterized by having a means to move to.

According to the feature βJ1, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied while displaying the game history information, the display of the game history information continues until the display duration of the displayed game history information elapses. Therefore, for example, the display of the game history information ends at the timing when the administrator or the inspector of the game machine tries to confirm the game history information being displayed and transfer it to the inspection table, and the game It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the history information could not be transferred to the inspection table.

<Characteristic βK group>
The characteristic βK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βK1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The calculation means is based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods with the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (the measured number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches a predetermined number) as a boundary. A means for calculating a plurality of the game history information corresponding to each of the periods of
The display means is
It is a means for switching and displaying the plurality of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods in a predetermined order, and when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the said game regardless of the predetermined order. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for starting display from game history information (bL) corresponding to a specific period among a plurality of periods.

According to the feature βK1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is started from the game history information corresponding to a specific period among a plurality of periods regardless of the predetermined order. The manager or the inspector can recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and can preferentially confirm the game history information corresponding to the specific period.

The inventions of the characteristic βG group to the characteristic βK group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the efficiency of game machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that takes the player into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the interest of the game is improved, the processing load of the gaming machine is reduced, the processing is optimized, the control is simplified, the structure is simplified, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and problems occur. Further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines that are friendly to players, and providing sounder games.

<Characteristic βL group>
The characteristic βL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βL1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
A storage means (main RAM 64) that stores predetermined information (various flag information, etc.) when the power supply from the outside is cut off.
When the power supply from the outside is started, the recovery means for executing the recovery process (power recovery process) for returning the gaming machine to the state before the power supply is cut off based on the predetermined information. When,
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting unit, CP light emitting unit) and can display various information, and
An inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting / blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode, and an inspection process executing means.
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the inspection processing execution means includes means for executing the inspection processing triggered by the execution of the return processing.

According to the feature βL1, the inspection process is executed triggered by the execution of the return process, so that the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine performs an operation of causing the gaming machine to execute the return process (for example, once the power switch is turned on). By performing the operation of turning it off and then turning it on again), the gaming machine can be made to execute the inspection process. Then, the administrator or the inspector can inspect whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means.

[Characteristic βL2]
Features The gaming machine described in βL1.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode.

According to the feature βL2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine can display. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element (for example, a light emitting unit that does not light due to disconnection) among the plurality of display elements constituting the means, which cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect.

[Characteristic βL3]
The gaming machine according to the feature βL1 or the feature βL2.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so that the first display mode and the second display mode are alternately repeated. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βL3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or the inspector cannot shift from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means (for example, the display element is always lit. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part) that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βM group>
The characteristic βM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βM1]
Operation reception means (RAM clear button, setting keyhole, setting change button) that accepts operations from the outside,
A processing execution means that executes one of the processing flows branched into a plurality of processing flows based on the operation mode accepted by the operation receiving means when the supply of electric power from the outside is started.
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting unit, CP light emitting unit) and can display various information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is a processing for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode regardless of which of the processing flows branched into the plurality of processing flows is executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for executing an inspection process (lighting / blinking process).

Feature According to βM1, inspection processing is executed regardless of which processing flow of the processing flows branched into a plurality of branches is executed. Therefore, what is the operation receiving means when the power supply is started? Even when the operation mode is accepted, the gaming machine can be made to execute the inspection process. Therefore, the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine is determined by a defect in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means, regardless of the operation mode accepted by the operation reception means when the power supply is started. It is possible to inspect whether there is a display element that does not work in the embodiment. That is, it is possible to suppress that the inspection cannot be performed depending on the operation mode accepted by the operation receiving means when the power supply is started.

[Characteristic βM2]
Features The gaming machine described in βM1.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode.

According to the feature βM2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode, so that the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine can display. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element (for example, a light emitting unit that does not light due to disconnection) among the plurality of display elements constituting the means, which cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect.

[Characteristic βM3]
The gaming machine according to the feature βM1 or the feature βM2.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so that the first display mode and the second display mode are alternately repeated. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βM3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or the inspector cannot shift from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means (for example, the display element is always lit. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part) that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βN group>
The characteristic βN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βN1]
A first processing group execution means for executing a first processing group (processing from step S12001 to step S12028 in FIGS. 63 and 64) based on the start of power supply from the outside.
A second processing group execution means that repeatedly executes the second processing group (various processing included in the timer interrupt processing, various random number update processing, power failure monitoring processing) after the execution of the first processing group is completed.
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting unit, CP light emitting unit) and can display various information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first processing group execution means is an inspection process (lighting / blinking) which is a process of operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode as one process included in the first process group. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing processing).

According to the feature βN1, the first processing group including the inspection processing is executed based on the start of the supply of electric power from the outside, and after the execution of the first processing group is completed, the second processing group is executed. Since the processing group of the above is repeatedly executed, the inspection processing can be executed only once after the power supply from the outside is started. If the inspection process is included in the second processing group, the inspection process will be repeatedly executed, and the processing load of the gaming machine will increase. Further, if the inspection process is repeatedly executed, there is a possibility that the period during which various information can be displayed on the display means is reduced. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the inspection process can be executed only once after the supply of electric power from the outside is started, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced and the gaming machine can be played. The administrator or the inspector of the machine can inspect whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means.

[Characteristic βN2]
Features The gaming machine described in βN1.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode.

According to the feature βN2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode, so that the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine can display. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element (for example, a light emitting unit that does not light due to disconnection) among the plurality of display elements constituting the means, which cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect.

[Characteristic βN3]
The gaming machine according to the feature βN1 or the feature βN2.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so that the first display mode and the second display mode are alternately repeated. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βN3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or the inspector cannot shift from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means (for example, the display element is always lit. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part) that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βO group>
The characteristic βO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βO1]
With a game progress processing execution means for executing a game progress process (ball entry detection process included in the timer interrupt process, ball entry process for the start port, game turn control process, etc.), which is a process for enabling the progress of the game. ,
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting unit, CP light emitting unit) and can display various information, and
An inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting / blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode, and an inspection process executing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The inspection process executing means is provided with a means for executing the inspection process after the supply of electric power from the outside is started and before the execution of the game progress process is started. ..

According to the feature βO1, the inspection process is executed after the supply of electric power from the outside is started and before the execution of the game progress process is started, so that the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine can perform the game. Before the game can proceed in the machine, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means.

If the configuration is such that the inspection process is executed after the execution of the game progress process is started, the player plays the game before the administrator or the inspector can inspect the display means. It will be possible to get started. In this case, after the player starts the game on the gaming machine, the administrator or the inspector may inspect the display means of the gaming machine and find a defect in the display element of the display means. If the administrator or the inspector finds a defect in the display element of the display means of the game machine, it is necessary to have the player suspend or stop the game in order to repair or replace the display means. .. As a result, the player may be strongly uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the administrator or the inspector can inspect the display means of the gaming machine before the player can start the game on the gaming machine. , It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable by interrupting or stopping the game.

[Characteristic βO2]
Features The gaming machine described in βO1.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode.

According to the feature βO2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode, so that the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine can display. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element (for example, a light emitting unit that does not light due to disconnection) among the plurality of display elements constituting the means, which cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect.

[Characteristic βO3]
The gaming machine according to the feature βO1 or the feature βO2.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so that the first display mode and the second display mode are alternately repeated. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βO3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or the inspector cannot shift from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means (for example, the display element is always lit. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part) that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βP group>
The characteristic βP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βP1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
With a storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game history basic information such as ball entry information, entry number information, prize ball total value, etc.) which is information based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. ,
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a ball ejection rate), which is information related to the game history based on the detection information.
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting unit, CP light emitting unit) and can display various information, and
A game history information display processing execution means for executing a game history information display process (a game history process included in a timer interrupt process), which is a process for displaying information corresponding to the game history information on the display means.
An inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting / blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode, and an inspection process executing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The inspection process executing means includes means for executing the inspection process before the information corresponding to the game history information is displayed on the display means by executing the game history information display process. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature βP1, the inspection process is executed before the information corresponding to the game history information is displayed on the display means, so that the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine corresponds to the gaming history information in the gaming machine. Before the information is displayed on the display means, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means. As a result, without noticing that there is a display element that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means, the information corresponding to the game history information displayed on the display means is displayed. It is possible to suppress confirmation.

[Characteristic βP2]
Features The gaming machine described in βP1.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode.

According to the feature βP2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode, so that the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine can display. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element (for example, a light emitting unit that does not light due to disconnection) among the plurality of display elements constituting the means, which cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect.

[Characteristic βP3]
The gaming machine according to the feature βP1 or the feature βP2.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so that the first display mode and the second display mode are alternately repeated. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βP3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or the inspector cannot shift from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means (for example, the display element is always lit. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part) that does not turn off.

<Characteristic βQ group>
The feature βQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βQ1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside, and
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting unit, CP light emitting unit) and can display setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability while the setting change mode is being executed.
An inspection process executing means for executing an inspection process (lighting / blinking process), which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode, and an inspection process executing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The gaming machine comprising the means for executing the inspection process before the setting information is displayed on the display means by executing the setting change mode.

According to the feature βQ1, the inspection process is executed before the setting information is displayed on the display means, so that the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine can display the setting information on the display means before the setting information is displayed on the gaming machine. , It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means. As a result, the setting information displayed on the display means is confirmed without noticing that there is a display element that does not operate normally due to a defect among the plurality of display elements constituting the display means. Can be suppressed.

[Characteristic βQ2]
Features The gaming machine described in βQ1.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode.

According to the feature βQ2, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine can display. It is possible to inspect whether or not there is a display element (for example, a light emitting unit that does not light due to disconnection) among the plurality of display elements constituting the means, which cannot be in the second display mode due to a defect.

[Characteristic βQ3]
The gaming machine according to the feature βQ1 or the feature βQ2.
Each of the plurality of display elements can be in a first display mode (light-off state) and a second display mode (light-up state) different from the first display mode.
The inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so that the first display mode and the second display mode are alternately repeated. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature βQ3, the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means so as to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode. The administrator or the inspector cannot shift from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a defect in the plurality of display elements constituting the display means (for example, the display element is always lit. It is possible to inspect whether there is a light emitting part) that does not turn off.

The inventions of the characteristic βL group to the characteristic βQ group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the efficiency of game machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that takes the player into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the interest of the game is improved, the processing load of the gaming machine is reduced, the processing is optimized, the control is simplified, the structure is simplified, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and problems occur. Further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines that are friendly to players, and providing sounder games.

<Characteristic βR group>
The feature βR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βR1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting changing flag) and
At the start of the setting change mode, the identification information is set to the first state (ON), and at the end of the setting change mode, the identification information is set to a second state (OFF) different from the first state. Identification information transition means to transition to
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside.
The setting change mode execution means is
Perform the predetermined start operation (the operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 while all the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON and the RAM clear button is pressed). Based on the acceptance, the first starting means for starting the setting change mode and
A second starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the determination that the identification information is in the first state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started from the outside, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature βR1, the first starting means starts the setting change mode based on the acceptance of the predetermined start operation, and the identification information transition means sets the identification information at the start of the setting change mode. The state is set, and the identification information is changed to the second state at the end of the setting change mode. Then, the storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode due to the power switch of the gaming machine being turned off or a power failure occurring, the power is stored in the storage means. The identification information is maintained in the first state.

Then, according to this feature, the second starting means sets the setting change mode based on the determination that the identification information is in the first state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started from the outside. Let's get started. That is, according to this feature, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, a predetermined start operation is performed. Even if is not accepted, the setting change mode will be started.

Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside during the execution of the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is required in order to cause the gaming machine to start the setting change mode again. It is possible to save the trouble that the administrator has to perform a predetermined start operation again after the restart.

In addition, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, there is a possibility that the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine is not intended by the administrator. However, according to this feature, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed from the outside, the setting change mode is started without the administrator of the gaming machine performing a predetermined start operation again. , It is possible to prevent the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine from being overlooked in a state not intended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βS group>
The feature βS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βS1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
The setting information display mode execution means for executing the setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting information which is the information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed.
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting confirmation flag) and
At the start of the setting information display mode, the identification information is set to the first state (ON), and at the end of the setting information display mode, the identification information is set to a second state different from the first state ( Identification information transition means to transition to OFF) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside.
The setting information display mode execution means is
Perform the predetermined start operation (the operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 while all the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON and the RAM clear button is not pressed). Based on the acceptance, the first starting means for starting the setting information display mode and
A second starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on the determination that the identification information is in the first state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started from the outside, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature βS1, the first starting means starts the setting information display mode based on the acceptance of a predetermined start operation, and the identification information transition means sets the identification information at the start of the setting information display mode. The state is set to 1, and the identification information is changed to the second state at the end of the setting information display mode. Then, the storage means can maintain the state of the identification information even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off during the execution of the setting information display mode due to the power switch of the gaming machine being turned off or a power failure occurring, the storage means stores the power. The identified information is maintained in the first state.

According to this feature, the second starting means determines that the identification information is in the first state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started from the outside, and the setting information display mode is used. To start. That is, according to this feature, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off during the execution of the setting information display mode, and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, a predetermined start is performed. Even if the operation is not accepted, the setting information display mode will be started.

Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside during the execution of the setting information display mode, in order to cause the gaming machine to start the setting information display mode again, the power to the gaming machine is supplied. It is possible to save the trouble that the administrator has to perform a predetermined start operation again after the supply is restarted.

<Characteristic βT group>
The feature βT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βT1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
A first storage means for storing setting information, which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and capable of maintaining the state of the setting information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off. Means (setting information storage area of main RAM 64) and
A second storage means (update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) for storing change setting information (update setting information) which is information used during execution of the setting change mode, and
A change means capable of changing the change setting information while the setting change mode is being executed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second storage means includes means for storing information corresponding to the setting information as the change setting information at the start of the setting change mode.
The changing means includes means for changing the changing setting information stored in the second storage means by accepting the predetermined changing operation.
The first storage means is a gaming machine including means for storing information corresponding to the change setting information as the setting information at the end of the setting change mode.

According to the feature βT1, the second storage means stores the information corresponding to the setting information as the setting information for change at the start of the setting change mode, and the change means receives a predetermined change operation to obtain the first change. (2) The change setting information stored in the storage means is changed, and the first storage means stores the information corresponding to the change setting information as the setting information at the end of the setting change mode. Therefore, even if the power supply from the outside is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the first storage means remains as the value before the setting change mode is started. Can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the winning probability of the gaming machine from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the power supply from the outside being cut off during the execution of the setting change mode. be able to. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

If a configuration is adopted in which the setting information for change is not used during the execution of the setting change mode and the setting information stored in the first storage means is directly changed by accepting a predetermined change operation. In the case where the power supply from the outside is cut off at the timing when the setting information is different from the value intended by the administrator of the gaming machine during the execution of the setting change mode, the gaming machine is used. The winning probability setting information will be different from the value intended by the administrator.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the setting information itself stored in the first storage means is not changed until the setting change mode ends, and the change setting information stored in the second storage means is not changed. Is changed, so when the power supply from the outside is cut off at the timing when the setting information for change is different from the value intended by the administrator of the game machine during the execution of the setting change mode. Even if there is, the setting information stored in the first storage means is maintained as the value before the setting change mode is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the winning probability of the gaming machine from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the power supply from the outside being cut off during the execution of the setting change mode. Can be done.

[Characteristic βT2]
Features The gaming machine described in βT1.
A gaming machine comprising a display means for displaying the change setting information stored in the second storage means during execution of the setting change mode.

According to the feature βT2, the display means displays the change setting information stored in the second storage means during the execution of the setting change mode, so that the administrator can display the change setting displayed in the display means. While checking the information, it is possible to perform a predetermined change operation.

<Characteristic βU group>
The characteristic βU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βU1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
A storage means for storing setting information which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and which can maintain the state of the setting information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off (the storage means). (Setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) and
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (execution of the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of electric power from the outside is started.
A game progress process execution means for executing a game progress process (processes from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68), which is a process for advancing a game, and a game progress process execution means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When it is determined by the setting information determining means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (in step S12007 of FIG. 65, it is determined that the setting information is not within the predetermined range), the game progress processing executing means determines that the setting information is not within the predetermined range. When the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015), the gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming progress process is not executed.

According to the feature βU1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off, and the game progress processing execution means starts the power supply from the outside. When this is done, it is determined whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition, and if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game progress process for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed in a state where the setting information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition, resulting in a problem in the progress of the game in the game machine. .. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the player and the manager from being inflicted with an unexpected loss.

<Characteristic βV group>
The characteristic βV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βV1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
It is a storage means that can store various information including setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and can maintain the various information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off. Storage means (main RAM 64) and
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (execution of the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of electric power from the outside is started.
An erasing process executing means for executing an erasing process (first RAM clearing process) for erasing the various information stored in the storage means except for the setting information.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The erasing process executing means is
The erasing process is based on the acceptance of a predetermined erasing operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear button is pressed). And the means to do
When it is determined by the setting information determining means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (it is determined in step S12007 of FIG. 65 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range, and the RAM error flag is turned ON in step S12015. In the case of), a means for not executing the erasing process even when the predetermined erasing operation is accepted, and a means for not executing the erasing process.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature βV1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off, and the erasing processing executing means starts the power supply from the outside. At that time, it is determined whether or not the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition, and if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the erasing process is performed even if the predetermined erasing operation is accepted. Do not execute. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the erasing process being executed while the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

If a configuration is adopted in which the erasing process is executed even if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, for example, among the various information stored in the storage means, the setting information is predetermined. Even though the information indicating that the condition is not satisfied (for example, the RAM error flag) is erased and the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the setting information is deleted after the erasing process is executed. There is a possibility that a process on the premise that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game progress process for advancing a game) will be executed, and a problem will occur.

On the other hand, according to this feature, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the erasing process is not executed even if the predetermined erasing operation is accepted, so that the setting information is obtained. It is possible to prevent the erasing process from being executed even though the state does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the process assuming that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the erasing process being executed while the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βW group>
The feature βW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βW1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
The setting information display mode execution means for executing the setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting information which is the information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed.
A storage means that can store various information including the setting information, and can maintain the various information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off (setting of the main RAM 64). Information storage area) and
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (execution of the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of electric power from the outside is started.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting information display mode execution means is
Perform the predetermined start operation (the operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 while all the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON and the RAM clear button is not pressed). Based on the acceptance, the means for executing the setting information display mode and
When it is determined by the setting information determining means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (it is determined in step S12007 of FIG. 65 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range, and the RAM error flag is turned ON in step S12015. In the case of), a means for not executing the setting information display mode even when the predetermined start operation is accepted, and a means for not executing the setting information display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature βW1, the storage means maintains the state of various information including the setting information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off, and the setting information display mode executing means has the setting information. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the setting information display mode is not executed even if the predetermined start operation is accepted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information display mode for displaying the setting information from being executed even though the setting information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βX group>
The feature βX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βX1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
It is a storage means that can store various information including setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and can maintain the various information even when the power supply from the outside is cut off. Storage means (main RAM 64) and
When the supply of power from the outside is cut off, a predetermined operation is executed based on a predetermined information group stored in the storage means, and the first operation result, which is the result of the predetermined operation, is stored in the storage. An arithmetic execution means for storing in a means (calculating a RAM determination value in a power failure monitoring process and storing it in the main RAM 64),
When the supply of power from the outside is started, the predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the storage means, and the second calculation result which is the result of the predetermined calculation is obtained. , A calculation result determination means for determining whether or not the first calculation result matches (execution of the processes from step S12005 to step S12006 in FIG. 65).
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition (execution of the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65) when the supply of electric power from the outside is started.
Based on the determination by the calculation result determination means that the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, and the setting information determination means determining that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition. , A predetermined process executing means for executing a predetermined process (process of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68, which is a process for advancing the game).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature βX1, the predetermined processing execution means determines that the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, and the predetermined processing is determined based on the determination that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition. To execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined process from being executed even though the second calculation result and the first calculation result are in agreement but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the execution of a predetermined process even though the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

When the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, the content of the predetermined information group stored in the storage means when the power supply from the outside is started and the previous power supply are displayed. There is a high possibility that the content of the predetermined information group stored in the storage means is the same when the storage means is cut off, and the predetermined information group stored in the storage means is cut off from the power supply from the outside. It is highly possible that it was maintained normally even if it was in a normal state. However, even when the predetermined information group stored in the storage means is not normally maintained, the second calculation result and the first calculation result may accidentally match.

Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, but whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition is adopted, the setting information is used. Even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the second calculation result and the first calculation result may coincide with each other by chance, and the predetermined process may be executed. If the predetermined process includes, for example, a process that enables the progress of the game, there is a possibility that a fatal defect may occur in the progress of the game.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a predetermined process is performed based on the determination that the second calculation result and the first calculation result match and that the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition. Execution, in other words, the second operation result and the first operation result match, but the predetermined process is not executed when the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined process from being executed even though the second calculation result and the first calculation result are in agreement but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to the execution of a predetermined process even though the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βY group>
The characteristic βY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, embodiment 100).

[Characteristic βY1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
A lottery processing execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
By accepting a predetermined operation (an operation of inserting and turning the setting key into the setting keyhole), the second state (the state on the OFF side) different from the first state (the state on the OFF side) is different from the first state (the state on the OFF side). Operation reception means (keyhole for setting) that can be transferred to (ON side state),
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting change mode execution means is
Based on the detection of the transition from the second state of the operation receiving means to the first state (OFF edge falling from the ON side state to the OFF side state) during the execution of the setting change mode. The gaming machine is provided with an ending means for terminating the setting change mode.

According to the feature βY1, the setting change mode execution means terminates the setting change mode based on the detection of the transition from the second state to the first state of the operation receiving means during the execution of the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from ending immediately after the start. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

For example, the first start condition (for example, the key (keyhole) for setting, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch) including that the operation receiving means is in the second state are all ON, and the RAM clear button. The operation to turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was performed while was pressed), and the operation receiving means is in the second state or not. In the configuration in which the setting change mode is started when the start condition of (for example, the setting changing flag is ON when the power is turned on) is satisfied, the configuration is different from this feature, and the operation reception means. A case where a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode is terminated when it is detected that is in the first state will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, when the setting change mode is started based on the establishment of the first start condition including the fact that the operation reception means is in the second state, the operation reception means is in the second state. The setting change mode continues until the transition from the first state to the first state. However, when the setting change mode is started based on the establishment of the second start condition regardless of whether or not the operation reception means is in the second state, the operation reception means is set in the first state. The change mode may be started. In this case, immediately after the setting change mode is started, it is detected that the operation receiving means is in the first state, and the setting change mode ends. That is, the setting change mode ends immediately after the start, and it becomes difficult to change the setting of the winning probability in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the setting change mode is terminated based on the detection of the transition from the second state of the operation receiving means to the first state. Therefore, for example, the second start condition. Even when the setting change mode is started by the establishment of the above, and the setting change mode is started while the operation reception means is in the first state, the administrator of the gaming machine or the like sets the operation reception means to the first. The setting change mode continues until the state of 1 is changed to the second state and the state of the second is changed to the first state again. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is started while the operation receiving means is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from ending immediately after the setting change mode is started. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to change the setting of the winning probability because the setting change mode ends immediately after the start.

Further, according to this feature, even if the setting change mode is started by the satisfaction of the second start condition, only the person who can change the state of the operation receiving means ends the setting change mode. Can be done. Therefore, the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Characteristic βY2]
Features The gaming machine described in βY1.
The setting change mode execution means is
The setting change mode is started based on the fact that the first start condition including that the operation receiving means is in the second state (the keyhole for setting is in the ON side state) is satisfied. 1 Starting means and
The setting change mode is set based on the fact that the second start condition (the setting changing flag is ON when the power is turned on) is satisfied regardless of whether or not the operation receiving means is in the second state. The second starting means to start,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature βY2, the first starting means starts the setting change mode based on the fact that the first starting condition including the fact that the operation receiving means is in the second state is satisfied, and the second starting means is The setting change mode is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the operation receiving means is in the second state. Therefore, the setting change mode can be started not only when the operation receiving means is in the second state but also when the operation receiving means is not in the second state.

The inventions of the characteristic βR group to the characteristic βY group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the efficiency of game machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that takes the player into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the interest of the game is improved, the processing load of the gaming machine is reduced, the processing is optimized, the control is simplified, the structure is simplified, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and problems occur. Further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines that are friendly to players, and providing sounder games.

<Characteristic βZ group>
The feature βZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic βZ1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
Timekeeping information updating means (RTC97 timekeeping register) that can update the timekeeping information (current date and time information) including information that can specify the time even when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off. 97b1) and
The activation time information storage means (RTC97) that can store the timing information as activation time information (starting date / time information) and can retain the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. Start time information storage area 97b2) and
Based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, the timekeeping information is acquired from the timekeeping information updating means, and the acquired timekeeping information is used as the start time information to store the start time information storage means. A storage process execution means for executing a storage process, which is a process of storing information in the information
An elapsed time calculating means for calculating the elapsed time since the storage process is executed based on the activation time information, and
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time, and a predetermined process execution means.
Based on the start of external power supply to the gaming machine, multiple types of startup processing with different processing contents (starting processing including processing for transmitting the normal startup command in FIG. 70, setting change mode) A startup process execution means that executes any of the startup processes (starting process including execution of, start processing including execution of setting confirmation mode, etc.) and
Equipped with
The storage process execution means executes a specific start process (start process including execution of setting change mode, execution of setting confirmation mode) among the plurality of start processes whose start process type is executed by the start process execution means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage process in the case of activation processing including the above.

Features Prior to the explanation of the effect of βZ1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a gaming hall, power is supplied to a plurality of gaming machines all at once (at the same time). Specifically, for example, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in so-called island equipment with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island equipment (hereinafter, also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, power supply to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine of feature βZ1 acquires timekeeping information from the timing information updating means based on the start of external power supply to the gaming machine. Then, the storage process, which is the process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the start time information in the start time information storage means, is executed. Then, based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means, the elapsed time since the storage process is executed is calculated, and the predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

Temporarily, a configuration (for example,) in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timekeeping information (current date and time information) updated in the timekeeping information updating means (timekeeping register 97b1 of RTC97) instead of the elapsed time since the storage process is executed. , A configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the timekeeping information becomes 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, when the time included in the time counting information of each gaming machine installed in the island facility is different (for example, the time included in the timing information of the gaming machine A at a certain moment is 11). When the time is 00:00 and the time included in the time measurement information of the gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started is each game. It will be different for each machine, and it will give a sense of discomfort to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined production) will be started all at once (at the same time) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. There are challenges.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility is based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, and the timekeeping information is updated from the timekeeping information means. Is acquired, and the storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island equipment is started all at once (at the same time), and the power is installed in the island equipment. Each of the gaming machines being played performs storage processing all at once (at the same time).

Then, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. .. As described above, since each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes storage processing all at once (at the same time), the elapsed time from the execution of the storage processing calculated in each gaming machine is different. Even if the time included in the timekeeping information of the gaming machine is different, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the mode of executing the predetermined process executed in each gaming machine can be determined. Can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the specific effect is simultaneously (simultaneously) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. Can be started.

Further, the gaming machine of this feature has a start time information storage means capable of retaining the stored start time information even during a power failure state, and a start process execution means having a plurality of types of start processing. If it is a specific activation process, it is provided with a workaround method for avoiding the execution of the storage process. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case where a configuration without the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the power supply to each gaming machine installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed in the island facility is stored all at once (at the same time). Execute the process. After that, the manager of the game hall causes one of the plurality of game machines installed in the island facility to execute a specific start-up process (for example, start-up process including execution of the setting change mode). In addition, after the power switch of the one game machine is once turned off, the power switch of the one game machine is turned on so that the specific start process is executed. May be executed. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. Then, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine will be different from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine will be set. There is a problem that the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in another gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine, which gives a player who is playing a game in the one gaming machine a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine and the power is cut off, the starting time information storage means of the one gaming machine is stored. The startup time information is retained. After that, when the administrator turns on the power switch with the one game machine in a state where a specific start process is executed, the specific start process is executed in the one game machine, and the execution of the storage process is avoided. Therefore, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the one game machine is not overwritten, and the storage process executed when the power supply is started simultaneously (at the same time) with the other game machines. The start time information stored in is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed in the island facility including the one gaming machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the power switch is once turned off and then turned on again. The mode of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a gaming machine in which the power switch is once turned off and then the power switch is turned on again. It is possible to start a specific effect all at once (at the same time) on each gaming machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γA group>
The feature γA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γA1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
Timekeeping information updating means (RTC97 timekeeping register) that can update the timekeeping information (current date and time information) including information that can specify the time even when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off. 97b1) and
The activation time information storage means (RTC97) that can store the timing information as activation time information (starting date / time information) and can retain the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. Start time information storage area 97b2) and
Based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, the timekeeping information is acquired from the timekeeping information updating means, and the acquired timekeeping information is used as the start time information to store the start time information storage means. A storage process execution means for executing a storage process, which is a process of storing information in the information
An elapsed time calculating means for calculating the elapsed time since the storage process is executed based on the activation time information, and
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time, and a predetermined process execution means.
An operation receiving means (keyhole for setting) that accepts a predetermined operation,
Equipped with
The storage processing executing means is an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage processing when the operation receiving means has received the predetermined operation when the supply of electric power from the outside to the gaming machine is started. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Features Prior to the explanation of the effect of γA1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a gaming hall, power is supplied to a plurality of gaming machines all at once (at the same time). Specifically, for example, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in so-called island equipment with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island equipment (hereinafter, also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, power supply to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine of feature γA1 acquires timekeeping information from the timing information updating means based on the start of supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside. Then, the storage process, which is the process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the start time information in the start time information storage means, is executed. Then, the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process is calculated based on the start time information, and the predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

Temporarily, a configuration (for example,) in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timekeeping information (current date and time information) updated in the timekeeping information updating means (timekeeping register 97b1 of RTC97) instead of the elapsed time since the storage process is executed. , A configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the timekeeping information becomes 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, when the time included in the time counting information of each gaming machine installed in the island facility is different (for example, the time included in the timing information of the gaming machine A at a certain moment is 11). When the time is 00:00 and the time included in the time measurement information of the gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started is each game. It will be different for each machine, and it will give a sense of discomfort to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined production) will be started all at once (at the same time) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. There are challenges.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility is based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, and the timekeeping information is updated from the timekeeping information means. Is acquired, and the storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island equipment is started all at once (at the same time), and the power is installed in the island equipment. Each of the gaming machines being played performs storage processing all at once (at the same time).

Then, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. .. As described above, since each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes storage processing all at once (at the same time), the elapsed time from the execution of the storage processing calculated in each gaming machine is different. Even if the time included in the timekeeping information of the gaming machine is different, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the mode of executing the predetermined process executed in each gaming machine can be determined. Can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the specific effect is simultaneously (simultaneously) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. Can be started.

Further, the gaming machine of this feature has a start-up time information storage means capable of retaining the stored start-time information even during a power failure state, and when power supply from the outside to the game machine is started. In addition, when the operation receiving means has received a predetermined operation, it is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the storage process. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case where a configuration without the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the power supply to each gaming machine installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed in the island facility is stored all at once (at the same time). Execute the process. After that, the manager of the gaming hall temporarily turns off the power switch of one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility for various reasons, and then determines the one gaming machine. The power switch of the one gaming machine may be turned on while the operation of is accepted. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. Then, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine will be different from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine will be set. There is a problem that the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in another gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine, which gives a player who is playing a game in the one gaming machine a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine and the power is cut off, the starting time information storage means of the one gaming machine is stored. The startup time information is retained. After that, if the administrator turns on the power switch while the one game machine is in the state of accepting a predetermined operation, the execution of the storage process is avoided, so that the start time information storage means of the one game machine can be used. The stored start time information is not overwritten, and the start time information stored in the storage process executed when the power supply is started simultaneously (at the same time) with the other gaming machines is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed in the island facility including the one gaming machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the power switch is once turned off and then turned on again. The mode of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a gaming machine in which the power switch is once turned off and then the power switch is turned on again. It is possible to start a specific effect all at once (at the same time) on each gaming machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γB group>
The feature γB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γB1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A lottery processing execution means that executes a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
Timekeeping information updating means (RTC97 timekeeping register) that can update the timekeeping information (current date and time information) including information that can specify the time even when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off. 97b1) and
The activation time information storage means (RTC97) that can store the timing information as activation time information (starting date / time information) and can retain the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. Start time information storage area 97b2) and
Based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, the timekeeping information is acquired from the timekeeping information updating means, and the acquired timekeeping information is used as the start time information to store the start time information storage means. A storage process execution means for executing a storage process, which is a process of storing information in the information
An elapsed time calculating means for calculating the elapsed time since the storage process is executed based on the activation time information, and
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time, and a predetermined process execution means.
Equipped with
The setting change mode execution means is
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined start condition is satisfied when the supply of electric power from the outside to the gaming machine is started, and
A setting change mode starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and a setting change mode starting means.
Equipped with
The storage processing execution means is a gaming machine including a avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage processing when the setting change mode is started.

Features Prior to the explanation of the effect of γB1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a gaming hall, power is supplied to a plurality of gaming machines all at once (at the same time). Specifically, for example, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in so-called island equipment with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island equipment (hereinafter, also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, power supply to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine of feature γB1 acquires timekeeping information from the timing information updating means based on the start of supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside. Then, the storage process, which is the process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the start time information in the start time information storage means, is executed. Then, the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process is calculated based on the start time information, and the predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

Temporarily, a configuration (for example,) in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timekeeping information (current date and time information) updated in the timekeeping information updating means (timekeeping register 97b1 of RTC97) instead of the elapsed time since the storage process is executed. , A configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the timekeeping information becomes 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, when the time included in the time counting information of each gaming machine installed in the island facility is different (for example, the time included in the timing information of the gaming machine A at a certain moment is 11). When the time is 00:00 and the time included in the time measurement information of the gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started is each game. It will be different for each machine, and it will give a sense of discomfort to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined production) will be started all at once (at the same time) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. There are challenges.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility is based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, and the timekeeping information is updated from the timekeeping information means. Is acquired, and the storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island equipment is started all at once (at the same time), and the power is installed in the island equipment. Each of the gaming machines being played performs storage processing all at once (at the same time).

Then, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. .. As described above, since each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes storage processing all at once (at the same time), the elapsed time from the execution of the storage processing calculated in each gaming machine is different. Even if the time included in the timekeeping information of the gaming machine is different, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the mode of executing the predetermined process executed in each gaming machine can be determined. Can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the specific effect is simultaneously (simultaneously) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. Can be started.

Further, the gaming machine of this feature has a start time information storage means capable of retaining the stored start time information even during a power failure state, and avoids execution of storage processing when the setting change mode is started. It is provided with a workaround. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case where a configuration without the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the power supply to each gaming machine installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed in the island facility is stored all at once (at the same time). Execute the process. After that, the manager of the gaming hall executes the setting change mode to change the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine, so that the power supply of one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility is used. After the switch is once turned off, the power switch of the one gaming machine may be turned on to start the setting change mode in a state where the start condition for starting the setting change mode of the one gaming machine is satisfied. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. Then, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine will be different from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine will be set. There is a problem that the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in another gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine, which gives a player who is playing a game in the one gaming machine a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine and the power is cut off, the starting time information storage means of the one gaming machine is stored. The startup time information is retained. After that, when the administrator turns on the power switch with the start condition for starting the setting change mode of the one gaming machine satisfied, the setting change mode is started in the one gaming machine and the storage process is executed. Since it is avoided, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the one gaming machine is not overwritten, and is executed when the power supply is started all at once (at the same time) with the other gaming machines. The start time information stored in the storage process is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed in the island facility including the one gaming machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the power switch is once turned off and then turned on again. The mode of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a gaming machine in which the power switch is once turned off and then the power switch is turned on again. It is possible to start a specific effect all at once (at the same time) on each gaming machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γC group>
The feature γC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the embodiment 101 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γC1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A lottery processing execution means that executes a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and
A setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (an operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside to set the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process.
The setting information display mode execution means for executing the setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting information which is the information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed.
Timekeeping information updating means (RTC97 timekeeping register) that can update the timekeeping information (current date and time information) including information that can specify the time even when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off. 97b1) and
The activation time information storage means (RTC97) that can store the timing information as activation time information (starting date / time information) and can retain the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. Start time information storage area 97b2) and
Based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, the timekeeping information is acquired from the timekeeping information updating means, and the acquired timekeeping information is used as the start time information to store the start time information storage means. A storage process execution means for executing a storage process, which is a process of storing information in the information
An elapsed time calculating means for calculating the elapsed time since the storage process is executed based on the activation time information, and
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time, and a predetermined process execution means.
Equipped with
The setting information display mode execution means is
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined start condition is satisfied when the supply of electric power from the outside to the gaming machine is started, and
The setting information display mode starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the setting information display mode starting means.
Equipped with
The storage processing execution means is a gaming machine including a avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage processing when the setting information display mode is started.

Features Prior to the explanation of the effect of γC1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a gaming hall, power is supplied to a plurality of gaming machines all at once (at the same time). Specifically, for example, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in so-called island equipment with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island equipment (hereinafter, also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, power supply to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine having the feature γC1 acquires the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside. Then, the storage process, which is the process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the start time information in the start time information storage means, is executed. Then, the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process is calculated based on the start time information, and the predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

Temporarily, a configuration (for example,) in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timekeeping information (current date and time information) updated in the timekeeping information updating means (timekeeping register 97b1 of RTC97) instead of the elapsed time since the storage process is executed. , A configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the timekeeping information becomes 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, when the time included in the time counting information of each gaming machine installed in the island facility is different (for example, the time included in the timing information of the gaming machine A at a certain moment is 11). When the time is 00:00 and the time included in the time measurement information of the gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started is each game. It will be different for each machine, and it will give a sense of discomfort to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined production) will be started all at once (at the same time) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. There are challenges.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility is based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, and the timekeeping information is updated from the timekeeping information means. Is acquired, and the storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island equipment is started all at once (at the same time), and the power is installed in the island equipment. Each of the gaming machines being played performs storage processing all at once (at the same time).

Then, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. .. As described above, since each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes storage processing all at once (at the same time), the elapsed time from the execution of the storage processing calculated in each gaming machine is different. Even if the time included in the timekeeping information of the gaming machine is different, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the mode of executing the predetermined process executed in each gaming machine can be determined. Can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the specific effect is simultaneously (simultaneously) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. Can be started.

Further, the gaming machine of this feature has a start time information storage means capable of retaining the stored start time information even during a power failure state, and executes a storage process when the setting information display mode is started. Provide an avoidance measure to avoid. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case where a configuration without the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the power supply to each gaming machine installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed in the island facility is stored all at once (at the same time). Execute the process. After that, in order to execute the setting information display mode and confirm the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine, the manager of the gaming hall of one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility. When the power switch of the one gaming machine is turned on and the setting information display mode is started with the start condition for starting the setting information display mode of the one gaming machine satisfied after the power switch is once turned off. There is. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. Then, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine will be different from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine will be set. There is a problem that the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in another gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine, which gives a player who is playing a game in the one gaming machine a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine and the power is cut off, the starting time information storage means of the one gaming machine is stored. The startup time information is retained. After that, when the administrator turns on the power switch with the start condition for starting the setting information display mode of the one gaming machine satisfied, the setting information display mode is started in the one gaming machine and the storage process is performed. Since the execution is avoided, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the one game machine is not overwritten, and when the power supply is started all at once (at the same time) with the other game machines. The start time information stored in the executed storage process is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed in the island facility including the one gaming machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the power switch is once turned off and then turned on again. The mode of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a gaming machine in which the power switch is once turned off and then the power switch is turned on again. It is possible to start a specific effect all at once (at the same time) on each gaming machine installed in the island facility. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic γD group>
The feature γD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 102 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γD1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
Timekeeping information updating means (RTC97 timekeeping register) that can update the timekeeping information (current date and time information) including information that can specify the time even when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off. 97b1) and
The activation time information storage means (RTC97) that can store the timing information as activation time information (starting date / time information) and can retain the stored activation time information even during the power failure state. Start time information storage area 97b2) and
Based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, the timekeeping information is acquired from the timekeeping information updating means, and the acquired timekeeping information is used as the start time information to store the start time information storage means. A storage process execution means for executing a storage process, which is a process of storing information in the information
An elapsed time calculating means for calculating the elapsed time since the storage process is executed based on the activation time information, and
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time, and a predetermined process execution means.
Equipped with
In the storage processing executing means, when the supply of power from the outside to the game machine is started, the time included in the timing information in the timing information updating means is stored in the activation time information storage means. A gaming machine, characterized in that it is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage process when a predetermined time (30 minutes) has not elapsed from the time included in the start-up time information.

Features Prior to the explanation of the effect of γD1, a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed will be described. Generally, in a gaming hall, power is supplied to a plurality of gaming machines all at once (at the same time). Specifically, for example, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in so-called island equipment with their respective power switches turned on, and the power switch of the island equipment (hereinafter, also referred to as an island power switch) is turned on. Then, power supply to a plurality of game machines installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time).

Based on the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming hall described above, the gaming machine having the feature γD1 acquires the timing information from the timing information updating means based on the start of supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside. Then, the storage process, which is the process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the start time information in the start time information storage means, is executed. Then, the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process is calculated based on the start time information, and the predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

Temporarily, a configuration (for example,) in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timekeeping information (current date and time information) updated in the timekeeping information updating means (timekeeping register 97b1 of RTC97) instead of the elapsed time since the storage process is executed. , A configuration in which a predetermined effect is started at the timing when the time included in the timekeeping information becomes 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, when the time included in the time counting information of each gaming machine installed in the island facility is different (for example, the time included in the timing information of the gaming machine A at a certain moment is 11). When the time is 00:00 and the time included in the time measurement information of the gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started is each game. It will be different for each machine, and it will give a sense of discomfort to the players who expected that the predetermined processing (predetermined production) will be started all at once (at the same time) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. There are challenges.

On the other hand, according to this feature, each game machine installed in the island facility is based on the start of supply of electric power to the game machine from the outside, and the timekeeping information is updated from the timekeeping information means. Is acquired, and the storage process, which is a process of storing the acquired timekeeping information as the activation time information in the activation time information storage means, is executed.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island equipment is started all at once (at the same time), and the power is installed in the island equipment. Each of the gaming machines being played performs storage processing all at once (at the same time).

Then, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility calculates the elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information stored in the start time information storage means. .. As described above, since each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes storage processing all at once (at the same time), the elapsed time from the execution of the storage processing calculated in each gaming machine is different. Even if the time included in the timekeeping information of the gaming machine is different, it will be the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the mode of executing the predetermined process executed in each gaming machine can be determined. Can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the specific effect is simultaneously (simultaneously) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility. Can be started.

Further, the game machine of this feature has a start time information storage means capable of retaining the stored start time information even during a power failure state, and when the supply of power from the outside to the game machine is started. In addition, when the time included in the time measuring information in the time measuring information updating means does not elapse a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) from the time included in the starting time information stored in the starting time information storage means, the storage process is performed. It is provided with a workaround to avoid the execution of. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

A case where a configuration without the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when the power supply to each gaming machine installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed in the island facility is stored all at once (at the same time). Execute the process. After that, the manager of the gaming hall once turns off the power switch of one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility for various reasons, and then again the one gaming machine. The power switch may be turned on. Specifically, for example, in order to execute the setting change mode and change the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine, the power switch of one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility is turned on. After turning it off once, the power switch of the one gaming machine may be turned on to start the setting change mode in a state where the start condition for starting the setting change mode of the one gaming machine is satisfied. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the power supply is started. Then, the elapsed time calculated in the one gaming machine will be different from the elapsed time calculated in the other gaming machine, and the timing at which the predetermined processing (predetermined effect) is started in the one gaming machine will be set. There is a problem that the timing at which a predetermined process (predetermined effect) is started in another gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine, which gives a player who is playing a game in the one gaming machine a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the one gaming machine and the power is cut off, the starting time information storage means of the one gaming machine is stored. The startup time information is retained. After that, if the administrator turns on the power switch of the one game machine within a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes), the execution of the storage process is avoided, and the storage process is stored in the start time information storage means of the one game machine. The start time information that has been set is not overwritten, and the start time information stored in the storage process executed when the power supply is started simultaneously (at the same time) with the other gaming machines is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed in the island facility including the one gaming machine is the same (or substantially the same).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed in the island facility executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the power switch is once turned off and then turned on again. The mode of execution of the predetermined process executed in each game machine installed in the island facility including the game machine can be the same. Specifically, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which a specific effect is started when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the game machine includes a gaming machine in which the power switch is once turned off and then the power switch is turned on again. It is possible to start a specific effect all at once (at the same time) on each gaming machine installed in the island facility.

That is, the administrator turns on the island power switch of the island facility, starts supplying power to a plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility all at once (at the same time), and then starts supplying power for a predetermined time (for example,). Within 30 minutes), of the multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility, once the power switch of the one gaming machine that is trying to change the setting of the winning probability is turned off, then the one gaming machine is turned off. If the power switch of the one gaming machine is turned on and the setting change mode is started with the start condition for starting the setting change mode satisfied, the setting of the winning probability of the one gaming machine can be changed. It is possible, and at the same time, a specific effect can be started all at once (at the same time) in each gaming machine installed in the island facility including the one gaming machine in which the power switch is turned off and then turned on again. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic γD2]
Features The gaming machine described in γD1.
A gaming machine comprising a changing means for changing the length of the predetermined time.

According to the feature γD2, the length of the predetermined time can be appropriately changed according to the number and size of the gaming machines installed in the gaming hall, and therefore, for example, a plurality of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a predetermined time elapses before the work of changing the setting of the winning probability for the gaming machine is completed.

<Characteristic γE group>
The feature γE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γE1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
A start-up process execution means for executing one of a plurality of types of start-up processes having different processing contents based on the start of external power supply to the gaming machine, and a start-up process execution means.
When a specific start process among the plurality of types of start processes is executed by the start process execution means (when the start process including the process of transmitting a RAM error command is executed by the main controller), the next time. The notification means for notifying the information regarding the type of the start processing to be executed by the start processing execution means at the start of the power supply (notifying "Please start in the setting change mode"), and the notification means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature γE1, information on the type of start processing to be executed at the start of the next power supply is notified, so that the manager of the gaming machine can stop the power supply to the gaming machine and then again. , When starting the power supply to the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the activation process of the notified type. Therefore, the manageability of the gaming machine can be improved.

Specifically, for example, when the power supply to one of the plurality of gaming machines installed in the island facility is terminated and then the power supply to the one gaming machine is started again. If the activation process of the notified type is not executed, the timing of the start of the specific effect executed in the one gaming machine is different from the timing of the start of the specific effect executed in the other plurality of gaming machines. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the administrator from causing the one gaming machine to execute another type of activation processing, and as a result, the start of a specific effect performed on the one gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the timing of the above from deviating from the start timing of a specific effect executed on a plurality of other gaming machines.

[Characteristic γE2]
Features The gaming machine described in γE1.
The notification means is characterized by comprising means for continuing notification of information regarding the type of activation processing until the external power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (until the power switch is turned off). Gaming machine.

According to the feature γE2, the notification of the information regarding the type of activation processing is continued until the power supply from the outside to the gaming machine is cut off. This effect will be described. If the notification of the information regarding the type of activation processing is finished in a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), for example, in a large game hall, the administrator turns on the power of the island power switch of the island equipment. After the external power supply to the game machine is started, the notification is terminated before the administrator reaches the game machine, and the start processing execution means is executed when the next power supply is started. The administrator may not be able to grasp the type of startup processing that should be performed. On the other hand, according to the feature γE2, the notification of the information regarding the type of activation processing is continued until the power supply from the outside to the gaming machine is cut off, so that the administrator can reach the gaming machine before reaching the gaming machine. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the notification is terminated and the administrator cannot grasp the type of start processing to be executed by the start processing execution means at the start of the next power supply.

The inventions of the feature βZ group to the feature γE group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the efficiency of game machine development. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems and providing a gaming machine that takes the player into consideration.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the interest of the game is improved, the processing load of the gaming machine is reduced, the processing is optimized, the control is simplified, the structure is simplified, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and problems occur. Further improvements in technology are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines that are friendly to players, and providing sounder games.

<Characteristic γF group>
The feature γF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspects 103 to 106 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γF1]
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
Winning probability changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
A setting information determination means for executing a setting information determination process for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game stop means for executing a game stop process (a process for turning on the game stop flag), which is a process for stopping the progress of a predetermined game, and
Equipped with
The setting information determination means is
The first setting information determination means for executing the setting information determination process (determining the setting information at the time of entry) and the first setting information determination means for executing the setting information determination process triggered by the entry of the game ball into the entry means.
A second setting information determination means that executes the setting information determination process (performs the setting information determination at the start of fluctuation) in association with the execution of the special information determination process.
Equipped with
The game stop means is
When it is determined by the second determination processing executing means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game stop processing is executed, but the setting information is determined by the first determination processing executing means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not executing the game stop process when it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied.

According to the feature γF1, when it is determined in the setting information determination process executed in connection with the execution of the special information determination process that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the setting information determination process executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is performed. Do not execute. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, even when it is determined in the setting information determination process executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined game A case where a configuration for executing a process for stopping the progress is adopted will be described. In this configuration, for example, the game ball enters the ball entry means during the privilege grant period (during the execution of the open / close execution mode), and the setting information is a predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed with the entry as a trigger. If it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the privilege grant period is interrupted and the progress of the game is stopped, which causes great discomfort and disadvantage to the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means. Since the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is not executed, the privilege grant period (opening / closing execution mode) already started before the entry of the game ball that triggered the setting information determination process is interrupted. There is no. And, as in this feature, even if the progress of the game is stopped when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed in association with the execution of the special information determination process, it is a privilege. Since it is not during the grant period, the discomfort or disadvantage given to the player is that the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition in the setting information determination process executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means. It is not larger than the case where it is determined that there is no such game and the process of stopping the predetermined game is executed. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to stop the progress of the game after reducing the discomfort and disadvantage given to the player. Then, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing in a state where the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

[Characteristic γF2]
Features The gaming machine described in γF1.
The second setting information determination means includes means for executing the setting information determination process prior to execution of the special information determination process.
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when it is determined by the second determination process execution means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

According to the feature γF2, since the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the special information determination process when it is determined by the second determination process execution means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is provided, the setting information is predetermined. It is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed without satisfying the condition of.

[Characteristic γF3]
The gaming machine according to the feature γF1 or the feature γF2.
A pre-determination process execution means for executing a pre-determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition before the special information is subject to the special information determination process is provided.
The first setting information determination means includes means for executing the setting information determination process prior to execution of the advance determination process, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the prior determination process when it is determined by the first setting information determination means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

Feature According to the feature γF3, the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition because the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the prior determination process when the setting information is determined not to satisfy the predetermined condition is provided by the first setting information determination means. It is possible to prevent the first determination process from being executed in the absence state.

[Characteristic γF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features γF1 to the feature γF3.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the first setting information determining means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

Feature According to the feature γF4, since the specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when it is determined by the first setting information determining means that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition is provided, for example, the setting information may be noise or the like. The discomfort given to the player due to the state of not satisfying the predetermined condition due to the influence can be reduced by the specific effect.

<Characteristic γG group>
The feature γG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 104 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γG1]
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
Winning probability changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
Along with the execution of the special information determination process, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the special information to be the target of the special information determination process are stored as the setting information at the time of acquisition. Setting information determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquisition setting information (setting information at the time of entry) matches, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature γG1, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the setting information at the time when the special information to be the target of the special information determination processing is acquired with the execution of the special information determination processing are stored. It is provided with a setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information is matched. Then, when the setting information is rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match. Therefore, according to this feature, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected with the execution of the special information determination process.

[Characteristic γG2]
Features The gaming machine described in γG1.
The setting information determination means includes means for executing a determination as to whether or not the setting information and the special information acquisition time setting information match, prior to the execution of the special information determination process.
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when it is determined by the setting information determination means that the setting information and the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information do not match.

Feature According to γG2, since it is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match, the administrator can use the setting information due to the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed while the value is being rewritten to another value that is not intended by.

[Characteristic γG3]
The gaming machine according to the feature γG1 or the feature γG2.
When it is determined by the setting information determining means that the setting information and the setting information at the time of acquiring the special information do not match, a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game (a process of turning on the game stop flag) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

Feature According to γG3, since it is provided with a means for executing a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of special information acquisition do not match, the setting information is affected by noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing while being rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator.

<Characteristic γH group>
Features The γH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 105 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γH1]
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
Winning probability changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
With the execution of the special information determination process, the special information acquisition setting information (setting information at the time of ball entry) stored as the setting information at the time when the special information to be the target of the special information determination process is acquired. And the setting information determination for determining whether or not the previous execution setting information (setting information at the time of the previous hit determination processing) stored as the setting information at the time of executing the special information determination process executed last time matches. Means and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature γH1, the special information acquisition setting information stored as the setting information at the time when the special information to be the target of the special information determination processing is acquired with the execution of the special information determination processing, and the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information. It is provided with setting information determination means for determining whether or not it matches with the previous execution time setting information stored as the setting information at the time of executing the special information determination process executed last time. Then, when the setting information is rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information at the time of special information acquisition and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match. Therefore, according to this feature, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected with the execution of the special information determination process.

[Characteristic γH2]
Features The gaming machine described in γH1.
The setting information determination means includes means for executing a determination as to whether or not the special information acquisition time setting information and the previous execution time setting information match, prior to the execution of the special information determination process.
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by providing an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when it is determined by the setting information determination means that the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match. Game machine.

Feature According to γH2, since it is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when it is determined that the special information acquisition setting information and the previous execution setting information do not match, the setting information is affected by noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed while the value is being rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator.

[Characteristic γH3]
The gaming machine according to the feature γH1 or the feature γH2.
A process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game (a process of turning on the game stop flag) when the setting information determination means determines that the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of performing.

Feature According to γH3, since it is provided with a means for executing a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game when it is determined that the setting information at the time of special information acquisition and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, the setting information is noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing while being rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator due to the influence of.

<Characteristic γI group>
The feature γI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 106 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γI1]
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
Winning probability changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
Along with the execution of the special information determination process, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the previous execution time stored as the setting information at the time of the execution of the special information determination process previously executed. Setting information judgment means for judging whether or not the setting information (setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing) matches, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature γI1, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the previous execution stored as the setting information at the time of the last execution of the special information determination processing are stored with the execution of the special information determination processing. It is provided with a setting information determination means for determining whether or not the time setting information matches. Then, when the setting information is rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information and the setting information at the previous execution time do not match. Therefore, according to this feature, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected with the execution of the special information determination process.

[Characteristic γI2]
Features The gaming machine described in γI1.
The setting information determination means includes means for executing a determination as to whether or not the setting information and the previous execution time setting information match, prior to the execution of the special information determination process.
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when it is determined by the setting information determination means that the setting information and the previous execution time setting information do not match.

Feature According to γI2, since it is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the special information determination process when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, the setting information is affected by noise or the like of the administrator. It is possible to prevent the special information determination process from being executed while the value is being rewritten to another unintended value.

[Characteristic γI3]
The gaming machine according to the feature γI1 or the feature γI2.
A means for executing a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game (a process of turning on the game stop flag) when the setting information determination means determines that the setting information and the previous execution time setting information do not match. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Feature According to γI3, since it is provided with a means for executing a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game when it is determined that the setting information and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, the setting information is managed by the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing while being rewritten to another value not intended by the person.

<Characteristic γJ group>
The feature γJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 106 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γJ1]
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
Winning probability changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
The setting information when the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting information when the special information determination process executed last time is executed, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The setting information judgment means for judging whether or not the setting information at the time of the previous execution (setting information at the time of the previous hit judgment processing) stored as is the same, and the setting information judgment means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature γJ1, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the setting information at the time of entering the ball entry means and the special information determination process executed last time are executed. It is provided with a setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of the previous execution, which is stored as the setting information, matches. If the setting information is rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like, the setting information at the time of entering the game ball and the setting information at the previous execution time do not match. .. Therefore, according to this feature, the rewriting of the setting information can be detected when the game ball enters the ball entry means. As a result, various processes on the premise that the setting information has been rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator due to the influence of noise or the like are executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means. It becomes possible.

[Characteristic γJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in γJ1.
A pre-determination process execution means for executing a pre-determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition before the special information is subject to the special information determination process is provided.
The setting information determination means is a means for executing a determination as to whether or not the setting information at the time of entering the game ball and the setting information at the time of the previous execution match, prior to the execution of the advance determination process. Prepare,
The gaming machine is
When the setting information determination means determines that the setting information at the time of entering the game ball and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the advance determination process is provided. A gaming machine featuring.

Feature According to γJ2, if it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the game ball and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, an avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the prior determination processing is provided, so that the setting information is noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the first determination process from being executed while the value is being rewritten to another value not intended by the administrator due to the influence of.

[Characteristic γJ3]
The gaming machine according to the feature γJ1 or the feature γJ2.
Provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the setting information determining means determines that the setting information at the time of entering the game ball and the setting information at the time of acquiring the special information do not match. A gaming machine featuring.

Feature According to the feature γJ3, since it is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when it is determined that the setting information at the time of entering the game ball and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match, for example, the game ball The discomfort given to the player due to the determination that the setting information at the time of entering the ball and the setting information at the time of the previous execution do not match can be reduced by the specific effect.

<Characteristic γK group>
The feature γK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspects 103 to 106 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γK1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
Winning probability changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
A setting information determination means for executing a setting information determination process for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A hold display means for displaying a hold display indicating that the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means and held until it is subject to the special information determination process exists.
When it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the effect execution means for executing the hold change effect, which is the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, and the effect execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

If the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, a problem may occur in the progress of the game or the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the feature γK1, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the hold change effect, which is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, is executed, so that the player is given the hold change effect. It is possible to reduce the discomfort that the player receives due to the determination that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the pending change effect.

[Characteristic γK2]
Features The gaming machine described in γK1.
The hold display means can display the hold display in a plurality of types of display modes (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color).
When the expectation of each display mode of the hold display is defined as the high probability that the result will be advantageous to the player when the hold display of each display mode is displayed.
The effect executing means is characterized by comprising, as the hold change effect, a means for executing a hold demotion effect that changes the display mode of the hold display that has already been displayed to a display mode having a lower expectation level. Machine.

If the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, a problem may occur in the progress of the game or the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the feature γK2, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the display mode of the hold display already displayed is changed to the display mode having a lower expectation degree. Since it is executed, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from stopping while the hold display of the display mode with high expectation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player that the progress of the game has stopped. Hereinafter, a more specific description will be given.

First, unlike this feature, a case where a configuration is adopted in which the hold demotion effect is not executed even when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition will be described. In this configuration, for example, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition in the situation where the hold display of the display mode with high expectation is displayed, the player has the display mode with high expectation. Even though there is a strong expectation for the special information corresponding to the hold display, the progress of the game may be stopped before the special information determination process is executed for the special information. The player feels strong anger, disappointment, and distrust that the game has stopped without executing the special information determination process based on the special information corresponding to the hold display of the display mode with high expectation. You will have a feeling.

On the other hand, in this feature, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the hold demotion effect is performed. Change. Therefore, the player initially had a strong expectation for the hold display of the display mode with high expectation, but the hold display of the display mode with high expectation is the hold display of the display mode with low expectation. By changing to, the recognition that the special information corresponding to the hold display was not so high expectation will be changed. After that, even if the game is stopped before the special information corresponding to the hold display is subject to the special information determination process, the player already has a strong expectation for the special information corresponding to the hold display. Since it is not held, even if the game is stopped before the special information corresponding to the hold display is subject to the special information determination processing, it is not necessary to have such a great anger or disappointment. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to reduce the anger and disappointment of the player when the game is stopped.

[Characteristic γK3]
Features The gaming machine described in γK2.
The effect executing means includes, as the hold demotion effect, a means for changing the display mode of the hold display already displayed to the display mode (blue) having the lowest expectation among the plurality of types of display modes. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature γK3, the effect executing means is a means for changing the display mode of the already displayed hold display to the display mode (blue) having the lowest expectation among the plurality of types of display modes as the hold demotion effect. In preparation for this, the player initially had a strong expectation for the hold display of the display mode with high expectation, but the hold display of the display mode with high expectation is the display mode with the lowest expectation. By changing to the hold display, the recognition that the special information corresponding to the hold display was the one with the lowest expectation is changed. After that, even if the game is stopped before the special information corresponding to the hold display is subject to the special information determination processing, it is not necessary to have such a great anger or disappointment. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the anger and disappointment of the player when the game has stopped.

[Characteristic γK4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features γK2 to the feature γK3.
The hold display means includes means for continuously displaying the hold display corresponding to the special information even after the special information is subject to the special information determination process.
The effect executing means includes a hold change suggestion effect execution means that executes a hold change suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change, prior to the hold change effect.
The hold display means responds to the hold display of the display mode (rainbow color) having the highest expectation among the plurality of types of display modes after the special information is subject to the special information determination process. A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying only when the holding display is continuously displayed.

According to the feature γK4, the hold display means displays the hold display of the display mode (rainbow color) with the highest expectation among the plurality of types of display modes after the special information is subject to the special information determination process. A means for displaying the hold display corresponding to the above is provided only when the display is continuously displayed. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described below.

First, unlike this feature, when the hold display of the display mode with the highest expectation is adopted, the hold display can be displayed even at the stage before the held special information is subject to the special information determination process. explain. In this configuration, when the hold change suggestion effect is executed in the situation where the hold display of the display mode with the highest expectation is displayed for the special information before the target of the special information determination process, the hold change The player who recognizes the suggestion effect has no room to change the hold display of the display mode with the highest expectation to the hold display of the display mode with higher expectation, so that the hold is executed after the hold change suggestion effect. It becomes possible to predict that the change effect changes the hold display of the display mode having the highest expectation to the hold display of the display mode having the lower expectation, and the game for the hold change suggestion effect. It will reduce the expectation of the person.

On the other hand, according to this feature, before the reserved special information is subject to the special information determination process, the reserved display always has room to change to the reserved display in a display mode with higher expectation. Therefore, even if the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the player who recognizes the hold change suggestion effect can perform the hold change suggestion effect that is executed after the hold change suggestion effect. It is not possible to determine whether the display mode has a high expectation to be changed to the hold display or the display mode has a low expectation to be changed to the hold display. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for the pending change suggestion effect.

[Characteristic γK5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features γK1 to the feature γK4.
A gaming machine comprising a gaming stopping means for executing a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game based on the determination that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

According to the feature γK5, the process of stopping the progress of the predetermined game is executed when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, so that the game is played with the setting information not satisfying the predetermined condition. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player from expanding due to the continuous progress of the game.

<Characteristic γL group>
The feature γL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspects 103 to 106 of the first embodiment.

[Characteristic γL1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
Winning probability changing means (setting change mode) capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
A setting information determination means for executing a setting information determination process for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A hold display means for displaying a hold display indicating that the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means and held until it is subject to the special information determination process exists.
An effect executing means for executing a hold change effect, which is an effect for changing the display mode of the hold display,
When it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, it is already scheduled to be executed before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, but it has not been executed yet. Cancellation means for canceling the execution schedule of the pending change effect, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

If the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, a problem may occur in the progress of the game and the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the feature γL1, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, it is already scheduled to be executed before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, but it is still executed. Since the execution schedule of the hold change effect that has not been performed is canceled, the player's expectation for the hold display whose display mode has changed due to the hold change effect has increased, but the special information corresponding to the hold display has been raised. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust because the game is stopped without executing the special information determination process.

[Characteristic γL2]
Features The gaming machine described in γL1.
The hold display means can display the hold display in a plurality of types of display modes (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color).
When the expectation of each display mode of the hold display is defined as the high probability that the result will be advantageous to the player when the hold display of each display mode is displayed.
As the hold change effect, the effect execution means can execute a hold promotion effect that changes the display mode of the hold display that has already been displayed to a display mode having a higher degree of expectation.
When it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the canceling means is already scheduled to be executed before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by providing a means for canceling an execution schedule of the pending promotion effect that has not yet been executed.

If the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, a problem may occur in the progress of the game and the progress of the game may be stopped. According to the feature γL2, when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, it is already scheduled to be executed before it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, but it is still executed. Since the execution schedule of the hold promotion effect that has not been performed is canceled, the hold display is supported even though the player's expectation for the hold display changed to the display mode with higher expectation due to the hold promotion effect has increased. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a strong distrust because the game is stopped without executing the special information determination process for the special information.

It should be noted that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature γL group are appropriately combined may be adopted. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a starting ball that is provided in the game area and allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. A game including a unit, an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry unit, and an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Machine.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Operation of a pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, a start means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to the operation of the start operation means, and an operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine including a stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to the above or due to the passage of a predetermined time, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations within a range not deviating from the gist thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in each of the embodiments described in the column of the outline of the invention, the technical features in the modifications are for solving a part or all of the above-mentioned problems, or the above-mentioned above. It is possible to replace or combine them as appropriate to achieve some or all of the effects. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be appropriately deleted.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... Weight button 25c ... Variable resistor 26 ... Game ball launch button 30 ... Game board 31 ... Guidance rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General winning opening 32a ... 1st winning opening 32b ... 2nd winning opening 32c ... 3rd winning opening 33 ... 1st starting opening 34 ... 2nd starting opening 34a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening and closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st symbol display unit 37b ... 2nd symbol display unit 37c ... 1st hold display unit 37d ... 2nd hold display unit 38 ... Normal diagram unit 39 ... Round display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Design display device 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main display unit 45z ... Game history information display unit (information display unit)
46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 ... 1st control unit 52 ... 2nd control unit 53 ... 3rd control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main MPU
62x ... Main CPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main RAM
64x ... Flash memory 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 .. .Audio emission control device 91 ... Audio emission control board 96 ... RTC
100 ... Display control device 300 ... Game history management chip 302 ... Buffer 304 ... Register 306 ... Prize ball number Data storage memory 307 ... Calculation execution condition storage memory 307a ... Memory execution condition Memory for storage 308 ... CPU
309 ... Memory for storing calculation results 309a ... Memory for storing the number of balls entered 309b ... Memory for storing information on balls 320 ... Inspection machine 321 ... CPU
328 ... Display 329 ... Connection cable

Claims (3)

The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A special information determination process execution means for executing a special information determination process for determining whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, and
When the special information determination process determines that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A winning probability changing means capable of changing the setting of the winning probability, which is the probability that the special information is determined to satisfy the privilege granting condition in the special information determination process.
A setting information storage means for storing setting information, which is information that determines the setting of the winning probability, and
Along with the execution of the special information determination process, the setting information stored in the setting information storage means and the special information to be the target of the special information determination process are stored as the setting information at the time of acquisition. Setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information at the time of acquisition of special information matches
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The setting information determination means includes means for executing a determination as to whether or not the setting information and the special information acquisition time setting information match, prior to the execution of the special information determination process.
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the special information determination process when it is determined by the setting information determination means that the setting information and the setting information at the time of acquisition of the special information do not match. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a process of stopping the progress of a predetermined game when it is determined by the setting information determining means that the setting information and the setting information at the time of acquiring the special information do not match. ..

Images